Chptr-32 PSS, 31,34 Air Data PDF

B767
Electrical / Instrument Book 18

Chapter (ATA reference)
PSS B767-200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PSS B767-300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FLIGHT DATA RECORDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AIRCRAFT INTEGRATED DATA SYSTEM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AIRPLANE CONDITION MONITORING SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CLOCKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PITOT STATIC SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
STANDBY ATTITUDE REFERENCE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
STANDBY COMPASS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AIR DATA COMPUTER SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AIR DATA INSTRUMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ALTITUDE ALERT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
29 August 2002
Page
3
79
193
309
333
403
435
475
501
509
563
601
Page 1
TRAINING NOTES
FOREWORD
UNCONTROLLED COPY
B767 ELECTRICAL / INSTRUMENT BOOK 18 Page 2
THESE NOTES ARE INTENDED FOR INSTRUCTIONAL PURPOSES ONLY

AND NO REVISION SERVICE WILL BE PROVIDED TO THE HOLDER
This document is issued on the express condition that any part or all of its contents shall not by way of trade or
otherwise, be lent, re-sold, hired out or otherwise circulated to any other party and/or Company without prior written
permission of QANTAS Airways Ltd.
PSS B767-200
Table of Contents
Subchapter
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
COMPONENT LOCATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SYSTEM PRINCIPLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TESTING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Page
5
11
17
27
43
51
55
61
B767 Electrical / Instrument Book 18 Page 3
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
INTRODUCTION
23.34 PSS B767-200 INTRODUCTION
PASSENGER SERVICE SYSTEM INTRODUCTION

Passenger Service System (PSS)
The PSS provides passenger control of the reading lights and an
attendant call for passenger service at each seat location.
The following pages describe the system as applicable to the
B767-238.
M00110A4.PST
62333AOA

g62333ao
PASSENGER SERVICE SYSTEM

General
The Passenger Service System on the B767-200 aircraft consists of
two zones, forward and aft.
The heart of the system in each zone is a Column Timer Decoder
(CTD). The CTD serves as the interface unit between the Seat
Electronics Box (SEB) and the Passenger Service Unit Decoder
(PSUD). It also has the clock that provides the timing for the system.
There is one PSUD for each seat overhead location and a SEB for
each seat group.
Terminators are located at the end of each SEB and PSUD column to
assist system timing and bidirectional data flow.
The forward attendants panel (P21) allows control of the PSS system
in normal operation and also provides testing facilities.
M00110F7.PST
READING/ROW CALL
LIGHTS
MASTER CALL
LIGHT (BLUE)
CHIME UNIT
TO NEXT PSUD
OR PSUD
TERMINATOR
62333AHA
PASSENGER SERVICE
UNIT DECODER
COLUMN TIMER
DECODER
LIGHTS
MAINTENANCE AND TEST ONLY

GROUND
ENTRY-L
SERVICE BUS
PASS ENT
&
SER VICE SYS
ATTEND-L
CABIN
MASTER
TEST
HI
LO
ATTEND-R
LEFT ENTRY
CEILING
P ASS ENT
SYST PWR
P ASS SERV
SYST PWR
READING
NORMAL
NORMAL
ENT
TEST
POWER
ON
OFF
EMER LTG
ON
LAMP
TEST
OFF AFT
EMERG
ENTRY-R
LIGHTS
FWD
ON
POWER
ON
W
DA T A DIR
CALL
L TS
ON
FWD
AFT
OFF
SEATS
OVHD
ENTER TAINMENT
1 2 3
ON ANNCMT
CONT
CANCL
BRD MUSIC
VOLUME
PWR
1 2
CHANNEL
SELECT
START
READY
NEXT
HI
OFF
2
1
CALL AND SERVICE

FWD MSTR
CALL RESET
MAIN DOOR
UP
AFT MSTR
CALL RESET
MAIN DOOR
DOWN
3
4
RSV 1
5
8 6
RSV 2
ANNOUNCEMENT
FWD ATTENDANTS PANEL

(P21)
TO NEXT SEB
OR SEB
TERMINATOR
PASSENGER CONTROL UNIT
SEAT ELECTRONICS
BOX
62333ASA
PASSENGER SERVICE SYSTEM

g62333as
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
COMPONENT LOCATIONS
g62333as
23.34 PSS B767-200 COMPONENT LOCATIONS
FLIGHT DECK AND EQUIPMENT CENTRE

Flight Deck
FWD and AFT Column Timer Decoders (No. 1 and 2

respectively).
The following circuit breaker is located on the P11-3 circuit breaker

panel:
PASS ENTMT/SERVICE CONT at position T8.
Main Equipment Centre

Circuit Breakers - located on P36 PASS ENTERTAINMENT PSUD:
R FWD - position J1
R AFT - position J2
L FWD - position J3
L AFT - position J4
Circuit Breakers - located on P37 PASS ENTERTAINMENT PSUD:

C FWD - position K3
C AFT - position K4
Circuit Breakers - located on P37 PASSENGER ENTERTAINMENT
CTD:
FWD - position K1
AFT - position K2
Located in P33:
FWD and AFT PSS Power relays.
Located above and forward of the E2 Rack:
M00110A7.PST
CIRCUIT BREAKER PANEL (P11-3)

PASS ENTMT/SERVICE CONT (T8)
CEILING AREA THAT IS FORWARD

OF EQUIPMENT RACK, E2
SEE A
FLIGHT DECK
RIGHT MISC ELECTRICAL

EQUIP PANEL, P37
PES/PSS CIRCUIT
BREAKERS
AFT COLUMN
TIME DECODER
FWD
A
FWD MISC ELECTRICAL
EQUIP PANEL, P33
POWER RELAYS
FWD COLUMN
TIMER DECODER
P36 MISC. EQUIP. LEFT

PASS. ENT
PSUDs
MAIN EQUIPMENT CENTER

FLOOR
BEAMS
MOUNTED ABOVE & ADJACENT TO
E2 RACK IN MAIN EQUIPMENT CENTER
(LOOKING DOWN)
62333ATA
FLIGHT DECK AND EQUIPMENT CENTRE

g62333at
PASSENGER CABIN AREA

Main Deck
Fwd Attendants Panel (P21) - Forward main entry door.

Seat Electronic Boxes - one per seat group.
Passenger Control Unit - one on each seat (on a seat arm).
Master Call Light Assemblies.
Attendant Row Call Light - one on each PSU.
Seat-to-seat cable routing - raceway next to seat tracks.
SEB termination plugs - at the end of each column.
Ceiling Area
Passenger Service Unit Decoders - above each seat group.

Chime Units - location of the 5 chime units as shown.
PSUD-to-PSUD cable routing.
PSUD termination plugs.
M00110FA.PST
PASSENGER SERVICE
UNIT DECODERS
COLUMN
C
2
PASSENGER CONTROL
COLUMN COLUMN
L
1
SEAT
ELECTRONICS
BOXES
LEFT
SERVICE
AREA
R
3
SEAT
GROUPS
SEAT
ELECTRONICS
RIGHT
SERVICE
AREA
RACEWAY CABLE
LOCATION
BOX
CABIN COMPONENTS
FWD ATTENDANTS PANEL (P21)

FWD
AFT
ZONE
ZONE
COMPONENTS
PSS CALL LIGHT
SIDEWALL DISCONNECT
FLOOR THROUGH BOX
SEAT WIRING
PSUD WIRING
PES/PSS CABLE RUN

WITH SEAT CONNECTIONS
DIRECT WIRED FROM ZONE CTD TO PSUDS

CORRESPONDING TO SEBS IN EACH COLUMN
PES/PSS CABLE RUN

WITH NO SEAT CONNECTIONS
TERM PLUG ON PSUD CORRESPONDING

TO LAST SEB IN COLUMN
COLUMN TERMINATION
CHIME UNITS
SHIPS WIRING (UNDER FLOOR)
62333AUA

g62333au
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
INTERFACE
g62333au
23.34 PSS B767-200 INTERFACE
PSS POWER
AC Power
The 115 volt ac right bus powers the Column Timer Decorders
(CTDs) which in turn supplies 35 volts ac to the Seat Electronic
Boxes (SEBs).
The 115 volt ac left utility bus provides power for the right and left
Passenger Service Unit Decoders (PSUDs).
The right utility bus powers the centre PSUDs.
DC Power
The 28 volt dc left bus provides the power to activate the relays
associated with PES/PSS and also provides DC power to the CTDs.
Power Control
The PASS SERV SYS PWR switch/light on the forward attendants
panel (P21) is used to control the fwd and aft PSS power relays. This
switch/light illuminates white when actuated to the on position. The
power relays distribute 115v AC to the CTDs and PSUDs.
M00110CC.PST
T8
28V DC
L BUS
PASS ENTMT
SERVICE CONTROL
J1
115V AC
UTIL L
BUS
R PSUD FWD
J3
L PSUD FWD
J2
R PSUD AFT
J4
L PSUD AFT
AC DC
AC DC
AC DC
PASS SER V SYST
PWR
PS
PS
PS
FWD ATTENDANTS P ANEL
(P21)
FIRST PSUD
SECOND PSUD
LAST PSUD
LEFT MISCELLANEOUS
EQUIPMENT PANEL (P36)
K459 AFT PSS
PWR RELA Y
(P33)
PS
PS
PS
RELA Y DIODE (P38)

AC DC
28V DC
115V AC
K1
AC DC
FIRST SEB
SUPPLY
POWER (PS)
AC DC
SECOND SEB
LAST SEB
35V AC
FWD CTD
NO 1 COLUMN TIMER DECORDER (FWD)
115V
AC R
BUS
28V DC
115V AC
K2
35V AC
PS
R SEB FWD
AFT CTD
115V AC
UTIL R
BUS
K4
C PSUD AFT
C PSUD AFT
K3
C PSUD FWD
NO 2 COLUMN TIMER DECORDER (AFT)
C PSUD FWD
RIGHT MISCELLANEOUS
R PSUD FWD
L PSUD FWD
L SEB FWD
R PSUD AFT
R SEB AFT
L PSUD AFT
L SEB AFT
SAME AS ABOVE
C PSUD AFT
C SEB AFT
K458 FWD PSS

PWR RELA Y
(P33)
62333AEA
PSS POWER
g62333ae
PSS SIGNAL FLOW

General
The passenger service system is made up of two zones; forward and
aft. Each zone has a Column Timer Decoder (CTD), Passenger
Service Unit Decoders (PSUD), Seat Electronics Boxes (SEB),
Passenger Control Units (PCU) and master call lights. PSS controls
can be found on the left forward attendants panel (P21). Each zone
has right, center, and left columns with the seats connected from
forward to aft in each column.
Each CTD acts as the interface unit between three identical columns
of PSUDs and SEBs. Each PSUD controls reading lights (one per
passenger seat) and an attendant call (row call) light (one per seat
group). Each SEB receives inputs from either two or three PCUs.
The aft zone centre column has three PCUs while all other columns
have two PCUs. Each zone has master call lights for both the left
side and the right side of the zone service areas. Chime outputs
provide input to the associated electronic chime unit to alert the
attendant to passenger calls.
Forward Attendants Panel PSS Controls

READING Switch
The READING switch gives the attendant control of all reading
lights in the airplane. The three positions are ON, OFF and
NORMAL. OFF is a momentary position.
PASS ENT and SERVICE SYSTEM Test Switch

This switch allows the attendant to test both the PES and PSS for the
entire airplane. Test will be discussed later.
MSTR CALL RESET Switch/lights

The switch is a momentary switch which illuminates white when
pushed. Pushing a MSTR CALL RESET switch will cause all zone
master call lights and all PSUD attendant (row call) lights to
extinguish. The FWD MSTR CALL RESET switch/light controls
FWD zone. The AFT MSTR CALL RESET switch/light controls the
aft zone.
The light will illuminate for a passed test in the respective zone.
Operation
Attendant Call Function
Each passenger calls an attendant by pushing the attendant call
button on their passenger control unit. This causes the PSUD row
call light and the appropriate master call light to come on. The lights
may be turned off by pushing the appropriate MSTR CALL RESET
switch on the forward attendants panel. The row call light can also
be reset by pushing the attendant call switch in the direction opposite
to call.
In each CTD column circuit there are outputs to initiate a single
chime and a single call light. The exception is a center column
circuit with three seats per row installed (aft zones). This circuit has
M00110D6.PST
LI
READING
L CHIME
RDG LT OFF
R CHIME
RDG LT ON
NORMAL
OFF
TEST
ELECTRONIC CHIME UNITS
FWD
L
L MSTR
CALL LT
ON
FWD
CTR
AFT
L
AFT
R
MID
R MSTR
CALL LT
MSTR CALL
RESET
L,C, & R
PSUD &
SEB DATA
FORWARD ZONE CTD
TO FWD
ZONE
PSUDS
& SEBS
ATTENDANT MASTER CALL LIGHTS

FWD
GAL
FWD
R
FWD
L
EST ONLY
PASS ENT &
SERVICE SYS
ENT
NORMAL
MASTER
TEST
TEST
LAMP
OFF AFT
TEST
FORWARD
ATTENDANTS
PANEL (P21)
DATA DIR
FWD
FWD
ON
AFT
ON
CALL
LTS
O/W
EXIT
L
OFF
MID
L
AFT
L
AFT
R
MID
R
O/W
EXIT
R
TEST
L CHIME
RDG LT OFF
R CHIME
RDG LT ON
L MSTR
CALL LT
FWD MSTR
CALL RESET
C
SEB
MSTR CALL
RESET
DEACTIVATED FOR
ATTENDANT CALL
TO NEXT PSUD
FIRST C PSUD
DATA 1
DATA 2
TO AFT L COL
PSUDS
DATA 1
DATA 2
TO AFT L COL
SEBS
R
DATA 1
PSUD DATA 2
TO AFT R COL
PSUDS
R
SEB
DATA 1
DATA 2
L
DATA 1
PSUD DATA 2
L
SEB
DATA 1
C
PSUD DATA 2
AFT MSTR
CALL RESET
AFT ZONE CENTRE

COLUMN ONLY
READING LIGHTS
R MSTR
CALL LT
L & SERVI
ROW
CALL
LIGHT
TO AFT R COL
SEBS
____ LAST PSUD & SEB

NOTE:
IN COLUMN HAVE
TERMINATION PLUG.
TO NEXT SEB
1
FIRST C SEB
PASSENGER
CONTROL UNITS
AFT ZONE CTD

62334AWA
PSS SIGNAL FLOW

g62334aw
PSS SIGNAL FLOW

(Continued)
Attendant Call Function (Continued)

outputs for both left and right chimes and call lights. The left and
center seats will initiate a left chime/call and the right seat will
initiate a right chime/call. As a unit, each CTD can generate both left
and right chime and call light signals.
In the forward zone, left and center column seats will sound the
FWD L chime and turn on the FWD (galley) and FWD L (ailse)
master call lights. The right column seats will sound the FWD CTR
chime and turn on the FWD (galley) and FWD R (ailse) master call
lights.
In the aft zone, left column seats and center column seats 1 and 2
will sound the AFT L chime and turn on the MID L (attendants
station), OVERWING L exit sign light assembly and AFT L (aisle)
master call lights. Center column seat 3 and the right column seats
will sound the AFT R chime and turn on the MID R (attendants
station), OVERWING R exit sign light assembly and AFT R (aisle)
master call lights.
Reading Light Function

When the forward attendants panel READING switch is in the
NORMAL position, control of the reading lights remains with the
PCUs. Subsequent pushes of a PCU reading light switch will turn on
and turn off the corresponding reading light. Placing the READING
switch in the ON position will turn on all reading lights in the
passenger cabin. The lights will remain on as long as desired.
Placing the READING switch in the OFF position will turn off all
lights.
M00110D6.PST
LI
READING
L CHIME
RDG LT OFF
R CHIME
RDG LT ON
NORMAL
OFF
TEST
ELECTRONIC CHIME UNITS
FWD
L
L MSTR
CALL LT
ON
FWD
CTR
AFT
L
AFT
R
MID
R MSTR
CALL LT
MSTR CALL
RESET
L,C, & R
PSUD &
SEB DATA
FORWARD ZONE CTD
TO FWD
ZONE
PSUDS
& SEBS

FWD
GAL
FWD
R
FWD
L
EST ONLY
PASS ENT &
SERVICE SYS
ENT
NORMAL
MASTER
TEST
TEST
LAMP
OFF AFT
TEST
FORWARD
ATTENDANTS
PANEL (P21)
DATA DIR
FWD
FWD
ON
AFT
ON
CALL
LTS
O/W
EXIT
L
OFF
MID
L
AFT
L
AFT
R
MID
R
O/W
EXIT
R
TEST
L CHIME
RDG LT OFF
R CHIME
RDG LT ON
L MSTR
CALL LT
FWD MSTR
CALL RESET
C
SEB
MSTR CALL
RESET
DEACTIVATED FOR
ATTENDANT CALL
TO NEXT PSUD
FIRST C PSUD
DATA 1
DATA 2
TO AFT L COL
PSUDS
DATA 1
DATA 2
TO AFT L COL
SEBS
R
DATA 1
PSUD DATA 2
TO AFT R COL
PSUDS
R
SEB
DATA 1
DATA 2
L
DATA 1
PSUD DATA 2
L
SEB
DATA 1
C
PSUD DATA 2
AFT MSTR
CALL RESET
AFT ZONE CENTRE

COLUMN ONLY
READING LIGHTS
R MSTR
CALL LT
L & SERVI
ROW
CALL
LIGHT
TO AFT R COL
SEBS
____ LAST PSUD & SEB

NOTE:
IN COLUMN HAVE
TERMINATION PLUG.
TO NEXT SEB
1
FIRST C SEB
PASSENGER
CONTROL UNITS
AFT ZONE CTD

62334AWA
PSS SIGNAL FLOW

g62334aw
(Continued)
ZONE SIGNAL FLOW

General
The CTD creates the system timing and interfaces with PSUDs and
SEBs to transfer data from the SEBs to the PSUDs. It also interfaces
with the Forward Attendants Panel (P21). It works as an encoder and
decoder, encoding commands from the attendant panel to the PSUDs
and SEBs, and decoding commands from the SEBs to the attendant
master call lights and the chime units.
The CTD also provides an ac supply to each SEB cloumn for PSS
and PES functions. The PSUDs in each column receive 115 volts ac
400 Hz, through PSS power relays. Since the SEBs receive power
from the CTDs, the PSS POWER switch must be on for the PES to
function.
When the reading light switch on the Passenger Control Unit (PCU)
is pushed, the SEB puts the proper code, at the proper time on the
data stream to the CTD. The SEBs and PSUDs are paired to a
particular seat group and are interfaced to each other by the CTD.
The same data flow is true for the attendant call function. When the
call switch is pushed, a command is sent to the CTD via the SEB
and on to the PSUD. The PSUD commands the appropriate attendant
row call light to illuminate and the CTD causes the chime to sound
and the relevant master call light to come on.
Signal Flow
Clock data (C/D) 1 and 2 are the timing and control signal lines for
SEBs and PSUDs. Each CTD provides 3 pairs of C/D 1 and 2 lines;
one pair to each left, centre and right columns of SEBs and PSUDs.
Each third of the CTD has parallel outputs to attendants master call
lights and the hi-tone chime.
M00110FF.PST
CLOCK/DATA 1
L
E
F
T
ATTENDANT
PANEL
C
O
L
U
M
N
LOGIC
CLOCK/DATA 2
PWR
POWER
SUPPLY
PWR
FIRST
LEFT PSUD
115V AC
CLOCK/DATA 1
LAST LEFT PSUD
PSUD
LOGIC
CLOCK/DATA 2
35V AC
PWR
POWER
SUPPLY
PWR
FIRST LEFT SEAT

ELECTRONICS BOX
SEB
POWER
SUPPLY
PWR
115V AC
PWR
CLOCK/DATA 2
FIRST CENTER PSUD
C
O
L
U
M
N
PASS SERV UNIT

(TYPICAL)
ATT CALL
AUDIO/READING
LIGHT CONTROL
PASS CONTROL UNIT
(TYPICAL)
CLOCK/DATA 2
CLOCK/DATA 1
MASTER
CALL
LIGHTS
CHIMES
PWR
PWR
PWR
FIRST CENTER SEAT

ELECTRONICS BOX
R
I
G
H
T
C
O
L
U
M
N
SEB
115V AC
PWR
PWR
FIRST RIGHT PSUD
PSUD
PWR
LAST RIGHT PSUD
CLOCK/DATA 2
CLOCK/DATA 1
35V AC
PWR
PWR
PWR
FIRST RIGHT SEB
CENTER
SEAT
ELECTRONICS
BOX
TERMINATION
PLUG
LAST CENTER SEB
CLOCK/DATA 2
CLOCK/DATA 1
CENTER
PSUD
TERMINATION
PLUG
LAST CENTER PSUD
PSUD
CALL
LIGHTS
READING
LIGHTS
35V AC
LEFT
SEAT
ELECTRONICS
BOX
TERMINATION
PLUG
LAST LEFT SEB
CLOCK/DATA 1
C
E
N
T
R
E
LEFT
PSUD
TERMINATION
PLUG
SEB
COLUMN TIMER DECODER
RIGHT
PSUD
TERMINATION
PLUG
RIGHT
SEAT
ELECTRONICS
BOX
TERMINATION
PLUG
LAST RIGHT SEB
62333AVA
ZONE SIGNAL FLOW

g62333av
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
g62333av
23.34 PSS B767-200 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION

Component Features
The CTD is 5.04 x 7.48 x 1.97 inches (12.80 x 19.00 x 5.00 cm)
excluding connectors. The finish is yellow alodine and the unit
weight is 2.87 pounds (nominal). There are three multi-pin
connectors on the front and four connectors on the rear.
System Interface
J1, J2, and J7 respectively interface with the right, left and center
PSUDs. J3, J4, and J6 respectively interface with the left, right, and
center SEBs. J5 interfaces with the attendants panel, chimes, call
lights, and input power.
Operation
The column timer decoders provide the basic PSS timing required to
keep the PSU decoders synchronous with their associated seat
electronic box. PSS commands are processed from the PCUs in the
three independant columns (left, center and right) and forward
attendants panel. The unit contains two power supplies, one for the
unit itself and one for the seat electronic boxes.
M00110B8.PST
UNIT INVERTED
FOR CLARITY
J7(C)
J1(R)
J2(L)
J3(L)
J4(R)
ROTATED
180 DEGREES
FOR CLARITY
J5
J6(C)
HOLD DOWN
FOOT (4 PLACES)
62333AXA

g62333ax
SEAT ELECTRONICS BOX

Location
The Seat Electronics Boxes (SEBs) are mounted under the seat
groups on a diagonal crossbrace using four nylatch fasteners. The
SEBs are protected by a plastic cover which is secured with similar
fasteners over the top of the SEB.
The Seat Electronics Box has three connectors that provide signal
interface with other units. Two connectors (J1 and J2) are on one end
and the third connector (J3) is on the other end.
Each SEB can handle up to four seats in a seat group.
Seat Electronics Box Interfaces

CAUTION
Care should be taken to ensure all nylon fasteners are
secured due to the seat itself providing heat sinking for the
SEB. Failure to do so may cause overheating of the SEB
with subsequent phantom chimes/lights throughout the
cabin.
The SEB interfaces with the;

J1 - CTD via a floor or wall disconnect, or the previous SEB.
J2 - next SEB or terminator.
J3 - PCUs.
Component Features
The Seat Electronics Box contains circuits for the Passenger
Entertainment System (PES) and the Passenger Services System
(PSS).
The PSS circuits are the seat coders, timing counters and logic gates
which assign a unique sampling period for each PCU. Each SEB is
interrogated at fixed intervals to check if any call or reading lights
switching has been requested by a passenger since the last
interrogation.
M00110B4.PST
J3 TO PCU
NYLATCH
FASTENERS
(2 PLACES)
J1
INTER SEAT
ELECTRONIC
BOX CABLE
SEAT TRACK
GROUND
CONNECTOR
LAST SEAT BOX

TERMINATION
SEAT
TRACK
J2
2.3"
48"
62333AYA

g62333ay
PASSENGER SERVICE UNIT DECODER

General
These units are located above each seat group inside the ceiling
panels and they provide control of the reading lights and attendant
row call light for each seat row.
The PSUD is used in all zones. It decodes commands received to
control the reading and row call lights for a seat group.
NOTE: Inboard 4 seat PSUDs are physically not interchangeable

with outboard 3 seat units.
Operation
The PSUD accepts timing and data information from the column
timer decoder and its associated seat electronic box. It provides
power to the reading lights and attendant row call lights. There are
three cable connections on the front of the unit. The PSUDs in a
column are series connected by loop-to-loop cables connecting the
two larger connectors on the end of the unit. The connectors are
interchangeable. The smaller connector provides interface with the
reading and row call lights. A termination plug is connected to the
last PSUD in a column. This plug contains a jumper for returning
clock and data information via the loop-to-loop cables, to the CTD.
The first PSUD in a column is connected to the CTD.
M00110C0.PST
END VIEW
J1
SIDE VIEW
J2
J3
1.9
BAIL WIRE
MAX
PSUD TERMINATION PLUG
62333AZA

g62333az

General Description
The Passenger Control Unit (PCU) is an analog device which does
not require any power supply for its operation. PSS output
commands are encoded by the Seat Electronic Box (SEB).
PCU Location
The PCU is located on the seat arm of each seat.
PSS Functions
The following facilities are provided by the PCU;
Reading Light Switch

The Reading Light Switch is a momentary slide switch which
provides push-on push-off light control.
Attendant Call Switch

The Attendant Call Switch is a momentary slide switch. Pushing this
switch causes the overhead white row call light to illuminate, a
hi-chime to sound once, and a blue master call light to illuminate.
Pushing the switch while the row call light is on resets the overhead
call light.
M00110AB.PST
SEAT HARNESS
CONNECTION
TOP VIEW
READING LIGHT
SWITCH
5
ATTENDANT CALL
SWITCH
62333ACA

g62333ac
ELECTRONIC CHIME UNIT

Purpose
The Electronic Chime Unit generates a musical chime signal in
response to various system inputs.
Features
The unit operates off 28 volts dc and creates either a LO, HI, or
HI/LO chime. There are four different sources of input for the chime
unit:
Cabin Interphone (HI/LO)

Passenger Service (HI)
Lavatory call (HI)
Passenger signs systems (LO)
The cabin interphone input originates from the Audio Accessory

Unit, the PSS from the CTD, the Lavatory call from relays and the
Passenger signs from the Passenger Signs Module.
NOTE: The MID chime unit has been disconnected for PSS calls.
M0011103.PST
BOEING PART NUMBER

S222T102-101
62333BAA

g62333ba
FORWARD ATTENDANTS PANEL - PSS CONTROLS

General
This panel is located above the attendants seat adjacent to the main
entry door. The following switches provide for control and test of the
PES/ PSS.
PASS ENT SYST
PASS ENT and SERVICE SYS MAINTENANCE/TEST

SWITCH
The switch is used to send test commands to PES or PSS to initiate
BITE. Test responses are indicated by the FWD and AFT MSTR
CALL RESET lights. Also, the chime tone indicates test completion.
This switch is left in the NORMAL POSITION, except when testing.
PASS ENT SYST PWR on-off switch controls power to the PES.
PASS SERV SYST

PASS SERV SYST PWR on-off switch controls power to the PSS.
READING
READING light control switch provides reading light control. In the
NORM position, the passengers have individual control. The ON and
OFF positions override this control.
FWD MSTR CALL

FWD MSTR CALL RESET is used to reset fwd attendant and
master call lights and also used as a test indicator.
AFT MSTR CALL

AFT MSTR CALL RESET is used to reset aft attendant and master
call lights and also used as a test indicator.
M00110BD.PST
LIGHTS

GROUND
SERVICE BUS
PASS ENT &

SER VICE SYS
ENTRY-L
POWER
ON
ENT
TEST
MASTER
TEST
HI
LO
ATTEND-L
READING
NORMAL
CABIN
NORMAL
OFF
ATTEND-R
LEFT ENTRY
CEILING
PASS ENT
SYST PWR
PASS SERV
SYST PWR
EMER LTG
ON
LAMP
TEST
OFF AFT
EMERG LIGHTS
ENTRY-R
FWD
POWER
ON
W
ON
SEATS
FWD
AFT
DA TA DIR
CALL
LTS
ON
OFF
OVHD
ENTER TAINMENT
CHANNEL
SELECT
BRD MUSIC
VOLUME
HI
OFF
2
1
CALL AND SERVICE

FWD MSTR
CALL RESET
MAIN DOOR
UP
AFT MSTR
CALL RESET
MAIN DOOR
DOWN
3
4
G62333AD
FORWARD ATTENDANTS PANEL - PSS CONTROLS

g62333ad
ATTENDANT CALL LIGHTS

Master Call Lights
The master call lights are blue and are mounted in the ceiling in
either three lamp or five lamp assemblies, or in exit light assemblies
mounted adjacent to service/entry doors and emergency exits.
First class (if configured) and business class each have the three
lamp ceiling assemblies located forward over each aisle.
The aft section has one three lamp assembly over each aisle forward
of the aft galley.
Row Call Lights

When an attendant call is made from a seat, a white row call light
illuminates on the PSU above that seat group.
M00110C4.PST
MASTER
CALL LIGHT (BLUE)
ATTENDANT
CALL LIGHT (PINK)
LAV CALL
LIGHTS (AMBER)
CEILING
MASTER CALL LIGHT

(BLUE)
CEILING
LAMP ASSEMBLY
LAV LIGHT
(AMBER)
UP
ATTENDANT
CALL LIGHT
(PINK)
MASTER CALL LIGHT

(BLUE)
UP
3-LAMP CEILING ASSEMBLY
COLORED LENS
5-LAMP CEILING ASSEMBLY
ATTENDANT
CALL LIGHT (PINK)
OXYGEN
MODULE
READING
LIGHTS
UP
LAV LIGHT
(AMBER)
MASTER
CALL LIGHT (BLUE)
EXIT LIGHT ASSEMBLY
DECODER
PASSENGER SERVICE UNIT

ROW CALL LIGHT (WHITE)
62334ATA
ATTENDANT CALL LIGHTS

g62334at
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
SYSTEM PRINCIPLES
g62334at
23.34 PSS B767-200 SYSTEM PRINCIPLES
PSS DATA COMMANDS

Operation
The following text details the operation of a PSS data command
request.
Frame
NOTE: There is a bit code for reading light functions for four
seats (left, center left, center right and right) but an
attendant call function for only two seats.
Seats 1 and 2 attendant call functions are jumpered together
to form the left attendant call functions. Seats 3 and 4 form
the right attendant call function.
The Column Timer Decoders deliver timing and sync pulses to three
columns of Seat Electronic Boxes, and Passenger Service Unit
Decoders. The CTDs provide individual timing pulses to all units
simultaneously. This allows for correct synchronization and control.
One frame contains 31 seat group time slots plus a frame sync time
slot. The sync time slot is required to obtain and maintain PSS
timing synchronization. Regardless of cabin configuration, the CTD
will still count 31 frames to maintain sync.
Seat Group Time Slot

Each seat group time slot is divided into four bit times (D0, D1, D2,
D3). Seat groups are capable of handling up to four seats within the
group.
When a passenger in a 2 seat group selects left READ light on, a
logic zero is generated in the PSCU. In the SEB, it is converted into
a four bit code data pulse, in this case, 0011. The data pulse is sent
to the CTDs and PSUDs to turn on the left READ light. If the
passenger pushes the READ light switch again, the SEB will now
output the four bit code 0010 to turn off the light.
M00110C8.PST
1 FRAME 119.315 mSEC

FS 1
START NEXT FRAME
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 FS 1
SEAT GROUP
DATA COMMAND SLOTS
TYPICAL SEAT
GROUP TIME SLOT
(3.016 mSEC)
FRAME SYNC
NORMAL SYNC
D0 D1 D2 D3
0.364
mSEC
25.5
mSEC
CLOCK
DATA
SEAT 1 AND 2 (LEFT & LEFT CENTER)

ACTIVATE THE LEFT ATTENDANT CALL
FUNCTION WHILE SEATS 3 & 4
(RIGHT & RIGHT CENTER) (WHEN INSTALLED) ACTIVATE THE RIGHT
ATTENDANT CALL FUNCTION
DATA COMMANDS
D3
D2
D1
D0
NOT USED
READLIGHT - LEFT - "OFF"
READLIGHT - LEFT - "ON"
READLIGHT - CENTER LEFT - "OFF"
READLIGHT - CENTER LEFT - "ON"
READLIGHT - CENTER RIGHT - "OFF"
READLIGHT - CENTER RIGHT - "ON"
READLIGHT - RIGHT - "OFF"
READLIGHT - RIGHT - "ON"
ATTENDANT CALL - LEFT - "RESET"
ATTENDANT CALL - LEFT - "ON"
ATTENDANT CALL - RIGHT - "RESET"
ATTENDANT CALL - RIGHT - "ON"
NOT USED
NOT USED
NOT USED
DATA FLOW
2 SEAT
GROUP
3 SEAT
GROUP
4 SEAT
GROUP
62334AUA
PSS DATA COMMANDS

g62334au
PSS DATA TRANSMISSION

Introduction
This diagram shows the method of transmitting data from the loop of
SEBs to the loop of PSUDs through the CTD.
General
The CTD generates a sync pulse followed by 124 clock pulses (31
seat groups x 4 bit times) for each frame. During one frame e.g. odd,
these pulses are transmitted to the SEBs on data line 1 and during
the next frame (even) data line 2 is used. The PSUDs have the same
arrangement but receive signals on the opposite data line to which
the SEB is transmitting on (for example, if the SEB transmits data to
CTD on DATA-1 line then the CTD transmits to PSUD on DATA-2
line.)
Operation
The passenger service system (PSS) provides a means of
multiplexing and programming control signals to enable passengers
to individually control their reading light and to call a cabin
attendant. The column timer decoder (CTD) is the heart of the PSS.
It interfaces with three columns of seat groups with a maximum of
31 seat groups per column.
Data Flow
The SEBs and PSUDs receive sync and clock pulses from the CTD
and apply them, through sync and clock regeneration circuits (not
shown), to the next SEB and PSUD without any intentional delay.
During the sync time, data is loaded into the shift registers in the
SEBs.
At the same time, data is being read out of the shift registers in the
PSUDs. The data in the PSUDs shift registers was put there during
a previous frame.
After generating sync, the microcomputer in the SEB works as a
4-bit shift register, and each clock pulse shifts the register by one bit.
As the command bits are shifted out of each shift register, they are
replaced by zero bits from the CTD. Since the SEBs are connected
in a series loop, all SEBs act as a large shift register, and the
shifting direction is toward DATA-1 in the odd frame and toward
DATA-2 in the even frame. In one frame, each SEB can only place
one switch command (4-bit code) to the register, while it may be
necessary to send up to six different commands.
The SEB microcomputer determines transmission sequence of the
commands on a last come, first served basis. The PSUD does not
accept any commands until it sees the same command for three
commands in succession. To allow for this, the SEB sends the same
command for six successive odd/even frames. If the data is shifted
from the SEB loop to the CTD on an odd frame (toward DATA-1) it
is shifted from the CTD to the PSUD loop on an even frame (out
DATA-2) on a last-in, first-out basis. Therefore, by the end of two
frames, all the SEB data has been shifted into all PSUDs. After
triple coincidence, the next sync pulse causes the PSUD shift
M00110D1.PST
A B C D
E F G H
C/D 1
CLOCK/SYNC
I/O
C/D 2
PSUD 1
PSUD 2
PSUD 31
PSUD 1
IN PSUDS 1 2 3 4
31
A B C D
X X X X X X
K L
TERMINATION
PLUG
SYNC READS DATA,

CLOCK SHIFTS DATA
PSUD BUFFER
MICROPROCESSOR
31
A B C D
1 2 3 4
SEB BUFFER
SEB 1
C/D 1
CLOCK/SYNC
I/O
C/D 2
A B C D
SEB 1
CTD
E F G H
SEB 2
IN SEBS -
SEB 31
K L
TERMINATION
PLUG
SYNC LOADS REGISTER,

CLOCK SHIFTS DATA
62334AVA

g62334av

(Continued)
Data Flow (Continued)

registers to be read and the appropriate lights to go on or off. This
technique prevents noise from being processed as a command since
the odds of a noise spike appearing in the same seat command slot
three times in succession are very low or almost non-existent.
Fault Tolerance
By alternately changing the direction of the timing signals it
generates, the CTD allows for normal system performance in the
event of an open connection between the CTD and either SEBs or
PSUDs.
Suppose there is a natural break between two SEBs in a column. By
feeding the timing signals first in the forward direction (out of
DATA-1 terminal), and then in the reverse direction (out of DATA-2
terminal), it can be seen that the break will appear non existent.
M00110D1.PST
A B C D
E F G H
C/D 1
CLOCK/SYNC
I/O
C/D 2
PSUD 1
PSUD 2
PSUD 31
PSUD 1
IN PSUDS 1 2 3 4
31
A B C D
X X X X X X
K L
TERMINATION
PLUG
SYNC READS DATA,

CLOCK SHIFTS DATA
PSUD BUFFER
MICROPROCESSOR
31
A B C D
1 2 3 4
SEB BUFFER
SEB 1
C/D 1
CLOCK/SYNC
I/O
C/D 2
A B C D
SEB 1
CTD
E F G H
SEB 2
IN SEBS -
SEB 31
K L
TERMINATION
PLUG
SYNC LOADS REGISTER,

CLOCK SHIFTS DATA
62334AVA

g62334av
(Continued)
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM
g62334av
23.34 PSS B767-200 SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM
SYSTEM SCHEMATIC
Attendants Panel.
A reading light on or off command from the PCU goes to the SEB
where it is multiplexed onto the SEB data loop controlled by the
CTD. The CTD processes this command and applies it to the PSUD
data loop. The PSUD reacts to the command, turning the white
reading light on or off.
The attendants panel contains the SYSTEM TEST switch which

provides test signals to other units during BITE functions and in the
normal position enables the CALL RESET switches and READING
LIGHT switch.
The CALL RESET switch resets all of the attendants call light in
that zone, or enables individual control in the NORMAL position for
both zones.
An attendant call command goes to the SEB where it is multiplexed

onto the SEB data loop controlled by the CTD. The CTD processes
this command and applies it to the PSUD data loop. The PSUD
reacts by turning on the overhead attendant call light (white) in a
manner similar to the reading light at the seat which issued the call.
The CTD also illuminates the attendant master call lights.
The attendant call is reset from the issuing seat in the same manner
as it was set or from the MSTR CALL RESET switch on the
attendants panel.
Column Timer Decoder

The CTD contains all the necessary circuitry to establish system
timing to interface with the PSUDs and SEBs for up to three
columns of aircraft seat groups, and to interface with the Attendant
Panel. It also provides command to illuminate the Master Call Lights
for the right hand and left hand halves of the zone of the aircraft as
well as driving the chime units for the same.
M00110DB.PST
28V
TEST OK = GND
TEST SWITCH
AFT MSTR
CALL RESET
FWD MSTR
CALL RESET
ON
TO AFT
CTD
NORM
OFF
FROM AFT CTD
DATA 1
P21 FORWARD ATTENDANTS PANEL

DATA 1
DATA I/O
BUFFER
TO
NEXT
PSUD
DATA 2
SEAT 1
DATA
2
AC
AC RTN
27V
FROM
PSUD
C/B
DATA 1
PSUD I/O
BUFFER
RESET
TEST OK
TEST OK
TEST MODE
DATA 2
AC RTN
SEB I/O
BUFFER
PROCESSOR
POWER
SUPPLY
PROCESSOR
SEAT 2
SEAT 3
SAME
AS
SEAT 1
ATT CALL
5V
+5V
28V
115V
AC
CENTER
COLUMN
R CALL
PROCESSOR
POWER
SUPPLY
LAMP BITE
CIRCUIT
DATA 2
RIGHT
COLUMN
R CHIME
PROCESSOR
35V
AC
C COL
PSUD
C COL
SEB
28V
RDG LT
ASSY
DATA 1
RDG LT OFF
L CALL LT
L CHIME
TERMINATION
(LAST PSUD
ONLY)
27V -8V
LEFT
COLUMN
RDG LT ON
115V
AC
ATT CALL
LT
PASSENGER
SERVICE
UNIT
TO/FROM
C COL
PSUD
AND SEB
R COL
PSUD
R COL
SEB
DATA 1 PSS DATA

INTERFACE
TO/FROM
R COL PSUD
AND SEB
DATA 2
TO
NEXT
SEB
B
FWD COLUMN TIMER DECODER
POWER
SUPPLY
READING
LIGHT
TO ELECTRONIC
CHIME UNITS
TO MASTER
CALL LIGHTS
ATTENDANT
CALL
5V
PROCESSOR
TERMINATION
(LAST SEB ONLY)
ON
RESET
CALL
62333BBA
SYSTEM SCHEMATIC
g62333bb
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
INSTALLATION
g62333bb
23.34 PSS B767-200 INSTALLATION
SEAT ELECTRONICS BOX INSTALLATION

General
This shows the SEB mounted on a diagonal brace on the underside
of the seat. Note the snap on cover.
NOTE: Ensure ALL fasteners are secured. Failure to do so may

cause overheating of the SEB with subsequent phantom
chimes/lights throughout the cabin.
M00110B1.PST
TO PCU
NYLON FASTENERS
MUX IN/OUT(SEAT-TO-SEAT)
UP
FWD
COVER
62334APA
SEAT ELECTRONICS BOX INSTALLATION

g62334ap
23.34 PSS B767-200 INSTALLATION
PASSENGER SERVICE UNIT DECODER INSTALLATION

PSUD Access
PSUD access is obtained by releasing two latches in the oxygen
module/lights panel. The panel then swings down. A lanyard is
provided with hooks which may be used to hold the panel at
intermediate inclined or full vertical position.
M0011107.PST
PSUD
O
2
MASK
PSU
LATCHES
READING
LIGHTS
62333AWA
PASSENGER SERVICE UNIT DECODER INSTALLATION

g62333aw
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
TESTING
g62333aw
23.34 PSS B767-200 TESTING
SELF TEST - ATTENDANT PANEL

General
Self-tests are initiated by the PASS ENT and SERVICE SYS switch
on the forward attendants panel. This switch has a NORMAL
position and seven test positions. The MASTER TEST position tests
both the PES and PSS. The next five positions test the PSS only.
LAMP TEST checks all attendant row call lights, reading lights and
master call lights. The next four positions check the PSUD or SEB
clock data loops. The inner callouts (FWD, AFT, FWD, AFT)
indicate the direction data (DATA DIR) is sent down the loops. The
outer callouts (ON, OFF, ON, OFF) indicate the normal condition of
the attendant row call lights (CALL LTS) if the tests pass. The first
two positions check the PSUD loops (OVHD) while the next two
positions check the SEB loops (SEATS).
On the forward attendant panel, press the PASS ENT SYS PWR and
the PASS SERV SYS PWR switches to the on (illuminated) position.
Set the READING switch and the PASS ENT and SERVICE SYS
switch to NORMAL.
Press the FWD MSTR CALL RESET and AFT MSTR CALL
RESET switch/lights to test the lights.
The last position of the test switch checks the PES only.
The FWD MSTR CALL RESET and AFT MSTR CALL RESET
lights will illuminate at the end of each test to indicate a satisfactory
test. Failure of one or both of the lights to illuminate indicates a
failed test. They are both press-to-test lights. The attendant call
chime tone will sound to indicate the completion of the first two
tests. If the MASTER TEST fails, then the other tests must be
performed in sequence.
Test Preparation
Verify that all PES and PSS circuit breakers are closed and the
Utility buses are powered.
M00110E1.PST
LIGHTS

GROUND
SERVICE BUS
ENTRY-L
PASS ENT &

SER VICE SYS
POWER
ON
ENT
TEST
MASTER
TEST
HI
LO
ATTEND-L
READING
NORMAL
CABIN
NORMAL
OFF
ATTEND-R
LEFT ENTRY
CEILING
PASS ENT
SYST PWR
PASS SERV
SYST PWR
EMER LTG
ON
LAMP
TEST
OFF AFT
ENTRY-R
EMERG LIGHTS
FWD
POWER
ON
W
FWD
AFT
ON
DA TA DIR
CALL
LTS
ON
OFF
SEATS
OVHD
ENTER TAINMENT
1 2 3
CONT
CANCL
ON ANNCMT
BRD MUSIC
VOLUME
READY
PWR
1 2
CHANNEL
SELECT
START
NEXT
HI
OFF
CALL AND SERVICE

FWD MSTR
CALL RESET
MAIN DOOR
UP
AFT MSTR
CALL RESET
MAIN DOOR
DOWN
RSV 1
5
8 6
RSV 2
ANNOUNCEMENT
62333AHA
SELF TEST - ATTENDANT PANEL

g62333ah
MASTER TEST
General
This tests all the PSS units and data lines and the PES signal
transmission. The completion of this check is indicated by a chime
sounding. A passed test is indicated by both MSTR CALL RESET
lights illuminating.
M00110E5.PST
TEST
PASSED TEST
PASS ENT AND

SERVICE SYST
FWD MSTR
CALL RESET
NORMAL
MASTER
TEST
ENT
TEST
LAMP
TEST
AFT
OFF
ILLUMINATED
P21
FWD
FWD
ON
ON
AFT
OFF
ONE OR BOTH MSTR

CALL RESET LIGHTS
NOT ILLUMINATED
AFT MSTR
CALL RESET
DATA DIR
SEATS
FAILED TEST
ILLUMINATED
CALL
LTS
OVHD
CORRECTIVE ACTION
1. CONTINUE TEST
NOTE: IF THIS TEST PASSES THEN NO FURTHER

TESTS ARE REQUIRED.
NOTE: CHIME SOUNDS TO INDICATE COMPLETION
OF TEST, WHETHER THE TEST PASSES OR FAILS.
62334AXA
MASTER TEST
g62334ax
LAMP TEST
General
This test checks all lamps for open circuits. The operator must walk
through the entire passenger cabin to check all lamps.
NOTE: The LAMP TEST position commands ALL reading, call and
Master call reset lights ON. The illumination of both MSTR
CALL RESET lamps does not necessarily confirm the
serviceability of the system.
M00110E8.PST
TEST
PASSED TEST
FWD MSTR
CALL RESET
PASS ENT AND

SERVICE SYST
ILLUMINATED
NORMAL
P21
MASTER
TEST
ENT
TEST
AFT MSTR
CALL RESET
OFF
DATA DIR
FWD
FWD
ON
ON
AFT
OFF
ONE OR BOTH MSTR

CALL RESET LIGHTS
NOT ILLUMINATED
ILLUMINATED
LAMP
TEST
AFT
SEATS
FAILED TEST
ALL MASTER CALL

LIGHTS ILLUMINATED
ANY MASTER CALL

LIGHTS NOT
ILLUMINATED
ALL ATTENDANT ROW

CALL LIGHTS ILLUMINATED
ANY CALL LIGHTS

NOT ILLUMINATED
ALL READING
LIGHTS ILLUMINATED
ANY READING LIGHTS

NOT ILLUMINATED
CALL
LTS
OVHD
CORRECTIVE ACTION
1. REPLACE ANY INDIVIDUAL BULBS
2. REPLACE CTD IF COMPLETE COLUMN OR COLUMNS OF LIGHTS NOT ILLUMINATED
3. TURN SWITCH TO "NORMAL" THEN BACK TO "LAMP TEST" TO VERIFY FIX
NOTE: CHIME SOUNDS TO INDICATE COMPLETION
OF TEST, WHETHER THE TEST PASSES OR FAILS
62334AYA
LAMP TEST
g62334ay
OVHD DATA DIR FWD TEST

General
This test checks the PSUD data lines and PSUDs by the CTD
transmitting a signal in the forward direction. During this check, each
PSUD makes a reading light driver amplifier check. The master call
light on/off condition indicates if a fault is a line fault or a unit fault.
The effect in the cabin will be the call lights will illuminate in a
sequential fashion from the front of the zone to the aft. At the end of
the test, ALL cabin call lights and the Master Call Reset lights will
be illuminated.
NOTE: The reading lights will NOT illuminate during this test.
M00110EB.PST
TEST
PASSED TEST
PASS ENT AND

SERVICE SYST
FAILED TEST
FWD MSTR
CALL RESET
NORMAL
ILLUMINATED
MASTER
TEST
ENT
TEST
AFT MSTR
CALL RESET
LAMP
TEST
AFT
OFF
ONE OR BOTH MSTR

CALL RESET LIGHTS
NOT ILLUMINATED
ILLUMINATED
DATA DIR
SEATS
FWD
FWD
ON
ON
AFT
OFF
CALL
LTS
CTD
PSUD
PSUD
PSUD
OVHD
ON
1ST
ON
2ND
ALL CALL LIGHTS

ILLUMINATE SEQUENTIALLY
FROM FWD TO AFT
ANY CALL LIGHTS

DO NOT ILLUMINATE
SEQUENTIALLY
ALL MASTER CALL

LIGHTS OFF
MASTER CALL
LIGHTS ON OR OFF
ON
3RD ...
CORRECTIVE ACTION
1. IF MASTER CALL LIGHT ON, REPLACE PSUD AT FIRST OFF CALL LIGHT
2. IF MASTER CALL LIGHT OFF, REPLACE PSUD TO PSUD CABLE BETWEEN
THE LAST ON CALL LIGHT AND FIRST OFF LIGHT
3. AFTER FAILURE HAS BEEN IDENTIFIED AND FIXED, VERIFY FIX BY
MOVING SWITCH TO "NORMAL" THEN BACK TO "OVHD DATA DIR FWD"
62334AZA
OVHD DATA DIR FWD TEST

g62334az
OVHD DATA DIR AFT TEST

General
This test is the same as the OVHD DATA DIR FWD test except the
CTD transmits a signal in the aft direction.
The effect in the cabin will be that all call lights will illuminate and
then will extinguish one at a time (in a sequential order) from the aft
to the front of the zone. At the completion of the test, ALL call
lights will be extinguished and the Master Call Reset lights will be
illuminated.
M00110EE.PST
TEST
PASSED TEST
FWD MSTR
CALL RESET
PASS ENT AND

SERVICE SYST
NORMAL
ILLUMINATED
MASTER
TEST
ENT
TEST
FAILED TEST
AFT MSTR
CALL RESET
LAMP
TEST
AFT
OFF
ONE OR BOTH MSTR

CALL RESET LIGHTS
NOT ILLUMINATED
ILLUMINATED
DATA DIR
SEATS
FWD
FWD
ON
ON
AFT
OFF
CALL
LTS
CTD
PSUD
PSUD
PSUD
OVHD
OFF
... 3RD
OFF
2ND
OFF
1ST
ALL CALL LIGHTS

ILLUMINATE AT SAME
TIME THEN GO OFF
SEQUENTIALLY FROM
AFT TO FWD
ALL MASTER CALL

LIGHTS OFF
ALL CALL LIGHTS

ILLUMINATE BUT DO
NOT ALL TURN OFF
SEQUENTIALLY
MASTER CALL
LIGHTS ON OR OFF
CORRECTIVE ACTION
1. IF MASTER CALL LIGHT ON, REPLACE PSUD AT FIRST ON LIGHT
FROM AFT
2. IF MASTER CALL LIGHT OFF, REPLACE PSUD TO PSUD CABLE
BETWEEN THE LAST OFF LIGHT AND FIRST ON LIGHT
MOVING SWITCH TO "NORMAL" THEN BACK TO "OVHD DATA DIR AFT"
62334BAA
OVHD DATA DIR AFT TEST

g62334ba
SEATS DATA DIR FWD TEST

General
This test checks the SEB data lines and SEBs by the CTD
transmitting a signal in the forward direction.
The effect in the cabin is that the call lights will illuminate in a
sequential fashion from the front of the zone to the aft. At the
completion of the test, ALL call lights and the Master Call Reset
lights will be illuminated.
M00110F1.PST
PASSED TEST
TEST
PASS ENT AND
SERVICE SYST
FAILED TEST
FWD MSTR
CALL RESET
NORMAL
ILLUMINATED
MASTER
TEST
ENT
TEST
AFT
AFT MSTR
CALL RESET
LAMP
TEST
OFF
ONE OR BOTH MSTR

CALL RESET LIGHTS
NOT ILLUMINATED
ILLUMINATED
DATA DIR
SEATS
FWD
FWD
ON
ON
AFT
OFF
CALL
LTS
CTD
ON
1ST
ON
2ND
ON
3RD
ALL CALL LIGHTS

ILLUMINATE SEQUENTIALLY
FROM FWD TO AFT
ANY CALL LIGHTS

DO NOT ILLUMINATE
SEQUENTIALLY
ALL MASTER CALL

LIGHTS OFF
MASTER CALL
LIGHTS ON OR OFF
OVHD
SEB
SEB
SEB
CORRECTIVE ACTION
1. IF MASTER CALL LIGHT ON, REPLACE SEB AT FIRST OFF CALL LIGHT
2. IF MASTER CALL LIGHT OFF, REPLACE SEB TO SEB CABLE BETWEEN
THE LAST ON CALL LIGHT AND FIRST OFF CALL LIGHT
MOVING SWITCH TO "NORMAL" THEN BACK TO "SEATS DATA DIR FWD"
62334BBA
SEATS DATA DIR FWD TEST

g62334bb
SEATS DATA DIR AFT TEST

General
This test checks the SEB data lines and SEBs by the CTD
transmitting a signal in the aft direction.
The effect in the cabin is that all call lights will illuminate and then
will be extinguished in a sequential fashion from the aft of the zone
to the front. At the completion of the test, ALL call lights will be
extinguished and the Master Call Reset lights will be illuminated.
M00110F4.PST
TEST
PASSED TEST
PASS ENT AND

SERVICE SYST
FWD MSTR
CALL RESET
FAILED TEST
TEST OK LIGHTS
NOT ILLUMINATED
ILLUMINATED
NORMAL
MASTER
TEST
ENT
TEST
AFT
DATA DIR
SEATS
FWD
FWD
ON
AFT
OFF
OVHD
CALL
LTS
ONE OR BOTH MSTR

CALL RESET LIGHTS
NOT ILLUMINATED
ILLUMINATED
LAMP
TEST
OFF
ON
AFT MSTR
CALL RESET
CTD
OFF
3RD
SEB
OFF
2ND
SEB
OFF
1ST
ALL CALL LIGHTS

ILLUMINATE AT SAME
TIME THEN GO OFF
SEQUENTIALLY FROM
AFT TO FWD
ANY CALL LIGHTS

ILLUMINATE BUT DO
NOT TURN OFF
SEQUENTIALLY
ALL MASTER CALL

LIGHTS OFF
MASTER CALL
LIGHTS ON OR OFF
SEB
CORRECTIVE ACTION
1. IF MASTER CALL LIGHT ON, REPLACE SEB AT FIRST ON CALL LIGHT FROM AFT
2. IF MASTER CALL LIGHT OFF, REPLACE SEB TO SEB CABLE BETWEEN
THE LAST OFF LIGHT AND FIRST ON LIGHT
3. AFTER FAILURE HAS BEEN IDENTIFIED AND FIXED, VERYFY FIX BY
MOVING SWITCH TO NORMAL THEN BACK TO "SEATS DATA DIR AFT"
G62334BC
SEATS DATA DIR AFT TEST

g62334bc
FIM TROUBLESHOOTING
Troubleshooting With Terminators
A shorted coaxial cable can cause PES/PSS failures not identifiable
by the BITE. If there is a failure that the BITE does not remove
follow the steps below:
Seat Fault
Make sure the SEB termination plug has the resistor and shorting
wire installed correctly and that the termination plug is correctly
attached to the SEB. If the problem continues, move the SEB
termination plug forward in the column until the failure is removed.
Replace the last SEB to SEB cable that you disconnected.
CAUTION
Remember to install the termination plug back at the last
SEB in the column.
CAUTION
Remember to install the termination plug back at the last
PSUD in the column.
Cable Short
Before you replace a Column Timer Decoder (CTD), check for:
open circuits between Pin 4 and 5 of connectors J3, J4 and J6
(indicating blown fuses)
blown fuses in the CTD
If there is an internal fuse that has blown, it indicates a problem in
the SEB-to-SEB wiring (short). Examine and repair the SEB-to-SEB
wiring in the applicable column before you install a new CTD to
prevent blowing the fuses in the replacement unit.
Roof Fault
Make sure the PSUD termination plug has the shorting wire installed
correctly and that the termination plug is correctly attached to the
PSUD. If the problem continues, move the PSUD termination plug
forward in the column until the failure is removed. Replace the last
cable that you disconnected.
M001110A.PST
FROM PREVIOUS
SEAT GROUP
LAST PSUD
PASSENGER SERVICE
UNIT DECODER
PASSENGER SERVICE
UNIT
GASPER AIR
OUTLETS
OXYGEN
MASKS
LAST SEAT
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
FROM PREVIOUS
SEAT GROUP
LOCATED IN
SEAT TRACK
TO NEXT
SEAT
SEAT
TRACK
SEB TERMINATION PLUG

73323CQA
FIM TROUBLESHOOTING
g73323cq
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
PSS B767-300
Table of Contents
Subchapter
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INTERFACE DIAGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DISPLAYS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SYSTEM PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TESTING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Page
81
89
99
123
149
155
177
187
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
INTRODUCTION
g73323cq

Introduction
The following section pertains to the Passenger Service System
(PSS) fitted to the 767-338 aircraft only.
General
The Passenger Service System (PSS) on the 767-338 is used to
provide the passengers with reading light control, cabin attendent call
and information functions.
In Business Class, the PSS interfaces directly with the Matsushita
System 2000 In-Seat Video setup. There are some controllers in the
PSS which have been replaced and some which remain similar or the
same as the 767238.
M0011173.PST
62333AOA

g62333ao
PASSENGER SERVICE SYSTEM - BUSINESS CLASS

Operation
The Cabin Management Terminal (CMT) is the interface unit for the
Cabin Attendant to control the system. The forward attendants panel
is fully operable for the aft section of the aircraft, however for
Business Class, the CMT should be used.
Attendant call request information and reading light control is carried
out from the CMT. This information is routed via the Passenger
Entertainment System Controller (PESC). The PESC interfaces via
the Passenger Service System Controller (PSSC) to the Area Services
Box (ASB). The ASB replaces the Column Timer Decoder (CTD). It
outputs to the Passenger Service Unit Decoders (PSUDs), Chime
Units and Master Call lights. The last PSUD at the end of each
column is fitted with a PSUD Terminator.
The PESC also connects to the Area Distribution Box which transfers
the Data information to the seat network via each seat groups
Video/Audio Seat Electronics Box (VASEB). Requests and
information exchange to the passenger happens via their individual
Advanced Digital Passenger Control Units (ADPCUs). Similar to the
PSUDs, the last VASEB at the end of each column is fitted with a
VASEB Terminator.
M0011177.PST
READING/ROW CALL
LIGHTS
MASTER CALL
LIGHT (BLUE)
CHIME UNIT
TO NEXT PSUD
OR PSUD
TERMINATOR
PASSENGER
SERVICE UNIT
DECODER
AREA SERVICE
BOX
LIGHTS

GROUND
ENTRY-L
SERVICE BUS
B/C
CABIN
PASS ENT &
DEACT
SERV SYSTEM
ATTND - L
READING
ATTND - C
EMER LTG
NORMAL
NORMAL
ENT
TEST
MASTER
TEST
LO
HI
LO
OFF
HI
ON
OFF
LAMP
TEST
AFT
LEFT ENTRY
CEILING
ENTRY-R
EMERG LIGHTS
DA T A DIR
CALL
FWD
L TS
FWD
ON
AFT
ON
OFF
SEATS
OVHD
ENTER
1 2 3
PASSENGER
SERVICE SYSTEM
CONTROLLER
CONT
CANCL
TAINMENT
BRD MUSIC
VOLUME
NEXT
2
1
HI
5
8 6
P ASS SERV
SYST
PWR
& SER VICE
FWD MSTR
CALL
RESET
MAIN DOOR
UP
AFT MSTR
MAIN DOOR
CHANNEL
SELECT
PWR
1 2
CALL
P ASS ENT
SYST
PWR
START
ON ANNCMT
READY
OFF
3
4
RSV 1
CALL RESET
DOWN
RSV 2
ANNOUNCEMENT

ADVANCED DIGITAL
PASSENGER
CONTROL UNIT
TO NEXT
VASEB
OR VASEB
TERMINATOR
AREA
DISTRIBUTION
BOX
CABIN MANAGEMENT
TERMINAL
VIDEO AUDIO SEAT

ELECTRONICS BOX
PASSENGER
ENTERTAINMENT
SYSTEM
CONTROLLER
62333AIA
PASSENGER SERVICE SYSTEM - BUSINESS CLASS

g62333ai
PASSENGER SERVICE SYSTEM - ECONOMY CLASS

General
The Economy Class Passenger Service System on the B767-300
aircraft consists of two zones, mid and aft. The heart of the system
in each zone is a Column Timer Decoder (CTD). The CTD serves as
the interface unit between the Seat Electronics Box (SEB) and the
Passenger Service Unit Decoder (PSUD). It also has the clock that
provides the timing for the system. Additionally, there is one PSUD
for each seat group overhead location and a SEB for each seat group.
Terminators are located at the end of each SEB and PSUD column to
assist system timing and bidirectional data flow.
Row call lights, master call lights, and chimes indicate that a
passenger has made an attendant call.
Controls on the Forward Attendants Panel (P21) allow;
power to be applied to the system,

reading lights to be controlled,
additional indication and resetting of attendant calls and
system testing to be carried out.
M00111AF.PST
MASTER CALL
LIGHT (BLUE)
READING/ROW CALL
LIGHTS
CHIME UNIT
TO NEXT PSUD
OR PSUD
TERMINATOR
62333AHA
PASSENGER SERVICE
UNIT DECODER
COLUMN TIMER
DECODER
A
T
T
E
N
D
LIGHTS

GROUND
SERVICE BUS
ENTRY-L
PASS ENT &

SERV SYSTEM
B/C
CABIN
DEACT
ATTND - C
EMER LTG
V
O
L
U
M
C
H
A
N
N
E
L
NORMAL
NORMAL
ENT
TEST
ATTND - L
READING
L
I
G
H
T
MASTER
TEST
LO
LO
HI
OFF
HI
ON
OFF
LAMP
TEST
AFT
LEFT ENTRY
CEILING
ENTRY-R
EMERG LIGHTS
FWD
ON
AFT
ON
OFF
SEATS
DA T A DIR
CALL
L TS
FWD
OVHD
ENTER
1 2 3
CONT
CANCL
CALL AND SERVICE

P ASS ENT
SYST PWR
BRD MUSIC
READY
CHANNEL
VOLUME
PWR
1 2
T AINMENT
START
ON ANNCMT
P ASS SERV
SYST PWR
FWD MSTR
CALL RESET
MAIN DOOR
UP
AFT MSTR
CALL RESET
MAIN DOOR
DOWN
SELECT
NEXT
HI
OFF
3
4
RSV 1
5
RSV 2
8 6
DIGITAL PASSENGER
CONTROL UNIT
ANNOUNCEMENT

TO NEXT SEB
OR SEB
TERMINATOR
SEAT ELECTRONICS
BOX
62333BFA
PASSENGER SERVICE SYSTEM - ECONOMY CLASS

g62333bf
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
COMPONENT LOCATIONS
g62333bf
FLIGHT DECK AND EQUIPMENT CENTRES

Flight Deck
The following circuit breakers are located on P11;
PASS ENTMT/SERVICE CONT (2.5 Amp) at position P11-3
(T7)
VIDEO PROJ (5 Amp) at position P11-6 (T34)

Circuit Breakers - located on P36. PASS ENTERTAINMENT PSUD;
R FWD (10 Amp) - position J1

R AFT (10 Amp) - position J2
L FWD (10 Amp) - position J3
L AFT (10 Amp) - position J4
Circuit Breakers - located on P37. PASSENGER ENTERTAINMENT

CTD;
on aircraft OGA-OGM
FWD (5 Amp) - position K1
AFT (5 Amp) - position K
on aircraft OGN-999
MID (5 Amp) - position J7
AFT (5 Amp) - position J
Circuit Breakers - located on P37. PASSENGER
ENTERTAINMENT;
on aircraft OGA-OGM
CAR (7.5 Amp) - position J1
VCC (7.5 Amp) - position J
Circuit Breakers - located on P37. IVS AREA DISTRIBUTION

BOX (ADB);
on aircraft OGA-OGM
ADB-1 (15 Amp) - position
J3
J4
J5
J6
J7
(collared
(collared)
(collared)
(not fitted)
Circuit Breakers - located on P101. IVS;

on aircraft OGN-999
ASB-1 (5 Amp)
ADB-1 (15 Amp)
VCC (7.5 Amp)
Located in P33;
PSS Power relay
Located on the E2-5 Rack;
Passenger Entertainment System Controller
Located above and forward of the E-2 rack;
Area Services Box
Mid Column Timer Decoder
Mid Equipment Centre

Located below the E5-1 rack;
Aft Column Timer Decoder
M001117A.PST

PASS ENTMT/SERVICE CONT (T7)
VIDEO PROJ (T34)
EQUIPMENT
RACK, E5
FWD CARGO
DOOR (REF)
AFT COLUMN
TIME DECODER
MID EQUIPMENT CENTER
FLIGHT DECK
MID COLUMN
TIME DECODER
CEILING AREA THAT IS FORWARD

OF EQUIPMENT RACK, E2
SEE A

EQUIP PANEL, P37
PES/PSS CIRCUIT
BREAKERS
EQUIPMENT SHELF E2-5

PASSENGER ENTERTAINMENT
SYSTEM CONTROLLER
AREA SERVICE BOX

EQUIPMENT PANEL, P101
(JUST FWD OF P54 ON R/H
SIDE OF R/H CRAWL WAY)
IVS CIRCUIT BREAKERS
FWD
FLOOR
BEAMS
E2 RACK IN MAIN EQUIPMENT CENTER
MOUNTED ABOVE & ADJACENT TO
(LOOKING DOWN)
FWD MISC ELECTRICAL

EQUIP PANEL, P33
POWER RELAYS
P36 MISC. EQUIP. LEFT

PASS. ENT
PSUDs CIRCUIT BREAKERS

62333APA
FLIGHT DECK AND EQUIPMENT CENTRES

g62333ap

Passenger Cabin Deck
The following items are located within the Passenger Cabin Deck
area:
Fwd Attendance Panel - Fwd left main entry door.
Central Stowage Unit - Fwd galley, aft unit station 347.
Flight Service Director (FSD) station - first bulkhead aft of the
forward left entry doorway.
Business Seats - Fwd Zone;
Video/Audio Seat Electronics Box (VASEB) - one per seat
group, regardless of the number of seats in the group, located
under the seat.
Advance Digital Passenger Control Unit (ADPCU) - one per
seat, located in the arm.
Economy Seat Group - Mid and Aft Zones;
Seat Electronics Box (SEB) - one per seat group, whether a 2
or 3 seat group, located under the seat.
Digital Passenger Control Unit (DPCU) - one per seat, located
in the arm.
Passenger Cabin Ceiling

The following items are located in the Passenger Cabin Ceiling area:
Relays RZ002 and RZ004 - above Central Stowage Unit (CSU)
station 346.
Area Distribution Box - station 400 in the ceiling above seat 1F
(R/H aisle).
ADB Termination Plug - on the ADB (2 off).
Passenger Services System Controller (PSSC) - Cabin Avionics
Rack (CAR) in the L/H aisle above the second ceiling panel at
station 437 LBL 25.
M001117F.PST
PASSENGER SERVICE
UNIT DECODERS
ADVANCED DIGITAL
PASSENGER CONTROL UNITS
OR DIGITAL PASSENGER
CONTROL UNITS
VIDEO AUDIO SEAT

ELECTRONICS
BOXES OR
SEAT ELECTRONICS
BOXES
VIDEO AUDIO SEAT

ELECTRONICS
BOXES OR
SEAT ELECTRONICS
BOXES
RACEWAY CABLE
LOCATION
CENTRAL STOWAGE UNIT

& RELAYS RZ002 - RZ004
AREA DISTRIBUTION BOX
ADB TERMINATION PLUG
COLUMN
COLUMN
L
COLUMN
R
C
1 2
1 2 3
1 2 SEAT
GROUPS
LEFT
SERVICE
AREA
CABIN AVIONICS RACK (CAR)

PASSENGER SERVICE
SYSTEM CONTROLLER
FWD ZONE
STA
347
FWD
ATTENDANTS
PANEL
STA
400
MID ZONE
STA
500
BUSINESS CLASS
SEAT GROUP
RIGHT
SERVICE
AREA
AFT ZONE
ECONOMY CLASS
SEAT GROUP
FLIGHT SERVICE
DIRECTORS (FSD)
STATION
CHIME UNITS
MASTER CALL LIGHTS
62334AIA

g62334ai
CENTRAL STOWAGE UNIT / FSD STATION

General
On Qantas 767-300 aircraft, two different configurations are
available. The two configurations are those aircraft fitted with either
a:
Central Stowage Unit (CSU), or
Flight Service Director (FSD) station.
Main Power Switch,

labelled VIDEO AUDIO SYSTEM
Cabin Management Terminal (CMT)
3.5mm Floppy Disk Drive
Stowage for CMT Software Disks
NOTE: The Flight Service Directors (FSD) station is only fitted to

late model 767-300 aircraft or those modified by the
deletion of the Central Stowage Unit (CSU).
Central Stowage Unit (CSU)

The Central Stowage Unit (CSU) contains the following components:
Main Power Switch,
labelled VIDEO AUDIO SYSTEM
3.5mm Floppy Disk Drive
Stowage for CMT Software Disks
A maintenance keyboard jack, accessed by removing a small
coverplate secured by 2 philips screws, to enable a PC to be
plugged in (for Tech Services use).
NOTE: The Central Stowage Unit (CSU) is only fitted to early

model 767-300 aircraft or those not fitted with the Flight
Service Directors (FSD) station.
Flight Service Directors (FSD) station

The Flight Service Directors (FSD) station contains the following
components:
M00111B2.PST
CABIN MANAGEMENT
TERMINAL
GASPER OUTLET
P.S.U.
OXYGEN
LIGHT / POWER SWITCH
3.5 FLOPPY
DISK DRIVE
NO SMOKING
AIR SHOW
MAIN POWER
SWITCH
CMT SOFTWARE
DISK STOWAGE
C.M.T.
V.C.P.
CASSETTE DRAWERS
(3 OFF @ 15 TAPES EA)
MAINTENANCE
KEYBOARD
JACK
HANDSET
MANUAL
STORAGE
E.L.T. BEACON
CENTRAL STOWAGE UNIT
FSD STATION
G62333BR
CENTRAL STOWAGE UNIT / FSD STATION

g62333br
CABIN CABLE DISTRIBUTION

General
Cable runs to the PSUDs and VASEBs and SEBs are shown below.
There are three columns of seat groups in each zone.
The overhead cable runs for the PSUDs in the Fwd Zone are now
fed from an Area Services Box (ASB) while the Mid and Aft Zones
are feed by CTDs. Each overhead run is ended with a Termination
Plug for the PSUDs.
In the seat feed cabling for the VASEBs and SEBs, both floor and
sidewall disconnects are used. For VASEBs, each column run can
have a maximum of 8 to 12 seat groups (dependant on current draw)
and is ended with a Termination Plug. For SEBs, each column run
can have a maximum of 31 seat groups and is ended with a
Termination Plug.
M0011183.PST
FROM AREA
SERVICES BOX (ASB)
FROM MID COLUMN
TIME DECODER (CTD)
FROM AFT COLUMN

TIME DECODER (CTD)
OVERHEAD FEEDS
TERMINATION PLUGS
SIDE WALL DISCONNECTS

FLOOR DISCONNECTS
SEAT FEEDS
62334AJA
CABIN CABLE DISTRIBUTION

g62334aj
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
INTERFACE DIAGRAMS
g62334aj
23.34 PSS B767-300 INTERFACE DIAGRAMS
POWER 1: OGA-OGM
General
Power from the 115V AC Right Utility Bus through the VCC circuit
breaker, via relay RZ004, provides power to:
The Cabin Management Terminal
The CMT in turn supplies 5V DC power for the Floppy Disk
Drive.
A Cooling Fan for the Video Control Centre
Power from the 115V AC Right Utility Bus, via relay RZ002,
provides power to:
Passenger Entertainment System Controller through the CAR
circuit breaker.
Passenger Services System Controller through the CAR circuit
breaker.
Area Distribution Box via the ADB 1 circuit breaker.
The ADB in turn supplies 115V AC to each column of Video
Audio Seat Electronics Boxes via individual internal 5 amp
automatically resetable circuit breakers.
The VASEBs provide 9V DC to their associated ADPCUs.
Control of relays RZ002 and RZ004 is from SW1 Power Switch
providing 28V DC R Bus through the VIDEO PROJ circuit breaker.
M00111B5.PST
115V AC
UTIL
R BUS
VCC
5V DC
CAR
ADB - 1
RZ 004
RELAY
CABIN MANAGEMENT
TERMINAL
FLOPPY DISC
DRIVE
COOLING FAN
RIGHT MISCELLANEOUS
PASSENGER SERVICE
SYSTEM CONTROLLER
RZ 002
RELAY
PASSENGER ENTERTAIMNENT
SYSTEM CONTROLLER
28V DC
R BUS
ADPCU
SAME AS CENTRE
COLUMN VASEB
VIDEO PROJ
OVERHEAD CIRCUIT
BREAKER PANEL P11-6
ADPCU
RIGHT COLUMN
115V AC
ADPCU
LEFT COLUMN
ADPCU
115V AC
CENTRE COLUMN
115V AC
VIDEO AUDIO
SYSTEM SWITCH
(SW 1)
AREA
DISTRIBUTION
BOX
9V DC
9V DC
115V AC
FIRST VASEB
LAST VASEB
G62333BH
POWER 1: OGA-OGM
g62333bh
POWER 2: OGA-OGM
General
Power from the 115V AC Right Bus through the FWD CTD circuit
breaker and via K458 FWD PSS PWR relay is provided to the Area
Services Box (ASB) and the Mid Column Time Decoder (CTD). The
AFT CTD circuit breaker supplies 115V AC via the same path to the
Aft CTD. Both CTDs provide 35V AC to the columns of Seat
Electronics Boxs (SEBs) in each zone. In turn the SEBs provide 5V
DC to the Digital Passenger Control Units (DPCUs).
Power from the 115V AC Ground Service Bus via the C PSUD
FWD circuit breaker and K458 FWD PSS PWR Relay is provided to
the centre column Passenger Service Unit Decoders (PSUDs) in the
fwd and mid zones. The same bus supplies 115V AC via the C
PSUD AFT circuit breaker via the same path to the centre column
PSUDs in the aft zone.
Power from the 115V AC Left Utility Bus via the R PSUD FWD
circuit breaker and K459 AFT PSS PWR Relay is provided to the
right column PSUDs in the fwd and mid zones. The same bus
supplies 115V AC via the L PSUD FWD circuit breaker via the same
path to the left column PSUDs in the fwd and mid zones. The same
bus supplies 115V AC via the R PSUD AFT circuit breaker via the
same path to the right column PSUDs in the aft zone. The same bus
supplies 115V AC via the L PSUD AFT circuit breaker via the same
path to the left column PSUDs in the aft zone.
Control to relays K458 and K459 is from the PASS SERV SYST
PWR Switch on Fwd Attendants Panel P21, which is supplied 28V
DC Left bus power via the PASS ENTMT/SERVICE CONT circuit
breaker.
M00111B8.PST
28V DC
L BUS
PASS ENTMT/
SERVICE CONT (T8)
OVERHEAD CIRCUIT
BREAKER PANEL P11-3
5V DC
AREA SERVICE
BOX
115V AC
R BUS
SEB
35V AC
35V AC
35V AC
FWD CTD (K1)

AFT CTD (K2)
CENTRE SEB
COLUMN
TO NEXT/
LAST SEB
SEB
RIGHT SEB
COLUMN
FWD ATTENDANTS
PANEL P21
TO LEFT,
CENTRE
AND RIGHT
SEB COLUMNS
CENTRE FWD PSUD COLUMN
AFT COLUMN
TIME DECODER
C PSUD FWD (K3)
CENTRE AFT
PSUD COLUMN
C PSUD AFT (K4)
FWD MISCELLANEOUS
PASS SERV
SYST PWR
MID COLUMN
TIME DECODER
RIGHT MISCELLANEOUS
115V AC
GND SVCE
BUS
DPCU
CENTRE MID PSUD COLUMN
K458 FWD PSS

PWR RLY (P33)
RIGHT FWD PSUD COLUMN
115V AC
L UTIL
BUS
LEFT FWD PSUD COLUMN
RIGHT MID PSUD COLUMN

R PSUD FWD (J1)
LEFT MID PSUD COLUMN

L PSUD FWD (J3)
RIGHT AFT PSUD COLUMN

R PSUD AFT (J2)
LEFT MISCELLANEOUS
TO NEXT/LAST PSUD
LEFT AFT PSUD COLUMN
L PSUD AFT (J4)
PSUD
K459 AFT PSS

PWR RLY (P33)
PSUD
62333BGA
POWER 2: OGA-OGM
g62333bg
POWER 1: OGN-OGU
General
Power from the 115V AC Right Utility Bus, through the K2225 IVS
CONT-1 RELAY and via the IVS circuit breaker, provides power to
the :
Cabin Management Terminal,
The CMT in turn supplies 5V DC power for the Floppy Disk
Drive.
Passenger Entertainment System Controller.
Passenger Services System Controller.
Cooling Fan for the Video Control Centre.
Power from the 115V AC Right Utility Bus, through the K2225 IVS
CONT-1 RELAY and via the ADB circuit breaker, provides power
to:
The Area Distribution Box.
The ADB in turn supplies 115V AC to each column of Video
Audio Seat Electronics Boxes (VASEBs) via individual internal
5 amp automatically resetable circuit breakers.
The VASEBs provide 9V DC to their associated ADPCUs
Control of K2225 IVS CONT-1 relay is from SW1 Video Audio
System Switch providing R Bus 28V DC via the VIDEO PROJ
circuit breaker.
M0011186.PST
COOLING FAN
115V AC
R UTILITY
BUS
5V DC
IVS-VCC
FLOPPY DISC
DRIVE
CABIN MANAGEMENT
TERMINAL
ADB-1
PASSENGER ENTERTAIMNENT
SYSTEM CONTROLLER
K2225 RELAYIVS CONT-1
P101 FWD RIGHT MISCELLANEOUS

ELECTRIC EQUIPMENT PANEL
PASSENGER SERVICE
SYSTEM CONTROLLER
SAME AS CENTRE
COLUMN VASEB
28V DC
R BUS
ADPCU
VIDEO PROJ
ADPCU
RIGHT COLUMN
OVERHEAD CIRCUIT
BREAKER PANEL P11-6
115V AC
B
115V AC
115V AC
VIDEO AUDIO
SYSTEM SWITCH
(SW 1)
LEFT COLUMN
CENTRE COLUMN
AREA
DISTRIBUTION
BOX
ADPCU
9V DC
ADPCU
9V DC
115V AC
FIRST VASEB
LAST VASEB
G62333BN
POWER 1: OGN-OGU
g62333bn
POWER 2: OGN-OGU
General
Power from the 115V AC Right Bus through the ASB circuit breaker
is provided directly to the Area Service Box.
Control to relays K458 and K459 is from the PASS SERV SYST
PWR Switch on Fwd Attendants Panel P21, which is supplied 28V
DC Left bus power via the PASS ENTMT/SERVICE CONT circuit
breaker.
Power from the 115V AC Right Bus through the MID CTD circuit
breaker and via K458 FWD PSS PWR relay is provided to the Mid
Column Time Decoder (CTD). The AFT CTD circuit breaker
supplies 115V AC via the same path to the Aft CTD. Both CTDs
provide 35V AC to the columns of Seat Electronics Boxs (SEBs) in
each zone. In turn the SEBs provide 5V DC to the Digital Passenger
Control Units (DPCUs).
Power from the 115V AC Ground Service Bus via the C PSUD
FWD circuit breaker and K458 FWD PSS PWR Relay is provided to
the centre column Passenger Service Unit Decoders (PSUDs) in the
fwd and mid zones. The same bus supplies 115V AC via the C
PSUD AFT circuit breaker via the same path to the centre column
PSUDs in the aft zone.
Power from the 115V AC Left Utility Bus via the R PSUD FWD
circuit breaker and K459 AFT PSS PWR Relay is provided to the
right column PSUDs in the fwd and mid zones. The same bus
supplies 115V AC via the L PSUD FWD circuit breaker via the same
path to the left column PSUDs in the fwd and mid zones. The same
bus supplies 115V AC via the R PSUD AFT circuit breaker via the
same path to the right column PSUDs in the aft zone. The same bus
supplies 115V AC via the L PSUD AFT circuit breaker via the same
path to the left column PSUDs in the aft zone.
M0011203.PST
28V DC
L BUS
PASS ENTMT/
SERVICE CONT (T8)
OVERHEAD CIRCUIT
BREAKER PANEL P11-3
115V AC
R BUS
ASB
AREA SERVICE
BOX
DPCU
DPCU
5V DC
FWD RIGHT MISC ELEC

EQUIP PANEL (P101)
TO NEXT/
LAST SEB
SEB
115V AC
R BUS
35V AC
35V AC
35V AC
MID CTD (K1)

AFT CTD (K2)
CENTRE SEB
COLUMN
RIGHT SEB
COLUMN
TO LEFT,
CENTRE
AND RIGHT
SEB COLUMNS
CENTRE FWD PSUD COLUMN

CENTRE AFT
PSUD COLUMN
C PSUD AFT (K4)
115V AC
L UTIL
BUS
SEB
AFT COLUMN
TIME DECODER
C PSUD FWD (K3)
FWD MISCELLANEOUS
FWD ATTENDANTS
PANEL P21
MID COLUMN
TIME DECODER
RIGHT MISCELLANEOUS
115V AC
GND SVCE
BUS
PASS SERV
SYST PWR
K458 FWD PSS

PWR RLY (P33)
CENTRE MID PSUD COLUMN
RIGHT FWD PSUD COLUMN

LEFT FWD PSUD COLUMN
RIGHT MID PSUD COLUMN

R PSUD FWD (J1)
LEFT MID PSUD COLUMN

L PSUD FWD (J3)
RIGHT AFT PSUD COLUMN

R PSUD AFT (J2)
L PSUD AFT (J4)
LEFT MISCELLANEOUS
TO NEXT/LAST PSUD
LEFT AFT PSUD COLUMN
K459 AFT PSS

PWR RLY (P33)
PSUD
PSUD
62333BOA
POWER 2: OGN-OGU
g62333bo
SIGNAL FLOW - BUSINESS CLASS

Floppy Disk Drive
The CMT is the interface unit for the cabin attendant to control the
system and to carry out programming functions. The CMT is loaded
with the aircraft configuration database which is provided to a
number of LRUs. Communication between the CMT and main
controller LRUs is via a Token Ring LAN (T-R data bus).
13 data and control lines are connected to a 3.5 inch Floppy Disk
Drive (FDD) to the CMT. It is used to download CMT system
software and aircraft configuration database to the CMT.
The CMT provides Attendant Call and Reset functions as well as

testing of the System 2000 components.
On initial application of power to the Passenger Service System, the
following units receive a complete copy of the aircraft configuration
database held within the CMT;
PESC
ADB
VASEB
PSSC
ASB
This aircraft configuration database is stored in each units
nonvolatile memory for use during system operation. The PESC and
PSSC receive the database via the T-R data bus. These two
controllers provide the database, via appropriate data buses, to the
appropriate LRUs.
NOTE: The Operational Software (Op Code) for System 2000

LRUs can only be downloaded in the workshop.
Passenger Entertainment System Controller

RS-485 data bus lines connect the PESC with the ADB for:
default aircraft configuration database programming.
BITE commands/results.
Passenger Service System interface.
Although two data busses are connected, only data bus 1 is used in
this configuration. Data bus 2 was to be used with projected features
and development of the system.
BITE is requested by the CMT via a T-R data bus, as are dynamic
changes to the program defaults. The PESC controls the BITE
operation, commanding other LRUs into BITE. The PESC stores all
BITE results from all LRUs reporting to it and provides a complete
BITE report to the CMT.
The number 1 air/ground system provides an air/ground discrete into
the PESC to provide air/ground status for display and control
functions.
M0011189.PST
TO FWD ZONE
RIGHT COLUMN
PSUDs
TO FWD ZONE
CENTRE COLUMN
PSUDs
DATA 1
DATA 2
ADDRESS LEFT
BITS
RIGHT
NC
TO FWD
CHIME UNITS
LEFT
AS B END
TERMINATOR
TO FWD MASTER
CALL LIGHTS
RIGHT
DATA 1
FWD ZONE
LEFT COLUMN
DATA 2
ARINC 429 OUT
ARINC 429 IN
DATA 1
DATA 1
DATA 1
DATA 2
DATA 2
DATA 2
AREA
SERVICE BOX
T-R DATA OUT
FIRST PASSENGER
SERVICE UNIT DECODER
END PSUD
TERMINATOR
LAST PASSENGER
T-R DATA IN
PASSENGER SERVICE
SYSTEMS CONTROLLER
DATA &
CONTROL
FLOPPY
DISC
DRIVE
DATA IN
DATA OUT
DATA OUT
T-R DATA OUT

ARINC 429 OUT
ARINC 429 IN
T-R DATA IN
ADB COLUMN
TERMINATOR
DATA 1
AIR/GND
RELAY
FWD ZONE
LEFT COLUMN
DATA 2
DATA 1
PASSENGER
ENTERTAINMENT
SYSTEMS CONTROLLER
NC
TO FWD ZONE
RIGHT COLUMN
VASEBs
ADDRESS
BITS
DATA 2
ADB END
TERMINATOR
DATA 1
DATA 2
DATA IN
DATA OUT
DATA OUT
ADVANCED DIGITAL
PASSENGER
CONTROL UNIT
uP
DATA 1
DATA 2
DATA IN
ADVANCED DIGITAL
PASSENGER
CONTROL UNIT
T-R DATA OUT
CABIN MANAGEMENT
TERMINAL
ADVANCED DIGITAL
PASSENGER
CONTROL UNIT
ADVANCED DIGITAL
PASSENGER
CONTROL UNIT
T-R DATA IN
13
DATA IN
FIRST VIDEO AUDIO

SEAT ELECTRO NICS
BOX
END VASEB
TERMINATOR
DATA 1
DATA 2
LAST VIDEO AUDIO

SEAT ELECTRO NICS
BOX
TO FWD ZONE
CENTRE COLUMN
VASEBs
AREA
DISTRIBUTION
BOX
62333AKA

g62333ak

(Continued)
Passenger Services System Controller
Area Distribution Box
The PSSC receives and transmits commands and responses to/from

the PESC via ARINC 429 data busses.
The ADB acts as a zone controller to distribute power and service

data to the seat network. The PESC-ADB Data 1 Bus, an RS-485
bus, is used for two way communication between the PESC and
ADB. The activity on this databus includes:
It provides the link to the overhead network. The PSSC is connected

to the ASB via RS-485 data lines. Again, only data bus 1 is used in
this configuration.
Area Services Box

The ASB fulfils the role previously carried out by the Column Timer
Decoder. It supplies power to operate the master call lights and
chime units. It interfaces with the PSUDs to control reading lights
and row call lights. Data 1 and data 2 lines are used to communicate
information under normal conditions. The information along data 1
and data 2 is the same, but it is fed down data 1 during one cycle
and then data 2 on the next cycle and so on. In this respect it
functions the same as the CTD in the zones not installed with
System 2000.
zonal seat network configuration download from the PESC to the

ADB.
PSS data originating from the VASEBs and via the ADB to the
PESC.
The ADB-VASEB RS-485 Data 1 Bus is used for communication
between the ADB and VASEBs. The ADB dynamically establishes
the seatbox addresses over this data bus upon power up. Passenger
service data such as reading lamp and call light request is transferred
up along this data line and eventually to the overhead network. Data
line 2 is not used at present.
NOTE: Zone ADBs can be connected in series, but in this

configuration there is only one ADB per zone.
The ASB has a hard wired address. In this case since there is only
one ASB, its address is all address bits open.
The series output which normally feeds the following ADB is

terminated by an end terminator to prevent reflections. The data lines
are terminated by two 100 ohm resistors.
Passenger Service Decoder Unit
The ADB has a hard wire address. In this case since there is only
one ADB its address is all address bits open.
The PSUDs decipher the data string from the ASB to control the
reading lights and row call lights for a seat row. They are connected
in a daisy chain with the last PSUD in each column having a
terminator. The terminator is a link between data 1 and data 2.
M0011189.PST
TO FWD ZONE
RIGHT COLUMN
PSUDs
TO FWD ZONE
CENTRE COLUMN
PSUDs
DATA 1
DATA 2
ADDRESS LEFT
BITS
RIGHT
NC
TO FWD
CHIME UNITS
LEFT
AS B END
TERMINATOR
TO FWD MASTER
CALL LIGHTS
RIGHT
DATA 1
FWD ZONE
LEFT COLUMN
DATA 2
ARINC 429 OUT
ARINC 429 IN
DATA 1
DATA 1
DATA 1
DATA 2
DATA 2
DATA 2
AREA
SERVICE BOX
T-R DATA OUT
FIRST PASSENGER
END PSUD
TERMINATOR
LAST PASSENGER
T-R DATA IN
PASSENGER SERVICE
SYSTEMS CONTROLLER
DATA &
CONTROL
FLOPPY
DISC
DRIVE
DATA IN
DATA OUT
DATA OUT
T-R DATA OUT

ARINC 429 OUT
ARINC 429 IN
T-R DATA IN
ADB COLUMN
TERMINATOR
DATA 1
AIR/GND
RELAY
FWD ZONE
LEFT COLUMN
DATA 2
TO FWD ZONE
RIGHT COLUMN
VASEBs
DATA 1
DATA 2
NC
ADDRESS
BITS
DATA 2
ADB END
TERMINATOR
DATA IN
DATA OUT
DATA OUT
ADVANCED DIGITAL
PASSENGER
CONTROL UNIT
uP
DATA 1
PASSENGER
ENTERTAINMENT
SYSTEMS CONTROLLER
DATA IN
ADVANCED DIGITAL
PASSENGER
CONTROL UNIT
T-R DATA OUT
CABIN MANAGEMENT
TERMINAL
ADVANCED DIGITAL
PASSENGER
CONTROL UNIT
ADVANCED DIGITAL
PASSENGER
CONTROL UNIT
T-R DATA IN
13
DATA IN
FIRST VIDEO AUDIO

SEAT ELECTRO NICS
BOX
DATA 1
END VASEB
TERMINATOR
DATA 1
DATA 2
LAST VIDEO AUDIO

SEAT ELECTRO NICS
BOX
TO FWD ZONE
CENTRE COLUMN
VASEBs
DATA 2
AREA
DISTRIBUTION
BOX
62333AKA

g62333ak
(Continued)

(Continued)
Area Distribution Box
(Continued)
The ADB is designed to feed four columns of VASEBs and has an

auxiliary output (for crew rest compartment). Three of the four
normal outputs are used (left, centre, right) and the remaining normal
output is terminated by a column terminator again to prevent
reflections. The auxiliary output is not used and does not need to be
terminated.
The end terminator and column terminator have the same resistors
fitted, but are different units.
Advanced Digital Passenger Control Unit (ADPCU)

For the Passenger Service System, the ADPCU is the passenger
interface to;
summons an attendant to their seat,

reset attendant calls,
turn their reading lights on/off,
display a No Smoking seat status.
Video Audio Seat Electronic Box (VASEB)

The VASEB is designed to integrate with the passenger service
functions for up to 2 seats.
The VASEB communicates with the ADPCU via a single bit hexcode
data bus line. The VASEB feeds data information to the next
VASEB. There are usually a number of VASEBs in a column
connected in series with a terminator plugged into the last VASEBs
output. This terminator is the same as the ADB column terminator
and is again used to prevent reflections for the RF Video/PCM Audio
and data lines. During the period when the ADB is dynamically
establishing the VASEBs addresses and under the control of the
VASEBs microprocessor, the VASEB physically disconnects the data
1 line to the following VASEBs. Once its address has been
established the VASEB reconnects the data 1 line.
M0011189.PST
TO FWD ZONE
RIGHT COLUMN
PSUDs
TO FWD ZONE
CENTRE COLUMN
PSUDs
DATA 1
DATA 2
ADDRESS LEFT
BITS
RIGHT
NC
TO FWD
CHIME UNITS
LEFT
AS B END
TERMINATOR
TO FWD MASTER
CALL LIGHTS
RIGHT
DATA 1
FWD ZONE
LEFT COLUMN
DATA 2
ARINC 429 OUT
ARINC 429 IN
DATA 1
DATA 1
DATA 1
DATA 2
DATA 2
DATA 2
AREA
SERVICE BOX
T-R DATA OUT
FIRST PASSENGER
END PSUD
TERMINATOR
LAST PASSENGER
T-R DATA IN
PASSENGER SERVICE
SYSTEMS CONTROLLER
DATA &
CONTROL
FLOPPY
DISC
DRIVE
DATA IN
DATA OUT
DATA OUT
T-R DATA OUT

ARINC 429 OUT
ARINC 429 IN
T-R DATA IN
ADB COLUMN
TERMINATOR
DATA 1
AIR/GND
RELAY
FWD ZONE
LEFT COLUMN
DATA 2
TO FWD ZONE
RIGHT COLUMN
VASEBs
DATA 1
DATA 2
NC
ADDRESS
BITS
DATA 2
ADB END
TERMINATOR
DATA IN
DATA OUT
DATA OUT
ADVANCED DIGITAL
PASSENGER
CONTROL UNIT
uP
DATA 1
PASSENGER
ENTERTAINMENT
SYSTEMS CONTROLLER
DATA IN
ADVANCED DIGITAL
PASSENGER
CONTROL UNIT
T-R DATA OUT
CABIN MANAGEMENT
TERMINAL
ADVANCED DIGITAL
PASSENGER
CONTROL UNIT
ADVANCED DIGITAL
PASSENGER
CONTROL UNIT
T-R DATA IN
13
DATA IN
FIRST VIDEO AUDIO

SEAT ELECTRO NICS
BOX
DATA 1
END VASEB
TERMINATOR
DATA 1
DATA 2
LAST VIDEO AUDIO

SEAT ELECTRO NICS
BOX
TO FWD ZONE
CENTRE COLUMN
VASEBs
DATA 2
AREA
DISTRIBUTION
BOX
62333AKA

g62333ak
(Continued)
SIGNAL FLOW - ECONOMY CLASS

General
The economy class passenger service system is found in the Mid and
Aft Zones. Each zone has a Column Timer Decoder (CTD),
Passenger Service Unit Decoders (PSUDs), Seat Electronics Boxes
(SEBs), Digital Passenger Control Units (DPCUs) and master call
lights. PSS controls can be found on the left forward attendants panel
(P21). Each zone has right, center, and left columns with the seats
connected from forward to aft in each column.
Each CTD acts as the interface unit between three identical columns
of PSUDs and SEBs. Each PSUD controls reading lights (one per
passenger seat) and an attendant call (row call) light (one per seat
group). Each SEB receives inputs from either two or three PCUs.
The centre column in both zones have three DPCUs while all other
columns have two DPCUs. Each zone has master call lights for both
the left side and the right side of the zone. Chime outputs provide
input to the associated electronic chime unit to alert the attendant to
passenger calls.
Forward Attendants Panel PSS Controls

READING Switch
The READING switch gives the attendant control of all reading
lights in the mid and aft zones. The three positions are ON, OFF and
NORMAL. OFF is a momentary position.
PASS ENT and SERVICE SYSTEM Test Switch

This switch allows the attendant to test both the PES and PSS for the
Mid and Aft zones. Test will be discussed later.
MSTR CALL RESET Switch/lights

The switch is a momentary switch which illuminates white when
pushed. Pushing a MSTR CALL RESET switch will cause all zone
master call lights and all PSUD attendant (row call) lights to
extinguish. The FWD MSTR CALL RESET switch/light controls
MID zone. The AFT MSTR CALL RESET switch/light controls the
AFT zone.
The light will illuminate for a passed test in the respective zone.
Operation
Each passenger calls an attendant by pushing the attendant call
button on their passenger control unit. This causes the PSUD row
call light and the appropriate master call light to come on. The lights
may be turned off by pushing the appropriate MSTR CALL RESET
switch on the forward attendants panel. The row call light can also
be reset by pushing the attendant call switch (on the DPCU) with the
red diagonal line across it.
In each CTD column circuit there are outputs to initiate a single
chime and a single call light. The exception is a center column
circuit with three seats per row installed. This circuit has outputs for
M00111BB.PST
LI
READING
TEST
L CHIME
RDG LT OFF
R CHIME
RDG LT ON
NORMAL
OFF
AFT
R
AFT
L
ELECTRONIC
CHIME UNITS
L MSTR
CALL LT
ON
R MSTR
CALL LT
MSTR CALL
RESET
L,C, & R
PSUD &
SEB DATA
MID ZONE CTD
AFT GALLEY MODULE

TO MID
ZONE
PSUDs &
SEBs AS
SHOWN
BELOW
EST ONLY
MID
FWD
L
MID
FWD
R
MID
CTR
L
MID
CTR
R
MID
AFT
L
MID
AFT
R
R/H
FWD
L/H
FWD
ATTENDANT
MASTER
CALL
LIGHTS
PASS ENT &

SERVICE SYS
NORMAL
ENT
TEST
MASTER
TEST
LAMP
OFF AFT
FWD
ON
TEST
DATA DIR
FWD
CALL
AFT
ON
L/H
AFT
R/H
AFT
LTS
AFT GALLEY MODULE
OFF
L CHIME
TEST
R CHIME
RDG LT OFF
RDG LT ON
READING LIGHTS
ROW CALL
LIGHT
L MSTR
CALL LT
L
R MSTR
CALL LT
L & SERVI
FWD MSTR
CALL RESET
AFT MSTR
CALL RESET
L
PSUD
DATA 1
DATA 2
TO AFT C COL
PSUDs
L
SEB
DATA 1
DATA 2
TO AFT C COL
SEBs
C
PSUD
DATA 1
DATA 2
C
SEB
DATA 1
DATA 2
FORWARD ATTENDANTS PANEL (P21)
R
PSUD
DATA 1
DATA 2
TO AFT R COL
PSUDS
CENTRE COLUMN ONLY
R
SEB
DATA 1
DATA 2
TO AFT R COL
SEBS
AFT ZONE CTD
TO NEXT
PSUD
FIRST L PSUD
MSTR CALL
RESET
C
1
____
NOTE:
LAST PSUD & SEB
IN COLUMN HAVE
TERMINATION PLUG.
C
1
TO NEXT
SEB
FIRST L SEB
62333BDA

g62333bd

(Continued)
Attendant Call Function (Continued)

both left and right chimes and call lights. The left and center seats
will initiate a left chime/call and the right seat will initiate a right
chime/call. As a unit, each CTD can generate both left and right
chime and call light signals.
In the mid zone left and center column seats will sound the AFT L
chime and turn on the MID FWD L, MID CTR L and L/H FWD (aft
galley module) master call lights. The right column seats will sound
the AFT R chime and turn on the MID FWD R, MID CTR R and
R/H FWD (aft galley module) master call lights.
In the aft zone, left column seats and center column seats 1 and 2
will sound the AFT L chime and turn on the MID AFT L, MID CTR
L and L/H AFT (aft galley module) master call lights. Center column
seat 3 and the right column seats will sound the AFT R chime and
turn on the MID AFT R, MID CTR R, and R/H AFT (aft galley
module) master call lights.

When the forward attendants panel READING switch is in the
NORMAL position, control of the reading lights remains with the
DPCU. Subsequent pushes of the DPCU reading light switch will
turn on and turn off the corresponding reading light. Placing the
READING switch in the ON position will turn on all reading lights
in the passenger cabin. The lights will remain on as long as desired.
Placing the READING switch in the OFF position will turn off all
lights.
M00111BB.PST
LI
READING
TEST
L CHIME
RDG LT OFF
R CHIME
RDG LT ON
NORMAL
OFF
AFT
R
AFT
L
ELECTRONIC
CHIME UNITS
L MSTR
CALL LT
ON
R MSTR
CALL LT
MSTR CALL
RESET
L,C, & R
PSUD &
SEB DATA
MID ZONE CTD
AFT GALLEY MODULE

TO MID
ZONE
PSUDs &
SEBs AS
SHOWN
BELOW
EST ONLY
MID
FWD
L
MID
FWD
R
MID
CTR
L
MID
CTR
R
MID
AFT
L
MID
AFT
R
R/H
FWD
L/H
FWD
ATTENDANT
MASTER
CALL
LIGHTS
PASS ENT &

SERVICE SYS
NORMAL
ENT
TEST
MASTER
TEST
LAMP
OFF AFT
FWD
ON
TEST
DATA DIR
FWD
CALL
AFT
ON
L/H
AFT
R/H
AFT
LTS
AFT GALLEY MODULE
OFF
L CHIME
TEST
R CHIME
RDG LT OFF
RDG LT ON
READING LIGHTS
ROW CALL
LIGHT
L MSTR
CALL LT
L
R MSTR
CALL LT
L & SERVI
FWD MSTR
CALL RESET
AFT MSTR
CALL RESET
L
PSUD
DATA 1
DATA 2
TO AFT C COL
PSUDs
L
SEB
DATA 1
DATA 2
TO AFT C COL
SEBs
C
PSUD
DATA 1
DATA 2
C
SEB
DATA 1
DATA 2
FORWARD ATTENDANTS PANEL (P21)
R
PSUD
DATA 1
DATA 2
TO AFT R COL
PSUDS
CENTRE COLUMN ONLY
R
SEB
DATA 1
DATA 2
TO AFT R COL
SEBS
AFT ZONE CTD
TO NEXT
PSUD
FIRST L PSUD
MSTR CALL
RESET
C
1
____
NOTE:
LAST PSUD & SEB
IN COLUMN HAVE
TERMINATION PLUG.
C
1
TO NEXT
SEB
FIRST L SEB
62333BDA

g62333bd
(Continued)
FORWARD ATTENDANT PANEL

Normal Operational Functions
The Forward Attendants Panel (P21) interfaces with the Area Service
Box (ASB) for Business Class, and Mid and Aft Column Timer
Decoders (CTD) for Economy Class.
Reading Lights
The reading light ON and OFF control on the Forward
Attendants Panel is directly connected to the ASB and Mid and Aft
CTDs. Only the Mid and Aft CTDs use this input in this mode.
Call Resets
The forward call reset connects to the ASB and the Mid CTD. The
aft call reset connects to the Aft CTD.
Test Functions
When in a Test mode, the reading lights ON, reading lights OFF and
FWD/AFT call reset lines change their functions. Their functions
change to Test Code Request lines. When selecting to any Test
position, an ON TEST discrete is applied to the ASB and CTDs.
The other three lines (Test Control 1, 2 and 3) are used to select the
required test by a combination of discretes earths on those lines.
Test Code
OVHD
SEATS
LAMP
ENT
NORM MSTR
TEST TEST ON OFF ON OFF TEST
X
TEST
LINE
Test Code (Continued)

OVHD
SEATS
MSTR LAMP
ENT TEST
NORM
TEST TEST ON OFF ON OFF TEST LINE
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
ON
TEST
X
X
X
CTL 1
X
X
X
CTL 2
X
X
X
CTL 3
X
PES
TEST
For example, when the Lamp Test is selected, the ON TEST and
READING LIGHT OFF (Test Control 3) lines have a discrete
applied to them. This forces all reading lights, row call lights and
master call lights to illuminate in all zones (classes) and chimes to
sound once.
The Fwd and Aft Master Call/Test Switch/Lights provide results of
requested tests directly from the Mid CTD and Aft CTD respectively.
When MASTER or ENTERTAINMENT TEST is selected, in
addition to the appropriate test code being used, a discrete (28V DC)
is applied to the Main Multiplexer. This action is the same on the
767-238 as it is on the 767-338 and affects the Mid and Aft Zones
(Economy Class) entertainment system only. The Main Multiplexer is
forced into test mode. The Main Mux applies a test tone into all 10
Main Mux tracks and inserts a test code into track 15 to tell the
Zone Muxes into test mode.
M0011194.PST
T-R DATA OUT
T-R DATA IN
T-R DATA OUT
T-R DATA OUT
T-R DATA IN
T-R DATA IN
DATA 1
CABIN
MANAGEMENT
TERMINAL
DATA 2
PASSENGER
ENTERTAINMENT
SYSTEMS
CONTROLLER
PASSENGER
SERVICE
SYSTEMS
CONTROLLER
TEST ENABLE
PES
MASTER
TEST
SELECTIONS
MAIN MULTIPLEXER
ON TEST
FWD CALL RESET
TEST CONTROL 1
TEST CONTROL 2
TEST CONTROL 3
PASSENGER
SERVICES
UNIT
DECODERS
READING LTS ON
READING LTS OFF
CHIMES
R MASTER CALL
LIGHTS
FWD MASTER CALL

RESET/TEST LIGHT
MID COLUMN
TIMER DECODER
AFT MASTER CALL

RESET/TEST LIGHT
AFT COLUMN
TIMER DECODER
L MASTER CALL
LIGHTS
TO FWD MASTER
CALL LIGHTS
AREA
SERVICE BOX
AFT CALL RESET

62333ALA

g62333al

(Continued)
Test Functions
(Continued)
Cabin Management Terminal Interface

Although the Cabin Management Terminal (CMT) is physically
connected to the ASB via the Passenger Entertainment System
Controller (PESC) and Passenger Service Systems Controller (PSSC),
it will not show any test results when the test is initiated from the
P21 Forward Attendants Panel. All Fwd Zone (Business Class) Test
request should be carried out from the CMT. All results from such
tests will be shown on the CMT.
M0011194.PST
T-R DATA OUT
T-R DATA IN
T-R DATA OUT
T-R DATA OUT
T-R DATA IN
T-R DATA IN
DATA 1
CABIN
MANAGEMENT
TERMINAL
DATA 2
PASSENGER
ENTERTAINMENT
SYSTEMS
CONTROLLER
PASSENGER
SERVICE
SYSTEMS
CONTROLLER
TEST ENABLE
PES
MASTER
TEST
SELECTIONS
MAIN MULTIPLEXER
ON TEST
FWD CALL RESET
TEST CONTROL 1
TEST CONTROL 2
TEST CONTROL 3
PASSENGER
SERVICES
UNIT
DECODERS
READING LTS ON
READING LTS OFF
CHIMES
R MASTER CALL
LIGHTS
FWD MASTER CALL

RESET/TEST LIGHT
MID COLUMN
TIMER DECODER
AFT MASTER CALL

RESET/TEST LIGHT
AFT COLUMN
TIMER DECODER
L MASTER CALL
LIGHTS
TO FWD MASTER
CALL LIGHTS
AREA
SERVICE BOX
AFT CALL RESET

62333ALA

g62333al
(Continued)
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
g62333al
CABIN MANAGEMENT TERMINAL

General
Reading light control,

Configuration programming.
The Cabin Management Terminal (CMT) is:

The originating data storage device for the system software and
aircraft configuration database.
The system control computer.
The user interface for the Business Class Passenger Service
System.
The CMT has the following features:
A 10 colour LCD display with capability for high speed
graphical user interface.
8 function keys and 16 line select keys for user interface.
A core processing unit consisting of;
a 25MHz 80386DX processor,
a 120 MB hard drive,
1 MB RAM expandable to 16 MB,
a PCMCIA ROM Card socket,
two serial ports
a Centronics port,
floppy disk controller,
IDE disk interface,
keyboard controller,
VGA video controller and
a colour 10 inch, LCD.
A screen saver function, operational after 10 minutes.
The CMT can be configured to boot either from an internal ROM

(hard) disk or floppy disk. When the system power is switched on,
the CMT will initialise and load the required system software and
aircraft configuration database. It also passes this data to the other
LRUs in the system. At this time the CMT also performs a self-test.
After successful initialisation the main menu is displayed on the
screen.
Located on the back of the CMT are the interconnection sockets.
J1
J2
J3
J4
J5
J6
J7
Video and power input.

Floppy drive interface.
Parallel printer port (not used).
RS-232 port.
External keyboard.
N/A.
Token ring interface.
The CMT weighs approximately 12lbs (5.45kg) maximum. Its

dimensions are 12.5in (317.5mm) wide, 11.6in (292mm) high and
4.25in (107.5mm) deep.
Through CMT application screens the following services can be

controlled:
System ON/OFF,
System testing,
PSS attendant call and reset,
M0011198.PST
BACK VIEW
J5
J3
J1
J2
J7
J4
MAS
LIQUID
CRYSTAL
DISPLAY
FUNCTION
KEYS
LINE SELECT
KEYS
62332APA

g62332ap
FORWARD ATTENDANTS PANEL.

General
The following switches provide for control and test of the Passenger
Service System ( PSS). They mainly affect the mid and aft zones
(economy) but have some affect on the forward zone (business).
PASS SERV SYST

PASS SERV SYST PWR on-off switch controls power to the mid
and aft (economy) zones PSS.
PASS ENT and SERVICE SYS MAINTENANCE/TEST

SWITCH
The switch is used to send test commands to PES or PSS to initiate
BITE in the mid and aft (economy) zones. Test responses are
indicated by the FWD and AFT MSTR CALL RESET lights. Also,
the chime tone indicates test completion. This switch is left in the
NORMAL POSITION, except when testing.
NOTE: For the forward (business) zone only position 2, LAMPS

TEST, has any affect.
READING
READING light control switch provides reading light control for the
Mid and Aft zones. In the NORMAL position, the passengers have
individual control. The ON and OFF positions override this control.
OFF position selection is sprung loaded to the NORMAL position.
FWD MSTR CALL

FWD MSTR CALL RESET is used to reset fwd and mid attendant
and master call lights and also used as a test indicator.
AFT MSTR CALL

AFT MSTR CALL RESET is used to reset aft attendant and master
call lights and also used as a test indicator.
M00111C0.PST
LIGHTS

GROUND
SERVICE BUS
PASS ENT &

SERV SYSTEM
ENTRY-L
ENT
TEST
B/C
CABIN
DEACT
HI
LO
ATTND - C
EMER LTG
NORMAL
NORMAL
MASTER
TEST
ATTND - L
READING
OFF
HI
LO
ON
OFF
LAMP
TEST
AFT
LEFT ENTRY
CEILING
ENTRY-R
EMERG LIGHTS
FWD
ON
W
FWD
AFT
OFF
SEATS
DA TA DIR
CALL
LTS
ON
D
OVH
ENTER TAINMENT
1 2 3
CONT
CANCL
CALL & SER VICE

PASS ENT
SYST PWR
START
ON ANNCMT
READY
PWR
1 2
BRD MUSIC
VOLUME
CHANNEL
SELECT
NEXT
HI
OFF
1
8 6
FWD MSTR
CALL RESET
MAIN DOOR
UP
AFT MSTR
CALL RESET
MAIN DOOR
DOWN
3
4
RSV 1
PASS SERV
SYST PWR
RSV 2
ANNOUNCEMENT
62333AMA
FORWARD ATTENDANTS PANEL.

g62333am
PASSENGER ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM CONTROLLER

General
The Passenger Entertainment System Controller (PESC) is the main
system controller for the Passenger Entertainment System. It also
provides the gateway for the Passenger Service System Controller
(PSSC) to the seat distribution network and the Cabin Management
Terminal (CMT).
Features
Contained in memory is the required portion of the System/Seat
Network Configuration Database.
The PESC converts the seat network address code and request into
an actual seat number (eg. 3A) and request code format for
transmission to the PSSC. It also provides PES functions, including
video/audio data formatting, which will not be discussed here. BITE
is performed automatically upon power up and upon request by the
CMT.
It maintains back up power for a minimum of 200ms during power
system interruptions.
M00111A3.PST
62332AQA
PASSENGER ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM CONTROLLER

g62332aq
PASSENGER SERVICES SYSTEM CONTROLLER

General
The Passenger Services System Controller (PSSC) is the main system
controller for the Passenger Services System (PSS) section of the
System 2000 integrated video/audio and service system.
The PSSC receives zonal overhead configuration database from the
Cabin Management Terminal (CMT), which is kept in memory.
The PSSC carries out the following functions;
Converts PESC/PSSC seat number and action requests into an
overhead (PSUD) network address and action request.
Determines the master call light and chime area, if required.
Carries out some PA functions, which are not discussed here.
BITE is performed automatically upon power on and when requested
by the PESC via the CMT.
The PSSC operates on 115v AC, 400Hz single phase aircraft power
and maintains back up power for 200ms during system power
interruption.
M001119B.PST
PSSC
62332AYA
PASSENGER SERVICES SYSTEM CONTROLLER

g62332ay
AREA DISTRIBUTION BOX (ADB)

General
Connections
The Area Distribution Box (ADB) serves as a seat zone controller to

distribute configuration database and power, and to collect passenger
service action requests from the seat network.
Jacks on the box connect as follows;
The ADB maintains backup power for 200ms during system power
interruptions.
It requires hardwiring (pin programming) via three address lines for
its address. The ADB feeds up to four columns of VASEBs.
For power distribution, each output is limited to 5A at 115 VAC, 400
Hz for the VASEBs. An automatic reset circuit breaker is installed in
each power feed. Unused ADB RF output ports, except CRC output
port, must be terminated.
The ADB stores the required portion of the downloaded seat zonal
network configuration database in memory. The ADB dynamically
establishes the seatbox addresses to the Video Audio Seat Electronics
Boxes (VASEB) and also downloads zonal audio, video and
passenger address information.
Passenger service data such as reading lamp and attendant call
requests is transferred from the ADB, where the ADB address is
added to the data stream, to the PESC.
J1 - input from:
PESC (RF video/PCM audio signal) data and address
programming,
115v AC power supply.
J2 - to next ADB or end terminator.
J3 - to seat column.
J6 - terminated.
J7 to J10 - not wired (capped with anti-static caps).
J11 - to crew rest (physically smaller, but not used QF).
Physical
ADB have a maximum weight of 4.4lb (2kg).
Dimensions 8.27in (210mm) wide, 3.33in (84.5mm) high and 6.69in
(170mm) deep.
Pin Programming
The ADB is provided with its own position address via hard wired
program pins.
M0010F39.PST
J5
SIDES ROTATED
FOR CLARITY
J6
J3
J4
J11
J9
J2
J10
J8
J1
J7
62332AUA
AREA DISTRIBUTION BOX (ADB)

g62332au
AREA SERVICES BOX

Functions
J7 - centre column PSUDs.
The Area Service Box (ASB) provides similar functions as would the
CTD.
It serves as an Overhead Zone Controller distributing power and
PSS data for the three (left, centre and right) columns of
Passenger Service Unit Decoders (PSUDs) .
The ASB converts the System 2000 digital data format into a
format which the PSUDs will recognize. This recognizable
format is the same as that outputted by the CTDs in the zones
not fitted with System 2000.
It adds Attendant Panel reading light and call light control inputs
into its output data format (for lamp test only).
The ASB also controls the Master Call Light illumination and
Chime generation associated with attendant calls.
The ASB holds aircraft PSS configuration database information in
memory.
It has the additional feature of being able to report to the PSSC
on system BITE and health.
Physical Description
Located on the ASB are interconnection sockets which have the
following functions;
J1
J2
J3
J4
J5
J6
right column PSUDs.

left column PSUDs.
PSS data to PSSC.
Terminator.
Power input and Attendant Panel control inputs.
capped.
M001119E.PST
UNIT INVERTED
FOR CLARITY
J6
J7(C)
J1(R)
J2(L)
J3
J4
ROTATED
180 DEGREES
FOR CLARITY
J5
HOLD DOWN
FOOT (4 PLACES)
62333ANA
AREA SERVICES BOX

g62333an

Operational Description
The Column Timer Decoders (CTDs):
provide basic Passenger Service System (PSS) and Passenger
Entertainment System (PES) timing.
provide power to the SEBs
processes commands originating from the PSCUs where fitted.
processes commands originating from the DPCUs where fitted.
NOTE: There are two internal power supplies. One for the CTD
and the other supplying 35v AC to the SEBs
During normal operation the CTD interrogates the SEBs for
passenger commands and passes these commands to the applicable
PSUD. The CTD responds to switches on applicable attendants
panels to:
The connectors interface with the following components:
J1 - Right column PSUDs.

J2 - Centre column PSUDs.
J7 - Left column PSUDs.
J3 - Left column SEBs.
J4 - Centre column SEBs.
J6 - Right column SEBs.
J5 - Attendant panel, chime units, master call lights and input
power.
NOTE: The CTDs on the 767-338 and 747-338 aircraft are

interchangeable. All other installations are NOT
interchangeable.
Turn on or off all reading lights in a zone for test purpose

(overrides seat controls).
Turn on all row call lights in a zone for test purposes (overrides
seat controls).
Reset all existing calls within a zone.
There are three connectors on the front (J1, J2, J7) and four on the
rear (J3, J4,J5 and J6). The CTD contains internal fuses that supply
the power for the seat electronics boxes in its zone.
NOTE: These fuses are not LRUs.
M00111C4.PST
UNIT INVERTED
FOR CLARITY
J7(C)
J1(R)
J2(L)
J3(L)
J4(R)
ROTATED
180 DEGREES
FOR CLARITY
J5
J6(C)
HOLD DOWN
FOOT (4 PLACES)
62333AXA

g62333ax

General
The Passenger Service Unit Decoders (PSUDs) provide control of the
reading lights and attendant row call light for each seat row in all
zones.
The PSUD accepts timing and data information from the Area
Service Box (ASB) or Column Timer Decoder (CTD). It provides
power to the reading lights and attendant row call lights. The PSUDs
in a column are series connected. There are three cable connections
on the front of the unit.
J1 and J3 are the two larger connections used to series connect
the PSUDs. These are interchangable.
J2, the smaller connector provides interface with the reading and
row call lights.
A termination plug is connected to the last PSUD in a column. This
plug contains a jumper for returning clock and data information via
the loop-to-loop cables, to the ASB or CTD. The first PSUD in a
column is connected to the ASB or CTD.
NOTE: PSUDs on the 767-300 aircraft are interchangable with the

outboard PSUDs on 767-200s and 747-300s.
M00111C8.PST
END VIEW
J1
SIDE VIEW
J2
J3
1.9
BAIL WIRE
MAX
62333AZA

g62333az
VIDEO/AUDIO SEAT ELECTRONIC BOX

General
The Video/Audio Seat Electronic Box (VASEB) Passenger Services
System (PSS) function is to provide a link between the Advanced
Digital Passenger Control Units (ADPCU) and the Area Distribution
Box (ADB) for reading light and attendant call functions.
The VASEB stores the required portion of the downloaded seat zonal
network configuration database in its memory.
VASEBs are connected in series and the last is VASEB fitted with a
termination plug.
The VASEB provides power (+9V DC) to the ADPCUs.
Interconnection
Located on the VASEB are the interconnection sockets which have
the following functions;
J1
J2
J3
J4
J5
column input.
output to next VASEB .
games port (NOT used).
output to seat 1 (L) ADPCU (colour coded red).
output to seat 2 (R) ADPCU (colour coded blue).
Physical Dimensions
The VASEB is 6.5in (166.5mm) X 5.26in (133.6mm) (including
mounting bracket) X 2.99in (76mm) excluding connectors.
M0010F3C.PST
J1
J2
J3
J5
J4
62332AVA
VIDEO/AUDIO SEAT ELECTRONIC BOX

g62332av

Operational Description
Terminator
The Seat Electronics Box (SEB) contains the demultiplexing

electronics for the Passenger Entertainment System (PES) as well as
encoding/decoding electronics for the Passeger Services System
(PSS). Only the PSS fuctions are discussed here. The PSS encoder in
the SEB decodes the received Digital Passenger Control Unit
(DPCU) action request serial data, encodes it and transmits this to
the Column Time Decoder (CTD) in a serial form. The SEB also
provides the DPCU with 5.6 volts DC.
A special terminator plug/harness assembly is required for the last

SEB in a column. This harness matches the impedance of the PES
coax cable, provides a PSS feedback loop, and is grounded using the
seat track.
NOTE: The teminator on the 767-338 is the same as that on the

767-238 and 747-338 aircraft.
The SEB box has three connectors that provide signal interface with
other units. The two connectors on one end interface with the
forward and aft SEBs in the column. The third connector interfaces
with the DPCU in the seat group. The first SEB in a column is fed
from the CTD via floor/sidewall disconnects. The last SEB in a
column has a termination plug connected to it which provides a
feedback loop for the passenger service system. The SEB is
grounded to the seat tracks.
The SEB is secured with NYLATCH fasteners to a box assembly
which is mounted on a seat brace.
NOTE: Although the SEB on the 767-338 is physically similar to

that on the 767-238 and 747-338 aircraft, they are NOT
interchangeable.
M00111CB.PST
J3 TO PCU
NYLATCH
FASTENERS
(2 PLACES)
J1
INTER SEAT
ELECTRONIC
BOX CABLE
SEAT TRACK
GROUND
CONNECTOR
LAST SEAT BOX

TERMINATION
SEAT
TRACK
J2
2.3"
48"
62333AYA

g62333ay
ADVANCED DIGITAL PASSENGER CONTROL UNIT

General
The Advanced Digital Passenger Control Unit (ADPCU) provides the
passenger interface to the Passenger Service System ( PSS) by
communicating with the Video Audio Seat Electronics Box (VASEB).
All the switch command processing is performed by the VASEB.
Pressing the attendant call switch initiates the operation to illuminate

the overhead white call light and sound the hi-chime once. This may
be reset by actuation of the FWD MSTR CALL RESET switch on
the forward attendants panel, the CMT, or the attendant call cancel
switch on the ADPCU.
All other switches are Passenger Entertainment System functions.
The ADPCU has the following features;

Momentary push button switches:
Attendant call control
Attendant call reset control
Reading light on/off
A two digit, seven segment LED display shows:
BITE status (88 in test)
Pr when VASEB in program mode.
CF when being reprogrammed.
Selected audio channel in normal operation.
A discrete LED No Smoking icon
The ADPCU contains a microprocessor to control information
processing. All switches are momentary contact with tactile feedback
and the entire switch panel is backlit for low lighting conditions.
When a push button is pressed, the microprocessor transmits a
command code to the VASEB. If multiple switches are pressed at the
same time, the ADPCU will not process the commands. The ADPCU
receives code commands from the VASEB which controls the on/off
status of the discrete LED no smoking icon.
The reading light is controlled by push-on/push-off operation of the
switch.
M00111AC.PST
P2
Mode
AUDIO
VIDEO
AUX
INFO
CH
VOL
P1
G62332CS
ADVANCED DIGITAL PASSENGER CONTROL UNIT

g62332cs
DIGITAL PASSENGER CONTROL UNIT

General
The Digital Passenger Control Unit (DPCU) provides the passenger
interface to the Passenger Services System ( PSS) by communicating
with the Seat Electronics Box (SEB) in economy class. All switch
command processing is performed by the SEB.
The DPCU has the following features;
Momentary push button switches:
Attendant call control
Attendant call reset control
Reading light on/off
The DPCU contain a microprocessor to control the channel display
and to transmit channel and volume data to the SEB. All switches
are momentary contact with tactile feedback and the entire switch
panel is backlit for low lighting conditions.
When a push button is pressed, the microprocessor transmits a
command code to the SEB. If multiple switches are pressed at the
same time, the DPCU will not process the commands.
The reading light is controlled by push-on/push-off operation of the
switch.
Pressing the attendant call switch will illuminate the overhead white
call light and sound the hi-chime once. This may be reset by
actuation of the FWD or AFT MSTR CALL RESET switch
(depending on the originating zone) on the forward attendants panel
or the attendant call cancel switch on the DPCU.
M00111D0.PST
A
T
T
E
N
D
L
I
G
H
T
V
O
L
U
C
H
A
N
N
E
L
62334AOA
DIGITAL PASSENGER CONTROL UNIT

g62334ao
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
SYSTEM PRINCIPLES
g62334ao
TOKEN RING LOCAL AREA NETWORK

General
Token Ring is logically a ring. This means that there is a path (set of
wires) running from one LRU to the next and only two LRUs are
on each path.
Returning to the analogy, when the receiver gets the message, rather
than taking it out of the envelope, he copies it and then stamps the
message in the envelope as READ and sends it around the ring back
to you. When you get the message stamped READ, you replace it
with the message TOKEN.
How a Token Ring Works

A Token Ring system controls which LRU is allowed to send
messages by passing a token around the ring from station to station.
Because each LRU is attached to only two other LRUs, complex
arbitration normally required to figure out whos next isnt needed,
as is found in some other LAN setups.
The LRUs pass the token around the ring until one of them needs it.
That LRU then replaces the token with what is called a frame,
another term for a message. The reason that we say replaces is that
each link between two LRUs carries a single message - instead of
the token being sent, a frame is sent in its place. Its rather like a
circle of people passing envelopes endlessly around the circle. The
token is a slip of paper reading TOKEN. If its in an envelope that
you get, you can take it out and hold on to it and replace it with a
message for one of the other people in the ring.
The frame is passed from LRU to LRU until the destination is
reached. Rather then removing the frame, the destination just sets
some bits in the frame to indicate that it got the message, and the
frame circulates around the network until it gets back to the sender.
The sender, seeing that the message was received, replaces it with a
new token.
M00111DD.PST
MAS
CMT
PESC
PSSC
62333BEA
TOKEN RING LOCAL AREA NETWORK

g62333be
ACTION REQUEST
General
Aircraft Configuration Database is a combination of essentially three
parts;
system operation configuration,
seat network configuration,
and overhead network configuration.
The ASB decodes this information, formats the signal and transmits
the data code to the correct PSUD. The result is the passenger can
read his/her magazine in comfort because the reading light at seat 3A
has illuminated.
If an attendant call was made instead of a reading light request the
PSSC would order the ASB to illuminate row call light, the
appropriate master call light and sound the appropriate chime unit.
The PESC uses the seat network configuration while the PSSC uses
the overhead network configuration .
As an example of a typical operation when a passenger at seat 3A
uses his/her ADPCU to illuminate the reading light follows.
The ADPCU signals the VASEB to illuminate the reading light. The
VASEB senses which ADPCU (left or right) has made the request.
The VASEB is also aware of its line position number along the
column as programmed previously by the ADB. This information is
sent to the ADB. The ADB determines which port and hence which
column (left, centre or right) the request originated. The ADB also
knows its own address, determined by pin programming at the unit.
All this information is passed on to the PESC.
Using the seat network configuration, the PESC converts this
information into an aircraft seat number and action, seat 3A - reading
light ON. This is then passed to the PSSC.
The PSSC receives this seat number (3A) and action (reading light
ON). Using the overhead network configuration the PSSC determines
the ASB address and output port involved, the line position number
of the PSUD and which reading light (left or right) to illuminate.
This information is transmitted to the ASB.
M0011200.PST
ASB
ADDRESS
ASB
PORT
PSUD
POSITION
SEAT
LT or RT
DATA INFO
OR ACTION
OVERHEAD NETWORK DATA
PASSENGER SERVICE
SYSTEM CONTROLLER
(PSSC)
ADB
ADDRESS
ADB
PORT
VASEB
POSITION
SEAT
LT or RT
ACTION
REQUEST
SEAT NETWORK DATA
PASSENGER ENTERTAINMENT
SYSTEM CONTROLLER
(PESC)
62332DFA
ACTION REQUEST
g62332df
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
DISPLAYS
g62332df
23.32 PSS B767-300 DISPLAYS
MAIN MENU
General
The cabin crew can use the CMT to control all functions of the
video system. Maintenance staff can also use the CMT for
configuration, testing and fault display.
To activate the video system, including the CMT, the Video/Audio
System switch must be turned ON. When turned ON, the switch will
change from blue to white illumination. After successful completion
of the start-up procedure the CMT will show the main menu.
The main menu displays 2 line select controls and 5 sub-menu
options. Line select keys are the 8 push buttons on the left and right
side of the CMT. The function selections are made by the 8 push
along the bottom of the CMT. The display will also show the aircraft
type and the activated seat configuration.
NOTE: The area near the bottom of the screen above the bottom
function key labels is the INFORMATION area. Helpful
hints and status messages are displayed here for most of
the screens as required.
Line Select Controls

There are 2 Line select functions on this screen:
DISPLAY OFF
SYSTEM OFF
Activation of SYSTEM OFF selection provides the VCPs with a
software off. In this case, any indication on the VCPs, including
the power light, will not be illuminated. It also blanks the CMT
screen.
To reactivate the CMT display, press any key.
Function Select Controls

The relevant function selection buttons are detailed as follows:
PAX SERV SYSTEM

Displays the screen for controlling the Reading Lights, Chimes and
for receiving Flight Attendant Calls by seat number (and cancelling
by zone).
MAINT
Displays the screen for activating system testing, activating system
programming, displaying details on the status of the system or
confirm the aircraft layout.
The test features can only be activated while the aircraft is on the
ground and should be performed by qualified maintenance personnel.
Activation of DISPLAY OFF blanks the CMT display (power will

still be applied, but the back light will not illuminate). To reactivate
the CMT display, press any key.
M0010F5A.PST
*** MAIN MENU ***
ACTIVATED SEAT CONFIGURATION

B767 - 300
24J / 224Y
DISPLAY OFF
SYSTEM OFF
SELECT A MENU FUNCTION KEY TO CONTINUE . . .
PAX
BRIEF
VIDEO
PAX SERV
SYSTEM
MAINT
HELP
G62332BB
MAIN MENU
g62332bb
MAIN MENU
(Continued)
Screen Saver Feature

To prolong the life of the CMT display, there is a screen save feature
that automatically turns OFF the display after 10 minutes of user
inactivity. This feature is active from any of the CMT screens.
Re-activation of the display is accomplished by pressing any key, at
which the same screen that was previously displayed will appear.
Common Function Select Options

On any of the menu pages, with the exception of the Main Menu,
there are 3 function keys which will always have the same purpose.
PREV PAGE
The extreme left function key is always labeled PREV PAGE and
will always go back to the previous page or screen.
MAIN MENU
The extreme right function key is always MAIN MENU and will
return the screen to the MAIN MENU.
HELP
The HELP function key is always the second key from right. Help
menus are content sensitive, so that the help information displayed is
about the screen where the help button was pressed.
M0010F5A.PST
*** MAIN MENU ***

B767 - 300
24J / 224Y
DISPLAY OFF
SYSTEM OFF
PAX
BRIEF
VIDEO
PAX SERV
SYSTEM
MAINT
HELP
G62332BB
MAIN MENU
g62332bb
(Continued)
PASSENGER SERVICE
General
This screen enables control of the PSS in the System 2000 installed
zones as follows:
Passenger Service Calls

Passenger Service CALLS are displayed by Zone and seat number
(from the Top Centre of the screen in vertical columns). These
columns grow longer as new calls are received, with new calls being
added to the bottom of the list.
NORMAL: Returns control of the reading lights to the passenger

seat.
OFF: This is a MOMENTARY switch that turns the reading lights
OFF, then reverts back to NORMAL.
NOTE: Conflicts in operation can occur when the Forward

Attendants Control Panel (P21 ) is selected to ON and
the CMT is selected to OFF. To avoid any problems
ensure switch positions agree. Business class operations
should be carried out via the CMT and economy class
operations via the Forward Attendants Panel (P21 ).
Chime
The RESET CALL line select keys, one for each class, resets
(cancels) the Passenger Service CALL lights at the Passenger seat,
and the master call lights by Zone.
The * (asterick), adjacent to the reset call class designator, will
only be present if there are calls present in that class.
The CMT also has chime control. The CHIME line select key (at the
bottom right of the screen), turns the attendant call chimes ON or
OFF.
ON: Enables the chimes.
OFF: Disables the chimes.
NOTE: Currently only the J CLASS zone control is active.

Reading Lights
The READING LIGHT control on the Passenger Service screen has
a similar function as the READING light control on the Forward
Attendants Panel (P21). However, the READING light control via
the CMT only controls the FWD zone.
The READING LIGHTS Line Select keys (at the bottom left of the
screen) control the passenger seat reading lights in the zone.
ON: Turns all reading lights on. Passenger control at the seats is
disabled.
M0010F81.PST
*** MAIN MENU ***
>MAIN MENU->
*** PASSENGER SERVICE ***

B767 - 300
J
2A
4A
1A
3B
24J / 224Y
SYSTEM OFF
DISPLAY OFF
PAX
BRIEF
VIDEO
PAX SERV
SYSTEM
MAINT
RESET
CALLS
HELP
J CLASS
Y CLASS
ON
NORMAL
READING
LIGHTS
ON CHIME OFF
OFF
NOTE: NORMAL ALLOWS OPERATION AT SEAT
PREV
PAGE
PAX
BRIEF
VIDEO
PAX SERV
SYSTEM
MAINT
HELP
MAIN
MENU
62332BKA
PASSENGER SERVICE
g62332bk
MAINTENANCE PASSCODE
General
This function is used by the maintenance crew to access PSS test
function for bussiness class on the ground.
If the MAINTENANCE Sub-Menu is selected from the main menu,
a maintenance passcode is required before the screen can be
accessed. The passcode is entered by pressing the CMTs bottom left
side key followed by the bottom right side key.
M00111FD.PST
*** MAIN MENU ***
>MAIN MENU->
*** MAINTENANCE ***

B767 - 300
24J / 224Y
SYSTEM OFF
DISPLAY OFF
PAX
BRIEF
VIDEO
PAX SERV
SYSTEM
MAINT
HELP
PLEASE ENTER PASSCODE
PREV
PAGE
PAX
BRIEF
VIDEO
PAX SERV
SYSTEM
MAINT
HELP
MAIN
MENU
62332BLA
MAINTENANCE PASSCODE
g62332bl
MAINTENANCE
General
Lamp Test
There are a number of selections available from this screen after the
passcode is entered.
Starts and stops the ADPCU Lamp test, and the 400 Hz test tone
from the PESC to the VASEBs.
Faults
Database Configuration
Used for displaying the current fault status of equipment for a flight
leg.
The top right hand section of the screen allows the user to select the
database configuration screen.
LRU Part Numbers

Reports the hardware part numbers and software version of the
System 2000 equipment installed on the aircraft.
Test All
Performs a complete test of all installed System 2000 equipment.
TEST results may be viewed in the FAULTS Screen. Test
automatically ends after 3-5 minutes.
Reprogram SEBs
Reprograms the VASEBs.
Abort Test All

Stops the testing of the installed System 2000 equipment.
M0010F87.PST
>MAIN MENU->
*** MAINTENANCE ***
>MAIN MENU->
*** MAINTENANCE ***

PART NUMBERS
SW: 211-QF03 [1 . 20 . 25]
< FAULTS
16 MAY 94
HW: RD-AA8010-02
< VTR COUNTER

PREV
PAGE
PAX
BRIEF
VIDEO
PAX SERV
SYSTEM
MAINT
B767-300 >
DB: QF-IVS-763-901
HELP
MAIN
MENU
DISK P/N: 211-763QAN901
< LRU PART NOs
TEST ALL
REPROGRAM SEBS
ABORT TEST ALL
ON
LAMP TEST
OFF
On Ground
PREV
PAGE
PAX
BRIEF
VIDEO
PAX SERV
SYSTEM
MAINT
HELP
MAIN
MENU
62332BMA
MAINTENANCE
g62332bm
DATABASE CONFIGURATION
General
The Database Configuration page shows the databases which are
stored in the CMT. Normally there will be two databases available
for the specific aircraft type. Both databases are IDENTICAL with
the exception of the database header. They are identified as PRI
and ALT, including the aircraft seat configuration.
These databases can be used to overcome difficulties experienced
during reprogramming of the system.
The software operational code (op-code) for the various controllers
(VMU, VSCU, PESC etc) can only be updated in the workshop.
Available Selection
The two available selections on this aircraft are:
24J/224Y-PRI
24J/224Y-ALT
M0010F92.PST
>MAIN MENU->
*** MAINTENANCE ***

PART NUMBERS
DB: QF-IVS-744-900.
SW: 211-QF03 [1.20.25]
< FAULTS
B767-300 >
16 MAY 94
HW: RD-AA8010-02
< VTR COUNTER
DISK P/N: 211-744QAN900
< LRU PART NOs
>MAIN MENU->MAINTENANCE->
*** B767 - 300 ***
TEST ALL
REPROGRAM SEBS
ABORT TEST ALL
ON
LAMP TEST
OFF
24J/224Y-PRI
On Ground
PREV
PAGE
PAX
BRIEF
VIDEO
MAINT
HELP
MAIN
MENU
24J/224Y-ALT
On Ground
PREV
PAGE
ACTIVATED: B767-300, 24J/224Y-PRI
PAX
BRIEF
VIDEO
PAX SERV
SYSTEM
MAINT
HELP
MAIN
MENU
G62332BN
DATABASE CONFIGURATION
g62332bn
FAULTS
General
This screen is a current up-to-date display of all known video system
faults. Faults are continuously monitored and cleared from this
screen in the event that the fault goes away.
Description
The information area of the screen displays a summary of the flight
leg number and the total faults recorded for this flight.
At present there is a message labeled ODU. This is an acronym for

Overhead Decoder Unit. It replaces the old PSUD terminology.
The report format as shown below gives the following information.
ASB reporting the fault.
Column of the faulty unit
Left=1
Centre=2
Right=3
Row from the start towards the terminator of the faulty unit.
No. Column
The first column on the CMT display, labeled as NO, is the fault
number.
Source Column
The next column labeled SOURCE, is the line replaceable unit
(LRU) identification label identifying the equipment reporting the
failure.
The VASEB and ADPCU failures are identified by row number and
seat letter. The ADBs and CMT are numbered by the appropriate
seat address according to the installation layout of the aircraft
(LOPA).
Fault Column
The next column labeled FAULT indicates the type of fault in the
LRU.
M0010F96.PST
>MAIN MENU->
*** MAINTENANCE ***
*** FAULTS ***
PART NUMBERS
B767-300 >
DB: QF-IVS-763-901
SW: 211-QF03 [1 . 20 . 25]
< FAULTS
16 MAY 94
HW: RD-AA8010-02
< VTR COUNTER
DISK P/N: 211-763QAN901
< LRU PART NOs
NO SOURCE FAULT
TEST ALL
001 SEB 12 A EEPROM Failure

002 SDU 02 A No response SDU
003 VCP 0, 6 VCP No Response
004 ODU 1, 3, 2
Bad Lamp
REPROGRAM SEBS
ABORT TEST ALL
ON
LAMP TEST
OFF
On Ground
PREV
PAGE
PAX
BRIEF
VIDEO
PAX SERV
SYSTEM
MAINT
HELP
MAIN
MENU
LEG 3 / TOTAL FAULTS 4

PREV
PAGE
PAX
BRIEF
VIDEO
PAX SERV
SYSTEM
MAINT
HELP
MAIN
MENU
62332BOA
FAULTS
g62332bo
LRU PART NUMBERS

General
This screen displays all LRUs in the system and their associated
software version number, followed by the hardware part number.
Refresh
The REFRESH Line Select key re-interrogates the system and
reports back the LRU IDs.
Incompatibilities
The INCOMPATIBILITIES prompt will only be available when the
system detects actual hardware/software incompatibilities. Selection
of this key activates the Incompatibility screen. Early revision
LRUs, (dash numbers) may be acceptable, but may function with
reduced capabilities. Known problems with incompatibilities are
reported.
M0010F9F.PST
>MAIN MENU->
*** MAINTENANCE ***
*** LRU PART NOs ***
PART NUMBERS
B767-300 >
DB: QF-IVS-763-901
SW: 211-QF03 [1 . 20 . 25]
< FAULTS
16 MAY 94
HW: RD-AA8010-02
< VTR COUNTER
DISK P/N: 211-763QAN901
< LRU PART NOs
TEST ALL
REPROGRAM SEBS
ADB 01.17 RD-AA8030-01
ABORT TEST ALL
CMT 01.20 RD-AA8010-02
ON
LAMP TEST
OFF
On Ground
PREV
PAGE
PAX
BRIEF
VIDEO
PAX SERV
SYSTEM
MAINT
HELP
MAIN
MENU
PESC 01.21 RD-AA8010-01

SEB 01.20 RD-AA8040-01
SEB 01.21 RD-AA8040-02
VSCU 01.05 RD-AA8020-01
REFRESH
< INCOMPATIBILITIES
PREV
PAGE
PAX
BRIEF
VIDEO
PAX SERV
SYSTEM
MAINT
HELP
MAIN
MENU
62332BRA
LRU PART NUMBERS

g62332br
INCOMPATIBILITIES
General
This screen displays all current LRU software incompatibilities that
exist with the current installed equipment, along with suggestions as
to which units to upgrade.
It is an information screen only and has no interactive line select
keys. To exit, press any of the function keys.
M0010FA5.PST
>MAIN MENU->MAINTENANCE->LRU PART NOs->
*** INCOMPATIBILITIES ***

ADB 01.17 RD-AA8030-01
WARNING: CMT and VSCU are incompatible.

VSCU will get unimplemented message from CMT
Recommendations: Upgrade VSCU to version 1.24.
CMT 01.20 RD-AA8010-02

PESC 01.21 RD-AA8010-01
SEB 01.20 RD-AA8040-01
SEB 01.21 RD-AA8040-02
VSCU 01.05 RD-AA8020-01

If PVIS remote control will not function.
< INCOMPATIBILITIES
PREV
PAGE
PAX
BRIEF
VIDEO
REFRESH
PAX SERV
SYSTEM
MAINT
HELP

If VSCU_Has_ARs=1: VSCU will not pause ARs during PA.
MAIN
MENU
WARNING: ADB and PESC are incompatible.

BITE will not run unless in Flight & amp on ADB only when it has a moveable CR.
Recommendations: Upgrade ADB to version 1.65.
CRC port power will not operate when toggled Off then On.
Recommendations: Upgrade ADB to version 1.65.
Some messages (inlcuding PSS) fropm the SEBs will be lost.
Recommendations: Upgrade SEB to version 2.42.
SCROLL DN
PREV
PAGE
PAX
BRIEF
VIDEO
PAX SERV
SYSTEM
MAINT
HELP
MAIN
MENU
62332BSA
INCOMPATIBILITIES
g62332bs
ENGINEERING
General
A separate fault page, labelled ENGINEERING, is available mainly
for Technical Services.
The ENGINEERING screen is accessed while in the LRU part
numbers screen by pressing the CMT top left key followed by top
right.
This screen displays very similar information to the FAULT screen
however in this case it displays the history of BITE carried out
during the current power up time. The history information is only
current essentially in RAM, so when the system is powered off, the
fault history is lost. LRU Hardware/Software part numbers and other
system information is also displayed.
M0010FA2.PST
>MAIN MENU->MAINTENANCE->LRU PART NOs->
*** ENGINEERING ***

ADB 01.17 RD-AA8030-01
CMT 01.20 RD-AA8010-02
PESC 01.21 RD-AA8010-01
SEB 01.20 RD-AA8040-01
SOURCE LOCATION FAULT
SEB 01.21 RD-AA8040-02

VSCU 01.05 RD-AA8020-01
DBMT header received B767-300 20J212Y;

VSCU VSCU/LAN Fail
VSCU No Response PVIS
< INCOMPATIBILITIES
REFRESH
Test results start

PREV
PAGE
PAX
BRIEF
VIDEO
PAX SERV
SYSTEM
MAINT
HELP
MAIN
MENU
SDU 01E Bad Video Source

SDU 01E SDU Bad Lamp
VSCU VSCU/LAN Fail
Test results stop
LRU Soft Hardware Version Numbers
PESC 0120 RDAA10017X
ADB 0167 RDAA200150
SCROLL DN
PREV
PAGE
PAX
BRIEF
VIDEO
PAX SERV
SYSTEM
MAINT
HELP
MAIN
MENU
72333AHA
ENGINEERING
g72333ah
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
SYSTEM PROCEDURES
g72333ah
23.34 PSS B767-300 SYSTEM PROCEDURES
CABIN ATTENDANT FUNCTIONS

General
Test requests, reading light control and attendant call resets can be
generated from the Forward Attendant Panel (P21) or the Cabin
Management Terminal (CMT) by switch selection.
Forward Attendant Panel (P21)
The first exception is that the switch/light labeled FWD MSTR

CALL RESET illuminates for test result in the Mid Zone (hence the
MID CTD) and NOT the Fwd Zone.
The second exception is that the switch operation only affects the
economy class zones. Business class is controlled by the CMT.
NOTE: The P21 Master Test Switch LAMP TEST function will
initiate testing of all lamps in the Fwd, Mid and Aft zones.
Selections from the Forward Attendant Panel (P21) are explained

below.

Reading Lights
Reading
Turns
Reading
Turns
Lights ON
reading lights in the Mid and Aft Zones ON.
Lights OFF
reading lights in the Mid and Aft Zones OFF.
Reading Lights
Reading
Turns
Reading
Turns
Lights ON
reading lights in the Fwd Zone (Business Class) ON.
Lights OFF
reading lights in the Fwd Zone (Business Class) OFF.
Attendant Call Reset

Fwd Master Call Reset selection will reset;
Fwd (Business Class) Zone Master Call Lights and Row Call
Lights (the CMT indication does NOT reset),
Mid Zone Master Call Lights and Row Call Lights.
Aft Master Call Reset selection will reset;
Aft Zone Master Call Lights and Row Call Lights.
Master Test
Attendant Call Reset

Resetting attendant calls is carried out by class. The only selection
operational from the CMT, at this time, is the J Class selection.
When selected the following are reset:
The CMT display.
The Fwd Zone (Business Class) row call lights.
The Fwd Master Call Lights.
The Master Test Switch has the same functions as on the 767200
with two exceptions.
M00111E1.PST
.
>MAIN MENU->

J
2A
4A
5B
1A
3B
RESET
CALLS
J CLASS
Y CLASS
ON
NORMAL
READING
LIGHTS
ON CHIME OFF
OFF
PREV
PAGE
PAX
BRIEF
VIDEO
PAX SERV
SYSTEM
MAINT
HELP
MAIN
MENU

LIGHTS

GROUND
SERVICE BUS
PASS ENT &

SERV SYSTEM
ENTRY-L
ENT
TEST
B/C
CABIN
DEACT
ATTND - L
READING
ATTND - C
EMER LTG
NORMAL
NORMAL
MASTER
TEST
LO
HI
LO
HI
OFF
ON
OFF
LAMP
TEST
AFT
LEFT ENTRY
CEILING
ENTRY-R
EMERG LIGHTS
FWD
ON
W
FWD
AFT
ON
OFF
SEATS
DA TA DIR
CALL
LTS
OVH
ENTER TAINMENT
1 2 3
CONT
CANCL
READY
BRD MUSIC
VOLUME
PWR
1 2
CALL & SER VICE
CHANNEL
SELECT
NEXT
2
HI
OFF
PASS SERV
SYST PWR
FWD MSTR
CALL RESET
MAIN DOOR
UP
AFT MSTR
CALL RESET
MAIN DOOR
DOWN
RSV 1
5
8 6
PASS ENT
SYST PWR
START
ON ANNCMT
RSV 2
ANNOUNCEMENT
FWD ATTENDANT PANEL

G62333AQ

g62333aq

(Continued)
Testing
Testing is done via the Maintenance page and tests only the Fwd
Zone (Business Class).
The Lamp Test selection affects the Fwd Zone (Business Class)
only. When selected ON, reading lights, row call lights and
Forward Master Call lights are illuminated. It also sounds the
forward chime once. When selected OFF all lights will reset.
NOTE: Conflicts may occur if the Forward Attendant Panel and

CMT reading light selections do not match.
M00111E1.PST
.
>MAIN MENU->

J
2A
4A
5B
1A
3B
RESET
CALLS
J CLASS
Y CLASS
ON
NORMAL
READING
LIGHTS
ON CHIME OFF
OFF
PREV
PAGE
PAX
BRIEF
VIDEO
PAX SERV
SYSTEM
MAINT
HELP
MAIN
MENU

LIGHTS

GROUND
SERVICE BUS
PASS ENT &

SERV SYSTEM
ENTRY-L
ENT
TEST
B/C
CABIN
DEACT
ATTND - L
READING
ATTND - C
EMER LTG
NORMAL
NORMAL
MASTER
TEST
LO
HI
LO
HI
OFF
ON
OFF
LAMP
TEST
AFT
LEFT ENTRY
CEILING
ENTRY-R
EMERG LIGHTS
FWD
ON
W
FWD
AFT
ON
OFF
SEATS
DA TA DIR
CALL
LTS
OVH
ENTER TAINMENT
1 2 3
CONT
CANCL
READY
BRD MUSIC
VOLUME
PWR
1 2
CALL & SER VICE
CHANNEL
SELECT
NEXT
2
HI
OFF
PASS SERV
SYST PWR
FWD MSTR
CALL RESET
MAIN DOOR
UP
AFT MSTR
CALL RESET
MAIN DOOR
DOWN
RSV 1
5
8 6
PASS ENT
SYST PWR
START
ON ANNCMT
RSV 2
ANNOUNCEMENT
FWD ATTENDANT PANEL

G62333AQ

g62333aq
(Continued)
REPROGRAMMING CMT
General
During the start up routine of the Inseat Video System, the aircraft
configuration data base that is loaded into the CMT non volatile
memory ensures that all required LRUs are configured correctly. The
part number of the disk which contains the aircraft configuration data
base is shown on the maintenance menu.
CMT Reprogram
If a CMT is replaced the data base loaded into its memory may not
be correct and the data base must be changed.
Insert the applicable CMT Program Disk into the floppy disk
drive.
Activate the system by selecting the VIDEO AUDIO SYSTEM
switch to ON. The CMT will now automatically receive the
required Data Base.
At the end of the programming procedure a message will appear
to remove the floppy disk and re-power. Remove the disk.
Wait 30 seconds and reactivate the system, gain access to the
MAINTENANCE MENU and verify the correct disk part
number was loaded.
NOTE: Refer to Maintenance Memo M0104GEN-2332MAR

27/96 for details.
The following procedure should be used after a CMT has been

changed.
switch to ON.
Verify that the switch illuminates white.
Verify that the Cabin Management Terminal (CMT) turns ON and
boots up to the Main Menu.
From the Main Menu, select MAINT and then enter passcode to
access the MAINTENANCE screen.
If the configuration data base shown on the MAINTENANCE
screen is correct, no further action is necessary. If the data base is
not correct, continue with the following steps.
Turn the system OFF by deselecting the VIDEO AUDIO
SYSTEM switch.
Ensure all LRUs are in place and connected and remain
connected during entire programming procedure, otherwise major
system damage may occur.
M0010FB6.PST
*** MAIN MENU ***
3.5 FLOPPY
DISK DRIVE

B767 - 300
24J / 224Y
REMOVE DISK AND

CYCLE POWER.
SYSTEM OFF
DISPLAY OFF
PAX
BRIEF
VIDEO
>MAIN MENU->
PAX SERV
SYSTEM
MAINT
HELP
*** MAINTENANCE ***
MAS
PART NUMBERS
B767-300 >
DB: QF-IVS-763-901
SW: 211-QF03 [1 . 20 . 25]
< FAULTS
16 MAY 94
HW: RD-AA8010-02
< VTR COUNTER
VIDEO
AUDIO
SYSTEM
SWITCH
DISK P/N: 211-763QAN901
< LRU PART NOs
TEST ALL
CABIN MANAGEMENT
TERMINAL
REPROGRAM SEBS
ABORT TEST ALL
ON
LAMP TEST
VIDEO
AUDIO
SYSTEM
OFF
On Ground
PREV
PAGE
PAX
BRIEF
VIDEO
PAX SERV
SYSTEM
MAINT
HELP
MAIN
MENU
62332CNA
REPROGRAMMING CMT
g62332cn
REPROGRAMMING VASEBs
VASEB Reprogramming
Currently, there are two ways of reprogramming the VASEBs.
REPROGRAM SEBs
There may be times when the VASEBs require reprogramming. If so,
proceed as follows:
The information area of the CMT will show Programming in

Progress and as each VASEB is being programmed its ADPCUs
will show Pr (programming mode) and then CF
(configuration) as the data base is downloaded.
An approximate 4 second transition from Pr to CF
indicates a full down load is occurring.
At the completion of a successful reprogramming, the information
area will display Programming Successful.
At the CMT select the MAINTENANCE MENU.

On this menu select REPROGRAM SEBs
The information area of the CMT will show Programming in
Progress and as each VASEB is being programmed its ADPCUs
will show Pr (programming mode) and then CF
(configuration) as the data base is downloaded.
An approximate 4 second transition from Pr to CF
indicates a full down load is occurring.
A quick transition will be noted if the VASEB program header
information matches the download header and no download is
required.
At the completion of the reprogramming, the REPROGRAM
SEBs selection will be automatically deselected, and the ADPCUs
will return to normal.
B767-300>
On occasions when ALL SEBs need to be forcibly reprogrammed,
proceed as follows:
At the CMT select the MAINTENANCE MENU
Select B767-300> at the top right corner of the Maintenance
Menu.
On the B767-300 Menu select the database preceded with an
asterisk. This will start the reprogramming process.
M0011000.PST
>MAIN MENU->
>MAIN MENU->
*** MAINTENANCE ***
*** MAINTENANCE ***
PART NUMBERS
< FAULTS
DB: QF-IVS-763-901
SW: 211-QF03 [1 . 20 . 25]
16 MAY 94
HW: RD-AA8010-02
< VTR COUNTER
DISK P/N: 211-763QAN901
PART NUMBERS
B767-300 >
< LRU PART NOs
< FAULTS
DB: QF-IVS-763-901
SW: 211-QF03 [1 . 20 . 25]
16 MAY 94
HW: RD-AA8010-02
< VTR COUNTER
DISK P/N: 211-763QAN901
< LRU PART NOs
TEST ALL
TEST ALL
REPROGRAM SEBS
REPROGRAM SEBS
ABORT TEST ALL
ABORT TEST ALL
ON
LAMP TEST
OFF
ON
On Ground
PREV
PAGE
B767-300 >
LAMP TEST
OFF
Programming In Progress
PAX
BRIEF
VIDEO
PAX SERV
SYSTEM
MAINT
HELP
PAX
BRIEF
PREV
PAGE
MAIN
MENU
VIDEO
PAX SERV
SYSTEM
MAINT
HELP
MAIN
MENU
Mode
AUDIO
VIDEO
AUX
INFO
CH
VOL
G62332CM
REPROGRAMMING VASEBs
g62332cm
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
TESTING
g62332cm
SYSTEM 2000 TESTING

General
Testing of the zone/s with System 2000 fitted should be carried out
from the Cabin Management Terminal (CMT).
Testing of the other zones should be carried out from the P21
Forward Attendants Panel.
Test Operation
NOTE: The following test procedures are only to be used as a
study guide and for training purposes. Before testing any
aircraft in-seat video system the appropriate aircraft
maintenance manual MUST be used.
The test is accomplished as follows:
switch to ON.
Verify that the switch illuminates white.
Verify that the CMT turns ON and boots up to the main menu.
At the CMT select:
MAINT from the main menu functions.
Enter the maintenance passcode. (Bottom left, then bottom
right keys)
select TEST ALL
Check a sample of seats equipped with Inseat Video, that the
ADPCU displays 88 on the LED readout
Repeat BITE test after any faults have been rectified.

Several nuisance messages may occur after every BITE test.
VSCU/LAN FAILURE
SDU BAD LAMP
VSCU PVIS
NOTE: These nuisance messages should be ignored. Refer

Maintenance Memo M0104-GEN-23-32 Mar 27/96.
Local Area Network

LAN failures make it difficult for the operator to access the normal
BITE and faults on the CMT due to slow or no response from CMT
line select keys. In order to assist in isolating failures to a particular
unit and associated wiring, a LAN test disk is utilised.
NOTE: Refer Maintenance Memo M02507442337Nov 18/97
Wait until TEST COMPLETE appears in the lower status

message area. (After approximately 5 minutes).
At the CMT select FAULTS
Review faults and rectify as required.
M0010FF4.PST
>MAIN MENU->
*** MAINTENANCE ***
>MAIN MENU->
*** MAINTENANCE ***

PART NUMBERS
SW: 211-QF03 [1 . 20 . 25]
< FAULTS
16 MAY 94
HW: RD-AA8010-02
< VTR COUNTER

PREV
PAGE
PAX
BRIEF
VIDEO
PAX SERV
SYSTEM
MAINT
B767-300 >
DB: QF-IVS-763-901
HELP
MAIN
MENU
DISK P/N: 211-763QAN901
< LRU PART NOs
TEST ALL
REPROGRAM SEBS
ABORT TEST ALL
ON
LAMP TEST
OFF
Test Complete
PREV
PAGE
PAX
BRIEF
VIDEO
PAX SERV
SYSTEM
MAINT
HELP
MAIN
MENU
62332BUA
SYSTEM 2000 TESTING

g62332bu
LAMP TEST OPERATION

General
Testing of the zone/s with System 2000 fitted should be carried out
from the Cabin Management Terminal (CMT).
Testing of the other zones should be carried out from the P21
Forward Attendants Panel.
NOTE: If a Lamp Test is carried out from the P21 Fwd Att
Panel, reading lights, row call lights and master call lights
will remain illuminated in the System 2000 area until a
manual reset is carried out. For the reading lights, reset
would be from the CMT. For the row call lights and master
call lights, reset could be from the CMT or the P21 Fwd
Att Panel.
Lamp Test
NOTE: The following test procedures are only to be used as a
study guide and for training purposes. Before testing any
aircraft in-seat video system the appropriate aircraft
maintenance manual MUST be used.
The Lamp Test is carried out as follows:
At the CMT Select:
MAINT from the main menu functions
Enter the maintenance passcode
Lamp Test to ON while the Maintenance Menu is displayed.
Check all seats equipped with inseat video that the ADPCU
displays 88 on the LED readout, all LED icons are illuminated.
Check all associated passenger service units ensuring that the
reading lights and attendant call lights are on.
Check that the master call lights are on and check chimes
sounded.
At the CMT select:
Lamp test - OFF
Main Menu
M0010FFD.PST
>MAIN MENU->
*** MAINTENANCE ***

PART NUMBERS
B767-300 >
DB: RD-AA9010-QF05
SW: 211-QF03 [1 . 20 . 19]
< FAULTS
4 OCT 93
HW: RD-AA8010-02
< VTR COUNTER
DISK P/N: 211-120QAN005
< LRU PART NOs
TEST ALL
REPROGRAM SEBS
ABORT TEST ALL
ON
LAMP TEST
OFF
LIGHTS

GROUND
SERVICE BUS
PASS ENT &

SERV SYSTEM
ENTRY-L
B/C
CABIN
DEACT
On Ground
MASTER
TEST
LO
HI
ATTND - L
READING
ATTND - C
EMER LTG
NORMAL
NORMAL
ENT
TEST
OFF
HI
LO
ON
OFF
PREV
PAGE
PAX
BRIEF
VIDEO
PAX SERV
SYSTEM
MAINT
HELP
MAIN
MENU
LAMP
TEST
AFT
ENTRY-R
EMERG LIGHTS
FWD
ON
W
AFT
OFF
SEATS
FWD
LEFT ENTRY
CEILING
DA TA DIR
CALL
LTS
ON
D
OVH
ENTER TAINMENT
1 2 3
CONT
CANCL
CALL AND SERVICE

PASS ENT
SYST PWR
START
ON ANNCMT
READY
BRD MUSIC
VOLUME
PWR
1 2
CHANNEL
SELECT
FWD MSTR
CALL RESET
MAIN DOOR
UP
AFT MSTR
CALL RESET
MAIN DOOR
DOWN
NEXT
3
HI
OFF
3
4
RSV 1
5
8 6
PASS SERV
SYST PWR
RSV 2
ANNOUNCEMENT
FWD ATTENDANT PANEL
62332COA
LAMP TEST OPERATION

g62332co
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
FLIGHT DATA RECORDER
Table of Contents
Subchapter
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TESTING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AIDS REPORTING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Page
195
201
205
221
243
255
285
293
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
INTRODUCTION
g62332co
31.31 FLIGHT DATA RECORDER INTRODUCTION
FLIGHT DATA RECORDING

Purpose
The primary purpose of the flight data recorder system is to create an
historical record of airplane flight parameters as required by
government regulatory agencies. The information in the record is
used for analysis of flight conditions in the event of an accident.
Modern flight recorder systems are capable of compiling and
recording data on most of an airplanes components and systems.
This capability has created an expanded purpose for the flight data
recorder system. Additional AIDS (Aircraft Integrated Data System)
data are transmitted to ACARS (Arinc Communications And
Reporting System) for display and printout. AIDS data are used in
the analysis of systems performance.
System Description
The basic components of the flight data recorder system are the
Digital Flight Data Acquisition Unit (DFDAU), the Digital Flight
Data Recorder (DFDR), the Flight Recorder Control Panel (FRCP)
and the flight recorder accelerometer. Additional optional components
(for example the Optical Quick Access Recorder (OQAR) on the
767-300 aircraft) may be added to enhance AIDS operation.
M00084F2.PST
DIGITAL FLIGHT
DATA RECORDER
OQAR (767-300 ONLY)
ACARS MANAGEMENT
UNIT
DIGITAL FLIGHT
DATA ACQUISITION
UNIT
63131AAA
FLIGHT DATA RECORDING

g63131aa
31.31 FLIGHT DATA RECORDER INTRODUCTION
FLIGHT DATA RECORDER SYSTEM - GENERAL

Equipment
Documentary Data
The flight data recorder system consists of the following:
Documentary data, e.g. Flight number, are provided from the

ACARS interactive display unit (IDU) via the ACARS management
unit.
Digital flight data recorder (DFDR)

Digital flight data acquisition unit (DFDAU)
Flight recorder control panel
Accelerometer
Test connector with test plug
Copy recorder receptacle
System Testing
A test connector, in the cockpit, is provided for the purpose of
connecting ground support equipment that may be used to check the
playback.
System Overview
All flight data are received, processed and formatted in the digital
flight data acquisition unit and transmitted in digital format to the
digital flight data recorder for recording.
Data recorded in the DFDR can be transferred to a copy recorder via

the copy recorder connector.
Fault Annunciation
Selected data is printed out in the ACARS printer.

Current flight data that are transmitted to the DFDR are available for
monitoring at the test connector.
Input Signals
Fault indicators on the front panels of the DFDAU or the DFDR are
provided to indicate faults. The signals labeled maintenance flag,
DFDR status and DFDAU BITE are used to activate the respective
fault indicators.
An OFF light on the flight recorder control panel indicates a
power-off or a status-fault condition.
Input signals to the flight data recorder system consist of mandatory

and optional parameters. Mandatory parameters are required by the
regulatory agency. Optional parameters are selected by the airline.
They are used for AIDS purposes and are transmitted to ACARS for
display and printout in the flight compartment. Part of the optional
parameters are also recorded in the DFDR.
M0008510.PST
EICAS
DIGITAL
DFDAU BITE
DISCRETE
DFDR STATUS
INPUTS
ANALOG
FLIGHT DATA RECORDER

CONTROL PANEL
FLIGHT DATA
ACCELERATION
SIGNALS
PLAYBACK DATA
MAINTENANCE FLAG
3 AXIS
ACCELEROMETER
DIGITAL FLIGHT DATA

RECORDER
DIGITAL FLIGHT DATA

ACQUISITION UNIT
TEST CONNECTOR
AND TEST PLUG
ARINC
COMMUNICATION
AND REPORTING
SYSTEM
HIGH SPEED COPY

COPY RECORDER
CONNECTOR
63131BAA
FLIGHT DATA RECORDER SYSTEM - GENERAL

g63131ba
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
COMPONENT LOCATIONS
g63131ba
31.31 FLIGHT DATA RECORDER COMPONENT LOCATIONS
FLIGHT DATA RECORDER SYSTEM COMPONENT LOCATIONS

Flight Deck
Flight Recorder Control Relay (right)

Flight Recorder EFIS Input Switching Relay
The following circuit breakers are located on P11:

FLT REC SENSOR(-200 A/C) or AIDS SENSOR(-300 A/C) at
postion J6
FLT REC AC at position J7
FLT REC DC at position J8
Located on the Aft Electronics Panel (P8) are:
ACARS Interactive Display Unit
ACARS Printer
Located at the Right Side Panel (P61) are:
Flight Recorder Control Panel
Test Connector
Voice and Flight Recorder Rack Assembly (E7)

Located at the E7 rack are:
Digital Flight Data Recorder
Copy Recorder Receptacle
Left Wheel Well

The three axis accelerometer for the Flight Data Recorder System is
located on the keel beam in the Left hand Wheel Well.

Located on the E2-3 rack are:
Digital Flight Data Acquisition Unit
DFDAU Coding and Airplane Identification Shorting Receptacle
(behind DFDAU)
Located in the Left Miscellaneous Equipment Panel (P36) are:
Flight Recorder Control Relay (left)
DFDAU Bite Relay
Located in the Right Miscellaneous Equipment Panel (P37) are:
M0008559.PST
OVERHEAD CIRCUIT BREAKER PANEL (P11)

FLIGHT RECORDER AC CB
FLIGHT RECORDER DC CB
FLT REC SENSOR CB(-200 A/C)
AIDS SENSOR CB(-300 A/C)
VOICE RECORDER (REF)
FLIGHT RECORDER
AFT ELECTRONICS PANEL (P8)
ACARS
INTERACTIVE DISPLAY UNIT
COPY RECORDER
RECEPTACLE
ACARS PRINTER
RIGHT SIDE PANEL (P61)

TEST CONNECTOR (IN RH
LOWER BOOKCASE)
FLIGHT RECORDER CONTROL
PANEL
FLIGHT COMPARTMENT
FWD
OUTBD
VOICE & FLIGHT RECORDER RACK ASSEMBLY (E7)

RIGHT MISCELLANEOUS ELECTRONIC
FLIGHT RECORDER CONTROL RELAY RIGHT
FLIGHT RECORDER EFIS INPUT
SWITCHING RELAY
RACK E2-3
DIGITAL FLIGHT DATA
ACQUISITION UNIT
DFDAU CODING & A/P IDENT
SHORTING RECEPTACLE
(BEHIND DFDAU)
LEFT WHEEL WELL

THREE-AXIS
ACCELEROMETER
LEFT MISC ELECTRONIC

FLIGHT RECORDER
CONTROL RELAY (LEFT)
DFDAU BITE RELAY
63131ACA
FLIGHT DATA RECORDER SYSTEM COMPONENT

LOCATIONS
g63131ac
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
INTERFACE
g63131ac
31.31 FLIGHT DATA RECORDER INTERFACE
FLIGHT DATA RECORDER SYSTEM - BLOCK DIAGRAM

General
The graphic shows a block diagram of the Flight Data Recorder
System. System interface will be described in the following subjects.
M00089C0.PST
FLT REC
ON
115V AC
L BUS
ON
NORM
TEST
115V AC UNSWITHED
OFF
DATA CONTROL 1 & 2
NORM
FLT REC
AC CB
PLA YBACK
TEST
DFDAU BITE
P11-2 CIRCUIT BREAKER PNL ASSY
R267 (E2-3)
DFDR STATUS
FLT DATA REC
FLT REC CONT PNL (P61)
FLT DATA ACQ
TEST
PLUG
TEST
CONNECT OR (P61)
BITE OUT
ENG CUT OFF
FLT DATA REC

DFDR STATUS
L FLT RCDR CONT RLY (P36)

ENG CUT OFF
ENG RUN
R FLT RCDR CONT RLY (P37)
GND
MAINTENANCE FLAG
L EICAS COMPUTR
ENG RUN
DFDR OUTPUT
DIGIT AL INPUT
DFDAU BITE
RELA Y (P36)
FLT DATA ACQ
PLAYBACK IN
FLT DATA REC
DFDR DATA IN
R EICAS COMPUTER
PLAYBACK
VALIDITY
TEST
PLAYBACK IN
PLAYBACK
115V AC
HIGH SPEED RETRIEV AL DATA
28V DC
TRACK DIRECTION
RETRIEV AL CONTROL
DFDR (E7)
SWITCHED 115V AC
UNSWITCHED 115V AC
COPY RECORDER RECEPT ACLE (E7)
28V DC
L BUS
AIR/GROUND
DISCRETE INPUT
FLT REC DC CB
AIR
L ENG
R ENG
SYS NO. 2 AIR/GND RLY (P37)
ADC
EFIS
ADC
EFIS
DATA
START DISCRETE
DATA IN
ADC AND EFIS SWITCHING

ARINC 429 DATA IN
EICAS DA TA IN
EICAS DATA
ARINC 429 DATA SOURCES
DISCRETE INPUTS
EICAS SWITCHING
IDU DATA IN
IDU DATA OUT
EVENT MARKER IN
ACARS IDU (P8)
IDU POWER, DA TA,

CONTROL & STATUS
INTERF ACE
PRINTER DA TA,
CONTROL, & STATUS
INTERF ACE
DISCRETE DATA SOURCES
1
ACARS PRINTER
28V AC
L BUS
ACARS
DATA
OUT
ACARS MU (E2 - 5)
SYNCHRO INPUTS
AIDS SENSOR CB
ACARS
DATA
IN
SYNCHRO DATA SOURCES
NOMEMCLATURE FOR THIS CIRCUIT BREAKER

ON 767-300 A/C IS "FLT REC SENSOR"
THREE-AXIS ACCELEROMETER
(LEFT WHEEL WELL)
28V DC
VER T.
LONG.
LAT.
ACCELERA TION
DFDAU (E2--3)
63131AYA
FLIGHT DATA RECORDER SYSTEM - BLOCK DIAGRAM

g63131ay
SIGNAL FLOW
Flight Data Inputs
High-speed Data Retrieval
The Digital Flight Data Acquisition Unit (DFDAU) receives ARINC

429, synchro, analog, and discrete signals. Details of these inputs
will be discussed later.
Data recorded in the DFDR can be transferred to a copy recorder via

the Copy Recorder connector or via a front panel connector on the
Sundstrand DFDR. The DFDAU is enabled for high-speed retrieval
by control data lines via the connector.
Request for AIDS reports is made through and displayed at the

ACARS Interactive Dispaly Unit. Documentary data such as Flight
number and crew IDs are inputted via the ACARS IDU if the
ACARS Management Unit is inoperative.
Processed flight data is stored in Digital Flight Data Recorder
(DFDR).
Low-speed Data Playback

Low-speed playback of currently received data or of injected tests
signals for troubleshooting can be achieved at the flight compartment
test connector or at the Copy Recorder connector at the E7 rack. The
data playback is transmitted from the Digital Flight Data Recorder to
the test connector over an internal jumper in the DFDAU. The
playback data is checked for integrity within the DFDAU.
AIDS Data Reports

Aircraft Integrated Data System reports are generated by the DFDAU
automatically in predetermined modes, upon manual request by the
flight crew, or an uplink request from the ground via ACARS.
These reports are queued to the ACARS Management Unit and can
be viewed at the ACARS Interactive Display Unit (IDU), hardcopied
via the ACARS Printer, or downlinked via the Centre VHF.
Fault Status
The status of both the DFDR and the DFDAU are annunciated by
lights on the front panel of the DFDAU as well as the OFF light on
the Flight Recorder Control Panel.
Normal DFDAU output to the DFDR can be monitored at test and

copy recorder connectors.
M00089D1.PST
DATA CONTROL 1 & 2

FLT REC
ON
NORM
TEST
PLAYBACK
OFF
DFDAU BITE
R267 (E2-3)
FLT REC CONT PNL (P61)
TEST TEST
PLUG CONNECT OR (P61)
BITE OUT
DFDR STATUS
MAINTENANCE FLAG
DIGITAL INPUT
DFDR OUTPUT
PLAYBACK IN
DFDR DATA IN
PLAYBACK
VALIDITY
TEST
PLAYBACK IN
PLAYBACK
HIGH SPEED RETRIEVAL DATA
TRACK DIRECTION
RETRIEV AL CONTROL
DFDR (E7)
COPY RECORDER RECEPT ACLE (E7)
DIGITAL AND
ANALOG DATA
IDU DATA IN
IDU DATA OUT
EVENT MARKER IN
ACARS IDU (P8)
IDU POWER, DA TA,

CONTROL & STATUS
INTERF ACE
PRINTER DA TA,
CONTROL, & STATUS
INTERF ACE
ACARS PRINTER
ACARS
DATA
IN
ACARS
DATA
OUT
ACARS MU (E2 - 5)
DFDAU (E2--3)
63131AZA
SIGNAL FLOW
g63131az
FLIGHT DATA RECORDER SYSTEM - POWER SWITCHING

Power-up
Test Connector Power
Operation of the flight data recorder system is fully automatic. The

system becomes operational by applying 115 volts ac, 400 Hz,
single-phase power and 28 volts dc power to the system.
Unswitched power is available at the test connector for ground

support equipment usage.
AIDS Sensor Power

Unswitched Power
Unswitched 115 volt ac power is routed from the FLT REC AC
circuit breaker to the DFDAU. Unswitched 28 volt dc power is
routed from the FLT REC DC circuit breaker to the DFDR.
Power for the dedicated AIDS sensors is provided by the FLT REC
SENSOR circuit breaker (767-300) or the AIDS SENSOR circuit
breaker (767-200) fed from the 28V AC L Bus.
Automatically Switched Power

Switched power for the DFDR originates from the 115 volt ac left
bus via the FLT REC AC circuit breaker and relays.
In normal operation, the flight recorder control panel power control
switch is in NORM (open). When the left or the right engine is
started, power is automatically routed through the flight recorder
control relays K163 and K164, respectively. When the airplane
becomes airborne, power also is routed through the closed air/ground
relay K213. This same switched power is also routed to the Copy
Recorder receptacle to facilitate copy recorder operation.
Manually Switched Power

Power may also be switched manually by placing the flight recorder
control panel power control switch to the ON (latched) or the
momentary TEST position.
M000873E.PST
28V DC
L BUS
J8
FLT REC
DC CB
28V AC
J6
L BUS -300 A/C - FLT REC
SENSOR CB
-200 A/C - AIDS
SENSOR CB
AIDS SENSORS
AC
ON
115V AC
L BUS
FLT REC
AC CB
NORM
POWER
CONT SW
P11 OVHD CB PNL
DIGITAL FLIGHT
DATA ACQUISITION
UNIT (E2-3)
J7
TEST
FLIGHT RECORDER
CONTROL PANEL (P61)
28V DC
TEST
PLUG
ENG CUTOFF
ENG START
TEST
CONNECTOR
(P61)
ENG RUN
L ENG START 2 RLY

ENG RUN
K163 L FLT RECORDER

CONTROL RELAY (P36)
28V DC
ENG CUTOFF
L FUEL/IGN CONT RLY
COPY RECORDER
RECEPTACLE
ENG RUN
AC
28V DC
DIGITAL FLIGHT
DATA RECORDER (E7)
ENG START
K164 R FLT RECORDER
CONTROL RELAY (P37)
R ENG START 2 RLY

ENG RUN
DC
28V DC
N/C
ALL OF THESE INPUTS COME

FROM THE BATTERY BUS
GND
AIR
R FUEL/IGN CONT RLY
K213 SYS NO. 2 AIR/GND

RELAY (P37)
63131ALA
FLIGHT DATA RECORDER SYSTEM - POWER SWITCHING

g63131al
DFDAU - ARINC 429 DITS INPUTS

Purpose
The purpose of the ARINC 429 DITS inputs is to transmit parameter
values and states. Data words, such as Total Fuel Quantity,
Computed airspeed, Magnetic Heading etc., define the specific
parameter values; whereas discrete words define one of two possible
states of given components or parameters, such as WING ANTI-ICE
ON or OFF, etc.
Flight Management Computer, Left

Fuel Quantity Processor Unit
EICAS, Left or Right
Inertial Reference Unit, Left
Control
The inputs from the Air Data Computers and the EFIS Symbol
generators are selected by the Captains ADC and the left EFI
instrument source select switches, respectively. The input from the
EICAS Computer is selected by the EICAS computer select knob on
the EICAS Display select Panel. In either case, the normal source is
the left unit and the source selection information is entered into the
DFDAU.
Inputs
Electronic Engine Control Units, Left and Right
Air Data Computers, Left or Right switched; Right ADC not
switched
Thrust Management Computer
Captains Clock
AFCS Mode Control Panel
Ground Proximity Warning Computer
EFIS Symbol Generator, Left or Centre
Flight Control Computer, Left
M0008A05.PST
ELECTRONIC ENGINE
CONTROL DATA
L ENG EEC (LEFT ENG)
RIGHT AIR DATA

COMPUTER DATA
R ENG EEC (RIGHT ENG)
THRUST MANAGEMENT
COMPUTER DATA
THRUST MANAGEMENT CMPTR (E1-3)
L AIR DATA CMPTR (E2-3)
AIR DATA COMPUTER DATA
NORM
R AIR DATA CMPTR (E1-3)
GREENWICH MEAN TIME
ALTN
CAPTAINS CLOCK (P1-3)

CAPTS ADC INSTR SOURCE
SELECT SWITCH (P1)
28V DC
L BUS
FLT REC DC
A
FLT REC ADC I/P SWITCHING
RELAY (P37)
TO EFIS INSTR
COMP UNIT (E1-4)
AFCS DATA
AFCS MODE CONTROL

PANEL
CIRCUIT BREAKER PNL (P11-2)
CAPT ADC INSTR SOURCE

SEL SW POSITION
GRD PROX MODES
GPWC (E1-5)
LEFT ELEX FLT INSTR SYS
SYM GEN (E1-2)
LEFT EFI INSTR SOURCE

SEL SW POSITION
EFIS DATA
CENTER ELEX FLT INSTR

SYS SYM GEN (E1-4)
LEFT FLIGHT CONTROL

COMPUTER DATA
NORM
ALTN
LEFT EFI INSTR SOURCE

SELECT (P1-1)
LEFT FLIGHT CONTROL

COMPUTER (E1-3)
FLT REC EFIS SWITCHING

RELAY (P37)
M134 LEFT FLIGHT

MANAGEMENT COMPUTER (E2-2)
EICAS COMPUTER SELECT
FUEL QTY
L EICAS COMPUTER (E8)

FUEL QTY PROC UNIT (E2-4)
EICAS DATA
LEFT
LEFT INERTIAL
REFERENCE UNIT DATA
AUTO
R EICAS COMPUTER (E8)
RIGHT
LEFT INERTIAL REFERENCE

UNIT (E1-6)
C
EICAS DISPLAY SELECT
PANEL (P9)
EICAS LOWER DISPLAY

SWITCHING (E8)
DIGITIAL FLIGHT DATA ACQUISITION

UNIT (E2-3)
28V DC
L BUS
DISPLAY SWITCHING
EICAS CB
63131AVA
P11-5 CIRCUIT BREAKER PNL
DFDAU - ARINC 429 DITS INPUTS

g63131av
DFDAU - DISCRETE INPUTS

Purpose
The purpose of discrete inputs is to transmit to the DFDAU one of
two possible states of designated components or parameters, such as
slats extended, or not extended, etc.
Instrument Source Select Switches

The input signals are : Normal or Alternate Left I.R.S. and Left
F.M.C. Instrument Source Select Switch positions.
Captains A.D.C., Left E.F.I.S. , and E.I.C.A.S. selection inputs are
shown on the A.R.I.N.C. 429 DITS input graphic.
Power
Power used for the generation of certain parameters is 115 Volts A.C.
from the Left Bus, and 28 Volts D.C. from the Left and Standby
Buses.
Inputs
The data sources listed below provide the following inputs:
Proximity Switch Electronics Unit

Position of individual Leading Edge Slats
The position of the individual Leading Edge Slats from their input
signals are:
All Slats fully extended = Logic 1. The output to the D.F.D.A.U.: All
Slats fully extended = ground, slats not extended = open.
Flight Recorder Control Relays, Left and Right.

All Leading Edge Slats fully extended
Input signal is a 115 Volt A.C. discrete Engine Cutoff, Left or
Right.
System #2 Air / Ground Relay

Input signal is In Flight or On the Ground mode.
Communication Transceivers
The input signals are: Keying event (PTT) from the Left, Centre and
Right V.H.F Transceivers, and from the Left and Right H.F
Transceivers.
If all Leading Edge Slats are fully extended the input signal will be a
Logic 1. The output to the D.F.D.A.U. will be that if any slats not in
transit = open.
Slats in disagreement with the handle position

If any of the Slats are in disagreement with the handle position the
input signal will be a Logic 0. If all of the Slats are not in transit the
Logic will =1. The output to the D.F.D.A.U. will be if any of the
slats not in transit = open.
M0008A29.PST
.
ENG CUTOFF
115V AC
L BUS
L ENG START / DISCRETE

FLT REC DC
ENG CUTOFF
FLT REC CONT RLT L (36)

P11-2 CB PNL
R ENG START / DISCRETE
FLT REC CONT RLT R (37)
28V DC
L BUS
GND
AIR / GND DISCRETE
FLT REC DC
AIR
P11-2 CB PNL
HI
SYS NO.2 AIR/GND

RELAY (P37)
HI / LO SELECTION DISCRETE
NOT KEYED
LO
77-00-02
R VHF KEYING
KEYED
NOT KEYED
RIGHT VHF COMM XCVR (E2-5)
L VHF KEYING
KEYED
NOT KEYED
LEFT VHF COMM XCVR
(E2-5)
C VHF KEYING (PROV)

KEYED
NOT KEYED
CENTER VHF COMM XCVR (PROV) (E2-5)
L HF COMM XCVR KEYING
KEYED
NOT KEYED
LEFT HF COMM XCVR (E2-6)
R HF COMM XCVR KEYING (PROV)
KEYED
RIGHT HF COMM XCVR
(PROV) (E2-6)
L IRS INSTR SOURCE SEL SW POSN

L OUTBOARD
SLATS
EXTENDED
=1
L INBOARD
SLATS
EXTENDED
=1
ALL SLATS
FULLY
EXTENDED
=1
LEFT IRS INSTR SOURCE

SELECT SWITCH (P1 - 1)
N
L FMC INSTR SOURCE SEL SW POSN
S2 LEFT FMC INSTR SOURCE

JT9D-7R4E ONLY
+12V DC
LE SLAT POSN
SLATS IN DISAGREEMENT WITH HANDLE POSN.
ANY SLATS IN TRANSIT = 0
ALL SLATS NOT IN TRANSIT = 1
28V DC
STBY BUS
POWER
SUPPLY
+12V DC
SLATS POSN
IND CB
P11-2 CF PNL
NOTES:
EFFECTIVITY VE
R OUTBOARD
SLATS
EXTENDED
=1
R INBOARD
SLATS
EXTENDED
=1
THE FOLLOWING SYSTEM SELECTION

INPUTS ARE SHOWN ON THE ARINC
429BITS INPUT GRAPHIC:
CAPT OR F/O ADC
L OR C EFIS SYMB GEN
L OR R EICAS COMP
ALL SLATS
PARTIALLY
EXTENDED
=1
061
062
063
x
x
064
x
065
066
B 11
C 11
13
D1421
+12V DC
A9
A / C TYPE
A 11
14
5
K 11
A / C IDENT
COMMON
D327D
ELEX UNIT PROX SWITCH (E1-2)

DFDAU (E2 - 3)
63131AWA

g63131aw

(Continued)
All Slats partially extended

The input signal with all slat partially extended will be Logic 1. The
output to the D.F.D.A.U. will be if all slats are partially extended =
ground; any Slats in transit: +12 Volts D.C.
Engine Vibration Monitor Unit

The input signal is the vibration filter selection. This is only
applicable to the JT9D-7R4E engine.
DFDAU Coding and A/C Identification Shorting

Receptacle
The input signals are from the Program Pins connected to a common
ground (pin K11), defining the airplane identification and airplane
type, as shown on the graphic.
M0008A29.PST
.
ENG CUTOFF
115V AC
L BUS
L ENG START / DISCRETE

FLT REC DC
ENG CUTOFF
FLT REC CONT RLT L (36)

P11-2 CB PNL
R ENG START / DISCRETE
FLT REC CONT RLT R (37)
28V DC
L BUS
GND
AIR / GND DISCRETE
FLT REC DC
AIR
P11-2 CB PNL
HI
SYS NO.2 AIR/GND

RELAY (P37)
HI / LO SELECTION DISCRETE
NOT KEYED
LO
77-00-02
R VHF KEYING
KEYED
NOT KEYED
RIGHT VHF COMM XCVR (E2-5)
L VHF KEYING
KEYED
NOT KEYED
LEFT VHF COMM XCVR
(E2-5)
C VHF KEYING (PROV)

KEYED
NOT KEYED
CENTER VHF COMM XCVR (PROV) (E2-5)
L HF COMM XCVR KEYING
KEYED
NOT KEYED
LEFT HF COMM XCVR (E2-6)
R HF COMM XCVR KEYING (PROV)
KEYED
RIGHT HF COMM XCVR
(PROV) (E2-6)
L IRS INSTR SOURCE SEL SW POSN

L OUTBOARD
SLATS
EXTENDED
=1
L INBOARD
SLATS
EXTENDED
=1
ALL SLATS
FULLY
EXTENDED
=1
LEFT IRS INSTR SOURCE

N
L FMC INSTR SOURCE SEL SW POSN
S2 LEFT FMC INSTR SOURCE

JT9D-7R4E ONLY
+12V DC
LE SLAT POSN
SLATS IN DISAGREEMENT WITH HANDLE POSN.
ANY SLATS IN TRANSIT = 0
ALL SLATS NOT IN TRANSIT = 1
28V DC
STBY BUS
POWER
SUPPLY
+12V DC
SLATS POSN
IND CB
P11-2 CF PNL
NOTES:
EFFECTIVITY VE
R OUTBOARD
SLATS
EXTENDED
=1
R INBOARD
SLATS
EXTENDED
=1
THE FOLLOWING SYSTEM SELECTION

INPUTS ARE SHOWN ON THE ARINC
429BITS INPUT GRAPHIC:
CAPT OR F/O ADC
L OR C EFIS SYMB GEN
L OR R EICAS COMP
ALL SLATS
PARTIALLY
EXTENDED
=1
061
062
063
x
x
064
x
065
066
B 11
C 11
13
D1421
+12V DC
A9
A / C TYPE
A 11
14
5
K 11
A / C IDENT
COMMON
D327D
ELEX UNIT PROX SWITCH (E1-2)

DFDAU (E2 - 3)
63131AWA

g63131aw
(Continued)
DFDAU - ANALOG INPUTS

Power
Power for the synchro signal sources is received from the 28 Volt
A.C. Left Bus. Synchro Excitation reference is from the 28 Volt A.C.
Left Bus via the R FLAP POS IND circuit breaker.
Power for the Flight Recorder Accelerometer is 28 Volts D.C. from
the D.F.D.A.U.
Inputs
The data sources listed below provide the following parameters:
Synchro Inputs
1. Rudder Pedal Position Transducer Rudder Pedal Position
2. Control Wheel Position Transducer Control Wheel Position
3. Control Column Position Transducer Control Column Position
4. Left Stabilizer Position module Horizontal Stabilizer Position
5. Flaps Position Indicator Left and Right Flap Position
Low Level D.C. Analog Inputs
1. Flight Recorder Accelerometer Vertical, Lateral, and
Longitudinal accelerations.
2. Flaps / Slats Electronics Unit Flap Handle Position
M0008A66.PST
.
H
FLT REC
SENSOR
CB
C CX
X
Y
Z
TS355 RUDDER PEDAL

POSN XDCR (ST A 191,
WL 192, LBL 28)
RUDDER PEDAL
POSITION
H
C CX
X
Y
Z
CONTROL WHEEL
POSITION
28V AC
L BUS
TS354 CONT WHEEL
POSN XDCR (STA 213,
WL 203, LBL 17)
H
C CX
X
Y
Z
CONTROL COLUMN
POSITION
TS353 CONT COLUMN

POSN XDCR (STA 178,
WL 202, LBL 16)
H
C CX
L STAB TRIM
POSN IND CB
H
L FLAP POSN
IND CB
28V AC
L TFR
BUS
C CX
R FLAP POSN
IND CB
P11 OVERHEAD CB PANEL
C CX
HORIZONTAL
STAB POSITION
M519 L STAB, POSN

XMTR MODULE (ST A
1733, WL 182, LBL 23)
X
Y
Z
LEFT FLAP
POSITION
L FLAP POSN IND

H
X
Y
Z
FROM K216
FLAPS/REF
TRANSFER RELA Y
X
Y
Z
RIGHT FLAP
POSITION
N15 FLAPS POSITION

INDICATOR (P3-1)
FLAP HANDLE POSN
N15 FLAPS POSITION

INDICATOR (P3-1)
FLAPS/SLATS
ELEX UNIT (E2-4)
SYNCHRO REF B
VERTICAL
ACCELERATION
LATERAL
LONGITUDINAL
28V DC
POWER SUPPLY
FLT RCDR ACCELEROMETER

(LEFT WHEEL WELL)
DIGITAL FLT DATA ACQ UNIT (E2-3)

63131AXA
DFDAU - ANALOG INPUTS

g63131ax
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
g63131ax
31.31 FLIGHT DATA RECORDER COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
DIGITAL FLIGHT DATA RECORDER (LOCKHEED)

Purpose
The purpose of the Digital Data Flight Recorder is to record on
magnetic tape the flight parameters received in digital format and to
have them available for retrieval in the shop, or on board for
maintenance analysis.
Physical Description/Features
Underwater Locator Beacon
An underwater locator beacon is mounted at the top portion of the
front panel. This beacon emits an ultrasonic acoustic output for 30
days upon immersion in either fresh or salt water.
Pull-out Handles
Unit Description
The Digital Flight Data Recorder consists of two major assemblies;
the tape deck assembly installed in the recorder protective housing
and the electronic assembly. The two major assemblies are joined to
form a single unit. The outside of the unit is in international orange,
with two bands of reflective tape.
Specifications
Size - 4 MCU
Weight - 25 pounds (11.3 kg)
Power requirements - 115V ac, 400Hz, single-phase, less than 20
watt in normal operation and less than 40 watts during high-speed
data retrieval.
Two fixed pull-out handles are provided for unit removal.
Hold-down
Two hold-down hooks engage with two hold-down fasteners to
secure the unit in its place on the shelf.
Mounting
The unit is mounted on a tray provided with vibration isolators.
Identification Plates
The identification plates are located on the front panel of the unit.
M0008664.PST
ELECTRONIC
SECTION
REFLECTIVE
TAPE
RECORDER
PROTECTIVE
HOUSING
UNDER WATER
LOCATOR BEACON
PULL-OUT
HANDLES
HOLD DOWN
HOOKS
IDENTIFICA TION PLATES

63131AHA
DIGITAL FLIGHT DATA RECORDER (LOCKHEED)

g63131ah
DIGITAL FLIGHT DATA RECORDER (SUNDSTRAND)

Purpose
The purpose of the DFDR is to store on magnetic tape, the flight
parameters, and to have them available for onboard or for in-shop
data retrieval.
Case Features
The outer case of the unit is made of stainless steel. The tape
transport is fully contained within a crash proof thermal enclosure
which supports the external drive motor. The outside of the unit is in
international orange with black lettering on the left and the right
sides, and strips of reflective tape on the top and the sides.

Identification plate
An identification plate is located on the front panel of the unit.
Shockmounts
Shockmounts provide vibration isolation of the crashproof
container.
A plug covers a connector for an optional airspeed/altitude
transducer.
Specifications
Front Panel Features
Fault indicator
A yellow LED labeled FAIL indicates digital flight data recorder
fault.
Copy recorder connector
A copy recorder connector is used for high-speed data retrieval
onboard or in the shop.
Size
4 MCU
Weight
28 lbs
Max Power requirements
115 volts, 400 Hz, single phase, 35w.
Pull-out handle
A fixed pull-out handle is provided for unit removal.
Hold-Down
M0008627.PST
REFLECTIVE TAPE
SHOCK MOUNT (TYP)
PLUG
AIRPLANE
INTERFACE
CONNECTOR
(IN THE REAR)
UNDERWATER
LOCATOR BEACON
COPY RECORDER
CONNECTOR
PULLOUT HANDLE
FAULT INDICATOR
IDENTIFICATION PLATE
HOLD DOWN HOOK (TYP)
63131AGA

g63131ag

(Continued)
Magnetic Tape
Data are recorded sequentially on 8 successive tracks. The capacity is
25 hours of data. The tape need not be replaced when fully used. To
accommodate fresh data, old data are erased prior to recording on the
same tape.
Underwater Locator Beacon

An underwater locator beacon is mounted at the front panel. This
beacon emits an ultrasonic acoustic output upon immersion in either
fresh or salt water.
Copy Recorder Connector

The Sundstrand Digital Flight Data Recorder has a copy recorder
connector on its front panel for high-speed data retrieval, however,
only a Sundstrand copy recorder can be used.
M0008627.PST
REFLECTIVE TAPE
SHOCK MOUNT (TYP)
PLUG
AIRPLANE
INTERFACE
CONNECTOR
(IN THE REAR)
UNDERWATER
LOCATOR BEACON
COPY RECORDER
CONNECTOR
PULLOUT HANDLE
FAULT INDICATOR
IDENTIFICATION PLATE
HOLD DOWN HOOK (TYP)
63131AGA

g63131ag
(Continued)
SOLID STATE FLIGHT DATA RECORDER

Flight Data Recording Function
Crash Survivability
The solid-state flight data recorder (SSFDR) is an all solid-state

implementation of a crash-survivable flight data recorder. The unit
eliminates all moving parts and uses solid-state memory as the
recording medium. The SSFDR is designed with three shop
replaceable units (SRUs): memory unit, power supply, and interface
and control assembly. The memory allows the last 25 hours of flight
data to be stored at an input rate of 64 words per second, or
optionally at 128 words per second. An underwater locator beacon
(ULB) is available as an option.
Impact - 3400G in 6.5 milliseconds. Equivalent to stopping from 360

mph/580 kph in 16 inches/.41 metres.
Performance Characteristics
Data Capacity - 64/128 words per second.
Down-load Time - Under 5 minutes for the 64words-per-second
model. Under 10 minutes for the 128words-per-second model.
Recording Medium Solid-state memory.
Fire - 110 C for 30 minutes. 260 C for 10 hours.

Static Crush - 5000 lbs/2272 kg force, on all axes, for 5 minutes.
Penetration Resistance - 500 lbs/227 kg, dropped from 10 feet/304
cm, impacting on a .25 inch/.63 cm diameter pin.
Deep Water - 20,000 feet/6100 metres, for 30 days. Salt Water
Corrosion - 9 feet/3,7 metres for 30 days.
BITE Indicator
The flight recorder has a yellow BITE indicator that comes on when
internal faults are detected. Recording continues if at all possible, but
may be unreliable.
Physical Characteristics
Weight - 18 lbs/8.18 kg.
Cooling - Ambient air.
Power - 115 volts ac, 400 Hz.
M0013B38.PST
AIRPLANE
INTERFACE
CONNECTOR
(IN BLACK)
NAMEPLATE
UNDERWATER
LOCATING
DEVICE
1/2 ATR LONG

(ARINC 600)
ATE / COMPUTER
CONNECTOR
BITE INDICATOR
G63131BG
SOLID STATE FLIGHT DATA RECORDER

g63131bg
DIGITAL FLIGHT DATA ACQUISITION UNIT

Purpose
The purpose of the digital flight data acquisition unit is to receive the
flight parameters to be recorded, to process the input signals, and to
transmit the output in digital format for mandatory DFDR recording
and AIDS functions.
Fault Display
A three-digit fault display labeled STATUS is used for coded fault
readout. Up to 16 unique failure codes can be sequentially displayed.
To initiate the readout, the READ pushbutton switch must be
depressed. Each failure code is displayed for four seconds. Details
are described later.
The DFDR FAIL light indicates a DFDR fault.
ATE Connector
An ATE connector is provided for testing purposes. The ATE
connector is covered by a protective cap.
Hold-Down
Pull-Out Handle
READ Pushbutton Switch
A fixed pull-out handle is provided for unit removal.
The READ pushbutton switch is used to initiate the fault display.

After depressing the switch, it must be held until the conclusion of
the readout.
Specifications
Fault Indicators
Size:
6 MCU
Weight:
Three yellow fault lights are provided to indicate faults.

The DFDAU FAIL light indicates a power supply fault, an output
data fault or failure of EPROM No. 1.
The DFDAU CAUTION light indicates a digital input circuit fault,
an analog input circuit fault, or a failure of EPROM No. 2.
20 pounds
Power requirements:
115 volts, 400 Hz, single-phase.
M00085E6.PST
FAULT
DISPLAY
WINDOW
READ
SWITCH
DFDAU
FAIL LIGHT
DFDAU
CAUTION
LIGHT
DFDR FAIL
LIGHT
ATE
CONNECTOR
PULL-OUT
HANDLE
TELEDYNE
2227000
HOLD DOWN
HOOK (TYP)
63131AFA

g63131af

(Continued)
Cooling
Forced-air cooling is required.
Electrostatic Sensitivity
The digital flight data acquisition unit contains electrostatically
sensitive parts and must be handled accordingly.
M00085E6.PST
FAULT
DISPLAY
WINDOW
READ
SWITCH
DFDAU
FAIL LIGHT
DFDAU
CAUTION
LIGHT
DFDR FAIL
LIGHT
ATE
CONNECTOR
PULL-OUT
HANDLE
TELEDYNE
2227000
HOLD DOWN
HOOK (TYP)
63131AFA

g63131af
(Continued)
DIGITAL FLIGHT DATA ACQUISITION UNIT (WITH QAR)

Purpose
The digital flight data acquisition unit (DFDAU) contains circuitry to
acquire, condition, and multiplex airplane inputs and convert them
into the appropriate digital format for the flight data recorder (FDR).
DMP CAUTION - shows a failure of any of the DMP internal

flash memory locations
DFDR FAIL light - amber light shows a flight recorder fault
Front panel select switches to control the 16digit display.
Switches are ESC, , +, ENT and EJECT.
NOTE: This DFDAU performs the functions of the DFDAU,

Aircraft Condition Monitoring System (ACMS) Data
Management Unit and Quick Access Recorder (QAR).
Features
An optical disk drive is on the front of the DFDAU. To access the
disk drive, open a door on the right side. The drive unit has a hinge
on the left side so that it opens outward to access the drive door.
Use the drive to upload software programs to the processors in the
DFDAU, or to load ACMS reports to a blank, preformatted optical
disk. The kind and format of the reports depends upon the software
in the DFDAU. The airline chooses the software it wants to use.
The front of the unit contains these features:
Fault display - a 16digit display of failure codes and software
part numbers
DFDAU FAIL light - amber light shows a fault in the power
supply, loss of mandatory input data, or failure of the data
acquisition processor (DAP)
DFDAU CAUTION light - amber light shows a loss of
non-mandatory input data or a failure of the data management
processor (DMP)
8004ac75
16-DIGIT
LED DISPLAY
DFDAU
FAIL LED
DFDAU
CAUTION
LED
DFDR FAIL
LED
FRONT PANEL
SELECT SWITCHES
OPTICAL DRIVE ACCESS
G63131BL
DIGITAL FLIGHT DATA ACQUISITION UNIT (WITH QAR)

g63131bl
FLIGHT RECORDER CONTROL PANEL

Purpose
Allows the flight crew to turn the flight recorder system on or off,
test, and monitor the system.
Flight Recorder Power Control Switch (Function

Switch)
NORM Position (lever locked) - Causes power to be applied
automatically to the flight recorder when the airplane is off the
ground or one of the engines is running.
ON Position (latched) - Provides power to the flight recorder by
bypassing the automatic power on features.
TEST Position - The momentary test position applies power to the
flight recorder by bypassing the automatic features.
Flight Recorder OFF Light

This light illuminates white in order to indicate a fault in the flight
recorder system or loss of power to the system.
M0008584.PST
FLIGHT RECORDER SYSTEM

POWER CONTROL SWITCH
FLT RCDR
SERV INTPH
ON
ON
NORM
OFF
TEST
OFF
w
FLIGHT RECORDER
OFF LIGHT (WHITE)
63131ADA

g63131ad
FLIGHT RECORDER ACCELEROMETER

Purpose
Electrostatic Sensitivity
The flight recorder accelerometer is a three-axis accelerometer which

measures acceleration along the vertical, lateral, and longitudinal
axes of the airplane. The data is supplied to the digital flight data
acquisition unit.
The flight recorder accelerometer is an electrostatically sensitive

device.
Location
The accelerometer is located in the left wheel well.
Construction
The accelerometer is of the seismic-type with capacitive pickoff. It is
pressure sealed, and capable of withstanding accelerations up to ten
times the normal operating ranges. It does not require calibration or
any scheduled maintenance. It is repairable.
Performance Characteristics
The performance characteristics of the accelerometer are stated in the
graphic.
Power
The accelerometer receives 28 volts dc from the DFDAU.
M00085AF.PST
ELECTROSTATIC
SENSITIVITY
DECAL
UP
FWD
ELECTRICAL
CONNECTOR
PICTORIAL VIEW
AXIS
VERTICAL
LATERAL
LONGITUDINAL
DIRECTION OF
ACCELERATION
INPUT
OUTPUT
NULL
OUTPUT
AT 75 F
UPWARD
+6g
5000 mV
+1800 mV
DOWNWARD
-3g
200 mV
25 mV DC
RIGHT
+1g
5000 mV
+2600 MV
LEFT
-1g
200 mV
25 mV DC
FORWARD
+1g
5000 mV
+2600 mV
AFT
-1g
200 mV
25 mV DC
PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS
63131AEA
FLIGHT RECORDER ACCELEROMETER

g63131ae
ACARS PRINTER
Purpose
Printer Busy Light
The ACARS printer prints out reports of selected data. The printing
function is controlled by the ACARS Management Unit. The printout
is initiated automatically in certain system modes, or manually from
the ACARS IDU.
The amber light labeled PTR BUSY illuminates steady when the
printer is printing. This indicator flashes after the paper has advanced
three lines beyond the tear-off edge. When the ALERT RESET
pushbutton is pushed, the indicator stops flashing.
Paper Advance Pushbutton
Power
The pushbutton labeled PPR ADV advances paper as long as the

pushbutton is pressed.
The printer operates from 115 volt ac, 400 Hz, single-phase received
from the ACARS PRINT circuit breaker.
Self-Test Pushbutton
Actuation of the pushbutton labeled SELF TEST causes the printer to
print a test pattern.
Power ON Light
The green PWR ON indicator illuminates when power is applied.
ALERT RESET Switch

The ALERT RESET pushbutton switch is used to reset the visual
alert function (ref. next paragraph).
M00086F4.PST
POWER-ON LIGHT
SELF-TEST
(GREEN)
PUSHBUTTON
ALERT RESET
PAPER ADVANCE
PUSHBUTTON
PPR
SELF
PWR
ALERT
PTR
ADV
TEST
ON
RESET
BUSY
PRINTER BUSY
LIGHT (AMBER)
CLAMP NUT
PRINTER DOOR
PAPER OUTPUT
TELDYNE
2228472-3
SLOT
63131AKA
ACARS PRINTER
g63131ak
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
SYSTEM PRINCIPLES
g63131ak
31.31 FLIGHT DATA RECORDER SYSTEM PRINCIPLES
DFDAU OUTPUT DATA FORMAT

Purpose
The purpose of standardized data formats is to provide uniformity in
data transmission to flight recorders, AIDS recorders, printers and
test equipment.
Output Data Stream

The AIDS data output and the output to the DFDR consists of a
continuous stream of consecutive four-second frames. Each frame is
divided into four subframes of one-second duration each. A subframe
is made up of 64 12-bit words. The first word in each subframe is a
sync word, the rest are data words. Data words contain 10-bit, 11-bit,
or 12-bit data fields, with discrete bits to make up the balance. The
total number of bits in a subframe is 768. Each parameter is
transmitted at least once every frame.
Bipolar-Return-To-Zero (Bipolar RZ) Code - ARINC 429

In the bipolar RZ code, a 1 bit is indicated by a +5 volt level, and
a 0 bit by a -5 volt level. The level returns to zero in the second
half of each bit.
Harvard Biphase Format - ARINC 573

In the Harvard biphase format, each bit changes state at its trailing
edge - either from high to zero, or from zero to high - independently
of its value.
A 1 bit is indicated by a mid-bit change of state. This mid-bit
change of state may be from high to zero, or from zero to high,
depending on the state before the transition.
A 0 bit is indicated by no mid-bit change of state.
Flight Data Recorder System Codes

Non-Return-To-Zero Code - DME
In the non-return-to-zero code, a 1 bit is indicated by a 5 volts
level, whereas a 0 bit is indicated by a zero level. A clock
reference is required, meaning that an extra wire is needed to carry
the clock signal.
M0008CAB.PST
ONE FRAME, 4 SECONDS DURATION

SUBFRAME 1
1 SECOND
SUBFRAME 2
1 SECOND
BIT NO.
10 11 12
SUBFRAME 4
1 SECOND
SUBFRAME 3
1 SECOND
NON RETURN TO - ZERO (NZR)

CLOCK
(ATE INTERFACE)
+5
0
WAVEFORM
EACH SUBFRAME
CONSISTS OF 64 WORDS,
SUBFRAME 1 IS SHOWN.
WORD
NO. 1
FIRST WORD OF EACH

SUBFRAME = SYNC WORD
SYNC WORD OF SUBFRAME
NO. 1 IS SHOWN
BITS
NO.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1112
BITS
VALUE
1 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0
OCTAL
VALUE
BIPOLAR
RETURN TO - ZERO
(BIPOLAR RZ)
(AIDS OUTPUT)
ANY ONE OF WORDS

2 THROUGH 63 OF EACH
SUBFRAME (WORD NO. 45
IS SHOWN AS EXAMPLE)
BITS NO.
10 11 12
LABEL
1107
2670
5107
6670
-5
12 - BIT DATA
FIELD WORD
1
BITS NO.
DATA FIELD
10 11 12
11 - BIT DATA
FIELD WORD
10 11 12
10 - BIT DATA
FIELD WORD
SYNC WORDS
SUB FRAME
+5
BITS NO.
BITS NO.
HARVARD
BI - PHASE
(DATA OUTPUT
TO DFDR)
+5
DATA FIELD
BINARY VALUE
DATA FIELD
10 11 12
DISCRETE
WORD
OCTAL VALUE
FLIGHT DATA RECORDER SYSTEM CODES
D = DISCRETE
EACH SUBFRAME WORD CONSISTS OF 12 BITS.

BIT 1 = LEAST SIGNIFICANT BIT
BIT 12 = MOST SIGNIFICANT BIT
LEAST SIGNIFICANT BIT
MOST SIGNIFICANT BIT
OUTPUT DATA STREAM

( AIDS OUTPUT AND OUTPUT TO DFDR )
G63131BB
DFDAU OUTPUT DATA FORMAT

g63131bb
FLIGHT RECORDER SUPERFRAME

Output
Documentary data and DFDAU generated data words are transmitted
using the superframe concept. A superframe consists of all the words
No. 64 of 16 consecutive frames in BCD format. The information
transmitted over a superframe includes failure codes (system status),
documentary data, engine data and calibration voltages used in
analog input channels.
Superframe format and details are shown on the graphic.
M0008CCC.PST
FRAME NO. 0
FRAME NO. 1
FRAME NO. 15
SF 1
SF 2
SF 3
SF 4
SF 1
SF 2
SF 3
SF 4
SF 1
SF 2
SF 3
FRAME NO. 16
SF 4
FRAME NO. 17
SF 1
SF 2
SF 3
SF 4
SF 1
SF 2
SF 3
SF 4
LEGEND:
DATA
STREAM
FROM DFDAU
TO DFDR
SF MEANS SUBFRAME NO.

A MEANS WORD NO. 64
WORD NO. 64
OF SUBFRAME
NO. 1
FRAME
COUNT
NO. 0
FRAME
COUNT
NO. 1
FRAME
COUNT
NO. 15
FRAME
COUNT
NO. 16
FRAME
COUNT
NO. 17
WORD NO. 64
OF SUBFRAME
NO. 2
SYSTEM
STATUS
WORD
SYSTEM
STATUS
WORD
SYSTEM
STATUS
WORD
SYSTEM
STATUS
WORD
SYSTEM
STATUS
WORD
WORD NO. 64
OF SUBFRAME
NO. 3
DOCUMENTARY
DATA
WORD
DOCUMENTARY
DATA
WORD
DOCUMENTARY
DATA
WORD
DOCUMENTARY
DATA
WORD
DOCUMENTARY
DATA
WORD
WORD NO. 64
OF SUBFRAME
NO. 4
ENGINE
DATA AND
CAL. VOLT
ENGINE
DATA AND
CAL. VOLT
ENGINE
DATA AND
CAL. VOLT
ENGINE
DATA AND
CAL. VOLT
ENGINE
DATA AND
CAL. VOLT
FRAME NO. 0
FRAME NO. 15
FRAME NO. 1
SUPERFRAME NO. 1
1. SUPERFRAME
EACH SUPERFRAME IS MADE UP OF
16 CONSECUTIVE FRAMES.
SUPERFRAME NO. 1: WORDS NO. 64
FRAME NO. 16
FRAME NO. 17
SUPERFRAME NO. 2
2. DATA ASSIGNMENT
THE DATA ASSIGNMENT PER SUBFRAME OF EACH FRAME IS AS FOLLOWS:
SUBFRAME 1: FRAME COUNTS
ALL WORDS NO. 64 OF
WORD NO. 64 OF EACH SUBFRAME NO. 1 IS THE FRAME COUNT.

FRAME COUNTS 0, 16, 32... DESIGNATE THE BEGINNING OF A SUPERFRAME.
AFTER FRAME COUNT 4095 THE NUMBERING RESTARTS FROM 0.
OF FRAMES NO. 0 TO NO. 15;

OF FRAMES NO. 16 TO NO. 31;
OF FRAMES NO. 32 TO NO. 47, ETC.
SUBFRAME 2: SYSTEM STATUS WORD

WORD NO. 64 OF EACH SUBFRAME NO. 2 IS THE SYSTEM STATUS WORD.
THE SYSTEM STATUS WORD CONSISTS OF FAILURE CODES GENERATED BY THE DFDAU.
SUBFRAME 3: DOCUMENTARY DATA ( AS IN CHART BELOW ), AND

SUBFRAME 4: ENGINE DATA AND CALIBRATION VOLTAGES ( AS IN CHART BELOW )
FRAME COUNT
SUBFRAME 3.
DOCUMENTARY DATA
SUBFRAME 4.
ENGINE DATA - CAL.VOLT
DAY
MONTH
OIL
PRESS L
OIL
PRESS R
3
FLIGHT NO.
OIL
TEMP L
OIL
TEMP R
4
LEG NO.
OIL
QTY L
GROSS WEIGHT
OIL
QTY R
ENG VIB
IND L
10
LATITUDE
ENG VIB
IND R
N2 L
11
12
LONGITUDE
N2 R
APU
RPM
APU
EGT
13
AIRCRAFT
IDENT
NOT USED:
ALL ZEROS
GND REF
CAL
15
14
NOT USED:
ALL ZEROS
+5V DC
CAL
25V DC
CAL
63131BCA
FLIGHT RECORDER SUPERFRAME

g63131bc
DFDR - TAPE DECK ASSEMBLY (LOCKHEED)

Power
Power for the DFDR is 115volt ac from the 115 volt ac L Bus.
Operation
Two coaxial bi-directional reels are used in the tape transport. The
tape is driven from reel-to-reel by the type deck capstan coupled to a
reversible constant-speed motor. The motor is located in the
electronics assembly section. Tape speed in the recording mode is
0.37 inch/second, and during high-speed data retrieval - 11.8
inches/second.
Recording
The tape format is six-track bidirectional, with sequential track
switching. Reversal of tape motion takes place at end-of-tape, as
sensed by the end-of-tape sensors.
Playback
During playback, data is read from the tape by the respective
playback head. One head simultaneously reads all odd-numbered
tracks. When the motion is reversed, the other head then
simultaneously reads all even-numbered tracks.
M00086C6.PST
CAPSTAIN PULLEY
CAPSTAIN
RECORDER
HEADS
RECORD HEAD
PLAYBACK HEAD
PLAYBACK
HEADS
END OF TAPE
SENSOR
PLAIN
TAPE
GUIDE
END OF TAPE
SENSOR
ENLARGED VIEW
OF TAPE
REELS
TAPE PACKS
8
6
4
2
5
3
1
A
MAGNETIC
TAPE
PLAIN GUIDE
TILTED GUIDE
INTERNAL VIEW OF TAPE DECK
TYPICAL SEQUENCE;
DIRECTION OF TAPE
MOTION-A.
TRACKS RECORDING1, 3 OR 5.
ACTIVE HEADS AND
END OF TAPE-A.
END OF TAPE
SENSOR B
END OF TAPE
SENSOR A
TILTED
TAPE
GUIDE
RECORD
HEADS
PLAYBACK
HEADS
TRACK SEQUENCE
(FIGURATIVE REPRESENTATION)
G63131BH
DFDR - TAPE DECK ASSEMBLY (LOCKHEED)

g63131bh
DFDR - CRASHPROOF THERMAL ENCLOSURE AND TAPE TRANSPORT (SUNDSTRAND)

Purpose
The purpose of the crashproof thermal enclosure is to provide to the
tape transport protection from shock, fire, corrosion from sea water,
etc., thus increasing the survivability of recorded flight data.
Crashproof Thermal Enclosure

The crashproof thermal enclosure fully contains the tape transport. To
avoid heating to the thermal enclosure, the drive motor is not
contained in the enclosure but is contained in a housing mounted
externally.
Magnetic Tape
Physical Characteristics
The magnetic tape is made of Kapton (similar to mylar, except for
higher thermal properties). The tape is 1/4 inch wide and 450 feet
long. The tape is self-lubricating.
Tape Format
The tape format is 8-track bi-directional with sequential track
switching. The odd-numbered tracks are recorded when the tape
moves in one direction, and even-numbered tracks are recorded in
the other direction.
Tape Transport
The tape transport uses two coplanar reels, driven by an elastomer
belt which drives the tape packs at their periphery. This belt is driven
by a pulley assembly that receives its drive from the drive motor via
the motor drive belt.
Drive Motor
The magnetic tape is driven by a reversible stepper motor, located
outside the crashproof thermal enclosure, at a rate of 700
steps/second. A motor drive belt provides the drive to the belt pulley
drive assembly in the crashproof thermal enclosure. The motor drive
belt passes through a hole in the wall of the enclosure. The hole is
lined with an intumescent feed-thru which chars and plugs the hole
in the event of fire.
Recording and Playback

Two four-channel read/write heads are provided for recording and
playback when in the write mode, one read/write head is enabled
when the tape moves in one direction and writes the odd/numbered
tracks. When the tape direction is reversed, the other read/write head
is enabled and writes the even-numbered tracks. The odd and the
even-numbered tracks are interleaved and produce eight sequential
tracks of recording. Data is written at a rate of 11.4 kilobits/second.
In the playback mode, the respective read/write head is enabled for
playback.
M0008691.PST
1
3
STEPPER MOTOR
HOUSING
8
TAPE TRACKS AND
DIRECTION OF MOTION
STEPPER
MOTOR
MOTOR DRIVE BELT
INTUMESCENT
PLUG
MAGNETIC TAPE
EOT/BOT
TAPE
PACK
READ/WRITE HEAD
ARMOR
SHELL
ELASTOMER
BELT
ERASE HEAD
MIN-K FIRE
INSULATION
CRASHPROOF
CONTAINER
BELT PULLEY
DRIVE ASSEMBLY
ERASE HEAD
FIBERGLASS
LINER
BELT IDLER
(TYP)
READ/WRITE HEAD
TAPE PACK
GASKET
EOT/BOT
TOP VIEW
SECTION SIDE VEIW
(TOP HALF REMOVED FOR CLARITY)
63131AIA
DFDR - CRASHPROOF THERMAL ENCLOSURE AND TAPE

TRANSPORT (SUNDSTRAND)
g63131ai
DFDR - CRASHPROOF THERMAL ENCLOSURE AND TAPE TRANSPORT (SUNDSTRAND)

(Continued)
Erasing
Before writing fresh data, old data are erased on the track engaged.
Two erase heads are provided for this purpose. Each erase head
sequentially erases four channels and is paired with the respective
read/write head.
Tape Motion
The tape has a recording capacity of 25 hours. A data block of 768
bits is recorded every second. The tape speed is approximately 0.48
ips during recording, and approximately 5 ips continuously during
data retrieval. Optical Beginning-of-tape (BOT) and end-of-tape (
EOT) sensors are provided to reverse direction of motion and to
switch to the next track.
M0008691.PST
1
3
STEPPER MOTOR
HOUSING
8
TAPE TRACKS AND
DIRECTION OF MOTION
STEPPER
MOTOR
MOTOR DRIVE BELT
INTUMESCENT
PLUG
MAGNETIC TAPE
EOT/BOT
TAPE
PACK
READ/WRITE HEAD
ARMOR
SHELL
ELASTOMER
BELT
ERASE HEAD
MIN-K FIRE
INSULATION
CRASHPROOF
CONTAINER
BELT PULLEY
DRIVE ASSEMBLY
ERASE HEAD
FIBERGLASS
LINER
BELT IDLER
(TYP)
READ/WRITE HEAD
TAPE PACK
GASKET
EOT/BOT
TOP VIEW
SECTION SIDE VEIW
(TOP HALF REMOVED FOR CLARITY)
63131AIA
DFDR - CRASHPROOF THERMAL ENCLOSURE AND TAPE

TRANSPORT (SUNDSTRAND)
g63131ai
(Continued)
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS
g63131ai
31.31 FLIGHT DATA RECORDER SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS
FLIGHT RECORDER ACCELEROMETER-SCHEMATIC

Operation
Each of the three accelerometer outputs is generated by an individual
circuit assembly. The three circuit assemblies are similar. Each
assembly consists of a seismic pendulum and a capacitive pickoff.
During acceleration, the seismic pendulum between two capacitive
plates is displaced. The capacitive pickoff plates form a portion of an
oscillator driven bridge circuit. They sense the pendulum
displacement and send an error signal into an amplifier which injects
a current into a torquer coil. This coil provides the force required to
balance the pendulum. The restoring current provides a voltage
output to the digital flight data acquisition unit that is proportional to
the sensed acceleration.
CAUTION
The flight recorder accelerometer is an electrostatically
sensitive device and must be handled according to
maintenance manual practices 20-41-01.
M0008CE0.PST
LOAD RESISTOR
+ 15V DC
DC TO DC
- 15V DC
CONVERTER
28V DC IN
(FROM DFDAU)
VERTICAL
ACCLERATION
OUT
PIVOT
1
1
1
FIELD CREATED BY PERMANENT MAGNET
SEISMIC PENDULUM WITH TORQUER COIL
CAPACITIVE PICK-OFF PLATES
OSCILLATOR
&
AMPL
BRIDGE CIRCUIT
VERTICAL SENSE
LONGITUDINAL SENSE
(INTERNALS SAME AS ABOVE)
LATERAL SENSE
(INTERNALS SAME AS ABOVE)
LONGITUDINAL
ACCLERATION
OUT
LATERAL
ACCLERATION
OUT
63131BEA
FLIGHT RECORDER ACCELEROMETER-SCHEMATIC

g63131be
DIGITAL FLIGHT DATA RECORDER FUNCTIONAL DIAGRAM (LOCKHEED)

Power
Tape Track Selection
An internal power supply generates all required DC voltages. It

receives 115 volt AC single-phase from the flight recorder relays or
from the flight recorder control panel power control switch.
Selection of the track to be recorded is achieved by logic circuits in

the track control circuit. A non-volatile memory consisting of a
solid-state latch remembers the active track so that no discontinuity
occurs during power off.
28 volt DC power required for the DFDR status discrete is received

from the 28 volt DC left bus, via the DC FLT RCDR circuit breaker.
Low-Speed Playback
Recording
The received flight data first are fed through the line receiver where
most of the noise present is eliminated. Then in the signal processor
the data signals are converted to current pulses to drive the record
heads. These current pulses are routed through the closed switch S4
first to the head current monitor, then to the track control circuit, and
finally to the record heads.
Only one track out of six is recorded at any one time. Consequently,
the output of the one corresponding preamplifier circuit only is
needed for low-speed monitoring playback. The selected playback
signal is transmitted to the test connector in the flight compartment
and to the copy recorder connector next to the digital flight data
recorder.
High-Speed Data Retrieval

Data Playback and Retrieval
The recorded data are read by the playback heads, and fed into the
monitor switching circuit after amplification in the preamplifiers.
There is one preamplifier circuit for each tape track. The monitor
switching circuit selects input(s) from the proper tape track(s) and
routes the signals to the respective output amplifiers.
High-speed data retrieval is initiated by an external signal fed into

the high speed control circuit. At the start of high-speed data
retrieval, the motor speed is increased by a factor of 32, record head
current is inhibited, high speed data outputs enabled and, the trace
control circuit is placed into the high speed data retrieval mode.
The data read from the three tracks are simultaneously sent to the
high-speed output amplifier.
Retrieved data from the high-speed output amplifier and track
direction information are transmitted to the copy recorder receptacle.
M00088A1.PST
UPPER
REEL
TRACK DIRECTION
TO COPY
RECORDER
RECEPTACLE
END OF TAPE SIGNAL

HIGH-SPEED
DATA RETRIEVAL
HIGH-SPEED
OUTPUT
AMPLIFIER
LOW-SPEED
DATA PLAYBACK
TO DFDAU
AND TO COPY
RECORDER
RECEPTACLE
END OF
TAPE
SENSOR
1
S1
LOW-SPEED OUTPUT AMPLIFIER

DATA
MONITOR
PLAYBACK
HEAD
PREAMPS
(TYP)
MONITOR
SWITCHING
RECORD
HEAD
PREAMP
SELECTION
TAPE
CAPSTAN
FROM
DIGITAL
FLIGHT DATA
ACQUISITION
UNIT
LINE
RECEIVER
DATA MONITOR
OUTPUT
FLIGHT DATA INPUT
PLAYBACK
PRESENT="1"
2
SIGNAL
PROCESSOR
HEAD
CURRENT
HEAD
CURRENT
MONITOR
S4
TRACK
CONTROL
(MICROPROCESSOR
CONTROLLED)
RECORD
HEAD
1
INPUT
PRESENT="1"
PREAMPS
(TYP)
1
S3
TO DIGITAL
FLIGHT DATA
ACQUISITION
UNIT
MAINTENANCE
FLAG. OK=GROUND
S2
HIGH-SPEED DATA
RETRIEVAL CONTROL
FROM COPY
RECORDER
RECEPTACLE
BITE MONITOR
MARKER
(MICROPROCESSOR
TONE
TONE
CONTROLLED)
GENERATOR
GENERATOR
CONTROL
HIGH
HIGH-SPEED RETRIEVAL="1"
SPEED
32 X FASTER
CONTROL
END OF
TAPE
SENSOR
LOWER
REEL
S5
HEAD
CURRENT
LEVEL
DETECTOR
TAPE
MOTION
SENSOR
MOTOR
CONTROL
DFDR STATUS
PLAYBACK
HEAD
END OF TAPE SIGNAL
DC
TO FLIGHT
RECORDER
CONTROL
PANEL
LOWER
REEL
MOTOR
HEAD, CURRENT OK = "1"

3
FROM 28V DC
CIRCUIT
BREAKER
+28V DC
FROM RELAYS
OR FLIGHT
RCDR CONTROL
PANEL
+115V AC
POWER
SUPPLY
S6
TAPE MONITOR OK = "1"
STATUS MONITOR
(MICROPROCESSOR
CONTROLLED)
DC
THREE PREAMPS PER PLAYBACK HEAD

ONLY ONE IS SHOWN
G63131BI
DIGITAL FLIGHT DATA RECORDER FUNCTIONAL DIAGRAM

(LOCKHEED)
g63131bi
DIGITAL FLIGHT DATA RECORDER FUNCTIONAL DIAGRAM (LOCKHEED)

(Continued)
DFDR Status
In normal operation, the DFDR status discrete is 28v dc. In the event
of loss of tape motion, loss of head current or loss of power, a low
output from gate 3 causes switch S6 to output a DFDR status ground
discrete.
Maintenance Flag
In normal operation, input data are received and low speed playback
data are present. Consequently, the outputs of gates 2 and 1 are a
logic 1. Switch S2 causes the maintenance flag discrete to be a 0,
indicating no fault.
No Data Input
If no input data are received, a logic 0 from the data monitor
output circuit causes the output of gate 1 to be a logic 1. Again, the
maintenance flag output is a logic 0, indicating no fault.
Fault Condition
If input data are received, but no low speed playback is present, the
output of gate 1 is a logic 0. Now, switch S2 is open, and the
maintenance flag discrete indicates a fault condition.
M00088A1.PST
UPPER
REEL
TRACK DIRECTION
TO COPY
RECORDER
RECEPTACLE
END OF TAPE SIGNAL

HIGH-SPEED
DATA RETRIEVAL
HIGH-SPEED
OUTPUT
AMPLIFIER
LOW-SPEED
DATA PLAYBACK
TO DFDAU
AND TO COPY
RECORDER
RECEPTACLE
END OF
TAPE
SENSOR
1
S1
LOW-SPEED OUTPUT AMPLIFIER

DATA
MONITOR
PLAYBACK
HEAD
PREAMPS
(TYP)
MONITOR
SWITCHING
RECORD
HEAD
PREAMP
SELECTION
TAPE
CAPSTAN
FROM
DIGITAL
FLIGHT DATA
ACQUISITION
UNIT
LINE
RECEIVER
DATA MONITOR
OUTPUT
FLIGHT DATA INPUT
PLAYBACK
PRESENT="1"
2
SIGNAL
PROCESSOR
HEAD
CURRENT
HEAD
CURRENT
MONITOR
S4
TRACK
CONTROL
(MICROPROCESSOR
CONTROLLED)
RECORD
HEAD
1
INPUT
PRESENT="1"
PREAMPS
(TYP)
1
S3
TO DIGITAL
FLIGHT DATA
ACQUISITION
UNIT
MAINTENANCE
FLAG. OK=GROUND
S2
HIGH-SPEED DATA
RETRIEVAL CONTROL
FROM COPY
RECORDER
RECEPTACLE
BITE MONITOR
MARKER
(MICROPROCESSOR
TONE
TONE
CONTROLLED)
GENERATOR
GENERATOR
CONTROL
HIGH
HIGH-SPEED RETRIEVAL="1"
SPEED
32 X FASTER
CONTROL
PLAYBACK
HEAD
END OF
TAPE
SENSOR
END OF TAPE SIGNAL
LOWER
REEL
S5
DC
TO FLIGHT
RECORDER
CONTROL
PANEL
LOWER
REEL
HEAD
CURRENT
LEVEL
DETECTOR
TAPE
MOTION
SENSOR
MOTOR
CONTROL
DFDR STATUS
MOTOR
HEAD, CURRENT OK = "1"

3
FROM 28V DC
CIRCUIT
BREAKER
+28V DC
FROM RELAYS
OR FLIGHT
RCDR CONTROL
PANEL
+115V AC
POWER
SUPPLY
S6
TAPE MONITOR OK = "1"
STATUS MONITOR
(MICROPROCESSOR
CONTROLLED)
DC
THREE PREAMPS PER PLAYBACK HEAD

ONLY ONE IS SHOWN
G63131BI
DIGITAL FLIGHT DATA RECORDER FUNCTIONAL DIAGRAM

(LOCKHEED)
g63131bi
(Continued)
DFDR FUNCTIONAL DIAGRAM (SUNDSTRAND)

Power Input
Power is received from the 115 volt ac left bus.
has four separate elements, one for each track. Erase channel control
is received from the track select circuit. The erase enable signal is
received from the system timing and control circuit.
An internal power supply generates all required dc voltages.
Tape Transport Function

Data Flow
Flight data from the DFDAU is received in Harvard bi-phase format
and temporarily stored in a local memory until an entire subframe of
data has been received. It is then applied to the write drivers for
recording. The track select function provides the necessary write
driver control.
The input signal is also routed to a check data circuit where it is
compared to the stored incremental bi-phase data as it is inputted to
the write drivers. After recording, the recorded data are read by a
read head, amplified, and routed through the analog multiplexer back
to the check data circuit. There the data is compared to the local
store word. If both comparisons are good, the recorded data is
considered to be valid.
Tape Pre-Erase
The tape track to be used for data recording is erased just prior to
recording. Separate erase heads are used for each direction of tape
travel. One of the erase heads erases the odd-numbered channels the
other erase head erases the even-numbered channels. Each erase head
A tape and motion control function provides forward and reverse

control signals to a dc-powered stepper motor. This motor operates at
a rate of 700 steps per second.
Forward and reverse control utilizes signals from end-of-tape ( EOT)
and beginning-of-tape ( BOT) sensors. Sensing is accomplished by
light from LEDs which passes through a clear section of the tape
and activates a phototransistor. The sensed signals are routed to the
system timing and control circuit, processed, and then used for tape
motion control.
Low-Speed Data Playback

For test and monitoring purposes data from the DFDAU, received in
Harvard bi-phase format, are routed to AND gate 4. Assuming no
DFDR faults, these data are then outputted from a Harvard bi-phase
transmitter, via the DFDAU, to the flight recorder test connector,
located in the book stowage, on the right side panel, P61.
These data are received at the test connector at the same rate at
which they are received at the DFDR.
M0008804.PST
DC
WRONG SENSOR
(EOT/BOT) ON
OR BOTH ON
WRITE DRIVER
INPUT DISAGREES
WITH RECORDER
INPUT DATA
TAPE &
MOTION
CONTROL
OPERATING MODE OTHER

THAN FLIGHT RECORDING
EOT
1
LOSS OF
DATA INPUT
INPUT DATA
ALL "0"S OR
ALL "1"S
RECORDED DATA
DISAGREES WITH
WRITE DRIVER
INPUT
5V
2
BOT
ERASE ENABLE
SYSTEM
TIMING AND
CONTROL
TRACK MEMORY
DATA
TRACK
SELECT DATA
2
5V
TRACK
SELECT
ERASE CHAN
5V
2
4
HARVARD
BI-PHASE
RECEIVER
3
5
TRACK SELECT
7
CONTINUOUS
BI-PHASE DATA
WRITE ENABLE
5V
1
READ/WRITE CHAN
HARVARD
BI-PHASE
XMTR
PLAYBACK DATA VIA

DFDAU TO TEST
CONNECTOR
PLAYBACK ENABLE
FLT
DATA
FROM
DFDAU
PLAYBACK DATA
HARDWARE
DECODER
MEMORY
SYSTEM STATUS
SOFTWARE
SOFTWARE DETECTED FAILURE
CHECK
DATA
INCREMENTAL
BI-PHASE DATA
3
5
7
WRITE
DRIVERS
0
2
4
6
DECODER
DFDR STATUS (OK = DC)

28V DC
5
K2
MAINT FLAG (OK = GND)
SYSTEM
LOCKUP
DETECTOR
DFDR
FAULT
K3
LOCKUP FAIL
115V AC
POWER
SUPPLIES
DC
ANALOG
MULTIPLEXER
(READ)
PLAYBACK
PREAMPS
COPY RECORDER
CONNECTOR
BITE (YELLOW)
M200 DIGITAL FLIGHT DATA RECORDER (E7)
63131ANA

g63131an

(Continued)
High-Speed Data Retrieval
DFDR Faults
By outputting eight tracks of data simultaneously into an external

copy recorder, the flight recorders data can be retrieved from the
playback preamps. High-speed data retrieval is achieved by
connecting the copy recorder to the copy recorder connector on the
front panel of the DFDR.
The following types of faults are sensed by OR gate 3, and

annunciated by the maintenance flag and DFDR status discretes. The
various points sensed provide a good integrity check of the read,
write, and erase circuits; playback amplifiers; tape motion; and,
digital data receive and transmit circuits:
Fault Output Discretes

Various faults within the flight recorder are sensed by OR gates 3
and NOR gate 5. When a fault is sensed, the following actions occur:
BITE Light
The flight recorders yellow BITE light illuminates whenever a
DFDR fault is sensed by OR gate 3.
Maintenance Flag Discrete
This ground level discrete, which is routed to the DFDAU,
goes to the open (invalid) state since relay K3 energizes
whenever a DFDR fault is sensed.
DFDR Status Discrete
This normally high level (dc) discrete, which is routed to the
flight data recorder control panel, goes to ground level (invalid)
whenever a DFDR fault is sensed (OR-gate 3 output high) or a
system fault sensed (OR-gate 1 output high). NOR gate 5,
sensing one of these inputs high, will go low at its output
causing K2 to deenergize.
Power for the DFDR status discrete is received from the 28 volt dc
left bus.
Software Detected Failures. The various software types of

failures, sensed by OR gate 2, are as follows:
Wrong EOT or BOT sensor on or both on at the same time.
Input data coming in with all 1s or all 0s.
Track memory and track select data disagree.
Recorded data disagrees with the input data to the write
drivers, as sensed by the check data circuit.
The write driver input disagrees with original data input to the
flight recorder, as sensed by the check data circuit
Lockup Fail Fault - This fault occurs whenever the system lockup
detector (watchdog timer) senses a loss of a trigger pulse that
normally occurs every 5 seconds.
System Faults
These faults are sensed by NOR gate 5, and are annunciated by the
state of the DFDR status discrete. This discrete is at a high (28 volt
dc) level until a system fault or a DFDR fault is sensed by OR gate
3. The various DFDR faults have been previously described.
The system fault condition occurs whenever OR gate 1 senses one of
the following conditions:
Flight recorder operating in a mode other than flight recording
(ground support functions).
M0008804.PST
DC
WRONG SENSOR
(EOT/BOT) ON
OR BOTH ON
WRITE DRIVER
INPUT DISAGREES
WITH RECORDER
INPUT DATA
TAPE &
MOTION
CONTROL

EOT
1
LOSS OF
DATA INPUT
INPUT DATA
ALL "0"S OR
ALL "1"S
RECORDED DATA
DISAGREES WITH
WRITE DRIVER
INPUT
5V
2
BOT
ERASE ENABLE
SYSTEM
TIMING AND
CONTROL
TRACK MEMORY
DATA
TRACK
SELECT DATA
2
5V
TRACK
SELECT
ERASE CHAN
5V
2
4
HARVARD
BI-PHASE
RECEIVER
3
5
TRACK SELECT
7
CONTINUOUS
BI-PHASE DATA
WRITE ENABLE
5V
1
READ/WRITE CHAN
HARVARD
BI-PHASE
XMTR
PLAYBACK DATA VIA

DFDAU TO TEST
CONNECTOR
PLAYBACK ENABLE
FLT
DATA
FROM
DFDAU
PLAYBACK DATA
HARDWARE
DECODER
MEMORY
SYSTEM STATUS
SOFTWARE
CHECK
DATA
INCREMENTAL
BI-PHASE DATA
3
5
7
WRITE
DRIVERS
0
2
4
6
DECODER

28V DC
5
K2
SYSTEM
LOCKUP
DETECTOR
DFDR
FAULT
ANALOG
MULTIPLEXER
K3
LOCKUP FAIL
115V AC
POWER
SUPPLIES
DC
(READ)
PLAYBACK
PREAMPS
COPY RECORDER
CONNECTOR
BITE (YELLOW)
63131ANA

g63131an
(Continued)

(Continued)
System Faults
(Continued)
A loss of input data occurs.
M0008804.PST
DC
WRONG SENSOR
(EOT/BOT) ON
OR BOTH ON
WRITE DRIVER
INPUT DISAGREES
WITH RECORDER
INPUT DATA
TAPE &
MOTION
CONTROL

EOT
1
LOSS OF
DATA INPUT
INPUT DATA
ALL "0"S OR
ALL "1"S
RECORDED DATA
DISAGREES WITH
WRITE DRIVER
INPUT
5V
2
BOT
ERASE ENABLE
SYSTEM
TIMING AND
CONTROL
TRACK MEMORY
DATA
TRACK
SELECT DATA
2
5V
TRACK
SELECT
ERASE CHAN
5V
2
4
HARVARD
BI-PHASE
RECEIVER
3
5
TRACK SELECT
7
CONTINUOUS
BI-PHASE DATA
WRITE ENABLE
5V
1
READ/WRITE CHAN
HARVARD
BI-PHASE
XMTR
PLAYBACK DATA VIA

DFDAU TO TEST
CONNECTOR
PLAYBACK ENABLE
FLT
DATA
FROM
DFDAU
PLAYBACK DATA
HARDWARE
DECODER
MEMORY
SYSTEM STATUS
SOFTWARE
CHECK
DATA
INCREMENTAL
BI-PHASE DATA
3
5
7
WRITE
DRIVERS
0
2
4
6
DECODER

28V DC
5
K2
SYSTEM
LOCKUP
DETECTOR
DFDR
FAULT
ANALOG
MULTIPLEXER
K3
LOCKUP FAIL
115V AC
POWER
SUPPLIES
DC
(READ)
PLAYBACK
PREAMPS
COPY RECORDER
CONNECTOR
BITE (YELLOW)
63131ANA

g63131an
(Continued)
SOLID STATE FLIGHT DATA RECORDER SCHEMATIC

General
Failures
The solid state flight data recorder (SSFDR) receives Harvard

bi-phase flight data from the digital flight data acquisition unit
(DFAU). The SSFDR records the flight data on memory chips.
If a fault is detected, the microprocessor produces these discretes;
Power
Certain faults detected by the microprocessor send both discretes.

These faults are:
The SSFDR receives 115v ac and 28v dc from the circuit breaker
assembly on P-11.
Recording
The digital flight data acquisition unit (DFAU) sends Harvard
bi-phase flight data to the solid state flight data recorder (SSFDR).
The Harvard bi-phase receiver processes and sends the data to:
The Harvard bi-phase transmitter.
The microprocessor
The microprocessor receives the flight data, processes it and sends it
to the SSFDR non-volatile memory.
The microprocessor controls the sequence of flight data storage.
Every four seconds the microprocessor selects a different memory
chip to store the data. This continues until a memory chip fails. Once
the microprocessor detects a failure, that chip is isolated and not
used. A failure of one chip causes 4second blocks of data loss
during data download.
System status
Maintenance Flag
DATA MISCOMPARE: Data rate input and program pin selection

do not agree (not at 64 words/sec rate).
Insufficient memory to record 25 hours of data due to faulty
memory devices. (Memory chip failure during normal operation is
tolerated until total usable memory is below 25 hours of flight
data).
Software detected fault.
Faults detected by the microprocessor that send just the status
discrete are the:
Power of state.
Loss of input data.
Downloading or test operation.
Power
The SSFDR receives 115 volts ac from the circuit breaker assembly
(P-11). An internal power supply provides dc power fro SSFDR
operation.
M6000D70.PST
I
SHT 3
AC
BRIDGE
POWER
SUPPLY
DATA
POWER
MONITOR
FAULT
DATA INPUT
A
PLAYBACK DATA
C
TRANSMITTER
AND RECEIVER
TIME CODE
GENERATOR
J
SHT 3
K
SHT 3
B
FAULT MONITOR
LOGIC
+5V
NO FAULT
SYSTEM STATUS
28V DC
MAINT FLAG
FAULT
COMPRESSION/STORE DATA
ACQUISITION PROCESSOR
+5V
+5V
FLASH STORE
INTERPACE
BITE
NO FAULT
GROUP
SUPPORT
EQUIPMENT
CRASH
SURVIVABLE
STORE UNIT
UNDERWATER LOCATING DEVICE
MOUNTED ON FRONT PANEL OF DFDR
WATER
ACTIVATED
+
SOLID STATE RECORDER
OSCILLATOR
PULSE
GENERATOR
G63131BK

g63131bk

(Continued)
ULB
The underwater locating beacon (ULB), emits an acoustic signal
when submerged underwater. The signal is 37.5 kHz and is pulsed
once per second.
The ULB is battery operated. The water activated switch makes
contact when submerged in water. The oscillator oscillates at 37.5
kHz. The transducer converts the electrical signal into an acoustic
signal, and emits the signal once per second.
M6000D70.PST
I
SHT 3
AC
BRIDGE
POWER
SUPPLY
DATA
POWER
MONITOR
FAULT
DATA INPUT
A
PLAYBACK DATA
C
TRANSMITTER
AND RECEIVER
TIME CODE
GENERATOR
J
SHT 3
K
SHT 3
B
FAULT MONITOR
LOGIC
+5V
NO FAULT
SYSTEM STATUS
28V DC
MAINT FLAG
FAULT
COMPRESSION/STORE DATA
ACQUISITION PROCESSOR
+5V
+5V
FLASH STORE
INTERPACE
BITE
NO FAULT
GROUP
SUPPORT
EQUIPMENT
CRASH
SURVIVABLE
STORE UNIT
UNDERWATER LOCATING DEVICE
MOUNTED ON FRONT PANEL OF DFDR
WATER
ACTIVATED
+
SOLID STATE RECORDER
OSCILLATOR
PULSE
GENERATOR
G63131BK

g63131bk
(Continued)
DFDAU FUNCTIONAL DIAGRAM

Power
Power is received by the power supply from the 115 volt ac left bus.
The power supply generates all required dc voltages. It also sends a
28 volt dc output to the flight recorder accelerometer. In the event of
an out-of-tolerance voltage condition of the power supply, a fault
message is sent to the BITE circuit.
Operation Overview
The digital flight data acquisition unit ( DFDAU) receives the flight
parameters to be recorded, processes the signals, formats them and
transmits them to the digital flight data recorder ( DFDR), and the
AIDS printer. Data acquisition, signal processing and output data
streams are controlled by the central processing units ( CPU) No. 1
and No. 2.
CPU No. 1: Mandatory Data Acquisition and Recording

CPU No. 1 controls the acquisition and the processing of synchro,
analog, discrete and digital information transfer system ( DITS)
inputs, as well as the output data stream to the DFDR. All software
relative to the CPU No. 1 functions resides in EPROM 1. All data
acquired by CPU No. 1 also are made available to CPU No. 2.
Documentary data and status information are received from CPU No.
2. All mandatory parameters are controlled by CPU No. 1.
CPU No. 2 - AIDS

CPU No. 2 controls the Aircraft Integrated Data System ( AIDS)
functions. These functions include data reception from CPU No. 1,
data acquisition from additional DITS input ports, storing and
computation of data required for AIDS printouts, formatting and
outputting data to the AIDS printer, mode determination, limit and
reasonability testing, printer control, and transferring documentary
data and status information to CPU No. 1. All software relative to
the CPU No. 2 functions resides in EPROM 2. The functions just
mentioned are discussed in more detail later in the course.
Data Output to DFDR

Format
Data output to the DFDR is continuous. It is formatted by CPU No.
1 into Harvard-biphase code and put into the proper sequence. Each
flight parameter is transmitted at least once every 4 seconds (at least
once per frame). Some parameters, such as vertical and lateral
acceleration, are sampled 16 times per frame. All data values to the
DFDR are acquired less than 250 milliseconds prior to their output.
Program instructions are received from EPROM 1 over a program
bus.
Wraparound Check
The output data stream to the DFDR is transmitted through an output
buffer and a Harvard-biphase transmitter. The data output is
constantly monitored using wraparound. This feature consists of a
M0008779.PST
CALIBRATION
CIRCUIT
CALIBRATION CONTROL
SIGNAL
CONDITIONER
SYNCHRO RCVR
A/D
CONVERTER
SAMPLING CONTROL
SYNCHRO RCVR
OUTPUT
DATA FAULT
LLDC BUFFER
A
MULTIPLEXER
EPROM 1
LLDC BUFFER
DISCRETE
INPUTS PLUS
A/C IDENT
AND A/C TYPE
PROGRAM PINS
(ONLY TWO
SHOWN)
SIGNAL
CONDITIONER
BUFFER
PROGRAM BUS
POWER SUPPLY
FAULT
DFDAU
FAIL
CPU NO. 1
MANDATORY
PARAMETERS
DFDAU FAIL
OK = "0"
FAIL = "1"
DFDAU BITE
FLIGHT DATA
S7
ANALOG INPUT FAULT
DIGITAL INPUT FAULT
CPU NO.2 EPROM FAULT
OK = 0 CAUTION = 1
DFDAU
CAUTION
BUFFER
DFDR
FAIL
SEQUENCING CONTROL
MULTIPLEXER
MAINTENANCE FLAG
OK = GND FAULT = OPEN
OK = 0 FAULT = 1
FLIGHT DATA
READ
SYSTEM STATUS SYSTEM
STATUS
BUFFER
POWER-ON INITIALIZATION ROUTINE + PERIODIC DATA UPDATE CHECK
DIGITAL
DATA
EXCHANGE
PLAYBACK
FAULT
FAULT
DISPLAY
TO TEST
CONN.
FROM DFDR
STATUS LINE A
FLIGHT DATA
STATUS LINE B
STATUS LINE C
DATA MEMORY
28V DC TO
FLT RECORDER
ACCELEROMETER
A
TO BITE
CIRCUIT
EPROM 2
DC
ACARS IN
ACARS
MANAGEMENT
UNIT
INTERNAL
JUMPER
PLAYBACK
VALIDITY
TEST
ARINC 429
RCVR
115V 400 HZ
SEQUENCING CONTROL
MULTIPLEXER
POWER
SUPPLY
FROM DFDR
DFDR FAIL
ARINC 429
RCVR
ARINC 429
RCVR
TO BITE RELAY
AND FLT.
REC.
CONTROL
PANEL
DFDAU CAUTION
DIGITAL INPUT FAULT
SAMPLING CONTROL
BUFFER
PARITY AND
STATUS BIT
CHECK
DITS INPUTS
(ONLY FOUR
SHOWN)
BITE
MULTIPLEXER
ARINC 429
RCVR
TO DFDR
AND TEST
CONNECTOR
OUTPUT
COMPARATOR
MULTIPLEXER
ANALOG INPUTS
(ONLY TWO OF
EACH SHOWN)
DATA OUTPUT
HARVARD
BIPHASE XMTR
OUTPUT
BUFFER
ACARS OUT
TEST CONNECTOR/IDU INTERFACE OUT
RS 422
XMTR
PROGRAM BUS
RS 422
RCVR
CPU NO. 2
AIDS
ARINC 717
XMTR
TEST CONNECTOR/IDU INTERFACE IN

DATA CONTROL 1 & 2
INPUT
BUFFER
ARINC 717
RCVR
NOT
CONNECTED
INPUT
BUFFER
TEST
CONNECTOR/
ACARS IDU
INTFC
EVENT MARKER IN
ARINC 573
XMTR
SERIAL BIPOLAR
RZ TRANSMITTER
OQAR
NOT
CONNECTED
63131AMA

g63131am

(Continued)
Wraparound Check (Continued)

word-by-word comparison of the data in the output buffer to the data
output from the Harvard-biphase transmitter. An error for more than
four consecutive seconds generates a failure code and turns on the
DFDAU FAIL indicator.
Control
Data output to the ACARS MU is under control of the CPU number
2.
Data Output to the ACARS IDU

Low-Speed Data Playback
Initiation of Output Function
Currently recorded low-speed playback data are received from the
DFDR and transmitted to the test connector over an internal DFDAU
jumper, to be used for test by ground support equipment.
A validity test is performed on the received playback data. This test
consists of a verification of the sequence of the subframe sync
words, as well as of the interval between consecutive sync words. In
the event of a failure, the corresponding code is set in the system
status word.
Data output to the ACARS Interactive Display Unit (IDU) is initiated

when a Parameter report is requested manually by the Flight Crew,
or by an ACARS uplink.
Control
Data output to the ACARS IDU is under control of CPU number 2.
ACARS IDU and Test Connector Interface

Data Output to the ACARS MU
Initiation of Output Function
Data output to the ACARS MU is automatic according to a
predetermined schedule, and also at the occurance of some particular
events such as exceedances, EGT divergence, etc. Furthermore, data
output is initiated when certain reports are requested manually by the
Flight crew, or by an ACARS uplink.
The ACARS IDU serves to enter documentary data, and to respond

to requests for parameter data display, printer report initialization and
system status display.
Low-speed data playback can be achieved, at the test connector in
the flight compartment, by connecting ground support equipment.
Data control 1 and 2 provide playback control.
M0008779.PST
CALIBRATION
CIRCUIT
CALIBRATION CONTROL
SIGNAL
CONDITIONER
SYNCHRO RCVR
A/D
CONVERTER
SAMPLING CONTROL
SYNCHRO RCVR
OUTPUT
DATA FAULT
LLDC BUFFER
A
MULTIPLEXER
EPROM 1
LLDC BUFFER
DISCRETE
INPUTS PLUS
A/C IDENT
AND A/C TYPE
PROGRAM PINS
(ONLY TWO
SHOWN)
SIGNAL
CONDITIONER
BUFFER
PROGRAM BUS
POWER SUPPLY
FAULT
DFDAU
FAIL
CPU NO. 1
MANDATORY
PARAMETERS
DFDAU FAIL
OK = "0"
FAIL = "1"
DFDAU BITE
FLIGHT DATA
S7
ANALOG INPUT FAULT
DIGITAL INPUT FAULT
OK = 0 CAUTION = 1
DFDAU
CAUTION
BUFFER
DFDR
FAIL
SEQUENCING CONTROL
MULTIPLEXER
MAINTENANCE FLAG
OK = 0 FAULT = 1
FLIGHT DATA
READ
STATUS
BUFFER
DIGITAL
DATA
EXCHANGE
PLAYBACK
FAULT
FAULT
DISPLAY
TO TEST
CONN.
FROM DFDR
STATUS LINE A
FLIGHT DATA
STATUS LINE B
STATUS LINE C
DATA MEMORY
28V DC TO
FLT RECORDER
ACCELEROMETER
A
TO BITE
CIRCUIT
EPROM 2
PROGRAM BUS
ACARS OUT
RS 422
RCVR
CPU NO. 2
AIDS

DATA CONTROL 1 & 2
INPUT
BUFFER
INPUT
BUFFER
ARINC 717
RCVR
TEST
CONNECTOR/
ACARS IDU
INTFC
EVENT MARKER IN
ARINC 573
XMTR
SERIAL BIPOLAR
RZ TRANSMITTER
ARINC 717
XMTR
NOT
CONNECTED
RS 422
XMTR
DC
ACARS IN
ACARS
MANAGEMENT
UNIT
INTERNAL
JUMPER
PLAYBACK
VALIDITY
TEST
ARINC 429
RCVR
115V 400 HZ
SEQUENCING CONTROL
MULTIPLEXER
POWER
SUPPLY
FROM DFDR
DFDR FAIL
ARINC 429
RCVR
ARINC 429
RCVR
TO BITE RELAY
AND FLT.
REC.
CONTROL
PANEL
DFDAU CAUTION
DIGITAL INPUT FAULT
SAMPLING CONTROL
BUFFER
PARITY AND
STATUS BIT
CHECK
DITS INPUTS
(ONLY FOUR
SHOWN)
BITE
MULTIPLEXER
ARINC 429
RCVR
TO DFDR
AND TEST
CONNECTOR
OUTPUT
COMPARATOR
MULTIPLEXER
ANALOG INPUTS
(ONLY TWO OF
EACH SHOWN)
DATA OUTPUT
HARVARD
BIPHASE XMTR
OUTPUT
BUFFER
OQAR
NOT
CONNECTED
63131AMA

g63131am
(Continued)

(Continued)
ACARS IDU and Test Connector Interface
(Continued)
Data transfer to/from the ACARS IDU is accomplished via an RS422

digital data transmitter and receiver. The RS 422 interface is a set of
standards defining voltage and signal levels, interface connectors and
control signals for the purpose of allowing communication between
various equipment components.
Analog Inputs
Signal Acquisition and Processing
The analog inputs, synchro and low-level dc, are received by synchro
receivers or buffer circuits, respectively, then sequentially sampled in
the multiplexers, signal conditioned in the signal conditioner,
converted to digital values in the analog-to-digital (A/D) converter
and sent into the CPU No. 1 for further processing and formatting.
Calibration
A calibration check of the synchro and analog input circuits is
performed continuously. Calibration signals from a calibration circuit
are injected into each channel. After being processed, these signals
are checked and compared with expected results.
Signal level changes exceeding 5% result in a fault message from the
CPU No. 1 to the BITE circuit. The appropriate failure code is set
and the DFDAU caution light illuminates.
DITS Inputs
Signal Acquisition and Processing
All DITS inputs are received by ARINC 429 receivers, checked for
parity and status (the checks are described later), and transmitted to
one of two multiplexers. One multiplexer channels the received flight
data to CPU No. 1, while the other multiplexer does so to CPU No.
2, for further processing and formatting. Sequencing control is
received from the respective CPUs.
Parity Tests
All digital inputs are examined for correct parity (bit 32). If a parity
error is detected, all 1s are set in the corresponding data field.
Status Tests
All digital inputs except BCD words also are examined for status
(bits 30 and 31). If these status bits indicate failure (both bits = 0),
or no computed data (bit 30 = 1, bit 31 = 0, all 1s are set in the
corresponding data field, except the least significant bit that is set to
0.
Data Update
During normal operation all digital input channels will be tested for
data update. Any input channel that is not updated at least once per
second will have its appropriate failure code set. This will not cause
the DFDAU CAUTION indicator to be lit, but it will be included in
the system status word.
M0008779.PST
CALIBRATION
CIRCUIT
CALIBRATION CONTROL
SIGNAL
CONDITIONER
SYNCHRO RCVR
A/D
CONVERTER
SAMPLING CONTROL
SYNCHRO RCVR
OUTPUT
DATA FAULT
LLDC BUFFER
A
MULTIPLEXER
EPROM 1
LLDC BUFFER
DISCRETE
INPUTS PLUS
A/C IDENT
AND A/C TYPE
PROGRAM PINS
(ONLY TWO
SHOWN)
SIGNAL
CONDITIONER
BUFFER
PROGRAM BUS
POWER SUPPLY
FAULT
DFDAU
FAIL
CPU NO. 1
MANDATORY
PARAMETERS
DFDAU FAIL
OK = "0"
FAIL = "1"
DFDAU BITE
FLIGHT DATA
S7
ANALOG INPUT FAULT
DIGITAL INPUT FAULT
OK = 0 CAUTION = 1
DFDAU
CAUTION
BUFFER
DFDR
FAIL
SEQUENCING CONTROL
MULTIPLEXER
MAINTENANCE FLAG
OK = 0 FAULT = 1
FLIGHT DATA
READ
STATUS
BUFFER
DIGITAL
DATA
EXCHANGE
PLAYBACK
FAULT
FAULT
DISPLAY
TO TEST
CONN.
FROM DFDR
STATUS LINE A
FLIGHT DATA
STATUS LINE B
STATUS LINE C
DATA MEMORY
28V DC TO
FLT RECORDER
ACCELEROMETER
A
TO BITE
CIRCUIT
EPROM 2
PROGRAM BUS
ACARS OUT
RS 422
RCVR
CPU NO. 2
AIDS

DATA CONTROL 1 & 2
INPUT
BUFFER
INPUT
BUFFER
ARINC 717
RCVR
TEST
CONNECTOR/
ACARS IDU
INTFC
EVENT MARKER IN
ARINC 573
XMTR
SERIAL BIPOLAR
RZ TRANSMITTER
ARINC 717
XMTR
NOT
CONNECTED
RS 422
XMTR
DC
ACARS IN
ACARS
MANAGEMENT
UNIT
INTERNAL
JUMPER
PLAYBACK
VALIDITY
TEST
ARINC 429
RCVR
115V 400 HZ
SEQUENCING CONTROL
MULTIPLEXER
POWER
SUPPLY
FROM DFDR
DFDR FAIL
ARINC 429
RCVR
ARINC 429
RCVR
TO BITE RELAY
AND FLT.
REC.
CONTROL
PANEL
DFDAU CAUTION
DIGITAL INPUT FAULT
SAMPLING CONTROL
BUFFER
PARITY AND
STATUS BIT
CHECK
DITS INPUTS
(ONLY FOUR
SHOWN)
BITE
MULTIPLEXER
ARINC 429
RCVR
TO DFDR
AND TEST
CONNECTOR
OUTPUT
COMPARATOR
MULTIPLEXER
ANALOG INPUTS
(ONLY TWO OF
EACH SHOWN)
DATA OUTPUT
HARVARD
BIPHASE XMTR
OUTPUT
BUFFER
OQAR
NOT
CONNECTED
63131AMA

g63131am
(Continued)

(Continued)
Power-On Initialization Routine

At power-on, a predetermined data pattern is injected into each
digital input port. These signals are processed in a normal way and
the results are tested.
DFDAU CAUTION Indication

The failure of any digital input port causes the appropriate failure
code to be set and the DFDAU CAUTION indicator to be lit.
Discrete Inputs
Discrete inputs are received by buffer circuits, then sequentially
sampled in the multiplexer, signal conditioned in the signal
conditioner and fed into the CPU No. 1 for further processing and
formatting.
Sampling control is provided by CPU No. 1.
BITE Function
The BITE circuit receives all status messages, stores them in a
system status buffer, causes the correspondent fault lights to
illuminate, displays failure codes on a fault display upon request, and
causes status messages to be included in subframe 2 of the
superframe in the data output to the DFDR. It also transmits ACARS
printer status data to the IDU over an RS422 bus.
EPROM Sum Check

A sum check of the EPROMs is performed periodically by CPU No.
1 or CPU No. 2, respectively. Any failure of this sum check results
in a fault message transmitted to the BITE circuit, which will cause
the DFDAU FAIL or the DFDAU CAUTION light, respectively, to
illuminate.
DFDAU FAIL Indicator

Power supply fault, output data fault or CPU No. 1 EPROM fault
messages cause the BITE circuit to illuminate the DFDAU FAIL
light on the DFDAU front panel, to send the DFDAU BITE fault
discrete (open circuit) to the flight recorder control panel and to both
EICAS computers to generate the message FLT DATA ACQ, and to
set the corresponding code in the system status word.
DFDAU CAUTION Indicator

Digital input fault, analog input fault or CPU No. 2 EPROM fault
cause the BITE circuit to illuminate the DFDAU CAUTION light on
the DFDAU front panel and the respective code in the system status
word to be set.
M0008779.PST
CALIBRATION
CIRCUIT
CALIBRATION CONTROL
SIGNAL
CONDITIONER
SYNCHRO RCVR
A/D
CONVERTER
SAMPLING CONTROL
SYNCHRO RCVR
OUTPUT
DATA FAULT
LLDC BUFFER
A
MULTIPLEXER
EPROM 1
LLDC BUFFER
DISCRETE
INPUTS PLUS
A/C IDENT
AND A/C TYPE
PROGRAM PINS
(ONLY TWO
SHOWN)
SIGNAL
CONDITIONER
BUFFER
PROGRAM BUS
POWER SUPPLY
FAULT
DFDAU
FAIL
CPU NO. 1
MANDATORY
PARAMETERS
DFDAU FAIL
OK = "0"
FAIL = "1"
DFDAU BITE
FLIGHT DATA
S7
ANALOG INPUT FAULT
DIGITAL INPUT FAULT
OK = 0 CAUTION = 1
DFDAU
CAUTION
BUFFER
DFDR
FAIL
SEQUENCING CONTROL
MULTIPLEXER
MAINTENANCE FLAG
OK = 0 FAULT = 1
FLIGHT DATA
READ
STATUS
BUFFER
DIGITAL
DATA
EXCHANGE
PLAYBACK
FAULT
FAULT
DISPLAY
TO TEST
CONN.
FROM DFDR
STATUS LINE A
FLIGHT DATA
STATUS LINE B
STATUS LINE C
DATA MEMORY
28V DC TO
FLT RECORDER
ACCELEROMETER
A
TO BITE
CIRCUIT
EPROM 2
PROGRAM BUS
ACARS OUT
RS 422
RCVR
CPU NO. 2
AIDS

DATA CONTROL 1 & 2
INPUT
BUFFER
INPUT
BUFFER
ARINC 717
RCVR
TEST
CONNECTOR/
ACARS IDU
INTFC
EVENT MARKER IN
ARINC 573
XMTR
SERIAL BIPOLAR
RZ TRANSMITTER
ARINC 717
XMTR
NOT
CONNECTED
RS 422
XMTR
DC
ACARS IN
ACARS
MANAGEMENT
UNIT
INTERNAL
JUMPER
PLAYBACK
VALIDITY
TEST
ARINC 429
RCVR
115V 400 HZ
SEQUENCING CONTROL
MULTIPLEXER
POWER
SUPPLY
FROM DFDR
DFDR FAIL
ARINC 429
RCVR
ARINC 429
RCVR
TO BITE RELAY
AND FLT.
REC.
CONTROL
PANEL
DFDAU CAUTION
DIGITAL INPUT FAULT
SAMPLING CONTROL
BUFFER
PARITY AND
STATUS BIT
CHECK
DITS INPUTS
(ONLY FOUR
SHOWN)
BITE
MULTIPLEXER
ARINC 429
RCVR
TO DFDR
AND TEST
CONNECTOR
OUTPUT
COMPARATOR
MULTIPLEXER
ANALOG INPUTS
(ONLY TWO OF
EACH SHOWN)
DATA OUTPUT
HARVARD
BIPHASE XMTR
OUTPUT
BUFFER
OQAR
NOT
CONNECTED
63131AMA

g63131am
(Continued)

(Continued)
Maintenance Flag
The maintenance flag discrete is received from the DFDR. Correct
DFDR operation is indicated by a ground discrete. A fault is
indicated by an open circuit. A fault condition causes the DFDR
FAIL indicator on the DFDAU front panel to illuminate and is
included in the system status word.
System Status Buffer

A 16-word system status buffer is used to store fault information. Up
to 16 unique failure codes can be stored and displayed. When the
DFDAU front panel READ switch is depressed and held, all failure
codes are sequentially displayed on the 3-digit fault display. Each
code is displayed for four seconds.
Furthermore, the failure codes are included in the system status word
to the DFDR.
Integrity Test
When the READ switch is depressed and held, the DFDR FAIL, the
DFDAU FAIL and the DFDAU CAUTION lights illuminate and the
fault display indicates the readout 88. After four seconds, the fault
lights extinguish and the fault display indicates 000, unless a specific
fault has occurred. In that event, the fault is indicated by the fault
display and the respective light.
The system status error codes are discussed on a separate graphic.
M0008779.PST
CALIBRATION
CIRCUIT
CALIBRATION CONTROL
SIGNAL
CONDITIONER
SYNCHRO RCVR
A/D
CONVERTER
SAMPLING CONTROL
SYNCHRO RCVR
OUTPUT
DATA FAULT
LLDC BUFFER
A
MULTIPLEXER
EPROM 1
LLDC BUFFER
DISCRETE
INPUTS PLUS
A/C IDENT
AND A/C TYPE
PROGRAM PINS
(ONLY TWO
SHOWN)
SIGNAL
CONDITIONER
BUFFER
PROGRAM BUS
POWER SUPPLY
FAULT
DFDAU
FAIL
CPU NO. 1
MANDATORY
PARAMETERS
DFDAU FAIL
OK = "0"
FAIL = "1"
DFDAU BITE
FLIGHT DATA
S7
ANALOG INPUT FAULT
DIGITAL INPUT FAULT
OK = 0 CAUTION = 1
DFDAU
CAUTION
BUFFER
DFDR
FAIL
SEQUENCING CONTROL
MULTIPLEXER
MAINTENANCE FLAG
OK = 0 FAULT = 1
FLIGHT DATA
READ
STATUS
BUFFER
DIGITAL
DATA
EXCHANGE
PLAYBACK
FAULT
FAULT
DISPLAY
TO TEST
CONN.
FROM DFDR
STATUS LINE A
FLIGHT DATA
STATUS LINE B
STATUS LINE C
DATA MEMORY
28V DC TO
FLT RECORDER
ACCELEROMETER
A
TO BITE
CIRCUIT
EPROM 2
PROGRAM BUS
ACARS OUT
RS 422
RCVR
CPU NO. 2
AIDS

DATA CONTROL 1 & 2
INPUT
BUFFER
INPUT
BUFFER
ARINC 717
RCVR
TEST
CONNECTOR/
ACARS IDU
INTFC
EVENT MARKER IN
ARINC 573
XMTR
SERIAL BIPOLAR
RZ TRANSMITTER
ARINC 717
XMTR
NOT
CONNECTED
RS 422
XMTR
DC
ACARS IN
ACARS
MANAGEMENT
UNIT
INTERNAL
JUMPER
PLAYBACK
VALIDITY
TEST
ARINC 429
RCVR
115V 400 HZ
SEQUENCING CONTROL
MULTIPLEXER
POWER
SUPPLY
FROM DFDR
DFDR FAIL
ARINC 429
RCVR
ARINC 429
RCVR
TO BITE RELAY
AND FLT.
REC.
CONTROL
PANEL
DFDAU CAUTION
DIGITAL INPUT FAULT
SAMPLING CONTROL
BUFFER
PARITY AND
STATUS BIT
CHECK
DITS INPUTS
(ONLY FOUR
SHOWN)
BITE
MULTIPLEXER
ARINC 429
RCVR
TO DFDR
AND TEST
CONNECTOR
OUTPUT
COMPARATOR
MULTIPLEXER
ANALOG INPUTS
(ONLY TWO OF
EACH SHOWN)
DATA OUTPUT
HARVARD
BIPHASE XMTR
OUTPUT
BUFFER
OQAR
NOT
CONNECTED
63131AMA

g63131am
(Continued)
FAULT ANNUNCIATIONS SCHEMATIC

Annunciations
The message FLT DATA REC is inhibited when a FLT DATA ACQ
condition exists.
DFDAU FAIL will illuminate for an CPU # 1, power supply or data

output fault.
DFDAU CAUTION will illuminate for a digital or analog input fault
or a failure of CPU # 2.
DFDR FAIL illuminates for an open circuit maintenance flag output
from the DFDR.
The OFF light on the Flight Recorder Control Panel illuminates for a
DFDAU FAIL or DFDR STATUS failure. The latter occurs for a
sensed failure of DFDR head current or tape motion. This a normal
indication when power is removed due on ground and both engines
shut down.
EICAS MESSAGES
When both engines are running and the left 115V ac bus is powered,
flight data recorder system faults are annunciated by the status and
maintenance messages:
FLT DATA REC - status and maintenance messages for a DFDR
fault.
FLT DATA ACQ - status and maintenance messages for a
DFDAU fault.
The messages only appear after a fault condition exists for more than
60 seconds. If they appear in flight, they are latched; if they appear
on the ground, they are not latched.
M0008923.PST
EICAS LOGIC MATRIX

"FLT DATA REC" (INHIBITED IN EICAS IF
"FLT DATA ACQ" DISPLAYED)
A
B
TO L & R EICAS
COMPUTERS
+28V DC
L BUS "FLT REC DC" C/B
W
DFDAU BITE
RLY (P36)
OFF
TO TEST GROUND
28/12V DC FROM
MASTER TEST & DIM
MESSAGE
FLT DATA ACQ

NO MESSAGE
DISPLAYED
3.
BITE
CIRCUIT
READ
DFDAU OK = "0"
DFDAU FAIL = "1"
ON
ON
OFF
ON THE GROUND: MESSAGE IS NOT LATCHED
DFDR STATUS
(NORMAL = 28V DC; FAIL = GND OR OPEN)
OK = "1"
FAULT = "0"
HEAD CURRENT OK = "1"

3
TAPE MOTION OK = "1"
S7
INTERNAL
DIGITAL
AND / OR
ANALOG
INPUT
CHANNEL
FAILURE
"B" =GND
"A" STATE IS IMMATERIAL
"A" =OPEN AND
"B" =OPEN
LIGHT
CONDITIONS FOR MESSAGE GENERATION:

1. (BOTH ENG RUN) (L AC BUS ON)
(60 SEC TIME DELAY)
2. IN AIR: MESSAGE IS LATCHED
FLIGHT RECORDER CONTROL PNL (P61)
DFDAU BITE
(NORMAL = GROUND
FAIL = OPEN)
STATUS OUTPUT SIGNALS
FLT DATA REC "A" =GND AND "B"=OPEN
K1
FAULT
DISPLAY
FLT REC PNL
DFDAU FAIL
ARINC
717
XMTR
FAIL = "1"
Y
DFDAU CAUTION
DFDR OK = "0"
DFDR FAIL = "1"
+28V DC
S6
TO ACARS MU
(FLIGHT SUMMARY REPORT)
MAINTENANCE FLAG
(NORMAL = GROUND
FAIL = OPEN)
OK = "1"
FAULT = "0"
PLAYBACK
PRESENT = "1"
1
INPUT DATA
PRESENT = "1"
S2
DIGITAL FLIGHT DATA RECORDER (E7)
DFDR FAIL
DIGITAL FLIGHT DATA ACQUISTION UNIT (E2-3)
63131AQA
FAULT ANNUNCIATIONS SCHEMATIC

g63131aq
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
TESTING
g63131aq
31.31 FLIGHT DATA RECORDER TESTING
FLIGHT DATA RECORDER SYSTEM TEST

Purpose
The purpose of the flight data recorder system test is a preflight
check of system performance.
Routine
The test is initiated by positioning the flight recorder system control
switch to TEST (momentary position). In this position, 115 volt ac
power is routed to the digital flight data recorder, causing it to
operate. The recorder system operates as long as the switch is held in
TEST.
The DFDAU and the ACARS printer are operational as soon as the
respective circuit breakers are closed.
Test Result Annunciator

If no fault is detected, the system fault indicators remain off. If a
fault is detected, the flight recorder OFF light on the flight recorder
control panel illuminates.
M0008901.PST
FLIGHT RECORDER SYSTEM

POWER CONTROL SWITCH
(FUNCTION SWITCH)
W
FLIGHT RECORDER
OFF LIGHT (WHITE)

DIGITAL FLIGHT DATA
ACQUISITION UNIT
(DFDAU)
E2-3
ON
115V AC
LEFT BUS
FLT REC
AC CB
POWER
CONTROL
SWITCH
OVERHEAD CIRCUIT
BREAKER PANEL (P11)
NORM
TEST
FLIGHT RECORDER
CONTROL PANEL (P61)
DIGITAL FLIGHT DATA

RECORDER (DFDR)
E7
63131APA
FLIGHT DATA RECORDER SYSTEM TEST

g63131ap
DFDAU FAILURE CODE

Fault Isolation
Any time the READ switch is depressed, the DFDAU FAIL,
DFDAU CAUTION and the DFDR FAIL indicators will illuminate
and the 3-digit display will indicate 888. (The 888 indication may be
preceded by an FFF indication for up to 1 second.)
After 4 seconds these indicators will extinguish and the displays will
indicate 000 unless a specific failure has occurred.
If failures did occur, the respective failure codes will be sequentially
displayed in the display window.
The graphic shown is a list of the available failure codes. These
codes can be used on board, or in the shop.
M0008940.PST
FAULT
DISPLAY
WINDOW
DFDAU
FAILURE CODE
(HEXADECIMAL)
DFDAU
STATUS LED
ILLUMINATED
DFDR BITE
001
DFDR FAIL
DFDR WRAP-AROUND FAILURE
102
READ
SWITCH
STATUS DESCRIPTION
STATUS
LEDS
DFDAU POWER SUPPLY FAILURE (BITE #1 THRU #6)
103 THRU 108
ANALOG CHANNEL FAILURE (CHANNEL #1 THRU #22)
201 THRU 216
DITS WRAP-AROUND FAILURE (DM3-1, CHAN #0 THRU #7)

(DM3 CHAN #0 THRU #7)
401 THRU 408

409 THRU 410
DITS WRAP-AROUND FAILURE (DM3-4, CHAN #0 THRU #7)
809 THRU 810
DFDAU FAIL
DFDAU
CAUTION
CPU #1 EPROM SUMCHECK FAILURE
101
DFDAU FAIL
CPU #2 EPROM SUMCHECK FAILURE
901
DFDAU
CAUTION
CPU #1/CPU #2 COMMUNICATION FAILURE (NO DATA

FROM CPU #1 TO CPU #2)
A01
CPU #1/CPU #2 COMMUNICATION FAILURE (CPU #1 CAN

NOT TRANSMIT)
501
---------------
NOTE: DM3-1, -2, AND -4 ARE PRINTED CIRCUIT CARDS
63131ARA
DFDAU FAILURE CODE

g63131ar
DFDAU (WITH QAR) FAILURE CODE

Read The Fault Codes
Fault codes show in the 16digit display when selected by the front
panel control switches. The display shows menu items such as fault
codes or software part numbers when you push the ENTER switch.
Push ENTER to sequence each menu item.
The memory keeps all mandatory and non-mandatory part numbers.
ERASE DAP ERROR now shows on the display

Push ENTER to clear DAP errors
Push + now ERASE DMP ERROR shows on the display
Push ENTER to clear DMP errors.
If the fault codes stay erased, the DFDAU FAIL light turns out. If
any of the faults still exist, that fault code returns and the DFDAU
FAIL light stays on. For this condition, replace the DFDAU.
The front panel memory keeps up to 13 fault codes. This memory is

non-volatile and the fault codes remain even if the fault no longer
exists. Any fault turns on the DFDAU FAIL light.
You use these steps to clear the fault codes from memory:
Push ESCAPE until TELEDYNE CONTROLS shows on the
display
Push ENTER and MANDATORY MENU shows
Push + and NON-MAN MENU shows
Push + and DISPLAY MENU shows
Push ENTER and LAMP TEST shows
Push + and TOGGLE BACKLIGHT shows
Push + and LDP S/W VERSION shows
Push + and SPECIAL FUNCS shows
Push + and PASSWORD AAA shows with a cursor (_) under the
first letter A
Push - until the first letter cycles to the letter T, then push
ENTER
Push + until the second letter cycles to the letter D, then push
ENTER
Push - until the third letter cycles to the letter Y, then push
ENTER
8004ac7d
16-DIGIT
DISPLAY
FAULT DESCRIPTION
STATUS
LEDS
DFDAU STATUS LED
FAIL CODE
DFDAU POWER SUP BITE #1
103 PS FAIL
DFDAU FAIL
104 PS FAIL
DFDAU FAIL
105 PS FAIL
DFDAU FAIL
DAP EPROM SUMCHECK #1
101 DAP SUM CK
DFDAU FAIL
DFDR DATA WRAPAROUND
102 DFDR WR AR
DFDAU FAIL
DFDR INTERRUPT FAILURE
10A DFDR INT
DFDAU FAIL
ANALOG INTERRUPT FAIL
10B ADC INT
DFDAU FAIL
DATA FRAME FAILURE
10D DATA FR
DFDAU FAIL
DAP TO FRONT PNL COM
301 DAP COM FA
DFDAU FAIL
DFDR FAILURE**
001 DFDR BITE
FDR FAIL
DFDR PLAYBACK**
502 DFDR PB
FDR FAIL
** THESE CODES ARE NOT LATCHED IN MEMORY
ESCAPE
ENTER
EJECT
NOTE: THE ABOVE CODES ARE ONLY A PARTIAL LIST, SHOWN AS

AN EXAMPLE ONLY. REFER TO THE AMM AND THE VENDOR
MANUALS FOR A COMPLETE LIST.
G63131BM
DFDAU (WITH QAR) FAILURE CODE

g63131bm
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
AIDS REPORTING
g63131bm
31.30 FLIGHT DATA RECORDER AIDS REPORTING
AIDS REPORTS - STANDARD

General
AIDS data received in the DFDAU are compiled in reports that are
available for display on the ACARS IDU, for printout on the
ACARS printer, or for transmission to the ground by ACARS.
AIDS system modes are determined by DFDAU CPU No 2 by

evaluating individual AIDS parameters, such as altitude, ground
speed, engine operating, etc. A cursory mode description is given in
the graphic.
AIDS Modes
All AIDS system functions are based on system (AIDS) modes. All
functions, such as exceedance tests, reasonability tests, report
generation, ACARS printer commands, output data formatting, etc,
are initiated and performed according to these modes.
AIDS MODES
0
1
2
MODE
OFF
ENGINE START
IDLE
3
4
5
6
TAXI
TAKE-OFF
CLIMB
CRUISE
STABLE CRUISE
EXTRA STABLE CRUISE
DESCENT
LOGIC
BOTH ENGINE START SWITCHES OFF OR LESS THAN 15%
EITHER ONE OF THE ENGINE START SWITCHES IS ON
AIRPLANE ON GROUND, GROUND SPEED LESS THAN 3 KTS, BOTH N2
GREATER THAN 50%
AIRPLANE ON GROUND, GROUND SPEED GREATER THAN 3 KTS
AIRPLANE ON GROUND, GROUND SPEED GREATER THAN 30 KTS
AIRPLANE IN AIR, CLIMB RATE GREATER THAN 300 RPM
ALTITUDE GREATER THAN 25,000 FT AND DOES NOT VARY MORE THAN
200 FT IN 5 MINUTES
ENTERED AFTER MODE 6 CRITERIA HAVE BEEN MAINTAINED FOR 5
MINUTES AND ALTITUDE DOES NOT VARY MORE THAN 100 FT.
ENTERED AFTER MODE 7 CRITERIA HAVE BEEN MAINTAINED FOR 10
MINUTES
DESCENT RATE GREATER THAN 200 FPM
M000844A.PST
STANDARD REPORTS
REPORT
GENERATION CRITERA
MODE OF
GENERATION
STORAGE REQUIREMENTS
IN MEMORY
AVAILABILITY FOR
DISPLAY
PRINTOUT
TRANSMISSION
TO GROUND
DATA INCLUDED
OR REMARKS
APU START
REPORT
AFTER EACH START ATTEMPT
4 LATEST REPORTS
O.R.
O.R.
ENGINE
START REPORT
AFTER EACH SUCCESSFUL

ENGINE START
8 LATEST SUCCESSFUL OR
UNSUCCESSFUL REPORTS
O.R.
O.R.
NT
APU REPORT
AT EACH TAKE-OFF
4 LATEST APU RUNS
O.R.
O.R.
QFT
APU DATA
TAKE OFF
IN MODE 4-TAKE-OFF, RADIO ALT

GREATER THAN 150 FT
3 LATEST REPORTS
O.R.
O.R.
QFT
ENGINE AND ESC DATA
CLIMB
IN MODE 5-CLIMB, ON PASSING

THROUGH 20,000 FT ALT
3 LATEST REPORTS
O.R.
O.R.
QFT
ENGINE AND ESC DATA
ON FIRST ENTRY TO MODE 7-STABLE

CRUISE. OVERWRITTEN ON ENTRY
TO MODE 9-EXTRA STABLE CRUISE
A MAX OF 9 REPORTS AFTER

PREDETERMINED INTERVALS
O.R.
O.R.
QFT
ENGINE, ECS AND

FLIGHT DATA
AFTER FIRST STABLE CRUISE REPORT
O.R.
O.R.
ON DEMAND FROM FLIGHT CREW
NA
O.R.
ON UPLINK REQUEST
STABLE CRUISE
ECS/
HYDRAULIC
3 LATEST REPORTS
NT
RPM, EGT, BAT V
ENGINE DATA AND

CONTROL STATUS
QFT WITH STABLE

CRUISE REPORT
QFT
ECS AND HYDRAULIC

DATA
QFT
FMCS CRUISE
PERFORMANCE
ON FIRST PASSING THROUGH 20,000 FT

ALT IN MODE-9 DESCENT
3 LATEST REPORTS
O.R.
O.R.
QFT
PURPOSE lS TO MEASURE
THE ACCURACY OF SPEED
CONTROL IN CRUISE
TOP OF
DESCENT
ON PASSING THROUGH 20,000 FT

3 LATEST REPORTS
O.R.
O.R.
QFT
ENGINE AND ECS

DATA
FLIGHT
SUMMARY
AT END OF FLIGHT, ON ENGINE

SHUT-DOWN
3 LATEST REPORTS
O.R.
NT
ENG DATA, AIDS LRU

AND REASONABILITY
STATUS, REPORTS
GENERATED
WEATHER
AUTOMATIC
AT END OF
FLIGHT, OR
O.R.
DEACTIVATED IN PRESENT CONFIGURATION
LEGEND: O.R. = ON REQUEST, FROM STORE AFT = AVAILABLE FOR TRANSMISSION

NT = NOT TRANSMITTED A = AUTOMATIC
NA = NOT AVAILABLE M = MANUAL COMMAND
QFT = QUEUED FOR TRANSMISSION R = AUTOMATIC, ON UPLINK REQUEST
63135ACA

g63135ac

(Continued)
AIDS MODES
10
11
MODE
LANDING
RUN-UP
(Continued)
LOGIC
AIRPLANE ON GROUND AFTER MODE 4 OR MODE 9
ENTERED FROM MODE 2 0R 3 WHEN NO OTHER MODE CRITERIA CAN BE
MET
Types of Reports
Report Storage
The graphic presents a summary of all available reports, compiled in

three charts. The chart on sheet 1 lists the standard reports generated
automatically and time of generation. On sheet 2, the chart lists
non-standard reports and the conditions triggering their generation.
The chart on sheet 3 lists the reports that can be generated only by
manual command from the flight crew, or by uplink request for the
ground.
All automatically generated reports are stored in non-volatile AIDS

data memory in the DFDAU.
Description of Reports
The charts list the reports available; under what conditions they are
generated; whether they are generated automatically (A), by manual
request from the flight crew (M), or by uplink request from the
ground (R); the number of reports stored in non-volatile memory as
well as requirements for storing; report availability for display,
printout or transmission to the ground; and a summary of data
included in the reports as well as special features.
M000844A.PST
STANDARD REPORTS
REPORT
GENERATION CRITERA
MODE OF
GENERATION
IN MEMORY
AVAILABILITY FOR
DISPLAY
PRINTOUT
TRANSMISSION
TO GROUND
DATA INCLUDED
OR REMARKS
APU START
REPORT
AFTER EACH START ATTEMPT
4 LATEST REPORTS
O.R.
O.R.
ENGINE
START REPORT
AFTER EACH SUCCESSFUL

ENGINE START
8 LATEST SUCCESSFUL OR
UNSUCCESSFUL REPORTS
O.R.
O.R.
NT
APU REPORT
AT EACH TAKE-OFF
4 LATEST APU RUNS
O.R.
O.R.
QFT
APU DATA
TAKE OFF
IN MODE 4-TAKE-OFF, RADIO ALT

GREATER THAN 150 FT
3 LATEST REPORTS
O.R.
O.R.
QFT
ENGINE AND ESC DATA
CLIMB
IN MODE 5-CLIMB, ON PASSING

THROUGH 20,000 FT ALT
3 LATEST REPORTS
O.R.
O.R.
QFT
ENGINE AND ESC DATA
ON FIRST ENTRY TO MODE 7-STABLE

CRUISE. OVERWRITTEN ON ENTRY
TO MODE 9-EXTRA STABLE CRUISE
A MAX OF 9 REPORTS AFTER

PREDETERMINED INTERVALS
O.R.
O.R.
QFT
ENGINE, ECS AND

FLIGHT DATA
AFTER FIRST STABLE CRUISE REPORT
O.R.
O.R.
ON DEMAND FROM FLIGHT CREW
NA
O.R.
ON UPLINK REQUEST
STABLE CRUISE
ECS/
HYDRAULIC
3 LATEST REPORTS
NT
RPM, EGT, BAT V
ENGINE DATA AND

CONTROL STATUS
QFT WITH STABLE

CRUISE REPORT
QFT
ECS AND HYDRAULIC

DATA
QFT
FMCS CRUISE
PERFORMANCE
ON FIRST PASSING THROUGH 20,000 FT

3 LATEST REPORTS
O.R.
O.R.
QFT
PURPOSE lS TO MEASURE
THE ACCURACY OF SPEED
CONTROL IN CRUISE
TOP OF
DESCENT
ON PASSING THROUGH 20,000 FT

3 LATEST REPORTS
O.R.
O.R.
QFT
ENGINE AND ECS

DATA
FLIGHT
SUMMARY
AT END OF FLIGHT, ON ENGINE

SHUT-DOWN
3 LATEST REPORTS
O.R.
NT
ENG DATA, AIDS LRU

AND REASONABILITY
STATUS, REPORTS
GENERATED
WEATHER
AUTOMATIC
AT END OF
FLIGHT, OR
O.R.
DEACTIVATED IN PRESENT CONFIGURATION
LEGEND: O.R. = ON REQUEST, FROM STORE AFT = AVAILABLE FOR TRANSMISSION

NT = NOT TRANSMITTED A = AUTOMATIC
NA = NOT AVAILABLE M = MANUAL COMMAND
QFT = QUEUED FOR TRANSMISSION R = AUTOMATIC, ON UPLINK REQUEST
63135ACA

g63135ac
(Continued)
AIDS REPORTS - NON-STANDARD

Notes:
M0008484.PST
NON - STANDARD REPORTS

REPORT
GENERATION CRITERIA
MODE OF
GENERATION IN MEMORY
AVAILABILITY FOR
DISPLAY
PRINTOUT
TRANSMISSION
TO GROUND
DATA INCLUDED
OR REMARKS
UNSUCCESSFUL
ENGINE START
WHEN FUEL CONTROL SWITCH

IS RETURNED TO CUTOFF IN
START MODE
8 LATEST REPORTS
O.R.
O.R.
NT
ALSO INCLUDED IN NOTIFICATION

REPORT AND THEN
TRANSMITTED TO GROUND
LIMIT
EXCEEDANCE
WHEN AN EXCEEDANCE IS
DETECTED
15 LATEST REPORTS STORED
O.R.
O.R.
NT
INCLUDED IN FLIGHT SUMMARY

REPORT. ALSO INCLUDED IN
NOTIFICATION REPORT AND
THEN TRANSMITTED TO GROUND
END OF
EXCEEDANCE
AT EXCEEDANCE TERMINATION
15 LATEST REPORTS STORED
O.R.
O.R.
QFT
ALSO INCLUDED IN FLIGHT

SUMMARY REPORT
OIL
CONSUMPTION
EXCEEDANCE
EXCESSIVE OIL CONSUMPTION

IN MODE 5, 6, 7, 8 AND 9
STORED
O.R.
O.R.
QFT
ALSO INCLUDED IN
VIBRATION
EXCEEDANCE
EXCESSIVE ENGINE VIBRATION

IN MODES 4, 5, 6, 7 AND 8
STORED
O.R.
O.R.
QFT
ALSO INCLUDED IN
EGT
DIVERGENCE
EXCESSIVE EGT DIVERGENCE

IN MODES 7 AND 8
STORED FOR FIRST

EXCEEDANCE
O.R.
O.R.
QFT
BASED ON EGT
DIVERGENCE COMPUTATION
MAINTENANCE
ACTION
IN MODES 3 THRU 10,

FAILURE ANNUNCIATION OF ANY
LRU IN DISCRETE WORD FROM
EICAS
STORED
O.R.
O.R.
QFT
A UNIQUE REPORT IS
GENERATED FOR EACH
INDIVIDUAL LRU
NOTIFICATION
IN THE EVENT OF AN
UNSUCCESSFUL ENGINE START,
LIMIT EXCCEEDANCE, OIL
CONSUMPTION EXCEEDANCE,
OR VIBRATION ENCEEDANCE
NOT STORED
NA
NA
QFT
REPORTS OCCURANCE
OF EVENT CAUSING THE
REPORT
LEGEND: O.R. = ON REQUEST FROM STORE

NT = NOT TRANSMITTED
NA = NOT AVAILABLE
QFT = QUEUED FOR TRANSMISSION
A = AUTOMATIC
63135ADA
AIDS REPORTS - NON-STANDARD

g63135ad
REQUESTED REPORTS
Notes:
M000849B.PST
REQUESTED REPORTS
REPORT
GENERATION CRITERIA
MODE OF
GENERATION
IN MEMORY
AVAILABILITY FOR
DISPLAY
PRINTOUT
O.R.
INITIATION BY FLIGHT CREW
NA
UPLINK REQUEST
NA
O.R.
UPLINK REQUEST
UPLINK REQUEST
UPLINK REQUEST
UPLINK REQUEST
INITIATION BY MAINTENANCE ON
THE GROUND, PRIOR TO START
OF ENGINE RUNS
TRANSMISSION
TO GROUND
NT
TREND DATA
ENGINE
PERFORMANCE
FLIGHT
CONTROL
ELECTRICAL
SYSTEMS
SELECTED
PARAMETERS
GROUND RUN
QFT
O.R.
NT
QFT
O.R.
O.R.
DATA INCLUDED
OR REMARKS
QUICK REVIEW OF ENGINE
HISTORY FOR PAST TEN FLIGHTS.
CONSISTS OF TAKE-OFF AND
STABLE CRUISE DATA,
UPDATED ONLY ONCE PER
FLIGHT
ENGINE DATA, ASSOCAITED
DISCRETE SWITCH POSITIONS,
GAS PATH RELATED PARAMETERS
NT
CONTROL SURFACE POSITIONS
QFT
O.R.
O.R.
NT
QFT
O.R.
O.R.
QFT
O.R.
O.R.
ON CONCLUSION
OF ENG
RUN
NT
ELECTRICAL POWER GENERATION

DATA
UP TO 6 PARAMETERS IN
ENGINEERING UNITS OR IN
RAW DATA
RUN TIMES AND FUEL USED.
GAS PATH SELECTED
PARAMETERS PRINTED OUT
IN BOTH RAW AND
NORMALISED VALUES
LEGEND: O.R. = ON REQUEST FROM STORE

NT = NOT TRANSMITTED
NA = NOT AVAILABLE
QFT = QUEUED FOR TRANSMISSION
M = MANUAL COMMAND
F = AUTOMATIC, ON UPLINK REQUEST
63135AEA
REQUESTED REPORTS
g63135ae
AIDS PARAMETER MONITORING AND SPECIAL COMPUTATIONS

General
The present graphic gives a brief description of tests performed on
parameters as well as the reports in which abnormal values are
included.
A summary of special computations also is given, as well as the
reports in which the computed values are included or used.
M0008434.PST
PARAMETER MONITORING
FUNCTION
DESCRIPTION
INCLUDED IN REPORT
MODE
PARAMETER REASONABILITY TEST ALL PREDICTABLE PARAMETERS TESTED

AGAINST SET VALUES
LIMIT EXCEEDANCE TESTS
SELECTED PARAMETERS TESTED AGAINST

LIMIT VALUES
FLIGHT SUMMARY REPORT

ALL MODES
EXCEPT OFF
EXCEEDANCE REPORT STORED

NOTIFICATION REPORT
DOWN LINKED VIA ACARS
SPECIAL COMPUTATIONS
PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION OF COMPUTATION
COMPUTED
IN MODE
INCLUDED IN REPORT
NORMALIZED
N1, N2, EGT, FUEL FLOW
PARAMETERS CORRECTED TO SEA LEVEL STATIC

STANDARD DAY VALUES
OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE

LIMIT (OATL)
COMPUTATION STARTS AT 150 FT RADIO ALTITUDE
TAKE-OFF
TREND DATA REPORT

EPR DERATE
COMPUTATION STARTS WHEN AIRPSEED GREATER

120 KTS FOR EACH ENGINE
TAKE-OFF
TAKE-OFF REPORT
EGT MARGIN
COMPUTED FOR EACH ENGINE
TAKE-OFF
TREND DATA REPORT

EGT DIVERGENCE
EGT DIVERGENCE FROM INITIAL EGT REFERENCE

COMPUTED EVERY 4 SECONDS FOR EACH ENGINE
N1, N2 EGT AND FUEL

FLOW DATA BASELINE
COMPUTATIONS DONE ACCORDING TO A

SPECIFIC EQUATION
OIL CONSUMPTION
DIFFERENCE OF OIL QUANTITY BETWEEN

TAKE-OFF AND LANDING FOR EACH ENGINE
TREND DATA REPORT

FUEL CONSUMPTION
DIFFERENCE OF FUEL QUANTITY BETWEEN

ENGINE START MODE AND OFF MODE
ENGINE/PERFORMANCE REPORT
STABLE CRUISE EGT DIVERGENCE REPORT

AND EXTRA
STORED AND DOWNLINKED
STABLE CRUISE VIA ACARS
TREND DATA REPORT
63135ABA
AIDS PARAMETER MONITORING AND SPECIAL

COMPUTATIONS
g63135ab
PARAMETER DISPLAY/PRINTOUT
Control
Parameter Display
Up to six parameters may be displayed, printed, or transmitted in

engineering units or in raw values when requested on the ACARS
IDU or by uplink. Data for this function is transmitted directly over
the DFDAU- ACARS IDU interface. The ACARS IDU screen is
touch-sensitive and the various pages can be called up by touching
the respective keys displayed on the screen.
Touching the DSPL key on the PARAMETER SELECT menu,

causes the PARAMETER DISPLAY menu to come up and the
parameters selected to be displayed in engineering units. The RAW
key on the PARAMETER SELECT menu changes the values
displayed to raw octal format; a subsequent actuation of the RAW
key reverts the display back to engineering units.
Page Selection
Control Functions
The PARAMETER DISPLAY page can be called up by starting from

the PRE-FLIGHT INITIALIZATION page and sequentially selecting
MAIN SYSTEM MENU, DATA ACQ MENU, PARAMETER
SELECT, AND PARAMETER DISPLAY.
The PTR key is provided to initiate printout of the parameters

displayed. Actuation of the SEND key initiates downlink ACARS
transmission of the parameters selected. The RTN key causes the
display to revert to PARAMETER SELECT menu. The MENU key
reverts the display back to MAIN MENU.
Parameter Selection
At the top of the page the PARAMETER SELECT menu are six
fields which allow up to six parameter mnemomic codes to be
inserted. Below these parameter fields, an alpha-numeric keyboard is
displayed along with control key functions.
Touching any of the six mnemonic codes displayed removes the
codes touched and enables the entry of a new codes by touching the
respective alpha-numeric characters, and subsequently actuating the
ENT key.
The BKSP key is used to move the cursor one space back.
M0008984.PST
DATA ACQUISITION MENU

ENG PERF REPORT
MAIN SYSTEM MENU
FLT CONTROL REPORT
ACARS
ECS/HYD REPORT
DFDAU
ELEC REPORT
PARAMETER SELECT
FIRST POWERED UP
TREND DATA REPORT

MAINT ENANCE MENU
INITIALISA TION
MENU
MENU
MAIN SYSTEM MENU
DATA ACQ MENU
PARAMETER PRINT OUT
REP . NO: 16
VH-OGA 2349/24MAR91 QF013
SYD
TAT: 27.0 SAT : 26.5 ALT: -61 MACH: ////
PARAMETER DISPALY
TLAR
EGTL
TLAL
N1R
A
D E
N O
MENU
Z
CLR
PARAMETER SELECT
N1L
EGTR
1
DISP
TLAL
TLAR
N1L
N1R
EGTL
EGTR
AQU: //://: MGDE ; 8 NO ; 2135ID ; 3
TLAL
0.0
0.0
31.0
32.0
RA W
PTR
BKSP
ENT
MENU
SEND
NIL
0.0
NIR
0.0
EGTL
31
EGTR
32
0.0
0.0
31
32
0.0
0.0
31
32
0.0
0.0
31
32
0.0
0.0
31
32
0.0
0.0
31
32
0.0
0.0
31
32
PARAMETER PRINT OUT 1
R TN
PARAMETER DISPLAY
TLAR
PRINTER WILL CONTINUE TO SEND

UPDATED REQUESTED DATA UNTIL
STOPPED BY REPEATED PRESS OF
THE "PTR" BUTTON ON THE PRINTER
OR PULLING THE ACARS PRINTER C/B
63135AFA
PARAMETER DISPLAY/PRINTOUT
g63135af
SAMPLE PARAMETER MNEMONIC CODES

General
The graphic shows a list of sample AIDS Parameter Mnemomic
codes. The full list for the applicable aircraft type can be obtained
from Qantas Technical Services.
M0008CF8.PST
PARAMETER
No.
CODE
DESCRIPTION
PARAMETER
No.
CODE
DESCRIPTION
AR
ALTITUDE RATE
15
CAS
COMPUTED AIRSPEED
FL
FLAP HANDLE POSITION
16
ADP
AIR DRIVEN PUMP
EM
EVENT MARKER DISCRETE
17
AID
AIRCRAFT NUMBER
GS
GROUND SPEED
18
ALT
PRESSURE ALTITUDE
GM
GROSS WEIGHT
19
AOA
ANGLE OF ATTACK
MH
MAGNETIC HEADING
20
AOQ
APU OIL QUANTITY
MN
MACH NUMBER
21
ARR
ALTITUDE RATE RIGHT
TA
TARGET AIRSPEED
22
EAE
EAROM/EEROM ERASE DISCRETE
TP
TOTAL PRESSURE
23
FFL
FUEL FLOW LEFT
10
SS
SPEED SELECTED
24
DEP
DEPARTURE STATION
11
WD
WIND DIRECTION
25
FFR
FUEL FLOW RIGHT
12
WS
WIND SPEED
26
FLT
FLIGHT NUMBER
13
VV
VERTICAL VELOCITY
27
FNO
FRAME NUMBER
14
AB1
ALTITUDE BARO No 1
28
FQA
FUEL QUANTITY AUX
G63131BF
SAMPLE PARAMETER MNEMONIC CODES

g63131bf
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
AIRCRAFT INTEGRATED DATA SYSTEM
Table of Contents
Subchapter
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MAINTENANCE PRACTICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Page
311
315
319
323
329
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
INTRODUCTION
g63131bf
31.35 AIRCRAFT INTEGRATED DATA SYSTEM INTRODUCTION
AIRCRAFT INTEGRATED DATA SYSTEM - GENERAL

General
The Aircraft Integrated Data System (AIDS) consists of an Optical
Quick Access Recorder. It receives data from the Flight Recorder
System via the Digital Flight Data Acquisition Unit. The data
recorded is the same as that recorded by the Digital Flight Data
Recorder but is stored on an optical 3.5 inch disk. This data can
easily be loaded onto a ground computer to permit detailed analysis
of airplane performance and maintenance requirements.
M0013234.PST
DIGITAL FLIGHT
DATA RECORDER
OPTICAL QUICK
ACCESS
RECORDER
DIGITAL FLIGHT
DATA ACQUISITION
UNIT
63135AGA
AIRCRAFT INTEGRATED DATA SYSTEM - GENERAL

g63135ag
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
COMPONENT LOCATIONS
g63135ag
31.35 AIRCRAFT INTEGRATED DATA SYSTEM COMPONENT LOCATIONS
LOCATIONS
Flight Deck
P11 circuit breaker panel.
AIDS AC circuit breaker at position J4
P61 side panel.
Optical Quick Access Recorder [OQAR (some aircraft)]

E2-2 Rack
Optical Quick Access Recorder [OQAR (some aircraft)]
E2-3 Rack
Digital Flight Data Acquisition Unit (DFDAU)
M0013237.PST
OVERHEAD CIRCUIT BREAKER PANEL (P11)

AIDS AC CB

OPTICAL QUICK ACCESS
RECORDER (SOME AIRCRAFT)
FLIGHT COMPARTMENT
RACK E2-2
OPTICAL QUICK ACCESS
RECORDER (SOME AIRCRAFT)
RACK E2-3
DIGITAL FLIGHT DATA
ACQUISITION UNIT
63135AHA
LOCATIONS
g63135ah
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
INTERFACE
g63135ah
31.35 AIRCRAFT INTEGRATED DATA SYSTEM INTERFACE
POWER AND SIGNAL FLOW

General
Power supply to the Optical Quick Access Recorder (OQAR) is
115V ac, 400 Hz from the Left AC Bus via the AIDS AC circuit
breaker.
The Digital Flight Data Acquisition Unit receives ARINC 429,
analog discrete and analog inputs. After formatting, the information
is stored by the Digital Flight Data Recorder. The same information
is also outputted to the OQAR.
The OQAR sends two discretes to the ACARS IDU. One is for
TAPE STATUS and the other for TAPE LOW.
M001323B.PST
J4
LEFT AC
BUS
AIDS AC
115V AC
ARINC,
DISCRETE,
AND
ANALOG
INPUTS
AUX
OUTPUT
TAPE
STATUS
TAPE LOW
ACARS IDU
DIGITAL FLIGHT
DATA ACQUISITION
UNIT
OPTICAL QUICK
ACCESS
RECORDER
63135AIA
POWER AND SIGNAL FLOW

g63135ai
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
g63135ai
31.35 AIRCRAFT INTEGRATED DATA SYSTEM COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
OPTICAL QUICK ACCESS RECORDER

Description
The Optical Quick Access Recorder (OQAR) is an airborne flight
data recorder which utilizes a 128Mbyte, ISO Standard 3.5 inch
rewrittable magneto-optical disk as the recording media. The OQAR
accepts data, via an ARINC 600 interface, in either bi-polar,
bi-phase, or Plessey formats, as determined by the aircraft wiring
installation. The OQAR accepts data at rates of from 64 to 512
words-per-second (WPS). The OQAR also incorporates standard EIA
232/422/485 interfaces, which allow the unit to communicate as an
intelligent device with other on-board units (such as ACARS and
on-ground maintenance support equipment (such as a lap-top or
desk-top personal computer).
The unit is housed in an aluminium 4 MCU or 12 ATR housing
which incorporates two NAS 622, Type T hold-down hooks and a
carrying handle.
Operating controls, optical drive and spare disk bracket are located
on the housing front panel behind a hinged locking door assembly.
The 16character alpha-numeric display is located directly above the
door assembly.
Interconnection of the OQAR to associated aircraft equipment is
accomplished via an ARINC 600 connector located on the rear of the
housing. A test connector, with associated protective cover, is located
on the front panel of the housing to allow for testing and fault
isolation of the OQAR.
M001323E.PST
73131ARA
OPTICAL QUICK ACCESS RECORDER

g73131ar
31.35 AIRCRAFT INTEGRATED DATA SYSTEM COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
OQAR CONTROLS AND INDICATIONS

General
Following is a table showing Controls and Indicators.
ITEM NO.
NOMENCLATURE
1
2
Lock
Display
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
MODE switch
+ switch
- switch
SET switch
EJECT switch
Fail indicator
Access Door
Spare disk slot
Data disk slot
12
ATE connector
Controls And Indicators

TYPE OF COMPONENT
FUNCTION
Mechanical latch
Secures door assembly in closed position
16-character alpha-numeric Provides visual display of system status, including BIT
display
results, date, time, and remaining recording capacity (in hours
of recording or percentage of disk capacity available).
Momentary contact
Selects OQAR operating modes
Momentary contact
Increment menu listings and adjustment parameters
Momentary contact
Decrement menu listings and adjustment parameters
Momentary contact
Selects display menu function and test parameters
Momentary contact
Ejects optical disk from the optical disk drive
Indicator lamps
Indicates system failure
Provides storage for a spare cartridge.
Provides storage for a spare cartridge.
Allows installation of the optical disk in the OQARs optical
disk drive.
Provides for connection of external Automatic Test Equipment
(ATE) for purposes of testing and fault isolation.
M0013241.PST
FAIL
TELEDYNE CONTROLS
MODE
+
_
SET
EJECT
10
11
12
63135AJA
OQAR CONTROLS AND INDICATIONS

g63135aj
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
MAINTENANCE PRACTICE
g63135aj
31.35 AIRCRAFT INTEGRATED DATA SYSTEM MAINTENANCE PRACTICE
POWER ON AND DISK CHANGE

Power-on Self Test
Disk Removal
Upon application of primary power, the OQAR executes a series of

Power-on Self Tests (POST) to verify the fidelity of critical processor
support functions. These tests include EPROM checksum verification,
initiation of intelligent hardware subsystems, and memory tests. If an
error is detected, the alphanumeric display will show an advisory
message. If the POST is successful, the alphanumeric display will
show the Insert Disk advisory message. The Insert Disk message
will remain on the display until an optical disk is installed and
detected by the OQAR, or until some other operator-initiated
function is selected. If a data cartridge is present when power is
applied OQAR Ready advisory message will be displayed.
When the OQAR is powered, the cartridge can be ejected by

pressing the EJECT switch. The Ejecting advisory message will
appear and the disk will be ejected after any pending writes to the
disk are completed.
It is also possible to manually eject the cartridge if the OQAR has
failed, or the cartridge must be ejected and power is not available. A
pin may be inserted through the manual eject access opening in the
front panel. Pushing this pin will eject the disk.
NOTE: The manual eject procedure should not be used unless

absolutely necessary.
Disk Insertion
Once the OQAR displays the Insert Disk advisory message, the
optical disk may be inserted.
Open the access door to gain access to the optical drive.
Insert a properly prepared optical disk into the optical drive.
When the optical drive accepts the disk, the Disk Detected
advisory message will be displayed on the alphanumeric display.
If the disk is not a valid data disk, an appropriate message will be
displayed.
After a brief time, the alphanumeric display will show the
OQAR Ready advisory message. At this time, the OQAR is
ready for operation and requires no further user interaction.
However, any of the operator-selectable functions available
through the OQAR Main Menu may be initiated at any time.
M0013244.PST
DISPLAY
FAIL
DISK
MANUAL
EJECT
ACCESS
FAIL INDICATOR
TELEDYNE CONTROLS
MODE
+
_
SET
EJECT
USE ONLY WHEN

ABSOLUTELY
NECESSARY
DISK
DRIVE
63135AMA
POWER ON AND DISK CHANGE

g63135am
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
AIRPLANE CONDITION MONITORING SYSTEM
Table of Contents
Subchapter
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
COMPONENT OPEARTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SYSTEM OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OPERATION PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Page
335
341
345
351
363
371
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
INTRODUCTION
g63135am
31.35 AIRPLANE CONDITION MONITORING SYSTEM INTRODUCTION
AIRPLANE CONDITION MONITORING SYSTEM-INTRODUCTION (RR 767)

General
The airplane condition monitoring system (ACMS) collects,
monitors, records, and distributes airplane performance data for
detailed system analysis.
The ACMS reports produced by the system are used for airplane
system trend analysis. Through trend analysis the engineering
department determines the rate of deterioration of a component
within a monitored system.
The system also monitors airplane and crew performance.
8004d738
REPORTS
ENGINEERING ANALYSIS
G63135BT
AIRPLANE CONDITION MONITORING SYSTEMINTRODUCTION (RR 767)

g63135bt
31.35 AIRPLANE CONDITION MONITORING SYSTEM INTRODUCTION
AIRPLANE CONDITION MONITORING SYSTEM (RR 767)

General
The airplane conditioning monitoring system (ACMS) consists of a
data management unit (DMU) and a quick access recorder (QAR).
The major component of the airplane condition monitoring system is
the data management unit. The DMU collects data from various
airplane systems, processes this data into a report format and upon a
request, sends these reports to the:
Quick access recorder (QAR)

Left or right control display unit (CDU)
Data loader connector
Multi-input printer
ACARS
Input data monitored comes from the following systems:
Fuel
Navigation
Indicating and recording
Auto pilot
Engines
Flight controls
Updating the DMU software or downloading of data is done through

the data loader connector on the flight deck P61 panel.
8004d741
FUEL
ACARS
NAVIGATION
IND/RECORDING
ENGINES
MULTI-INPUT
PRINTER
AUTO PILOT
FLT CONTROL
DATA MANAGEMENT UNIT
PENNY & GILES

DATA RECORDER
SOFTWARE DATA
LOADER CONNECTOR
QUICK ACCESS
RECORDER
TYPE D17666
LEFT OR RIGHT
CDU
LOCK
KEEP THIS ACCESS
PANEL CLOSED
POWER
QAR
G63135BU
AIRPLANE CONDITION MONITORING SYSTEM (RR 767)

g63135bu
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
COMPONENT LOCATIONS
g63135bu
31.35 AIRPLANE CONDITION MONITORING SYSTEM COMPONENT

LOCATIONS
ACMS-COMPONENT LOCATIONS (RR 767)

Data Management Unit (DMU)
The data management unit (DMU) is located on the E2-2 shelf in the
main equipment centre.
Quick Access Recorder (QAR)

It is located in the forward closet aft of the cockpit door (RR 767
aircraft only).
115V AC Circuit Breakers

The ACMS AC and PRINTER circuit breakers are located on P11-2
panel in the flight deck.
Multi-input Printer
The printer is located on the P8 centre console.
Control Display Units

The left and right control display units are located on the P9 panel.
Data Loader Connector

The connector is located on the P61 panel.
8004d75d
CONTROL DISPLAY UNITS

(LEFT AND RIGHT) (P9)
115V AC CIRCUIT
BREAKERS (P11-2)
DATA LOADER
CONNECTOR (P61)
DATA MANAGEMENT
UNIT (E2-2)
MULITPURPOSE
PRINTER (P8)
QUICK ACCESS
RECORDER (E2-2)
QUICK ACCESS
RECORDER
(FWD CLOSET)
G63135AO
ACMS-COMPONENT LOCATIONS (RR 767)

g63135ao
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
g63135ao

DESCRIPTION
ACMS - DATA MANAGEMENT UNIT (RR 767)

Purpose
The DMUs function is to provide for the collection, manipulation,
storage and distribution of data for the airplane condition monitoring
system (ACMS). The DMU collects airplane performance data from
the systems. The DMU then analyzes and sorts the data according to
the operators needs. The data is distributed automatically or manually
when requested, to ACARS, CDU, multi-input printer, or quick
access recorder.
CAUTION
Static sensitive. Do not handle before reading procedure
for handling electrostatic discharge sensitive devices
(20-41-01). It contains devices that can be damaged by
static discharges.
The DMU performs different management and analytical tasks to

satisfy individual operators requirements for the collection and
display of aircraft data.
The DMU is designed to be configured by the airline for their
specific needs. A portable data loader (PDL) is used to program the
DMU with software prepared by the airline.
Features
The yellow DMU FAIL lamp comes on for a DMU fault.
When the READ switch is pressed, the status display window
displays 888 and any fail codes in sequence.
An ATE connector is provided on the front panel for shop testing.
The DMU requires 115v ac, 400 Hz single phase.
8004d7e5
STATUS CODE
DISPLAY
IDENTIFICATION
PLACARD
DMU FAIL
INDICATOR
ESD LABEL
"READ" SWITCH
ATE CONNECTOR
HANDLE
G63135AP
ACMS - DATA MANAGEMENT UNIT (RR 767)

g63135ap

DESCRIPTION
ACMS - QUICK ACCESS RECORDER (RR 767)

Purpose
The quick access recorder (QAR) records flight data from the DMU
onto a magnetic tape. The QARs magnetic tape can be replayed for
reference or analysis.
Power
It gets 115v ac, 400 Hz single phase power from the ACMS AC
circuit breaker on the P11 panel.
With power applied to the airplane and a cartridge installed, the
QAR is ready to record. The QAR recording is manually controlled
by the CDU or automatically controlled by the ACMS DMU logic.
NOTE: The QAR does not erase previously recorded data,

therefore all cartridges should be bulk erased before use in
the QAR. When the cartridge is at end-of-tape, the QAR
will not operate until a new cartridge is installed.
BUSY - comes on when a load or unload operation is being

performed. When the QAR is in use the busy light comes on and
the cartridge cannot be ejected.
READY - comes on when the unit is operational with a cartridge
installed.
EJECT - push to eject the recording cartridge. The eject function
is inhibited when the busy indicator is on.
POWER ON - comes on when power is present.
CAUTION
Static sensitive. Do not handle before reading procedure
for handling electrostatic discharge sensitive devices
(20-41-01). It contains devices that can be damaged by
static discharges.
Capacity
The QAR has the capacity to store 14 hours of 128 channels of 12
bit words. The data is recorded on 1/4 inch cartridge containing 450
feet of magnetic tape.
Features
The front panel of the QAR has the following controls and
indications when the cartridge access door is open:
8004d7f9
PENNY & GILES

DATA RECORDER
QUICK ACCESS
RECORDER
READY
LOCK
BUSY
KEEP THIS ACCESS
PANEL CLOSED
EJECT
POWER
POWER
G43135BN
ACMS - QUICK ACCESS RECORDER (RR 767)

g43135bn
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
COMPONENT OPEARTION
g43135bn

OPEARTION
ACMS - SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM (RR 767)

Notes:
This graphic shows the interface between the data management unit
with the quick access recorder.
8004d802
RELAY
DRIVER
K2
BUSY
LAMP
DRIVER
LINE
DRIVER
POWER
ON
LINE
RECEIVER
24
ARINC 429
INPUTS
24
ARINC 429
INPUTS
EOT SENSOR
2 CHANNEL
R/W HEADS
READ/
WRITE
ERASE
I/F
DATA
TRIGGER
SYNC
TRIGGER
TAPE
TRANSPORT
READY
2 CHANNEL
ERASE HEADS
2 CHANNEL
R/W HEADS
CPU
STEPPER
MOTOR
BOT
SENSOR
EJECT
MOTOR
RECEIVER
CHANNEL
MODULE
MEMORY
MODULE 1
CPU 2
FORMATTER
STATIC
RAM
MODULE
RECEIVER
CHANNEL
MODULE
POWER
SUPPLY
TRANSPORT
CONTROL
EJECT
INTERNAL
SUPPLIES
QUICK ACCESS RECORDER (E1-5)

ACARS
CPU 1
28
DISCRETE
INPUTS
DISCRETE
INTERFACE
MODULE
POWER
SUPPLY
I/O
MODULE
ADL
PRINTER
READ
SWITCH
115V AC
CDU
BATTERY
PACK
FAILURE
LIGHT
CMC
INTERNAL
SUPPLIES
HEX CODES
DATA MANAGEMENT UNIT (E1-3)
G43135BB
ACMS - SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM (RR 767)

g43135bb

OPEARTION
ACMS - DMU OPERATIONS (RR 767)

Power
Power for the DMU is 115 volts from the left ac bus.
The purpose of the MEM-1 module is to store application software

for CPU-2. New application programs are downloaded to the MEM-1
module via an airborne data loader (ADL).
Data Inputs
The purpose of the static random access memory module (SRAM-1)

is to store flight reports.
Airplane information is received on ARINC 429 data buses to the

DMUs two receiver channel modules and a discrete interface
module. Each of the two receiver channel modules are capable of
receiving up to 24 ARINC 429 channels. The discrete interface
module is capable of up to 28 discrete input channels.
Memory Back-up Power

During a power interruption, +3 volts dc from the internal battery
pack is sent to CPU-2, SRAM-1 and to MEM-1 modules. This 3
volts dc is used to prevent loss of data that is stored in memory.
The receiver channel modules and the discrete interface module send
the digital and discrete inputs to central processor unit (CPU) #1.
The #1 CPU receives the inputs and preforms data scaling,
formatting and validity testing of all input parameters.
The shelf life of the cells is five years. The actual life based on eight
hours per day usage and 70 percent of rated current is approximately
three years. The battery pack is not a line replaceable item.
The CPU #1 downloads all input data to CPU #2. The CPUs buffer
all data and preform logic and processing decisions required to
control data flow to the output devices.
I/O Module
Memory
There are two separate memory storage modules in the DMU known
as:
Memory Module (MEM-1)
Static RAM Module (SRAM-1)
The I/O module contains a 4k, dual port RAM processor module, an
ARINC 429 bus, and a microprocessor. The microprocessor handles
the ARINC 429 buses between ACARS, control display unit,
airborne data loader, printer, central management computer, and the
data management unit.
The DMU FAIL light indicates the operational status of the DMU
and its power supply. Power supply monitor is done by comparing
the DMU power supply to a set voltage level supplied by the
batteries. If the DMU voltage falls below the designated level, the
DMU FAIL light comes on.
8004d81e
TO QAR
24
ARINC 429
INPUTS
24
ARINC 429
INPUTS
RECEIVER
CHANNEL
MODULE
MEMORY
MODULE 1
CPU 2
STATIC
RAM
MODULE
RECEIVER
CHANNEL
MODULE
ACARS
CPU 1
28
DISCRETE
INPUTS
DISCRETE
INTERFACE
MODULE
POWER
SUPPLY
CDU
I/O
MODULE
ADL
PRINTER
READ
SWITCH
115V AC
BATTERY
PACK
FAILURE
LIGHT
CMC
INTERNAL
SUPPLIES
HEX CODES
DATA MANAGEMENT UNIT (E1)
G43135AK

g43135ak

OPEARTION

(Continued)
I/O Module
(Continued)
The status of the DMU is shown on a light emitting diode (LED) on

the front panel of the DMU. A three digit failure code is shown
when the READ switch is pushed.
QAR Interface
The quick access recorder (QAR) interfaces with the DMU through a
series of four digital buses and two discrete lines. The DMU sends
flight data to the QAR in bi-polar form at a data rate of 6144 bits per
second (512 words per second).
The control bus turns on or off the QAR with a software command
or a manual command from the DMU. The data/status bus is used by
the DMU to send a status request to the QAR and to monitor the
status reply from the QAR.
A status discrete from the QAR sends a failure indication to the
DMU. When a predetermined remaining capacity is reached, a media
low discrete is sent to the DMU.
8004d81e
TO QAR
24
ARINC 429
INPUTS
24
ARINC 429
INPUTS
RECEIVER
CHANNEL
MODULE
MEMORY
MODULE 1
CPU 2
STATIC
RAM
MODULE
RECEIVER
CHANNEL
MODULE
ACARS
CPU 1
28
DISCRETE
INPUTS
DISCRETE
INTERFACE
MODULE
POWER
SUPPLY
CDU
I/O
MODULE
ADL
PRINTER
FAILURE
LIGHT
READ
SWITCH
115V AC
BATTERY
PACK
CMC
INTERNAL
SUPPLIES
HEX CODES
DATA MANAGEMENT UNIT (E1)
G43135AK

g43135ak
(Continued)

OPEARTION
ACMS - QAR OPERATIONS (RR 767)

Power
Processing
The quick access recorder (QAR) receives 115 volts from the left ac
bus.
The DMU sends a turn on control signal to the QAR. This control
signal allows for the inertia of the mechanical tape drive. The QAR
records under manual control or automatic control. Manual control
(continuous recording) is started by the flight crew via the CDU.
Automatic control (incremental recording) is under the control of the
ACMS DMU logic.
Digital Interface
The DMU/QAR interface is through four digital buses and two
discretes.
The DMU sends a negative frame pulse to the QAR. This occurs
during the first half of the last data bit, in each form of flight data.
This negative pulse is used by the sync trigger circuit to assure data
frame synchronization.
The data output from the DMU to the QARs data trigger circuit is a
bi-polar return to zero (RZ) format. The recording rate is one block
per second. The size of the block is selected through the application
program. The line driver circuit sends data/status from the QAR to
the DMU. The DMU monitors the data/status lines from the QAR at
a 4 second rate, The QAR furnishes 3 byte of status information to
the DMU by a manual request or automatically with software logic.
Status Discrete
The QAR sends a discrete status bit to the DMUs discrete interface
module. With power applied to the QAR and no faults detected, relay
K2 energizes and sends a 1 state to the DMU.
When a low tape condition (track #4) is sensed by the CPU, a low
tape discrete is sent by the line driver circuit to the DMU.
When data is sent to the central processing unit, the CPU performs a
self-test to check the validity of the data. The central processing unit
(CPU) contains the software to control the data flow within the
QAR. The CPU sends the data to the formatter.
Record
The formatter arranges the data into blocks to be recorded by the
tape drive assembly. The formatter sends the data to the
read/write/erase interface which sends the data to the correct record
channel. The formatter reads the recorded data for verification. The
formatter also signals the transport control when to step from track to
another.
The QAR records the data on a four track, 1/4 inch wide, computer
grade tape cartridge. The tape cartridge contains approximately 450
feet of tape and has a continuous record time of 14 hours.
The tape contains tape marks which are used as fill separators. The
tape marks are beginning of tape (BOT), end of tape (EOT), load
point (LP), and end writing (EW). The control logic develops a tape
low signal when the tape track #4 is reached.
8004d83b
K2
RELAY
DRIVER
LAMP
DRIVER
LINE
DRIVER
TO
DMU
BUSY
READY
POWER
ON
LINE
RECEIVER
DATA
TRIGGER
CPU
TAPE
TRANSPORT
EOT SENSOR
2 CHANNEL
R/W HEADS
2 CHANNEL
ERASE HEADS
READ/
WRITE/
ERASE
I/F
2 CHANNEL
R/W HEADS
SYNC
TRIGGER
BOT
SENSOR
STEPPER
MOTOR
EJECT
MOTOR
FORMATTER
115V AC
POWER
SUPPLY
TRANSPORT
CONTROL
EJECT
INTERNAL
SUPPLIES
QUICK ACCESS RECORDER (E1)
G43135AI

g43135ai

OPEARTION

(Continued)
Indications
The QAR has two indicator lights and an eject push-button which are
exposed when the cartridge access door is open. The lights come on
with a signal to the lamp driver from the CPU. The lights are
labeled:
BUSY - Which comes on when a load or unload operation is
being performed. When on, the QAR is still in use and the
cartridge cannot be ejected.
READY - Which comes on when the unit is operational.
Power ON - Which comes on when power is applied.
The eject switch is used to eject the recording cartridge. The action
of this switch is inhibited when the BUSY light is on.
8004d83b
K2
RELAY
DRIVER
LAMP
DRIVER
LINE
DRIVER
TO
DMU
BUSY
READY
POWER
ON
LINE
RECEIVER
DATA
TRIGGER
CPU
TAPE
TRANSPORT
EOT SENSOR
2 CHANNEL
R/W HEADS
2 CHANNEL
ERASE HEADS
READ/
WRITE/
ERASE
I/F
2 CHANNEL
R/W HEADS
SYNC
TRIGGER
BOT
SENSOR
STEPPER
MOTOR
EJECT
MOTOR
FORMATTER
115V AC
POWER
SUPPLY
TRANSPORT
CONTROL
EJECT
INTERNAL
SUPPLIES
QUICK ACCESS RECORDER (E1)
G43135AI

g43135ai
(Continued)
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
SYSTEM OPERATION
g43135ai
31.35 AIRPLANE CONDITION MONITORING SYSTEM SYSTEM OPERATION
ACMS - INTERFACE DIAGRAM (RR 767)

Notes:ACMS interface diagram showing power, discretes and data flow.
8004d844
L + R DME
LEFT & RIGHT FMC

CAPTS CLOCK
PVD
LEFT OR CENTER
EFIS SG
LEFT, RIGHT AND
CENTER IRU
LEFT OR RIGHT
EICAS COMPUTERS
LEFT, RIGHT AND

CENTER RA
LEFT, RIGHT AND

CENTER ILS
LEFT & RIGHT VOR
GPWC
PROPULSION MUXS
(EMMU)
LEFT & RIGHT ADC
DFDAU
ADF CONTROL PANELS

TMC
LEFT, RIGHT AND

CENTER FCC
FQPU
DMU
LEFT & RIGHT EEC
G63135AT
ACMS - INTERFACE DIAGRAM (RR 767)

g63135at
ACMS-DISCRETE INPUTS AND POWER (RR 767)

Discrete Inputs
The data management unit (DMU) receives discrete inputs from
these systems:
Quick access recorder (QAR):
Status
Tape low
Data loader enable
Air/ground relay
Input Power
The DMU receives 115v ac from the left main bus.
8004d850
INPUT POWER
PRINTER
115V AC
LEFT BUS
PRINTER (P8)
INPUT POWER
ACMS AC
CIRCUIT BREAKER
PANEL (P11 - 2)
INPUT POWER
STATUS
TAPE LOW
QAR (E2-2)
AIR/GND
POWER
AIR/GND
SYS 2
DATA LOADER
ENGAGE
DATA LOADER
CONNECTOR (P61)
DMU (E2-2)
G63135AU
ACMS-DISCRETE INPUTS AND POWER (RR 767)

g63135au
ACMS - DMU OUTPUT INTERFACE (RR 767)

General
The ACMS data can be downloaded to the following:
QAR
Multi-input printer
Portable data loader (through the data loader connector on P61)
ARINC Communications And Reporting System

(ACARS)
The DMU may upload or download data through ACARS.
QAR
The DMU sends ACMS reports to the QAR. This process is started
automatically by the DMU. The QAR stores the DMU reports on a
magnetic tape cartridge. The DMU interfaces with the QAR through
four data buses.
Multi-purpose Printer
The DMU can also send ACMS reports to the multi-purpose printer.
This can be manually started from either CDU or automatically
started by the DMU. The DMU has interfaces with each CDU and
the multi-purpose printer through two low speed ARINC 429 buses.
Data Loader
A portable data loader can be connected to the data connector on
P61. Operation of the data loader can download ACMS reports and
other data. In addition, changes to report requirements can be
uploaded. Interface between the data loader and DMU are through
two ARINC 429 data buses. The data loader must supply an enable
discrete to the DMU.
8004d869
LEFT CDU
RIGHT CDU
DOWNLOAD
DATA / STATUS
FRAME SYNCH
UPLOAD
CONTROL
DATA LOADER
ENABLE
DATA IN
STATUS
TAPE LOW
DATA LOADER
QAR
ACARS
DMU
MULTI - PURPOSE
PRINTER
G63135AV
ACMS - DMU OUTPUT INTERFACE (RR 767)

g63135av
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
OPERATION PROCEDURES
g63135av
31.35 AIRPLANE CONDITION MONITORING SYSTEM OPERATION

PROCEDURES
ACMS - APPLICATION PROGRAMS (RR 767)

General
The DMU stores two different application programs and thus
operates in two basic states. The two states are:
Basic application
Airline application
The basic application program performs functions which are not
dependent on the airline application program.
The airline engineering department makes the application program

with an IBM compatible PC and the application edit program. The
airborne data loader is used to load the new ACMS application
program.
The normal mode of operation is with the airline application
program. With the airline application program, menu functions are
programmable and are set by the airline engineering department.
NOTE: Only the QANTAS application program CDU pages will be

discussed.
Basic Default
The basic application program is active when:
An airline application program is not resident in memory.
The resident airline application program fails.
The basic application program is factory loaded and contains:
The control display unit (CDU) screens data.
The acquisition codes and tables.
Customization
The second state is referred to as the airline application. When an
airline application program is loaded, the basic application program
is deactivated. The basic program remains in memory and activates
when the airline application program fails.
8004d879
prog chng comp rdy xfer r/w hrdw
AIRLINE APPLICATION
ACMS
AIRBORNE DATA LOADER
AIRLINE GROUND
SUPPORT EQUIPMENT
STATUS
READ
FAIL
BASIC APPLICATION
TELEDYNE SUPPORT
EQUIPMENT
DATA MANAGEMENT UNIT

43135AOA
ACMS - APPLICATION PROGRAMS (RR 767)

g43135ao

PROCEDURES
ACMS - QANTAS MAIN MENU (RR 767)

General
The Qantas main menu is referred to as the airline application. When
an airline application program is loaded, the basic application
program is deactivated.
Access
Access to the ACMS - Qantas Main Menu is by selecting LSK 5L
on the CDU main menu page. As shown, this allows the selection of
either Required or Stored Reports, Reprogram, Help, Data Display,
ADL, Maintenance pages.
NOTE: The Qantas application program is subjected to change for

operation and maintenance requirements; therefore, the
menu format and display function may vary accordingly.
8004d886
ME N U
< F MC
< A CA RS
< A C MS
< ACT >

ME MO R Y >
ACMS QANTAS MAIN MENU

< REQ ---------------- REPORTS -------------DIR
< REPROGRAM
MENU
KEY
HELP
< DATA DISPLAY
D
S
P
Yw
< ADL
F
A
I
La
< MAINTENANCE
INIT
REF
RTE
CLB
CRZ
DES
DIR
INTC
LEGS
DEP
ARR
HOLD
PROG
MENU
FIX
PREV
PAGE
NEXT
PAGE
BRT
EXEC
+/-
SP
DEL
CLR
M
S
Gw
O
F
S
Tw
G63531BV
ACMS - QANTAS MAIN MENU (RR 767)

g63135bv

PROCEDURES
ACMS - QANTAS REPORTS REQUEST (RR 767)

General
There are different manually activated reports. They are:
Aircraft Performance
Engine Performance
APU Performance
Environmental Systems
Hydraulic systems
Electrical Systems
Wheels
These reports capture a snapshot of related data, with standard

header information.
Access
From the ACMS QANTAS MAIN MENU select LSK 1L <REQ
_ _ REPORTS. The ACMS REPORTS REQUESTS 1/2 screen
will be displayed, with selections for the Aircraft, Engine and APU
Performance Reports.
Press the CDU NEXT PAGE key to display the ACMS REPORT
REQUEST 2/2 screen, with selections for the Environmental,
Hydraulic and Electrical Systems, and Wheels Reports.
Request report
Select the LSK on the left side of the screen under the ACTIVATE
heading and adjacent to the name of the desired report. A
COMPLETE message will appear on the scratchpad for a short
time.
The report will be activated within one second of pressing the key. It
will then be collected and stored in the DMU. There is a counter on
the screen on the same line as the report name, which displays the
number of reports which have been activated during the current
flight.
Display report
To view the report, select the LSK on the right side of the screen
under the DISPLAY heading and adjacent to the report just
activated. This will display some details of the report, and provide
prompts for outputting the report (refer to QANTAS STORED
REPORTS for details).
Automatic Printing
When the reports are activated through the CDU, they are
automatically printed on the flight deck printer shortly after being
activated.
This function may be disabled or enabled as desired by selecting the
<AUTO or MANUAL> prompts on either ACMS REPORT
REQUEST screen.
8004d896
ACMS
REPORT
2/2
REQUEST
ACTIVATE
DISPLAY
< REQ ---------------- REPORTS -------------DIR
<
ENVIRONMENTAL
< REPROGRAM
<
HYDRAULIC
ELECTRICAL
WHEELS
HELP
<
< DATA DISPLAY

< ADL
PRINT MODE
MANUAL
AUTO
-----------------------------------< RETURN
< MAINTENANCE
< AUTO
ACMS
REPORT
1/2
REQUEST
ACTIVATE
DISPLAY
<
AIRCRAFT
<
ENGINE
NEXT
<
APU
PAGE
PRINT MODE
MANUAL
< AUTO
AUTO
-----------------------------------< RETURN
G63135BW

g63135bw

PROCEDURES

(Continued)
Automatic Printing
(Continued)
The current mode is displayed on the screen, and is reset to AUTO

after a power interrupt or at the beginning of a new flight.
8004d896
ACMS
REPORT
2/2
REQUEST
ACTIVATE
DISPLAY
< REQ ---------------- REPORTS -------------DIR
<
ENVIRONMENTAL
< REPROGRAM
<
HYDRAULIC
ELECTRICAL
WHEELS
HELP
<
< DATA DISPLAY

< ADL
PRINT MODE
MANUAL
AUTO
-----------------------------------< RETURN
< MAINTENANCE
< AUTO
ACMS
REPORT
1/2
REQUEST
ACTIVATE
DISPLAY
<
AIRCRAFT
<
ENGINE
NEXT
<
APU
PAGE
PRINT MODE
MANUAL
< AUTO
AUTO
-----------------------------------< RETURN
G63135BW

g63135bw
(Continued)

PROCEDURES
ACMS - QANTAS STORED REPORTS (RR 767)

General
It is possible to display a directory listing of reports stored in the
ACMS DMU. From the listing, an individual report may be accessed
and if desired, distributed to a peripheral device such as the printer
or the portable data loader (PDL).
Eight general report type groups are defined. Each group contains a
limited number of related report types.
The listing of reports may be for all flights, or it may be further
restricted to only the last (current) flights.
Access
From the ACMS QANTAS MAIN MENU select LSK 1R
REPORTSDIR>. The ACMS STORED REPORTS 1/2 menu
page will be displayed with selections for various groups of reports.
Press the CDU NEXT PAGE key to display more selections.
Hence, the desired group of reports can be selected on those
appropiate pages.
Select the corresponding right LSK, the last (current) flight selected
report will display. If the left LSK is pressed, the all flight selected
reports will show.
If there are no stored reports in the selection, the message NO
ENTRIES will be displayed on the CDU scratch pad.
8004d8a3
ACMS STORED REPORTS
APU
< REQ ---------------- REPORTS -------------DIR
<
< REPROGRAM
<
MISC SYSTEMS
< DATA DISPLAY
<
REPROGRAMMABLE RPTS
< ADL
<
HELP
2/2
>
FLIGHT SUMMARIES
ALL
THIS
FLIGHTS
FLIGHT
---------------------------------< RETURN
< MAINTENANCE
ACMS STORED REPORTS
1/2
<
ALL REPORTS
<
ENGINE PERFORMANCE
NEXT
<
AIRCRAFT PERFORMANCE
PAGE
<
>
ALL EXCEEDANCES
ALL
THIS
FLIGHTS
FLIGHT
---------------------------------< RETURN
G63135BX
ACMS - QANTAS STORED REPORTS (RR 767)

g63135bx

PROCEDURES
ACMS - QANTAS STORED REPORTS - PRINT (RR 767)

Stored Report Print
From the ACMS STORED REPORTS page, select the given
prompt with the adjacent LSK to display the desired report.
An APU Perfomance report of this flight is used as an example.
APU perf report

On this page there are five selective functions. They are:
< PRINTERThis will print the report immediately on the flight
desk printer. An example is also given for illustration purpose.
LOADER >This will flag the report to be downloaded to a disk
in the ADL.The downloading of reports to the ADL must be
manually initiated and will be discussed later.
< ACARSThis will downlink the report to the ground via
ACARS.
MCDU >This will display the report on the MCDU screen. Use
the NEXT PAGE and PREVIOUS function keys to view all
pages of the report.
< RETURNThis brings back to the ACMS STORED REPORTS
page.
8004d8ab
APU
PERF
ACMS - - APU PERFORMANCE REPORT No. 1
REPORT
REP
FLT
DATE
GMT
FLCT
ISC
FM
REASON
VH - OJQ 061844 21 FEB 96 QFA0008 KLAX YSSY

FLTCNT : 262 DMUSN : 17 ASID : 0094 MODE : PO
S / No
130
< PRINTER
LOADER
>
< ACARS
MCDU
>
< RETURN
N1
N2
EGT
IGV
P1T1
T12
T6T
HRS
4073
STARTS ABORTS
2595
53
ACTUAL
REDLINE
100 . 1
85 . 3
438 . 0
+++
+++
+++
110 . 8
103 . 2
700 . 0
QTY TEMP
81 . 8 230 . 8
ECS DEMAND
101
2042
FREQ
GEN 1
GEN 2
BAT
OIL
MESC
2781
400
400
VOLT
116
114
27 . 5
LOAD
44
38
36
TYPICAL PRINTOUT OF A STORED REPORT

G63135BY
ACMS - QANTAS STORED REPORTS - PRINT (RR 767)

g63135by

PROCEDURES
ACMS - QANTAS REPROGRAM (RR 767)

General
Using this REPROGRAM menu, the reprogrammable reports can be
manually processed by following the CDU screen instruction.
Access
From the ACMS QANTAS MAIN MENU select
<REPROGRAM. The ACMS ACCESS CONTROL screen will
be displayed prompting for the password.
Type the password characters. When the last character is pressed the
ACMS REPROGRAM MENU will automatically be displayed.
NOTE: Obtain current password from Maintenance Watch.
8004d8b7

< REQ ---------------- REPORTS -------------DIR
< REPROGRAM
HELP
< DATA DISPLAY

< ADL
< MAINTENANCE
ACMS
ACCESS CONTROL
CURRENT ACCESS: _ _ _ _ _
< PASSWORD
< RETURN
G63135BZ
ACMS - QANTAS REPROGRAM (RR 767)

g63135bz

PROCEDURES
ACMS - QANTAS MAIN MENU HELP (RR767)

Access
Select LSK 2R HELP> on ACMS QANTAS MAIN MENU,
ACMS HELP will display on screen.
Further select LSK 1L < MNEMONICS on ACMS HELP, eight
separate mnemonic groups shows on the ACMS MNEMONIC HELP
page.
8004d8c0

< REQ ---------------- REPORTS -------------DIR
< REPROGRAM
HELP
< DATA DISPLAY

< ADL
ACMS HELP
< MAINTENANCE
< MNEMONICS
< REPORTS
< RETURN
ACMS MNEMONIC HELP

< AIR DATA
< ENGINE
< CMC
WHEELS
HYDAULICS
ENVIROMENTAL
< FUEL
ELECTRICAL
SELECT TO PRINT HELP
< RETURN
G63135CA
ACMS - QANTAS MAIN MENU HELP (RR767)

g63135ca

PROCEDURES
ACMS - QANTAS DATA DISPLAY MENU (RR 767)

General
Using the ACMS DATA MENU, it is possible to display in real time
all data which is received by the ACMS DMU from other aircraft
systems, as well as data being sent to the Quick Access Recorder
(QAR).
Access and Data Display

By selecting <DATA DISPLAY from the ACMS QANTAS MAIN
MENU, the ACMS DATA MENU shows with five particular
functions on the screen. They are:
MNEMONICS
QAR
DITS
DISCRETES
PRINTOUT SETUP
< Mnemonics
The Mnemonic data display, selected from LSK 1L MNEMONICS
on the ACMS DATA MENU, is the most convenient form of viewing
ACMS data.
The digital information received on the ARINC 429 input ports is
converted and displayed in the appropriate engineering unit (EU) eg;
feet for altitude, C for temperature, kg for weight, etc. Each
parameter so converted has a name, or mnemonic, selected to be
easy to remember, eg; N1E1 for engine No.1 (fan) speed. Binary
parameters (usually Extracted Discrete parameters) which have a

1 or 0 value, may have a translation string displayed instead, eg;
ON or OFF, for a clearer indication of the parameters meaning.
NOTE: Not all data received by the ACMS, however, has an

assigned mnemonic.
< QAR Words
Select <QAR on the ACMS DATA MENU, the QAR WORD
DISPLAY screen will be displayed.
It is then possible to view the data that is being sent to the Quick
Access Recorder (QAR) for recording.
< DITS
Select <DITS on the ACMS DATA MENU, the DITS DATA
DISPLAY screen will be display.
This function allows any digital data which is available to the ACMS
to be displayed. This is useful for viewing the data which does not
have a parameter mnemonic assigned.
< Discretes
Select <DISCRETES on the ACMS DATA MENU, the
DISCRETE DISPLAY 1/3 screen will be displayed. Use the
NEXT PAGE and PREV PAGE CDU keys to view all 28
discretes, on three screens, as desired.
8004dc01

< REQ ---------------- REPORTS -------------DIR
< REPROGRAM
HELP
< DATA DISPLAY

< ADL
< MAINTENANCE
ACMS DATA MENU

< MNEMONICS
< QAR
< DITS
< DISCRETES
PRINTOUT SETUP >
---------------------------------< RETURN
G63135CB

g63135cc

PROCEDURES

(Continued)
< Discretes (Continued)

ACMS has 28 DISCRETE inputs. These are single, dedicated
inputs with a 1 or 0 state. The 1 state is normal or
unconnected. The 0 state is a positive indication of the specified
event or state, eg; AIR/GROUND, 0 = GROUND.
Printout setup >
This selection will bring up the ACMS DATA DISPLAY
PRINTOUT SETUP screen where the number of seconds of
printing data can be adjusted.
< Return
This selection will bring back to the ACMS QANTAS MAIN
MENU.
8004dc01
MNEMONIC DATA
DISPLAY
MNEMONIC
----------------
DITS DATA
DISPLAY
LBL
< ---
SD
--
PT
--
F
DATA
---------------
----------------
< ---
--
--
---------------
----------------
< ---
--
--
---------------
----------------
< ---
--
--
---------------
----------------
< -----------------------------------------------------< RETURN

1 SEC PRINT
< RETURN
VALUE
1 SEC PRINT
QAR
WORD
DISPLAY
DISCRETE DISPLAY
SF / WORD / FMT
< ---
DATA
------
< -
---
------
< -
---
------
< -
---
------
< -
---
------
-----------------------------------< RETURN
1 SEC PRINT
PORT
NAME
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
EICAS EVNT
VHF - C
VHF - L
VHF - R
HF - L
HF - R
NOSE SQUAT
<
AIR / GROUND
RETURN
1/3
STATE
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
1
0
1
1 SEC PRINT
G63135CC

g63135cc
(Continued)

PROCEDURES
ACMS - QANTAS ADL MENU (RR 767)

General
Download Reports
All of the six types of manually activated reports, and the five
programmable reports may be downloaded to a 3.5 disk in the
Airborne Data Loader (ADL). They are written to an ASCII format
text file which may be viewed on any PC, or transferred to a PC for
automatic processing.
The mode for downloading reports is set by default to the normal

APPEND, where the reports are added to the end of any existing
download file on the disk. Generally this mode should not be
changed, however if it is necessary to do so, select OVERWRITE>
and confirm that the mode has changed.
Procedure
Start
From the ACMS QANTAS MAIN MENU select <ADL. The

ACMS ADL MENU will be displayed.
Select <START. The ACMS ADL DOWNLOAD menu will be

displayed, with selections for various groups of reports.
Formatting Disk
Select the desired group of reports to be downloaded, and follow the

instructions on the screen (not shown).
An ordinary PC/DOS formatted 3.5 disk may be used for the

download, however it is possible to format an unformatted disk in
the aircraft ADL.
If it is desired to format a disk, select <FORMAT DISK and
follow the instructions on the screen (not shown).
While formatting is in progress the ADL PROG and RDY lights
and the disk access light are on. When formatting has completed,
these lights will extinguish and the ADL COMP light will come
on. Follow the instructions on the screen and return to the ACMS
ADL MENU.
While downloading is in progress the ADL PROG and RDY

lights will be on, the disk access light will be flashing, and there will
be a display of X% COMPLETE on the MCDU screen. When
complete, these lights will extinguish and the COMP light will
come on.
Follow the instructions on the screen, and return to the ACMS
QANTAS MAIN MENU.
NOTE: Formatting a disk in the ADL takes about 12 minutes.
8004dc19

< REQ ---------------- REPORTS -------------DIR
< REPROGRAM
HELP
< DATA DISPLAY

< ADL
< MAINTENANCE
ACMS
ACMS ADL MENU

< FORMAT DISK
<
DOWNLOAD REPORTS
< START
< RETURN
APPEND_ _
MODE: A
OVERWRITE
ADL
ALL
DOWNLOAD
REPORTS
<
ENGINE
<
AIRCRAFT PERFORMANCE
PERFORMANCE
<
MISC SYSTEMS
ALL
THIS
FLIGHTS
FLIGHT
-----------------------------------< RETURN
G63135CD
ACMS - QANTAS ADL MENU (RR 767)

g63135cd

PROCEDURES
ACMS - QANTAS MAINTENANCE MENU (RR 767)

General
The ACMS MAINTENANCE MENU provides facility for:
1. investigating the ACMS status.
2. recording data on magnetic tape in the QAR.
Access
From the ACMS QANTAS MAIN MENU, select
<MAINTENANCE. The ACMS MAINTENANCE MENU will
be displayed.
Several selections are available, as described below.
< System Status

This selection displays the status of the ACMS and attached primary
interfaces, giving an OK or FAIL indication. It also displays the
current software part number, and DMU part number and serial
number.
The current QAR recording track number, tape status and number of
output subframes of data are shown. The tape status will indicate
LOW when the QAR is recording on the 4th of its 4 recording
tracks. If the number of output subframes is incrementing, then data
is currently being sent to the QAR.
Select NEXT PAGE to view the second screen (not shown). This
gives more detailed information about DMU EPROM software
version, and the actual application software database version.
< Bus Status

This selection (screen not shown) displays the current activity status
of all ACMS input ports (busses), together with output status
information. The display shows bits 11 to 30 of each of the four
label 350 status words.
< DMU Faults

This selection (screen not shown) causes two further selections to be
displayed for the ACMS DMU fault codes. They are:
1. Current Faults this selection displays all currently active DMU
fault codes.
2. History Faults this selection displays all previously active DMU
fault codes, which have been detected since the DMU was last in
the workshop for repair.
< Port Status

This selection (screen not shown) is used to indicate the activity of
the input ports, these are listed by the Boeing port number.
< Status - QAR

This selection (screen not shown) displays the status of the QAR.
Tyres >
This selection (screen not shown) displays the status of the tyres
status.
8004dc26
ACMS MAINTENANCE MENU
< SYSTEM STATUS

< BUS STATUS
< REQ ---------------- REPORTS -------------DIR

< REPROGRAM
TYRES
< DMU FAULTS
< DATA DISPLAY
< PORT STATUS
< ADL
< STATUS
CONTROL >
- QAR -----------------------------------< RETURN
< MAINTENANCE
ACMS
03 : 45
SYSTEM
STATUS
1/2
22 FEB 96
VH - OJK
DMU
ACARS
ADL
PRINTER
DMU
P/N
S/N
SOFTWARE
OK
OK
OK
OK
QAR
FAIL
TAPE OK
TRACK
S / FR
2232000 - 02B
148
QF - ACMS - K20070
-----------------------------------< RETURN
PRINT
MANUAL QAR CONTROL

< ENABLE
DISABLE
CONT. CRUISE RECORDING
0 SEC. REMAINING
0
0
< ENABLE
DISABLE
GROUNG RECORDING TEST
0 SEC. REMAINING
1066 OUTPUT SUBFRAMES.
-----------------------------------< RETURN
G63135CE

g63135ce

PROCEDURES

(Continued)
QAR - control >

This selection displays the MANUAL QAR CONTROL menu.
There, a manual record can be made during en-route cruise flight
phase OR on the ground when the engines are NOT running.
NOTE: Data is sent automatically to the QAR any time when any
engine is running or being started or shutdown, except for
en-route cruise flight phase.
< Return
This will bring back to ACMS QANTAS MAIN MENU.
8004dc26
ACMS MAINTENANCE MENU
< SYSTEM STATUS

< BUS STATUS
< REQ ---------------- REPORTS -------------DIR

< REPROGRAM
TYRES
< DMU FAULTS
< DATA DISPLAY
< PORT STATUS
< ADL
< STATUS
CONTROL >
- QAR -----------------------------------< RETURN
< MAINTENANCE
ACMS
03 : 45
SYSTEM
STATUS
1/2
22 FEB 96
VH - OJK
DMU
ACARS
ADL
PRINTER
DMU
P/N
S/N
SOFTWARE
OK
OK
OK
OK
QAR
FAIL
TAPE OK
TRACK
S / FR
MANUAL QAR CONTROL

< ENABLE
DISABLE
CONT. CRUISE RECORDING
0 SEC. REMAINING
0
0
< ENABLE
DISABLE
GROUNG RECORDING TEST
0 SEC. REMAINING
2232000 - 02B
148
QF - ACMS - K20070
1066 OUTPUT SUBFRAMES.

-----------------------------------< RETURN
-----------------------------------< RETURN
PRINT
G63135CE

g63135ce
(Continued)

PROCEDURES
ACMS - DMU STATUS TEST (RR 767)

FAIL LED Indicator
The FAIL LED reflects the current DMU status only. It only
illuminates when a fault is detected and the fault is active.
System Status Code Display

A system buffer accumulates the system status codes. Push and hold
the read switch to show faults. The 3 digit display shows all failure
codes in sequence.
If there are no failures, the indicator reads FFF for one second,
888 for four seconds and then 000 to indicate no faults.
If a fault is present (active or inactive), then instead of code 000 it
will be shown as a 3 digit hexadecimal fault code for 4 seconds.
After four seconds the display will sequence to the next fault code
until all fault codes are shown. The presence of any active fault code
will turn on the fail lamp.
40A/40F Dits channels 9/14 DM4-1

410/418 Dits channels 15/23 DM4-1
419 Dits channel 0 DM4-2
430 Dits channel 23 DM4-2
901 CPU #2 sumcheck fail
902 CPU #2 flash memory sumcheck
903 Inter CPU communication
905 SRAM fail
912 I/O PROM sumcheck fail
914 I/O sanity maze fail
915 I/O external RAM fail
916 I/O internal timers fail
917 I/O ARINC interface fail
918 I/O dual-port RAM fail
The error code and status description are:
101 CPU #1 NVM sumcheck fail

102 CPU #1 EPROM sumcheck fail
103 DMU power supply bite +15v dc
104 DMU power supply bite -15v dc
105 DPU #1 data acquisition
106 Inter CPU communication
107 CPU #1 dits transmitter failure
108 SRAM battery failure
8004dc32
HEX CODE
READOUT
READ
SWITCH
FAIL LED
G63135CF
ACMS - DMU STATUS TEST (RR 767)

g63135cf

PROCEDURES
ACMS - ABBREVIATION/ACRONYM LIST (RR767)

Notes:This list is supplied for reference only.
8004dc3a
ACARS
- ARINC COMMUNICATION ADDRESSING AND REPORTING SYSTEM
ACMS
- AIRPLANE CONDITION MONITORING SYSTEM
PDL
- PORTABLE DATA LOADER
BOT
- BEGINNING OF TAPE
CPU
- CENTRAL PROCESSING UNIT
DITS
- DIGITAL INFORMATION TRANSFER SYSTEM
DMU
- DATA MANAGEMENT UNIT
EMMU
- ENGINE MONITOR MULTIPLEX UNIT
EOT
- END OF TAPE
EPROM
- ERASABLE PROGRAMMABLE READ-ONLY MEMORY
MEM
- MEMORY MODULE
QAR
- QUICK ACCESS RECORDER
RAM
- RANDOM ACCESS MEMORY
SRAM
- STATIC RANDOM ACCESS MEMORY
G63135CG
ACMS - ABBREVIATION/ACRONYM LIST (RR767)

g63135cg
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
CLOCKS
Table of Contents
Subchapter
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Page
405
409
413
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
INTRODUCTION
g63135cg
31.25 CLOCKS INTRODUCTION
CLOCKS
Description
Clock Controls
The electronic clocks are equipped with an internal quartz crystal

time base and controlled by a microprocessor. Captains and first
officers clocks are identical, and provide:
Each clock is set independently using GMT, ET, and CHR switches
located on the front face. The remote clock switch allows easy to
reach start/stop/reset control of the CHR (stopwatch) function.
A continuous display of Greenwich Mean Time (GMT)

A display on demand of elapsed time (ET) or chronograph time
(CHR)
On aircraft equipped with date function clocks: the day, month,
and year.
Display Ranges
GMT: 23 hours 59 minutes, ET: 99 hours 59 minutes, CHR: 99
minutes 59 seconds.
Power Supplies
Each clock is supplied by two 28 volt dc voltages from hot battery
bus and respective main bus. With main bus ON, hot battery bus
powers ALL clock functions. With main bus OFF, hot battery bus
powers ONLY quartz crystal time base and microprocessor time
calculations; front face time displays and GMT output bus are
disabled.
GMT ARINC 429 Digital Output

GMT data is provided to L and R FMC for display on the FMC
control and display units (CDUs). The Captains clock is the primary
GMT source for CDU displays. If it should fail, the F/Os clock is
used. The Captains GMT is also provided to the DFDAU for
transmission to the flight recorder.
NOTE: On aircraft fitted with the global positioning system (GPS),

the GPS will be the primary source for the CDU displays.
M0008298.PST
28V DC
HOT BAT. BUS
L CLOCK
TIME BASE
MAIN PWR DISTR PNL (P6)
28V DC
STBY BUS
GMT
CHRONOGRAPH
ST
CLOCK
TE
L CLOCK
IND
CONTROL
OVERHEAD CB PANEL (P11)
DIGITAL FLIGHT
DATA ACQUISITION
UNIT
CAPTAINS
CLOCK SWITCH
LEFT FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
COMPUTER
CAPTAINS CLOCK
(TIME FUNCTION)
28V DC
HOT BAT. BUS
R CLOCK
TIME BASE
CHR
FMC
INTERSYSTEM
BUSES
DATE
MAIN PWR DISTR PNL (P6)
60
DAY
28V DC
RIGHT BUS
MO/YR
50
10
GMT
GMT
R CLOCK
IND
OVERHEAD CB PANEL (P11)
ET/CHR
CLOCK
CHRONOGRAPH
CONTROL
40
RUN
20
30
HLD
RUN
HLDY
MSM
HSD
RESET
FIRST OFFICERS
CLOCK SWITCH
RIGHT FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
COMPUTER
GMT
LABEL 125 BCD
LABEL 150 BNR
FIRST OFFICERS CLOCK

(DATE FUNCTION)
63125AAA
CLOCKS
g63125aa
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
COMPONENT LOCATIONS
g63125aa
31.25 CLOCKS COMPONENT LOCATIONS
CLOCKS - COMPONENT LOCATIONS

General
Captains clock - on captains instrument panel (P1).
Captains clock switch - at left end of glareshield panel (P7).
First officers clock - on first officers instrument panel (P3).
First officers clock switch - at right end of glareshield panel (P7).
L and R clock indication circuit breakers - on overhead circuit
breaker panel (P11).
L and R clock time base circuit breakers - on main power
distribution panel (P6).
M00082C9.PST
OVERHEAD CIRCUIT BREAKER

PANEL (P11)
L AND R CLOCK
INDICATION CIRCUIT
BREAKERS
GLARESHIELD PANEL (P7)

CAPTS CLOCK SWITCH
F/OS CLOCK SWITCH
CLOCK
CLOCK
PANEL
PANEL
OFF
OFF
CHART
CHART
CAPTS INSTRUMENT PANEL (P1)

CAPTS CLOCK
F/OS INSTRUMENT PANEL (P3)
F/OS CLOCK
MAIN POWER DISTRIBUTION

PANEL (P6)
L AND R CLOCK
TIME BASE
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
63125ABA
CLOCKS - COMPONENT LOCATIONS

g63125ab
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
OPERATION
g63125ab
31.25 CLOCKS OPERATION
CLOCK OPERATION
Specifications
Dimensions
ET
Elapsed time is displayed by a 4-digit reflective LCD which indicates
hours and minutes. The ET display range is 00:00 to 99:59.
width 3.0 in., length 4.7 in., height 3.2 in.

Weight
2.0 lbs.
Electrical Current Consumption

28 volts dc - 90 ma (normal operation); 20 ma (stand-by operation)
CHR
When the chronograph is actuated, the ET/CHR display indicates the
minutes computed by the chronograph (the two right-hand digits)
instead of the elapsed time. The seconds are indicated by means of a
sweep second hand (one revolution in 60 sec.). As soon as the CHR
second hand is reset to zero, the CHR time is replaced by the ET
display. CHR display range is 0 min. 0 sec. to 99 min. 59 sec.
5 volts, 400 Hz, panel lighting - 1.1 amps
Clock Controls
Accuracy
The clock is accurate to +/- 1 second in 200 hours at 25 degrees C.
Clock Displays
GMT
Greenwich mean time is displayed by a 6-digit reflective liquid
crystal display (LCD) counter which indicates hours, minutes and
1/10 minutes. The GMT display range is 00:00.0 to 23:59.9.
GMT
A 4-position control switch provides the following functions:
RUN - The GMT counter accumulates starting at zero seconds.
HLD (hold) - Stops the GMT accumulation and holds the hours and
minutes previously accumulated. Seconds are held at zero.
SS (slow slew) - Sets the GMT accumulator seconds to zero and
advances the minutes but does not advance the hours. Slew rate is
one minute per second.
FS (fast slew) - Sets the GMT accumulator seconds to zero and
advances the hours but does not advance the minutes. Slew rate is
one hours per second.
M00082E0.PST
CHRONOGRAPH SWITCH
1ST PUSH : RUN
2ND PUSH : HOLD
3RD PUSH : RESET
CHRONOGRAPH SWEEP
SECOND HAND
GMT INDICATOR
DISPLAYS TIME IN 24 HOUR FORMAT IN
HOURS, MINUTES AND TENTHS OF MINUTES
RUN
TE
S
ELAPSED TIME
DISPLAY (HR : MIN)
OR CHRONOGRAPH
DISPLAY (MIN)
HLD
T HLD
RUN
ET
M
G SS
FS
RESET
ELAPSED TIME
CONTROL SWITCH
(RUN, HOLD, RESET)
GMT SELECTOR
TEST - DISPLAYS 88:88.8 ON GMT DISPLAY
AND 88:88 ON ET/CHR DISPLAY
RUN - STARTS GMT INDICATOR COUNTING IN
HOURS AND MINUTES
NOTE :
CLOCK IS SHOWN WITH
GMT = 08 HR 43.9 MIN
ET = 99 HR 59 MIN
CHR = RESET STATE
(SWEEP SECOND HAND AT 60)
HLD (HOLD) - STOPS GMT INDICATOR TIME

AND SETS SECONDS TO ZERO
SS (SLOW SLEW) - ADVANCES GMT MINUTES;
TENTHS OF MINUTE ARE SET TO ZERO
JAEGER 65806-002-1
BOEING S283T120-1
FS (FAST SLEW) - ADVANCES GMT HOURS;

TENTHS OF MINUTES ARE SET TO ZERO
63125ACA
CLOCK OPERATION
g63125ac
CLOCK OPERATION
(Continued)
ET
A 3-position control switch provides the following functions:
RUN - Allows the ET to accumulate time beginning from the time
that is in the ET accumulator.
HLD (Hold) - Stops the ET accumulator and holds the display at the
time previously accumulated.
RESET - Blanks the ET display and sets the ET accumulator to zero
time. This position is spring-loaded to return to HLD.
CHR
A push button switch on the front face actuates the chronograph. The
chronograph may also be controlled by the remote clock switch on
the glareshield (not shown). Chronograph switch control is as
follows:
The first push starts the chronograph from zero seconds.
The second push holds the CHR time accumulator, the numeric
displays and the sweep second hand.
The third push returns the sweep second hand to zero, resets the
CHR time accumulator to zero, and returns the ET/CHR display to
ET.
Clock Operating Modes

GMT Reset and Start Procedure
Initial application of power causes all functions to return to zero and
hold. ET and CHR functions are held at zero until GMT is reset as
follows:
Rotate GMT switch to FS to set correct hours, and SS to set correct
minutes. Seconds are automatically initialized to zero. Set GMT
switch to RUN to start normal operation.
ET Reset and Start Procedure

Rotate ET switch momentarily to RESET to clear the display, then to
RUN to start accumulating time. ET accumulation continues even
while CHR is being used.
CHR Mode
The first actuation of either CHR switch or remote clock switch
interrupts the ET display and replaces it with the CHR minutes
counter, and starts the sweep second hand. The second actuation
holds the display and second hand. The third actuation returns the
second hand to zero and the display to ET.
Failure Modes
All failures result in blank displays, stopped sweep second hand, and
disabled GMT digital output.
M00082E0.PST
CHRONOGRAPH SWITCH
1ST PUSH : RUN
2ND PUSH : HOLD
3RD PUSH : RESET
CHRONOGRAPH SWEEP
SECOND HAND
GMT INDICATOR
RUN
TE
S
ELAPSED TIME
DISPLAY (HR : MIN)
OR CHRONOGRAPH
DISPLAY (MIN)
HLD
T HLD
RUN
ET
M
G SS
FS
RESET
ELAPSED TIME
CONTROL SWITCH
(RUN, HOLD, RESET)
GMT SELECTOR
HOURS AND MINUTES
NOTE :
CLOCK IS SHOWN WITH
ET = 99 HR 59 MIN
CHR = RESET STATE

JAEGER 65806-002-1
BOEING S283T120-1

63125ACA
CLOCK OPERATION
g63125ac
(Continued)
CLOCK OPERATION
(Continued)
Failure Modes (Continued)

Airplane DC power failure - Re-application of power restores all
functions to the correct times without loss of accuracy.
Hot battery failure - Re-application of power causes all functions to
return to zero and hold until the GMT reset and start procedure is
invoked (described above).
Master time base or program failure - Replace clock.
M00082E0.PST
CHRONOGRAPH SWITCH
1ST PUSH : RUN
2ND PUSH : HOLD
3RD PUSH : RESET
CHRONOGRAPH SWEEP
SECOND HAND
GMT INDICATOR
RUN
TE
S
ELAPSED TIME
DISPLAY (HR : MIN)
OR CHRONOGRAPH
DISPLAY (MIN)
HLD
T HLD
RUN
ET
M
G SS
FS
RESET
ELAPSED TIME
CONTROL SWITCH
(RUN, HOLD, RESET)
GMT SELECTOR
HOURS AND MINUTES
NOTE :
CLOCK IS SHOWN WITH
ET = 99 HR 59 MIN
CHR = RESET STATE

JAEGER 65806-002-1
BOEING S283T120-1

63125ACA
CLOCK OPERATION
g63125ac
(Continued)
CLOCK CONTROLS AND INDICATORS WITH DATE FUNCTION

General
The clock shows GMT or alternating date format on the GMT/DATE
display. It also has the capability to measure elapsed time (ET) and
has a chronometer (CHR) function that can be displayed on the
ET/CHR display.
Characteristics
Operational characteristics of the clock are:
Accuracy of +/- one second per two hundred hours at 25 degrees
C.
Power use of displays is 0.2 watts.
Power use of timebase is 0.6 watts.
Clock Power
Each clock receives 28 volts dc from two sources. The CLOCK
TIME BASE circuit breaker, located on the main power distribution
panel P6, supplies 28 vdc from the HOT BAT BUS . The CLOCK
INDICATION circuit breaker located on P11, supplies 28 vdc from
the standby bus for the captains clock and, from the Right dc bus
for the first officers clock.
The CLOCK TIME BASE voltage is used to power all clock
functions. The CLOCK INDICATION voltage is monitored for
presence by the clock optoelectric voltage detector. With the
indication voltage present the hot battery bus powers ALL clock
functions. With the loss of the indication voltage the hot battery bus
only powers the quartz crystal time base and microprocessor time
calculations; front face time displays and GMT output buses are
disabled.
Clock Initialization
The time keeping functions of the clock do not automatically start
when power is applied. First the clock microprocessor must be
initialized by setting the time of day. The clock starts operation when
the set switch is returned to the run position after setting the correct
time.
GMT- Date Display

The upper display labeled GMT, displays GMT or the date.
GMT time is displayed when the clock is first initialized or is
alternately selected when the date switch is pressed. When GMT
time is selected the upper display continuously displays time from 00
hours and 00 minutes (00:00), to 23 hours and 59 minutes (23:59).
The date replaces the GMT time when the clock is set to the date
mode. The date mode is selected by pressing the date control switch
labeled DATE. After a one-second delay, (day/month), and then
(blank/year) are shown alternately for one second each.
During the first interval, day is shown, 1 to 31, by the two left-hand
digits. Month. 1 to 12, is displayed by the two right digits. During
the second interval, year, 00 to 99 is displayed by the two right
digits.
M000834E.PST
DATE CONTROL
SWITCH
CHRONOGRAPH SWITCH
60
GMT / DATE
DISPLAY
DAY MO / YR
50
CHRONOGRAPH SWEEP
10
ELAPSED TIME
GMT
SECOND HAND
DISPLAY (HR : MIN)

OR CHRONOGRAPH
ET / CHR
40
DISPLAY (MIN)
20
N
RUN
HLD
30
ET
SE
HLD Y
MS M
RESET
ELAPSED TIME
HS D
GMT / DATE
CONTROL SWITCH
JAEGER 65806-002-1
BOEING S283T120-1
CONTROL SWITCH
63125AGA
CLOCK CONTROLS AND INDICATORS WITH DATE

FUNCTION
g63125ag

(Continued)
GMT- Date Display
(Continued)
The colon used on the GMT display is removed in the date mode.
The date updates at 23:59 GMT. GMT is shown again on the upper
LCD when the date switch is pushed a second time.
Pressing the Date pushbutton again resumes the display of GMT
time.
GMT- Date Set Control Switch

The GMT/Date control switch is labeled SET. This switch is used to
set both the GMT and the date. The switch has four positions:
RUN
HLD Y (hold / year)
MS M (minutes slew / month)
HS D (hours slew / day)
Setting the GMT Time

To set the GMT time, select the GMT time display by pressing the
date switch. Selecting the HS D position of the SET switch causes
the hours display to slew (advance) at a rate of one hour per second.
The minutes display is held at its present shown value. Once the
hours has been set the switch is rotated to the MS M position.
Selecting the MS M position of the SET switch causes the minute
display to slew (advance) at a rate of one minute per second. The
hours display is held at its present value. Once the minutes are set
the switch is rotated to the HOLD position.
Selecting the HLD Y with the SET switch will hold the GMT display
at its present shown value.
The RUN position of the SET switch is the normal operational
setting. GMT is shown continuously.
Setting the Date

To set the date, use the date control switch and the GMT/Date
control switch. The date control functions (day, month and year) are
shown by D, M, and Y. They are adjacent to the GMT control
functions: HS, MS and HLD.
This sequence is used to set the date:
Push the date switch one time with the GMT switch set to RUN.
This replaces the GMT time display with the date display.
Move the GMT/Control switch to the D position. The
(day/month) display is now shown in the upper clock window.
The two left digits update one day per second. Move the switch
out of this position when the desired day is displayed.
Turn the GMT/Control switch to the M position. The (day/month)
display remains in the upper clock display window. Month is
updated in the two right digits. Move the switch out of this
position when the desired month is displayed.
Turn the GMT/DATE control switch to Y. The (blank/year)
display is now shown in the upper clock display window. Year is
updated in the two right digits. Move the switch out of this
position when the desired year is displayed.
There is no required sequence for these steps. After the switch has
been set the last time, return the GMT/Date control switch to the
RUN position.
M000834E.PST
DATE CONTROL
SWITCH
CHRONOGRAPH SWITCH
60
GMT / DATE
DISPLAY
DAY MO / YR
50
CHRONOGRAPH SWEEP
10
ELAPSED TIME
GMT
SECOND HAND
DISPLAY (HR : MIN)

OR CHRONOGRAPH
ET / CHR
40
DISPLAY (MIN)
20
N
RUN
HLD
30
ET
SE
HLD Y
MS M
RESET
ELAPSED TIME
HS D
GMT / DATE
CONTROL SWITCH
JAEGER 65806-002-1
BOEING S283T120-1
CONTROL SWITCH
63125AGA

FUNCTION
g63125ag
(Continued)

(Continued)
Switching between GMT time and Date Displays

When the clock is first initialized the clock upper display will display
GMT time. The clock remains in the display mode until the date
switch is pressed. The DATE switch alternately selects between
displaying GMT time or the date. When setting GMT time or the
date the DATE switch must first be used to select the desired display
mode.
ET - CHR Display
Elapsed time and chronograph time are displayed in the ET/CHR
display. The ET display is controlled by the elapsed Time control
switch. The CHR display is controlled by the chronometer control
switch or either of the glaresheild clock switches.
Elapsed time display is activated by moving the ET switch from the
HLD position to the run position. Elapsed time is displayed, in hours
and minutes, from 00 hours and 00 minutes (00:00), to 99 hours and
59 minutes (99:59).
The chronograph time keeping function of the ET/CHR display is
activated by pressing the CHR pushbutton.
Chronograph time is displayed in the ET/CHR display, in minutes,
from 00 minutes (00:00) to 99 minutes (00:99). The seconds
accumulated in the chronograph mode are shown by the sweep
second hand.
Pressing any of the CHR pushbuttons a second time will stop the
accumulation of time. Pressing any of the CHR pushbuttons a third
time resets the chronograph time base, and the sweep second hand
will return to the zero seconds.
The chronograph time display has priority over elapsed time display.
If elapsed time base is accumulating, and the chronograph time is
selected, the ET/CHR display will change to zero, the begin
accumulating and display chronograph time. The elapsed time base
will continue to accumulate. When the chronograph time is reset,
elapsed time will reapear in the ET/CHR display.
Elapsed Time Control Switch

The elapsed time control switch is labeled ET. The switch has a
RUN, HLD (hold) and RESET position. The switch is used to start,
stop, restart, or reset the elapsed time accumulator. The ET switch
operation is as follows:
In the RESET position, the elapsed time display is blank and the
elapsed time accumulator is set to zero.
The HLD position of the switch causes the elapsed time shown to
hold at the present value.
In the RUN position, time is accumulated from the last hold or
reset condition. The elapsed time shown advances from this value.
M000834E.PST
DATE CONTROL
SWITCH
CHRONOGRAPH SWITCH
60
GMT / DATE
DISPLAY
DAY MO / YR
50
CHRONOGRAPH SWEEP
10
ELAPSED TIME
GMT
SECOND HAND
DISPLAY (HR : MIN)

OR CHRONOGRAPH
ET / CHR
40
DISPLAY (MIN)
20
N
RUN
HLD
30
ET
SE
HLD Y
MS M
RESET
ELAPSED TIME
HS D
GMT / DATE
CONTROL SWITCH
JAEGER 65806-002-1
BOEING S283T120-1
CONTROL SWITCH
63125AGA

FUNCTION
g63125ag
(Continued)

(Continued)
Chronometer Function Control Switches

The clock CHR control switch is in parallel with the remote clock
switches located on the glaresheild (P7). Any one of these switches
will start, stop, and reset the chronometer functions in the following
manner.
Push any switch to start the chronometer.
Push any switch a second time to hold the chronometer
accumulator and display.
Push any switch a third time to reset the chronometer
accumulator to zero and return the sweep hand to the start
position. Elapsed time is shown. The display stays blank if the
elapsed time accumulator contents are zero.
Chronometer operations replace the displays of elapsed time while
the chronometer is accumulating. This does not affect the internal
operation of the elapsed time accumulator.
M000834E.PST
DATE CONTROL
SWITCH
CHRONOGRAPH SWITCH
60
GMT / DATE
DISPLAY
DAY MO / YR
50
CHRONOGRAPH SWEEP
10
ELAPSED TIME
GMT
SECOND HAND
DISPLAY (HR : MIN)

OR CHRONOGRAPH
ET / CHR
40
DISPLAY (MIN)
20
N
RUN
HLD
30
ET
SE
HLD Y
MS M
RESET
ELAPSED TIME
HS D
GMT / DATE
CONTROL SWITCH
JAEGER 65806-002-1
BOEING S283T120-1
CONTROL SWITCH
63125AGA

FUNCTION
g63125ag
(Continued)
CLOCKS - SCHEMATIC
General
Controls
The following two graphics show the schematics for the two different
configurations of clocks that are available:
GMT, ET, CHR, and remote CLOCK switches provide electrical

grounds to the microprocessor logic.
Clocks without date function.

Clocks with date function.
The first graphic shows the clock schematic without the date
function, where the second graphic shows the clock schematic with
the date function.
Control Sequence
The hot battery bus supplies 28 volts dc to both clocks through
separate circuit breakers. STBY and right 28 volt dc busses do not
supply power to the clock functions but are monitored by an
optoelectric voltage detector. In the event of a STBY or right 28 volt
dc bus failure, the optoelectric voltage detector cuts off power to the
display drivers, sweep second-hand stepping motor, and ARINC 429
GMT output driver, thereby reducing the load on the hot battery bus
from 90 to 20 ma. The microprocessor time base computations
continue as long as the hot battery bus is powered.
Conditioning is accomplished by electromagnetic interference filters
to reduce voltage spikes.
On clocks with the date function, the SET, DATE, ET and CHR and
remote CLOCK switches provide electrical grounds to the
microprocessor logic.
Microprocessor
(Microprocessor hardware is not shown; software computations are
depicted as functional blocks.) The microprocessor computes GMT
(or if applicable, DATE/MONTH), ET, and CHR time data upon
actuation of the respective control switches. The time information to
be displayed is formatted for each particular indicator interface
before it is output.
Displays
GMT (or if applicable, DATE/MONTH) and ET/CHR time is output
by the microprocessor to serial-to-parallel registers and displayed on
five-position and four-position liquid crystal displays (LCD)
respectively. CHR seconds are displayed by the sweep second-hand
which is driven by a stepping motor.
Timing Reference
An internal quartz crystal provides a hardware timing reference to
the microprocessor for software time base generation.
M001324B.PST
.
605-M44611
NC
GENERATE
TIME
BASE
QUARTZ
CRYSTAL
CLOCK
15V DC
FREQUENCY
TEST
RUN
HLD
GMT
SS
COMPUTE
GMT
GMT
DISPLAY
CONTROL
COMPUTE
ET
ET/CHR
DISPLAY
CONTROL
SERIAL TO
PARALLEL
REGISTER
DISPLAY
DRIVER
GMT
LCD
FS
SERIAL TO
PARALLEL
REGISTER
DISPLAY
DRIVER
ET/CHR
LCD
RUN
F/F
CHR
F/F
RUN/HOLD/RESET
12V DC
33-13-01 SH 3
0 TO 5V AC
OPTOELECTRIC
VOLTAGE
DETECTOR
28V DC
STBY BUS
SEC 2
C573
L CLOCK
INDICATION (J9)
P11-2
EMI
FILTER
RUN
HLD
SS
FS
12V DC
RUN/HOLD/RESET
S320
CAPT
CLOCK (P7)
G
RESET
15V DC
COMPUTE
CHR
ET
HLD
RESET
REMOTE
ST
HLD
TE
RUN
ET
CHRONO
DISPLAY
CONTROL
MOTOR
DRIVE
STEPPING
MOTOR
CHRONO
POINTER
15V DC
CONTROL
POWER
SUPPLY
15V DC
CB PNL ASSY
GMT
DIGITAL
DATA
28V DC
HOT BAT.
BUS
C563
L CLOCK
TIME BASE (G3)
EMI
FILTER
28V DC
HOT BAT.
BUS
C576
R CLOCK
TIME BASE (G4)
POWER
SUPPLY
ARINC 429
OUTPUT
DRIVER
GMT OUTPUT DATA
M134 LEFT FLT

MGT CMPTR
(E2-2)
5V DC (P)
SOFTWARE
P6 MN PWR DISTR
HARDWARE
N2
CAPTAIN CLOCK (P1)
CLOCK
M138 DGTL FLT

DATA ACQ UNIT
(E2-3)
INTERSYSTEM
BUSES
S321
F/O
CLOCK (P7)
33-13-01 SH 3
0 TO 5V AC
INTERNALS
SAME AS
N2
28V DC
R BUS
C574
R CLOCK
INDICATION (J36)
P11-5
CB PNL ASSY
N42
M135 RIGHT FLT

MGT CMPTR
(E2-3)
FIRST OFFICER CLOCK (P3)
63125ADA
CLOCKS - SCHEMATIC
g63125ah
CLOCKS - SCHEMATIC
(Continued)
GMT Digital Data Output

GMT (and if applicable, DATE/MONTH) data is sent over the
ARINC 429 data bus to the flight management computer (FMC) and
the digital flight data acquisition unit (DFDAU). The data is
transmitted in sequence as follows: one word BCD (Binary Coded
Decimal), followed by one word BNR (Binary Numerical Reference),
and so on for a total of 10 words per second (5 x BCD and 5 x
BNR).
ARINC 429 label 125 is BCD GMT to +/-0.1 minute resolution.
ARINC 429 label 150 is BNR GMT to +/-1 second resolution.
M001324B.PST
FREQUENCY
3
NC
CHR
GENERATE
TIME
BASE
QUARTZ
CRYSTAL
CLOCK
NC
RUN
1
COMPUTE
GMT/
DATE
HLDY
MSM
SET
HSD
DATE
RUN
2
COMPUTE
ET
HLD
ET
60
GENERATE
"8" S
TEST
GMT/DATE
DISPLAY
CONTROL
SERIAL TO
PARALLEL
REGISTER
DAY
DISPLAY
DRIVER
GMT/
DATE
LCD
10
GMT
ET/CHR
DISPLAY
CONTROL
SERIAL TO
PARALLEL
REGISTER
DISPLAY
DRIVER
ET/CHR
LCD
ET/CHR
40
RUN
15V DC
REMOTE
MO/YR
50
RESET
COMPUTE
CHR
F/F
DATE
15V DC
20
RUN
30
HLD
HLDY
12V DC
MSM
HSD
RUN/HOLD/RESET
RESET
CHR
CAPT CLOCK
F/F
INSTR
LTS
CHRONO
DISPLAY
CONTROL
RUN/HOLD/RESET
12V DC
MOTOR
DRIVE
STEPPING
MOTOR
CHRONO
POINTER
15V DC
VOLTAGE
DETECTOR
28V DC
CLOCK
IND L
CONTROL
POWER
SUPPLY
EMI
FILTER
15V DC
P11
GMT/DATE
DIGITAL
DATA
28V DC
CLOCK TIME
BASE L
EMI
FILTER
ARINC 419/429
OUTPUT
DRIVER
GMT/DATE OUTPUT
POWER
SUPPLY
LEFT FLT
MGT CMPTR
28V DC
CLOCK TIME
BASE R
ARINC 419 SELECT
5V DC (P)
NC
SOFTWARE
P6
HARDWARE
CLOCK
CAPTAIN CLOCK - DATE FUNCTION

DGTL FLT
DATA ACQ UNIT
F/O CLOCK
INTERNALS SAME AS
CAPTAINS CLOCK
INSTR
LTS
RIGHT FLT
MGT CMPTR
28V DC
CLOCK
IND R
P11
G63125AH
FIRST OFFICER CLOCK - DATE FUNCTION
CLOCKS - SCHEMATIC
g63125ah
(Continued)
CLOCKS - FMC CDU STATUS DISPLAYS

GMT Display
GMT is displayed on the position initialization (POS INIT) page.
This page is accessed on either FMC control and display unit (CDU)
by pressing the initialization reference (INIT REF) key when the
airplane is on the ground and the IRS is not initialized. This page
can also be accessed from INIT/REF INDEX, IDENT, and
TAKEOFF REF pages.
The GMT indicated on the graphic is 23 hours 59 minutes; the suffix
label z stands for Zulu time. The GMT display on both CDUs is the
same and normally track the Captains clock output; if the Captains
clock is invalid, the CDUs track the F/Os clock. If both clocks are
invalid, the GMT digits on the CDUs are replaced with dashes.
On aircraft with the global positioning system (GPS) fitted, the
normal GMT/UTC will be from the GPS. If both GPS fail, then the
clocks can provide information to the CDUs.
NOTE: It is possible to offset the hours digits from either CDU

GMT display so that local time is indicated on both
CDUs.
NOTE: On aircraft with GPS, the CDU time cannot be offset if the
GPS is valid.
Regulatory agencies require that the captains clock be set to GMT

(and not local time) since it provides the time data recorded on the
airplane flight recorder.
Clock Status
Captains clock status is displayed on L FMC SENSOR STATUS
page on the left CDU. F/Os clock status is displayed on R FMC
SENSOR STATUS page on the right CDU. Each page is accessed on
the respective CDU by sequential selection of INIT/REF INDEX,
MAINTENANCE INDEX, and FMC SENSOR STATUS pages,
when the airplane is on the ground.
Status message definitions for the clocks are:
OK Clock is providing valid ARINC 429 GMT data words to
FMC.
FAIL Clock is providing invalid ARINC 429 GMT data words,
or it isnt connected, or it isnt fully powered.
TEST Clock is in self-test mode.
_ _ _ Clock is not required for this FMC or airplane
configuration. (L FMC requires left (Captains) clock; R FMC
requires right (F/Os) clock).
Enter local hours (00-23) into the CDU scratchpad using the
numeric keys.
Press line select key 5L adjacent to the GMT data field.
The minutes digits cannot be offset. The GMT and z labels
remain.
M0008313.PST
GMT
DISPLAY
KEY 5L
POS INIT
CAPTAINS
CLOCK STATUS
1/2
L AST
L FMC SENSOR STATUS 1/2
P OS
N40 38.1 WO73 46.0
L RU
R E F AIRPORT
- - - GA T E
G MT
SE T
I RS
P OS
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
RTE
CLB
CRZ
DES
DIR
INTC
LEGS
DEP
ARR
HOLD
PROG
FIX
D
S
P
Y
PREV
PAGE
w
F
A
I
L
a
ROUTE>
INIT
REF
EXEC
NEXT
PAGE
+-
DEL
CLR
FMC CDU - LEFT OR RIGHT (P9)
CTR
F AI L
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
R FMC SENSOR STATUS 1/2

RIGHT
- - - - - - - - OK
- - - - - - - - - - -
LRU
OK
T E ST
- - OK
OK
- - - - OK
- - - - -
M
S
G
D
S
P
Y
RTE
CLB
CRZ
DES
DIR
INTC
LEGS
DEP
ARR
HOLD
PROG
w
O
F
S
T
PREV
PAGE
F
A
I
L
a
F AI L
OK
- - OK
OK
- - OK
OK
OK
- - -
RIGHT
- - - - - - - - OK
- - - - - - - - - - -
OK
T EST
OK
OK
OK
OK
- - OK
- - OK
<INDEX
INIT
REF
FIX
NUMERIC
KEYS
CTR
LEFT
V OR
D ME
I LS
A DC
I RS
F C C / MC P
T MC
F UE L F L O
F UE L QT Y
CLOCK
<INDEX
SCRATCH
PAD
BRT
LEFT
V OR
D ME
I LS
A DC
I RS
F C C / MC P
T MC
F UE L F L O
F U E L QT Y
CLOCK
2359.9z
<INDEX
F/OS CLOCK
STATUS
BRT
EXEC
INIT
REF
RTE
CLB
CRZ
DES
DIR
INTC
LEGS
DEP
ARR
HOLD
PROG
NEXT
PAGE
DEL
CLR
M
S
G
D
S
P
Y
O
F
S
T
F
A
I
L
PREV
PAGE
FMC CDU - LEFT (P9)
BRT
EXEC
FIX
NEXT
PAGE
DEL
CLR
M
S
G
w
O
F
S
T
w
FMC CDU - RIGHT (P9)
G63125AE
CLOCKS - FMC CDU STATUS DISPLAYS

g63125ae
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
PITOT STATIC SYSTEM
Table of Contents
Subchapter
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SCHEMATICS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Page
437
441
467
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
INTRODUCTION
g63125ae
34.11 PITOT STATIC SYSTEM INTRODUCTION
PITOT-STATIC SYSTEM INTRODUCTION

Overview
The pitot-static system senses pitot and static air pressures. Static
pressure is ambient air pressure; pitot pressure is total (dynamic plus
ambient) air pressure. These two air pressures are used to determine
airplane altitude and airspeed.
The system consists of an installation of pitot-static probes, static
ports and associated tubing to conduct the pressures to various
computers and indicators containing pressure-sensitive devices. The
probes are heated for anti-ice by electric heating circuits.
M0008715.PST
TOTAL
AIR IN
PITOT
AIR PRESSURE
AIRPLANE
PITOTSTATIC
SYSTEM
AMBIENT
AIR IN
STATIC
AIR PRESSURE
SYSTEMS
HEATER
POWER
G63411AA
PITOT-STATIC SYSTEM INTRODUCTION

g63411aa
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
COMPONENT LOCATIONS
g63411aa
34.11 PITOT STATIC SYSTEM COMPONENT LOCATIONS
PITOT - STATIC SYSTEM COMPONENT LOCATIONS

Pitot/Static Probes
There is a total of four pitot/static probes (two on each side of the
fuselage) located at STA 200.
Static Ports
There is a total of two alternate static ports (one on each side of the
fuselage) located at STA 465.
Pitot-Static System Drains

The pitot/static drains are concentrated in five main areas:
Forward equipment center (left and right sides of nose wheel
well).
Main equipment center (on stanchions of the electronic racks, left
and right sides).
Fwd cargo compartment (on the right hand side, forward of the
forward cargo door).
Aft cargo compartment (on the left and right hand sides, near the
bulk cargo door).
Stabilizer compartment (on the left hand side, aft of the pressure
bulkhead).
M000872C.PST
STATIC PORT
(STA 465)
(ONE EACH SIDE)
PITOT STATIC PROBES

(STA 200)
(TWO EACH SIDE)
FWD CARGO COMPARTMENT

DRAINS
FORWARD EQUIPMENT CENTER

DRAINS
STABILIZER COMPARTMENT
DRAINS

DRAINS
AFT CARGO COMPARTMENT

DRAINS
G63411AB
PITOT - STATIC SYSTEM COMPONENT LOCATIONS

g63411ab
PITOT-STATIC PROBE
Description
The pitot/static probe provides one source of pitot (dynamic plus
ambient) pressure and two sources of static (ambient) pressure. The
heater connector provides probe anti-icing. The RIGHT and LEFT
pitot-static probes are not interchangeable.
CAUTION
Before touching any pitot/static probe ensure that heating
power is NOT on, or, allow sufficient cooling time.
NOTE: Late model aircraft have nickel plated pitot/static probes,

with quick disconnect fittings, as standard. These new
probes will be retrofitted throughout the Qantas 767 fleet.
The nickel plated pitot/static probes allow the continued
compliance of the reduced vertical separation minimum
(RVSM).
Maintenance Practice
During removal/installation of a pitot/static probe, the following
maintenance practices should be observed:
The pitot/static probe is a delicate instrument and care should be
taken not to bend or twist the probe while installing it into the
airplane skin cutout. Ensure that the probe alignment pins are
engaged into the airframe cutouts before securing the mounting
screws.
Use wrenches on each side of the pneumatic connectors to apply
counter pressure during the disassembly and assembly to prevent
tube or connection damage.
Carry out a low range leak check of the affected pitot/static
systems and a bonding check of the probe after installation.
M00087C3.PST
Pt PRESSURE LINE
S1 PRESSURE LINE
PITOT INPUT
S2 PRESSURE LINE
S1 PORT
HEATER
CONNECTOR
(2 PLS)
S2 PORT
GASKET
(2 PLS)
UP
ALIGN PIN CUTOUT
(2 PLACES)
FWD
AIRPLANE SKIN
MOUNTING SCREW
(5 PLACES)
63411ACA
PITOT-STATIC PROBE
g63411ac
INSPECTION CRITERIA FOR PITOT PROBES

Limits For Damage
Make an inspection of the pitot openings. The following would
indicate a damaged pitot opening:
Indentation of pitot opening exceeding .030 inch or affecting
more than 20% of tip circumference.
Lip flatness greater than .015 inches
Any single nick exceeding .035 inches or two nicks between .025
and .035 inches deep.
Detectable outward flare or curl of lip
The probe must be replaced if damaged. The maintenance manual
ATA chapter 34-11 must be used for all inspections and checks.
M00087D9.PST
END VIEW
INDENTATION OF PITOT OPENING
END VIEW
END VIEW
LIP FLATNESS
CHIPS OR NICKS IN PROBE TIP

OUTWARD FLARE OF LIP
END VIEW
63411ADA
INSPECTION CRITERIA FOR PITOT PROBES

g63411ad
ALTERNATE STATIC PORTS

Description
The alternate static ports provide the alternate source of ambient
pressure. These ports are connected together and pressure is sensed
through small holes which open to the static lines. The ports are
flush-mounted on the lower forward fuselage and have no anti-icing
heaters.
M00087F1.PST
FWD
NOTE: RIGHT PORT SHOWN,

LEFT PORT SIMILAR
63411AEA
ALTERNATE STATIC PORTS

g63411ae
INSPECTION CRITERIA FOR STATIC PORTS

Limits For Damage
Make an inspection of the static pressure ports. Check that the static
ports remain square and sharp. The following would indicate a
damaged static port:
Rounded or raised static port edges in excess of .003 inches.
Scratches, nicks or surface irregularities deeper than .015 inches
and located within .5 inches of static port.
The port must be replaced if found damaged. The maintenance
manual ATA chapter 34-11 must be used for all inspections and
checks.
M000880E.PST
SQUARE EDGE
ROUNDED EDGE
CORRECT
DAMAGED
FLARED AND
RAISED EDGE
DAMAGED
63411AFA
INSPECTION CRITERIA FOR STATIC PORTS

g63411af
PITOT - STATIC SYSTEM DRAINS

Description
Drains remove condensation from the pitot-static lines. The bayonet
type fitting has a reinforced transparent tubing with the orange float
that provides a sight gauge. The depressor on the bayonet cap is
pushed upward against the poppet valve to remove the accumulated
moisture.
NOTE: It is not necessary to do a leak check of a quick-disconnect

fitting that has been disconnected and then reconnected. It
is only necessary to see that the fitting connection is locked
and sealed.
Hex Head drain plugs are used in the stabilizer access area.
There are two Visco Jet drains fitted to the static lines for the
elevator feel computer on some of QF-300 aircraft. These allow
hydraulic fluid to be continually purged from the static system.
M0008906.PST
NOTE: IN THE STABILIZER

ACCESS AREA, HEX HEAD
DRAIN PLUGS ARE USED.
TO REMOVE MOISTURE:
REMOVE CAP, THEN INSERT
OPPOSITE END OF CAP INTO
DRAIN.
SIGHT GAUGE
ORANGE FLOAT BALL

INDICATES WATER LEVEL
DRAIN FITTING
BAYONET FITTING CAP
LANYARD
STATIC SYSTEM VISCO JET DRAIN
63411AGA
PITOT - STATIC SYSTEM DRAINS

g63411ag
DRAIN LOCATIONS - SECTION 41 LH

Notes:
M0008751.PST
FWD PRESSURE BULKHEAD
STA 204.5
FORWARD
ACCESS
DOOR (REF)
STA 266.5
DRAINS
SEE
STA 266.5
STA 204.5
DRAINS
CAPTAINS PITOT
DRAIN L7
SEE A
AUXILIARY
STATIC
NO. 2
DRAIN L22 1
SECTION 41
CAPTAINS
STATIC
DRAIN L8
AUXILIARY STATIC
NO. 2 DRAIN L21
1
CAPTAINS STATIC
DRAIN L3
AUXILIARY STATIC
NO. 1 DRAIN L4
AUXILIARY PITOT
NO. 1 DRAIN L19
AUXILIARY PITOT
NO. 1 DRAIN L6
F/OS STATIC
DRAIN L5
QAN OGA - 999
AUXILIARY STATIC
1
NO. 1 DRAIN L15
G63411AS
DRAIN LOCATIONS - SECTION 41 LH

g63411as
DRAIN LOCATIONS - SECTION 41 RH

Notes:
M0008768.PST
DRAIN LOCATIONS - SECTION 41 RH

g63411ak
DRAIN LOCATIONS - MEC

Notes:
M000877C.PST
LEFT ADC, E1-3

(REF)
MAIN EQUIPMENT CTR
RIGHT ADC, E2-3

(REF)
CAPTS
STATIC
DRAIN L11
SECTION 41
STA 325
F/OS PITOT
DRAIN R11
CAPTS PITOT
DRAIN L10
F/OS STATIC
DRAIN R12
MAIN EQUIPMENT CTR
G63411AP
DRAIN LOCATIONS - MEC

g63411ap
DRAIN LOCATIONS - SECTION 43

Notes:
M000878C.PST
STA 456
DRAIN
STA 456
FORWARD CARGO
DOOR (REF)
ALTERNATE STATIC
DRAIN R13
SECTION 43
G63411AQ
DRAIN LOCATIONS - SECTION 43

g63411aq
DRAIN LOCATIONS - SECTION 46 AND 48

Notes:
M000879D.PST
STA 1461
SEE B
BULK CARGO
STA 1480 DOOR (REF)
SEE A
STA 1461
AUXILIARY STATIC
N0. 1 DRAIN L17
SECTION 46 AND 48
STA 1480
AUXILIARY STATIC
N0. 2 DRAIN L19
1
AUXILIARY PITOT
N0. 1 DRAIN L12
AUXILIARY PITOT
NO. 2 DRAIN R14
AUXILIARY PITOT
N0. 2 DRAIN L13
QAN OGA - 999
G63411AT
DRAIN LOCATIONS - SECTION 46 AND 48

g63411at
DRAIN LOCATIONS - VISCO JETS

Location
On VH-OGF and on, visco jet drains are installed in the aft stabilizer
area for the auxiliary static 1 and 2 systems which supply the
elevator feel computer. These drains have a calibrated orifice which
allow purging of any contaminant fluids.
NOTE: Visco jet drains need to be sealed prior to carrying out a

static leak check of the auxiliary static systems 1 and 2.
M00087AE.PST
STA 1629
STA 1629
STA 1629
FWD
FWD
AUXILIARY STATIC
NO. 2 DRAIN
L24 (VISCO JET)
AUXILIARY STATIC
NO. 1 DRAIN
L25 (VISCO JET)
AUXILIARY STATIC
NO. 2 DRAIN PLUG
L24
AUXILIARY STATIC
NO. 1 DRAIN PLUG
L25
AIRCRAFT WITHOUT VISCO JET DRAINS
AIRCRAFT WITH VISCO JET DRAINS
G63411AR
DRAIN LOCATIONS - VISCO JETS

g63411ar
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
SCHEMATICS
g63411ar
34.11 PITOT STATIC SYSTEM SCHEMATICS
PITOT-STATIC SYSTEM SCHEMATIC - 200 AIRCRAFT

Inputs
The Pitot Probes sense total pressure. Openings along the pitot probe
and the flush-mounted static ports sense ambient (static) pressure.
Static sources are cross-connected to compensate for airplane
maneuvers.
PITOT
R-ADC
X
L-ADC
X
STBY ALTM
STBY AIRSPEED
DIFF PRESS
SENSOR
RAT A/S SWITCH
ELEV FEEL COMP
STATIC
P/S SYSTEM CONNECTIONS

AUX PITOT AUX PITOT AUX STATIC ALTERNATE
NO.1
NO.2
NO.1
STATIC
CABIN
PRESS
COMPARTMENT
PRESS
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Distribution
Tubing connects the pressure sensors to pressure-sensitive devices in
indicators and computers. The standby altimeter, standby airspeed
indicator, and cabin differential pressure indicator convert the air
pressures into visual indications.
X
X
The Differential Pressure Sensor (used to compute cabin differential
pressure) is a piezoelectric pressure transducer located below the
flight compartment. Pressures are also used in the air data computers
and the elevator feel computer.
Control circuits for the Ram Air Turbine ( RAT) utilizes pitot/static
inputs from the RAT airspeed switch to prevent premature
deployment.
M000891C.PST
.
R AUX PITOT
B27 R LOWER
(AUX PITOT - 2)
PT
R8
S1
FLOAT (ORANGE)
B28 R UPPER
S2
F/O PITOT
S1
PT
PITOT STATIC DRAIN ASSY LOCATION
TRANSPARENT TUBE
S2
DRAIN NO.
R3
R10
R5
0
10
R4
R11
R12
CABIN DIFF
PRESS. GAUGE
PSI
STATIC
LOCATION
STA 165
STA 200
R12
IN HG
PITOT
STA 265
STA 325, LBL 55

STA 325, L 45
STATIC
L11
STA 325, LBL 55

STA 456
R13
R14
PITOT
STA 1460
STA 1476
L12,L13
DRAIN INSTL
(TYP)
STA 325, L 45
TS5072 DIFF PRESS.

SENSOR (UNDER FLR,
FWD P61)
R2
R13
R7
1 0 1 3 2 99 2
4
6
5
BARO
R7,R9,L8
L10
R6
MB
PITOT
M101 R ADC
(E2-4)
STATIC
L6
R11
CABIN
PRESS.
0
R3-R6,L3-L5
AIR DATA
INPUTS
R9
M19 CABIN PRESS GAUGES (P5)
STATIC
R8,R10,L7,L9
6
DIFF
TYPE
R2
WL
212
R14
WL
194
N23 STBY ALTM (P1)

0
60
80
400
350
WL
140
100
IAS
120
300
250
240
220
KNOTS
200
FOR RAT
140
80
KNOTS
L18
160
180
ELEVATOR
L9
N22 STANDBY AIRSPEED
(P1)
NOTES:
1
ALL DRAINS ARE LOCATED

ON LOWER LOBE SIDEWALLS
UNLESS BL IS PROVIDED.
ELEVATOR FEEL COMPUTER USES

LOCAL STATIC SENSE - COMPARTMENT PRESSURE
STA
200
L13
S614
A/S (UNDER
FLR, FWD P61)
L10
AUXILARY STATIC NO. 1
L12
M950 ELEV
FEEL CMPTR
(STA 1725,
WL 244,
LBL 47)
S1 PORT
(2 PLS)
S2 PORT
(2 PLS)
AIR DATA
INPUTS
L8
L11
L6
STATIC
L5
L4
HEATER CONN
(B26-B29)
30-31-01
(SH 1, 2)
PROBE
M100 L ADC
(E1-3)
AIRPLANE SKIN
(TYP 4 PLS)
UP
OUTBD
ALTERNATE STATIC
L3
L7
AUXILIARY PITOT NO. 1

S1 PRESSURE LINE
S2 PRESSURE
LINE
UP
FWD
PITOT
STA
465
PT PRESSURE LINE
PITOT INPUT
CAPT PITOT
PT
STATIC PORT
FWD
S1
B26 L UPPER
S2
L AUX PITOT
PT
S1
S2
B29 L LOWER
FLUSH STATIC PRESSURE PORTS

(TYP 2 PLS)
DO NOT PLUG OR DEFORM

HOLES. INDICATED
AREAS MUST BE
SMOOTH AND CLEAN
63411AHA

g63411ah

(Continued)
Distribution
(Continued)
Drains are located at low points in the tubing to allow moisture

condensation to be removed from the system. The tubing is mounted
so that moisture flows down to these drains for all normal airplane
attitudes.
Maintenance Practice Caution

Absolute pressure in pitot must be greater than static.
Absolute pressure in static must never exceed ambient.
The rate at which pressure is applied or released to a pitot system
must be less than 300 knots per minute.
The rate at which a vacuum is released or applied to a static
system must be less than 5000 feet per minute.
The difference between the pitot and the static pressures must not
be larger than 10 inches of mercury or 420 knots.
Disconnect pitot lines from elevator feel computer at ambient
pressure.
Open probe heat circuit breakers when leak check is performed.
Open RAT circuit breakers when the corresponding lines are
pressurised.
Make sure the ATC altitude reporting function is turned off if its
altitude source system is being pressurized. Failure to do so may
accidentally cause false TCAS targets!
M000891C.PST
.
R AUX PITOT
B27 R LOWER
(AUX PITOT - 2)
PT
R8
S1
FLOAT (ORANGE)
B28 R UPPER
S2
F/O PITOT
S1
PT
TRANSPARENT TUBE
S2
DRAIN NO.
R3
R10
R5
0
10
R4
R11
R12
CABIN DIFF
PRESS. GAUGE
PSI
STATIC
LOCATION
STA 165
STA 200
R12
IN HG
PITOT
STA 265
STA 325, LBL 55

STA 325, L 45
STATIC
L11
STA 325, LBL 55

STA 456
R13
R14
PITOT
STA 1460
STA 1476
L12,L13
DRAIN INSTL
(TYP)
STA 325, L 45
TS5072 DIFF PRESS.

SENSOR (UNDER FLR,
FWD P61)
R2
R13
R7
1 0 1 3 2 99 2
4
6
5
BARO
R7,R9,L8
L10
R6
MB
PITOT
M101 R ADC
(E2-4)
STATIC
L6
R11
CABIN
PRESS.
0
R3-R6,L3-L5
AIR DATA
INPUTS
R9
STATIC
R8,R10,L7,L9
6
DIFF
TYPE
R2
WL
212
R14
WL
194
N23 STBY ALTM (P1)

0
60
80
400
350
WL
140
100
IAS
120
300
250
240
220
KNOTS
200
FOR RAT
140
80
KNOTS
L18
160
180
ELEVATOR
L9
L12

(P1)
NOTES:
1
ALL DRAINS ARE LOCATED

ON LOWER LOBE SIDEWALLS
ELEVATOR FEEL COMPUTER USES

LOCAL STATIC SENSE - COMPARTMENT PRESSURE
STA
200
L13
S614
A/S (UNDER
FLR, FWD P61)
M950 ELEV
FEEL CMPTR
(STA 1725,
WL 244,
LBL 47)
S1 PORT
(2 PLS)
S2 PORT
(2 PLS)
AIR DATA
INPUTS
L10
L8
L11
L6
STATIC
L5
L4
HEATER CONN
(B26-B29)
30-31-01
(SH 1, 2)
PROBE
M100 L ADC
(E1-3)
AIRPLANE SKIN
(TYP 4 PLS)
UP
OUTBD
ALTERNATE STATIC
L3
L7

S1 PRESSURE LINE
S2 PRESSURE
LINE
UP
FWD
PITOT
STA
465
PT PRESSURE LINE
PITOT INPUT
CAPT PITOT
PT
STATIC PORT
FWD
S1
B26 L UPPER
S2
L AUX PITOT
PT
S1
S2
(TYP 2 PLS)
B29 L LOWER

HOLES. INDICATED
AREAS MUST BE
SMOOTH AND CLEAN
63411AHA

g63411ah
(Continued)

P/S SYSTEM CONNECTIONS (300)
PITOT
R-ADC
L-ADC
STBY ALTM
STBY AIRSPEED
DIFF PRESS SENSOR
RAT A/S SWITCH
ELEV FEEL COMP
HUMIDIFIER ALT
SWITCH
X
X
STATIC
AUX
PITOT
NO.1
General
AUX
PITOT
NO.2
AUX
STATIC
NO.1
AUX
STATIC
NO.2
ALTERNATE CABINPRESS
STATIC
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
M000893D.PST
.
R AUX PITOT
B27 R LOWER
(AUX PITOT - 2)
PT
R8
FLOAT (ORANGE)
B28 R UPPER
S1
S2
F/O PITOT
S1
PT
R3
R10
R5
0
10
R11
CABIN DIFF
PRESS. GAUGE
PSI
R12
MB
IN HG
STA 165
R3-R6,L3-L5,R16,R17,L16
STATIC
L6
PITOT
R7,R9,L8,L18,L19
STATIC
PITOT
STA 200
STA 265
STA 325, L 45
STATIC
L11
S787
HUMIFICATION
ALT SW (STA
212 WL206
RBL 68)
TS5072 DIFF PRESS.

SENSOR (UNDER FLR,
FWD P61)
STA 325, LBL 55

STA 456
R14
DRAIN INSTL
(TYP)
STA 325, L 45
STA 325, LBL 55
L10
R13
PITOT
STA 1460
STA 1476
L12,L13
L22,L23
STATIC
STA 1476
L24,L25
STATIC
STA 1605
L22
R7
1 0 1 3 2 99 2
6
4
5
BARO
STATIC
R12
R17
R2
R2
M101 R ADC
(E2-4)
LOCATION
R11
CABIN
PRESS.
0
TYPE
AIR DATA
INPUTS
R9
DRAIN NO.
R8,R10,L7,L9
S921
EICAS MAINTENANCE
ENABLE ALT SW (E8)
6
DIFF
R4
TRANSPARENT TUBE
S2
L21
R15
R14
N23 STBY ALTM (P1)

0
60
400
350
80
100
IAS
120
300
250
240
220
KNOTS
200
L25
80
KNOTS
140
L18
160
180
L9
ELEVATOR
L12
L14

(P1)
1
ALL DRAINS ARE LOCATED ON LOWER LOBE SIDEWALLS

STATIC SYSTEM VISCO JET DRAIN
L13
S614
A/S (UNDER
FLR, FWD P61)
M950 ELEV
FEEL CMPTR
(STA 1725,
WL 244,
LBL 47)
L23
L19
PT PRESSURE LINE
PITOT INPUT
S1 PORT
(2 PLS)
S2 PORT
(2 PLS)
S1 PRESSURE LINE
S2 PRESSURE
LINE
HEATER CONN
(B26-B29)
30-31-01
(SH 1, 2)
L24
L20
THE EICAS MAINTENANCE ENABLE ALTITUDE SWITCH

IS ONLY FITTED TO LATE MODEL 767-300 AIRCRAFT.
L10
AIR DATA
INPUTS
UP
PROBE
FWD
L8
PITOT
L11
L6
L5
L4
STATIC
(TYP 4 PLS)
AIRPLANE SKIN
UP
OUTBD
L3
L7
ALTERNATE STATIC
M100 L ADC
(E1-3)
CAPT PITOT
PT
L16
S1
B26 L UPPER
S2
STATIC PORT
FWD
L AUX PITOT
PT
S1
S2
B29 L LOWER

(TYP 2 PLS)

HOLES. INDICATED
AREAS MUST BE
SMOOTH AND CLEAN
63411AIA

g63411ai
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
STANDBY ATTITUDE REFERENCE SYSTEM
Table of Contents
Subchapter
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Page
477
481
485
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
INTRODUCTION
g63411ai
34.24 STANDBY ATTITUDE REFERENCE SYSTEM INTRODUCTION
STANDBY ATTITUDE REFERENCE SYSTEM INTRODUCTION

Purpose
The system provides the pilots with a backup source of pitch and roll
attitude information in case of primary attitude system failure or loss
of main airplane power. The system also provides an additional
source of ILS (localizer and glide slope deviation) information.
M000954A.PST
ILS
63424AAA

INTRODUCTION
g63424aa
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
COMPONENT LOCATIONS
g63424aa
34.24 STANDBY ATTITUDE REFERENCE SYSTEM COMPONENT LOCATIONS
STANDBY ATTITUDE REFERENCE SYSTEM COMPONENT LOCATION

General Component Locations
Standby attitude/ ILS indicator
On P1-3 panel of flight compartment.
Static inverter/ ILS processor
Installed in the main equipment center (E1-4).
STBY ATTITUDE INDICATOR circuit breaker
On circuit breaker panel assembly P11.
STBY ILS INDICATOR circuit breaker
On circuit breaker panel assembly P11.
M000955F.PST
OVERHEAD CIRCUIT BREAKER PANEL (P-11)

STANDBY ATTITUDE INDICATOR CIRCUIT BREAKER
STANDBY ILS INDICATOR CIRCUIT BREAKER
CAPTAINS INSTRUMENT PANEL (P1-3)

STANDBY ATTITUDE INDICATOR
MAIN EQUIPMENT CENTER (E1-4)

STATIC INVERTER/ILS PROCESSOR
63424ABA
STANDBY ATTITUDE REFERENCE SYSTEM COMPONENT

LOCATION
g63424ab
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
OPERATION
g63424ab
34.24 STANDBY ATTITUDE REFERENCE SYSTEM OPERATION
STANDBY ATTITUDE - ILS INDICATOR

Purpose
The indicator gives visual indications of pitch and roll attitude
information, localizer and glide slope deviations, and localizer, glide
slope and gyro circuit failures.
Standby Attitude
The gyro-stabilized ball gives a stable horizon reference.
The roll scale is shown on the top half of the case. The pitch scale is
shown on the face of the ball.
The airplane symbol relative to the horizon reference indicates pitch
and roll attitude.
Standby ILS
Localizer pointer indicates deviation from the centreline of the
localizer beam.
Glide slope pointer indicates deviation from the centreline of the
glide slope beam.
The ILS knob provides the following:
OFF
Moves the LOC and G/S pointers and flags out-of-view.
ILS
Allows localizer and glide slope data to be shown on the
indicator.
B/CRS (N/A QF)

Provides reversed signal polarity to the LOC pointer for a back
course approach to a landing field.
Modified Model
On units P/N S231T110-6 (SFENA P/N H150AKM1) the following
modifications have been incorporated:
Improved erection mechanism.
Modification of locking spacer used to immobilize caging device
during transportation of the indicator, and providing a bracket in
the rear of the indicator to store the locking spacer when not in
use.
Improved reduction gear assembly with added ball bearings.
Power requirement
115 volts ac, 400 Hz, 3 phase
Gyroscope
Rotor speed 23,000 rpm
Vertical accuracy 0.5 degrees
Erection rate 3 degrees/min
Run-up time 6 minutes
Roll scale
Graduations between left 60 degrees and right 60 degrees
Pitch scale
Graduations between white markers on blue for climb and on
grey for dive
LOC, G/S, GYRO flags
+28 volts dc validity signal
M0009572.PST
GYRO
FAILURE
FLAG
ROLL
POINTER
PITCH
SCALE
ROLL
SCALE
PITCH
INDICATOR
G/S DEV
SCALE
HORIZON
REFERENCE
FIXED
AIRPLANE
SYMBOL
G/S DEV
FAILURE
FLAG
G/S DEV
POINTER
G/S SCALE
INDEX
LOC DEV
POINTER
ILS
ILS
GYRO
CAGE KNOB
MODE CONTROL
SWITCH
LOC SCALE
INDEX
LOC DEV
SCALE
LOC DEV
FAILURE
FLAG
FAILURE DISPLAY
NORMAL DISPLAY
63424ACA

g63424ac

(Continued)
(Continued)
LOC scale
1 dot = 1.25 degrees of deviation
G/S scale
1 dot = 0.35 degrees of deviation
Lighting
5 volts ac, 400 Hz
Connector
24 pin connector mounted in rear
Mounting
Indicator installed from the front on an instrument panel with a
slant angle of 16 degrees and secured by 4 screws.
M0009572.PST
GYRO
FAILURE
FLAG
ROLL
POINTER
PITCH
SCALE
ROLL
SCALE
PITCH
INDICATOR
G/S DEV
SCALE
HORIZON
REFERENCE
FIXED
AIRPLANE
SYMBOL
G/S DEV
FAILURE
FLAG
G/S DEV
POINTER
G/S SCALE
INDEX
LOC DEV
POINTER
ILS
ILS
GYRO
CAGE KNOB
MODE CONTROL
SWITCH
LOC SCALE
INDEX
LOC DEV
FAILURE
FLAG
LOC DEV
SCALE
FAILURE DISPLAY
NORMAL DISPLAY
63424ACA

g63424ac
(Continued)
STANDBY ATTITUDE REFERENCE SYSTEM - STATIC INVERTER - ILS PROCESSOR

Purpose
The static inverter changes a 28 volt dc input to a 3-phase, 115 volts
ac, 400 Hz output to power the indicator gyro.
The ILS processor changes digital ILS data to analog signal to move
the LOC and G/S pointers.
Features
The static inverter/ ILS processor is an LRU with no external
controls, lights or adjustments.
Physical description
Size
2 MCU(modular concept unit)
Connector
External on rear panel
Weight
5.5 lbs.
Power
28 volt dc 2.5A (gyro)
28 volt DC 285 MA ( ILS)
M000958A.PST
EXTERNAL
CONNECTOR
IDENTIFICATION
LABEL
HANDLE
TYPE T
HOOK
SFENA B254AAM
S231T110-XXX
63424ADA
STANDBY ATTITUDE REFERENCE SYSTEM - STATIC

INVERTER - ILS PROCESSOR
g63424ad
STANDBY ATTITUDE REFERENCE SYSTEM BLOCK DIAGRAM

Power
Power from the 28 volt dc standby bus is supplied through the STBY
ATT INDICATOR circuit breaker to the static inverter power supply
and through the STBY ILS INDICATOR circuit breaker to the ILS
processor power supply. Each power supply provides dc for its
respective portion of the static inverter/ ILS processor.
Attitude Display
A converter in the static inverter/ ILS processor provides 115 volt ac
three phase power to drive the gyro in the standby attitude/ ILS
indicator. The pitch and roll displays are directly coupled to the gyro.
The GYRO flag appears if the static inverter power supply fails or if
current is lost on one or more of the three phases of gyro power. The
cage knob, when pulled, causes the gyro to erect to the local vertical.
ILS Display
ILS data, from the center ILS receiver, is checked for parity and
correct labels, and converted to analog signals in the ARINC 429
receiver and digital processing section of the ILS processor.
Depending on mode selected, and if the checks are passed, localizer
and glide slope deviation signals are supplied through the appropriate
processing section to the meter movements in the indicator. The LOC
and G/S flags are spring loaded into view. They monitor power and
the digital processing. The ILS display can be tested through the ILS
system.
M0009598.PST
STBY ATT
INDICATOR
28V DC
STANDBY
BUS
STBY ILS
INDICATOR
POWER
SUPPLY
DC TO 3
PHASE AC
CONVERTER
GYRO
CURRENT
SENSING
GYRO FLAG
MOTOR
GYRO
CAGE
KNOB
STATIC INVERTER
POWER
SUPPLY
GYRO
FLAG
MON
DC
OVERHEAD CIRCUIT BREAKER

PANEL (P11)
ILS
OFF
MODE
CONTROL
ILS
FREQUENCY
AND TEST
ILS CONTROL
PANEL (P8)
ILS
DATA
AND TEST
CENTER ILS
RECEIVER (E1-4)
LOC DEV
PROCESSING
ARING 429
RECEIVER &
DIGITAL
PROCESSING
G/S DEV
PROCESSING
DC
LOC & G/S

FLAG
MONITORS
ILS PROCESSOR
STATIC INVERTER/ILS PROCESSOR (E1-4)
LOC DEV
METER
MOVEMENT
G/S DEV
METER
MOVEMENT
LOC FLAG
MOTOR
G/S FLAG
MOTOR
STANDBY ATTITUDE/
ILS INDICATOR (P1-3)
63424AEA
STANDBY ATTITUDE REFERENCE SYSTEM BLOCK

DIAGRAM
g63424ae
STANDBY ATTITUDE REFERENCE SYSTEM SCHEMATIC

Gyro Power
The inverter power supply in the static inverter/ ILS processor unit
receives 28 volts dc from the 28 volt dc standby bus. It provides
power for both the gyro flag drive motor in the standby attitude/ ILS
indicator and for the dc to 115 volt, 3-phase ac converter which
powers the indicators gyro motor.
When the gyro motor currents for all 3 phases are sensed to be
within proper limits, a ground is provided to the GYRO flag motor
to hold the GYRO flag out of view.
ILS Power
DC power is supplied to the ILS processor power supply from the 28
volt dc standby bus. The power supply provides the processors
required dc voltages and contains its own monitoring circuits.
Power OFF
When a power failure occurs or power is removed from the standby
attitude reference system, the spring-loaded GYRO, G/S and LOC
flags all come into view. Also, the zero-center LOC and G/S
galvanometer pointers return to the center position.
Gyro Operation
With power applied to the gyro motor and the display drum
stabilized in the vertical position, any deviations of the airplane from
this position in flight is displayed as drum deviation in the pitch and
roll axes. The gyro has 85 degrees freedom around the pitch axis
and full freedom around the roll axis. Manual alignment of the gyro
gimbals to the instrument case, to expedite erection, is achieved by
pulling the spring-loaded caging knob.
Maintenance Practices
On initial startup of the gyro, allow 30 seconds of spin up time
before pulling the caging knob.
On release of the caging knob, wait 6 minutes before verifying that
the pitch and roll indications are within +/- 2 of airplane attitude.
After removing power from the gyro, allow 3 minutes of run down
time before attempting to remove the standby attitude indicator.
ILS Data
Data is provided to the processors ARINC 429 receiver and
processing circuit from the center ILS receiver. This serial data is
converted first to parallel data and then to analog glide slope and
localizer deflection dc signals. This data is checked by processor
monitors for odd parity, validity, and the presence of proper glide
slope and localizer labels.
Mode Selection
The mode logic and validity circuits verify the receipt of the
indicators 28 volt dc mode select discrete at the same time as the 28
volt dc ILS, or OFF mode selection discrete. If both are present then
M00095AA.PST
ATTITUDE DISPLAY
28V DC
STBY BUS
1
INVERTER
POWER
SUPPLY
C619
STBY ATTITUDE
INDICATOR
GY
RO
GYRO
CURRENT
SENSING
DC TO 3 PHASE
AC CONVERTER
GYRO
115V, 400HZ
3 PHASE AC
STATIC INVERTER
GYRO
CAGE
MECHM
ILS PROCESSOR
GYRO
28V DC
CAGE
KNOB
28V DC
STBY BUS
ILS
15V DC
POWER
SUPPLY
C604
STBY ILS
INDICATOR
MODE LOGIC
AND
VALIDITY
OFF
MODE SELECTOR DATA

MONITOR/DC
MODE VALID
CAGE
ILS
OFF
OFF
MODE
SELECT
SWITCH
MODE SEL DIS

MODE SEL DISCRETE

G
/
28V DC
EFIS C-SG
D417B
B11
C11
LOC G/S
DATA
ILS
OFF
PROCESSING
&
MONITOR
CIRCUITS
S2
28V DC
ARINC 429
RECEIVER
G/S
M157 CENTER ILS

RECEIVER (E1-4)
L O
FLAG LOGIC
VALID, OFF &
NCD = 1
LOC
1
S5
G/S
OFF/NCD/
LOC
INVALID = 0
-15V DC
G/S DRIVE
DC
S4
G/S
POINTER
GALVO
B/CRS
+15V DC
LOC DRIVE
DC
BACKCOURSE
SWITCH
S7
LOC
POINTER
GALVO
NA QF
5V AC
1
LOGIC
FLAGS ARE DRIVEN BY TORQUE

MOTORS TO THE OUT OF VIEW
POSITION. WHEN MOTOR IS
DE-ENERGISED SPRING BRINGS
FLAG INTO VIEW.
NEEDLE(S)
OUT OF VIEW
OUT OF VIEW
SWITCH TO "ILS"
VALID LOC
VALID G/S
IN VIEW
OUT OF VIEW
INVALID LOC
INVALID G/S
OUT OF VIEW
IN VIEW
NCD
OUT OF VIEW
OUT OF VIEW
CENTERED
IN VIEW
POWER LOSS
N20 STANDBY ATTITUDE ILS INDICATOR (P1)
M917 STATIC INVERTER/ILS PROCESSOR UNIT (E1-4)
FLAG(S)
SWITCH TO "OFF"
63424AFA

g63424af

(Continued)
Mode Selection
(Continued)
a mode valid discrete is sent to the processing and monitor circuits.

A mode valid discrete together with a power-supply-within-limits
discrete from the monitor will be an enable for flag retractions
discussed later.
OFF Mode
When this mode is selected the flag logic will actuate switches S2
and S5 regardless of the validity of the incoming ILS data, driving
the flags out of view. Also, switches S4 and S7 deactivate, applying
voltages to drive the pointers out of view.
Backcourse (B/CRS) Mode (N/A QF)

During a backcourse approach, the B/CRS mode should be selected.
In this case, the B/CRS logic signal causes the polarity of the
localizer deviation voltage to be reversed so that the indicators LOC
deviation needle deflects in the correct direction.
In a backcourse approach no glide slope information is transmitted
by the ground station so the ILS receiver outputs a glide slope word
status of NCD. This causes switch S2 to activate driving the glide
slope flag out of view. Also, switch S4 is de-energized driving the
glide slope pointer out of view.
ILS Mode
Anytime that the system is powered and the OFF mode is not
selected, the processor will be operating in the ILS mode. ILS data is
received by an ARINC 429 receiver in serial format.
The processor and monitor circuits process the glide slope and
localizer data alternately. If the data is valid then switches S2, S5,
S4, and S7 are actuated driving the flags out of view and the pointers
are driven by localizer and glide slope drive dc voltages.
With no glide slope and/or localizer deviation data being received
and no equipment failures detected then an NCD condition exists.
Switches S2, S4 and/or S5, S7 operate as in OFF mode causing
flag(s) and pointer(s) to be out of view.
M00095AA.PST
ATTITUDE DISPLAY
28V DC
STBY BUS
1
INVERTER
POWER
SUPPLY
C619
STBY ATTITUDE
INDICATOR
GY
RO
GYRO
CURRENT
SENSING
DC TO 3 PHASE
AC CONVERTER
GYRO
115V, 400HZ
3 PHASE AC
STATIC INVERTER
GYRO
CAGE
MECHM
ILS PROCESSOR
GYRO
28V DC
CAGE
KNOB
28V DC
STBY BUS
ILS
15V DC
POWER
SUPPLY
C604
STBY ILS
INDICATOR
MODE LOGIC
AND
VALIDITY
OFF
MODE SELECTOR DATA

MONITOR/DC
MODE VALID
CAGE
ILS
OFF
OFF
MODE
SELECT
SWITCH
MODE SEL DIS

MODE SEL DISCRETE

G
/
28V DC
EFIS C-SG
D417B
B11
C11
LOC G/S
DATA
ILS
OFF
PROCESSING
&
MONITOR
CIRCUITS
S2
28V DC
ARINC 429
RECEIVER
G/S
M157 CENTER ILS

RECEIVER (E1-4)
L O
FLAG LOGIC
VALID, OFF &
NCD = 1
LOC
1
S5
G/S
OFF/NCD/
LOC
INVALID = 0
-15V DC
G/S DRIVE
DC
S4
G/S
POINTER
GALVO
B/CRS
+15V DC
LOC DRIVE
DC
BACKCOURSE
SWITCH
LOC
POINTER
GALVO
S7
NA QF
5V AC
1
LOGIC
FLAGS ARE DRIVEN BY TORQUE

MOTORS TO THE OUT OF VIEW
POSITION. WHEN MOTOR IS
DE-ENERGISED SPRING BRINGS
FLAG INTO VIEW.
NEEDLE(S)
OUT OF VIEW
OUT OF VIEW
SWITCH TO "ILS"
VALID LOC
VALID G/S
IN VIEW
OUT OF VIEW
INVALID LOC
INVALID G/S
OUT OF VIEW
IN VIEW
NCD
OUT OF VIEW
OUT OF VIEW
CENTERED
IN VIEW
POWER LOSS
N20 STANDBY ATTITUDE ILS INDICATOR (P1)
M917 STATIC INVERTER/ILS PROCESSOR UNIT (E1-4)
FLAG(S)
SWITCH TO "OFF"
63424AFA

g63424af
(Continued)
STANDBY ATTITUDE REFERENCE SYSTEM - ILS SELF TEST

Operational Checkout
There are no unique tests for the standby attitude reference system;
however, the ILS display may be checked by doing an ILS test.
Test
An ILS test is started by pushing the TEST switch on the ILS
control panel or pushing the TEST switch on the center ILS receiver.
The ILS test signals for the ILS processor and standby attitude
indicator are made in the center ILS receiver and transmitted by the
ARINC 429 bus.
M00095CD.PST

ILS SELF-TEST SEQUENCE
CONDITION/RESPONSE
SEQUENCE NO.
STANDBY ATTITUDE/ILS INDICATOR MODE

SWITCH TO ILS
TIME RANGE
PRESS AND RELEASE TEST SWITCH ON ILS CONTROL

PANEL--OR-PRESS AND HOLD TEST SWITCH ON C ILS RECEIVER
INVALID DATA INPUT - LOC & G/S FLAGS

IN VIEW, POINTERS OUT-OF-VIEW
3 SEC
NO COMPUTED DATA - LOC & G/S

FLAGS OUT-OF-VIEW, POINTERS OUT-OF-VIEW
2 SEC
VALID DATA INPUT - GLIDE SLOPE POINTER

MOVES IN VIEW TO ONE DOT UP & LOC
POINTER MOVES TO ONE DOT LEFT,
FLAGS OUT-OF-VIEW
3 SEC
VALID DATA INPUT - GLIDE SLOPE MOVES

TO ONE DOT DOWN & LOC POINTER MOVES
TO ONE DOT RIGHT, FLAGS OUT-OF-VIEW
6 SEC
ANY FREQUENCY ON ILS CONTROL

PANEL EXCEPT PARK POSITION
63424AGA
STANDBY ATTITUDE REFERENCE SYSTEM - ILS SELF

TEST
g63424ag
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
STANDBY COMPASS
Table of Contents
Subchapter
STANDBY COMPASS SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Page
503
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
STANDBY COMPASS SYSTEM
g63424ag
34.23 STANDBY COMPASS STANDBY COMPASS SYSTEM
PILOT STANDBY MAGNETIC COMPASS

General Component Locations
A standard magnetic compass is mounted in the flight compartment
area as shown. This instrument is used as a backup magnetic heading
reference. Internal magnets align themselves with the Earths
magnetic lines of flux. This action causes a rotating compass card to
indicate the aircrafts heading with respect to the Earths magnetic
field.
STBY BUS via the STBY INSTR LTS circuit breaker and stepped
down to 5 volt ac in the pilots center instrument panel dimmer
control station. To change the bulb, loosen and remove the lamp
holder assembly.
Mechanical
The compass is 2 5/8 inches in diameter. It is mounted under the
overhead P5 panel with a non-ferrous bracket. It is a sealed, liquid
filled unit, with a circular indicator card that has two parallel and
horizontal magnets attached and free to rotate and tilt as the airplane
banks. The liquid medium dampens rapid movements and
oscillations.
The front panel has E-W and N-S compensators which are used to
correct for both magnetic deviations generated by airplane
components and electrical currents in local wiring. A card mounted
below the compass is used to record small deviation errors that can
not be removed by the compensators.
Electrical
The rotating compass card is lighted by a 5 volt ac bulb. Brightness
is controlled by the PANEL lighting control on the left side of the
glareshield panel (P7). Power is received from the 115 volt AC
M000950E.PST
BULB COVER
COMPASS
COMPENSATOR
ADJUSTMENT
COVER
CLOCK
PANEL
LIQUID-FILLED CASE
ROTATING CIRCULAR COMPASS CARD
OFF
CHART
FLOOD
LIGHTING
INTENSITY
CONTROL
OFF
MAP
63423AAA
PILOT STANDBY MAGNETIC COMPASS

g63423aa
34.23 STANDBY COMPASS STANDBY COMPASS SYSTEM
COMPASS SWING
General
There are two procedures which can be used to swing the standby
magnetic compass. One procedure is to tow the aircraft around a
compass rose. The other is to use a standby compass calibrator. Both
of these procedures are set out in detail in their respective sections of
the relevant maintenance manuals.
The following information on the standby compass calibrator is to
familiarize maintenance personnel on the use of this component.
Standby Compass Calibrator(SCC)
Calibration
The SCC has to be adjusted or calibrated to cancel the Earths
magnetic field at the compass rose before being used.
The SCC will need re-calibration under the following conditions:
annually if it kept at a station permanently e.g. Sydney Tool Crib.
if there is doubt about its accuracy during a compass swing.
before being used at a different station from the one it was
calibrated at. This is because different stations will have different
magnetic variation figures.
An SCC Calibration Record Sheet is used to monitor the calibration
of the SCC set.
Description
The SCC Set consists of a SCC and an accessory kit. The accessory
kit consits of a Master Magnetic Compass (MMC) and other minor
items. The SCC consists of a magnet assembly, a knob assembly and
an optical assembly.
Function
The SCC is a device used to calibrate an aircraft standby compass
without physically rotating the aircraft. The magnet assembly is used
to cancel the ambient earths magnetic field. The top and bottom dial
assembly is used to generate an artificial magnetic field in various
direction.
M0009525.PST
MOUNTING
BRACKET
TOP AND BOTTOM
DIAL ASSEMBLY
MAGNET
ASSEMBLY
MAGNETIC FIELD
CANCELLATION
ADJUSTMENT SCREW
63423ABA
COMPASS SWING
g63423ab
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
AIR DATA COMPUTER SYSTEM
Table of Contents
Subchapter
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FUNCTIONAL TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Page
511
515
519
557
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
INTRODUCTION
g63423ab
34.12 AIR DATA COMPUTER SYSTEM INTRODUCTION
AIR DATA COMPUTER SYSTEM - INTRODUCTION

Single Point Source of Computed Air Data
Monitors airspace adjacent to airplane.
System Inputs
Pneumatic inputs from pitot and static systems.
Electrical inputs from angle of attack sensors, total air
temperature probe, and altimeters (baro correction).
Analog discretes and program pins.
System Outputs
Altitude, airspeed, temperature, pressure and angle of attack data.
Status discretes.
M0008962.PST
ALTITUDE
ALTITUDE RATE
PITOT AIR PRESSURE
BARO CORRECTION
COMPUTED AIRSPEED
STATIC AIR PRESSURE
TAT PROBE
DIGITAL
AIR
DATA
COMPUTER
TRUE AIRSPEED
MACH
Vmo/Mmo LIMITS
AOA SENSOR
IMPACT PRESSURE
TOTAL PRESSURE
BARO CORRECTION
STATIC AIR TEMPERATURE

DISCRETES
TOTAL AIR TEMP

ANGLE OF ATTACK
ADCS DISCRETES
OVERSPEED DISCRETE
63412ADA
AIR DATA COMPUTER SYSTEM - INTRODUCTION

g63412ad
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
COMPONENT LOCATIONS
g63412ad
34.12 AIR DATA COMPUTER SYSTEM COMPONENT LOCATIONS
AIR DATA COMPUTER SYSTEM - COMPONENT LOCATION

Air Data Computers
The left and right Air Data Computers are located on shelves E1-3
and E2-3.
Air Data Computer Transformers

The left and right ADC transformers are located in P36 and P37,
respectively.
AIR DATA CMPTR Test Switches

Located on the Test Panel Module (P61).
Alternate Vmo/Mmo Select Switch

Located approximately 4 inches above the floor on forward outboard
stanchion of shelf E1.
Aspirated TAT Probe

One dual element TAT probe is mounted on the forward portion of
the fuselage, at Station No. 143.50, waterline 228, on the captains
side.
Angle-of-Attack Sensors
One is mounted on each side at Station 191.50, waterline 202.
M0008982.PST
ASPIRATED TOTAL AIR

TEMPERATURE PROBE
TEST PANEL MODULE
(AIR DATA COMPUTER
TEST SWITCHES)
ANGLE OF ATTACK
SENSORS (1 PER SIDE)
SHELF E2-3
R-AIR DATA COMPUTER
SHELF E1-3
L-AIR DATA COMPUTER
RIGHT MISC. ELEC EQUIPMENT
LEFT MISC. ELEC EQUIPMENT
PANEL (P37)
PANEL (P36)
R-AIR DATA COMPUTER
L-AIR DATA COMPUTER
TRANSFORMER
TRANSFORMER
ALTERNATE Vmo/Mmo SELECT

(GEAR DOWN DISPATCH) SWITCH
FWD
63412AEA
AIR DATA COMPUTER SYSTEM - COMPONENT LOCATION

g63412ae
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
OPERATION
g63412ae
34.12 AIR DATA COMPUTER SYSTEM OPERATION
AIR DATA COMPUTER

External Sensor Fault Display
Functions
The Air Data Computer (ADC) utilizes pitot-static inputs, barometric
corrections, temperature sensor inputs, and angle-of-attack sensor
inputs to compute air data information which is routed to various
user systems.
Output data is generally transmitted on digital data buses. This data
includes functions of altitude, airspeed, angle-of-attack, and air
temperature.
Physical Details
The ADC is installed in a 4 MCU case and utilizes ARINC 600
cooling and electrical connections.
The ADC weighs 13 pounds.
A red, 4 x 7 dot LED input signal monitor displays a 0-9 single digit
only during a self-test from the front of the computer. Displayed
numbers correspond to specific failures of input sensors, as follows:
0
1
2
3
4
5
67-
Front Panel Features

ADC FAIL
This ball type failure indicator is normally black. It switches to
yellow for failures. If the fault indicator has been set and
subsequently the cause of the fault has cleared, the indicators circuit
can be reset by actuating the self-test switch and verifying that the
self-test runs through to completion.
89-
EXTERNAL MATRIX DISPLAY

CODE
MEANING
SPARE
L-AOA SYNCHRO INPUT
R-AOA SYNCHRO INPUT
SPARE
SPARE
TAT PROBE SENSOR
RESISTANCE
No.1 BARO - CORRECTION
SYNCHRO INPUT
SYNCHRO INPUT
SYNCHRO INPUT
AIRCRAFT TYPE PROGRAM
Normal display when no faults exist is 4 dots.
Functional test switch

Depressing switch initiates a self-test of the air data computer
internal circuits, input sensors, and interfaces with the flight deck
displays. The test features are described later.
M0008A10.PST
PITOT CONNECTOR
STATIC CONNECTOR
BALL TYPE FAILURE

INDICATOR
SINGLE DIGIT INPUT SIGNAL MONITOR
FUNCTIONAL TEST SWITCH
ARINC 429 DATA CONNECTOR

(TEST ONLY)
TEST
ONLY
HANDLE
THE ARINC 429 CONNECTOR IS ONLY INSTALLED

ON -211 AND LATER AIR DATA COMPUTERS
63412AFA
AIR DATA COMPUTER

g63412af
AIR DATA COMPUTER

(Continued)
ARINC 429 Test Connector

The ARINC 429 Test Connector allows for monitoring of the ADC
output Bus. This feature is only applicable to the -211 and later Air
Data Computers.
M0008A10.PST
PITOT CONNECTOR
STATIC CONNECTOR
BALL TYPE FAILURE

INDICATOR
SINGLE DIGIT INPUT SIGNAL MONITOR
FUNCTIONAL TEST SWITCH
ARINC 429 DATA CONNECTOR

(TEST ONLY)
TEST
ONLY
HANDLE
THE ARINC 429 CONNECTOR IS ONLY INSTALLED

ON -211 AND LATER AIR DATA COMPUTERS
63412AFA
AIR DATA COMPUTER

g63412af
(Continued)
ANGLE OF ATTACK SENSOR

Sensor Function
The angle-of-attack sensor (AOA) senses direction of airflow over
the airplane. It converts airflow direction to 3-wire synchro output
signals. Independent synchro resolvers route their output signals
through separate connectors to the ADCs.
Power Requirements
The power for the synchro resolvers is 26 volts ac, and the power for
the heater is 115 volts ac.
The sensors can be removed and installed from the outside only,
without having to go inside to loosen connections. Access to the
electrical connections at the back of the sensors is from the crawl
space forward of the main equipment center and next to the nose
wheel well. The sensors do not need to be removed to access the
electrical connections.
After installation of an AOA sensor, a functional test should be
carried out from the ADC front panel. If serviceable, the external
sensor fault display will show a dash.
Physical Details
This sensor has an aerodynamic vane on a rotating arm. The right
and left sensors are physically interchangeable, the air data
computers are programmed to automatically adjust for rotation. The
sensor has two heaters: the vane heater gives anti-ice protection to
allow the vane to respond quickly in icing conditions; the case heater
maintains the viscosity of the dampening fluid.
CAUTION
Sensor heat is sufficient to burn bare skin - use protective
devices when adjusting vane.
M0008A3E.PST
RESOLVER & HEATER

CONNECTORS (J1 & J2)
(LOCATED ON REAR)
AERODYNAMIC VANE
FACEPLATE
MOUNTING BOLT HOLES (QTY 8)
ALIGNMENT PINS (QTY 2)
63412AGA
ANGLE OF ATTACK SENSOR

g63412ag
TOTAL AIR TEMPERATURE PROBE

Probe Function
The probe senses the temperature of air flow over the airplane and
changes temperature to an analog electrical signal.
Physical Details
This probe is a small metal strut with two temperature-sensitive wire
elements. The wire elements resistance varies with a change in
temperature.
Bleed air into the ejector fitting makes a negative pressure. This
pressure draws outside air across the sensing elements such that the
anti-ice heaters have no effect on temperature readings. This feature
permits accurate TAT readings to be displayed while the airplane is
on the ground or in-flight at low airspeeds.
Access to the electrical connector and ejector fitting is by removing
the probe from the airplane.
WARNING
Ensure that probe heat has been removed to avoid
serious burns.
M0008A72.PST
AIR FLOW
THRU AIR FLOW
AIR EXIT TO SIDEPORTS
ENGINE BLEED AIR OUT

SENSING ELEMENTS
HEATING ELEMENT
ASPIRATED AIRFLOW OUT

FROM SENSING ELEMENTS
& FROM PROBE CAVITY
EJECTOR FITTING
ELECTRICAL
CONNECTOR
ENGINE BLEED AIR IN
63412AHA
TOTAL AIR TEMPERATURE PROBE

g63412ah
ALTERNATE Vmo-Mmo SELECT SWITCH

Location
The alternate Vmo/Mmo select switch is located on the left hand side
of the E1 rack (on the stauchion).
Features
The alternate Vmo/Mmo select guarded and wire-locked switch, is
provided to accommodate a flight with the landing gear extended.
The alternate Vmo/Mmo select switch is used for two main
functions:
To modify the Vmo/Mmo curves within the ADC for overspeed
warnings due to gear down dispatch.
To remove the Altitude Alert system inhibit during approach with
the gear down and locked.
When a flight with the gear down is anticipated, this switch has to be
actuated prior to takeoff since it is located in the main equipment
center.
Actuation of this switch modifies the air data computers software
such that the maximum operating speeds allowed are greatly reduced.
Normally the overspeed warning will occur at 360 knots (0.86
Mach). With the switch actuated the warning will be provided at 270
knots (0.73 Mach). The specific values and schedules are provided
on the graphic 767 MAXIMUM OPERATING SPEED SCHEDULE.
M0008A9F.PST
E2
E1
FWD
63412AAA

g63412aa
INSTRUMENT SOURCE SELECT PANELS

Purpose
These two panels allow the pilots to connect to their alternate data
sources. The captain and first officer can make selections
independently of each other. The ALTN switch illuminates when the
alternate source has been selected.
Switch Functions
FLT DIR Switch
This switch connects the left, center, or right Flight Control
Computer (FCC) to the flight director portion of display on the
EADI.
FMC Switch
Selects the left or right Flight Management Computer (FMC) as the
source of navigation and flight parameters for the EHSI display.
Also, it determines which FMC provides the display for the onside
FMC CDU (control display unit).
IRS Switch
This switch determines which Inertial Reference Unit (IRU) provides
data to the onside EFIS symbol generators, and VSIs, the offside
RMIs, weather radar transceiver, the digital flight data acquisition
unit (captains switch only), and the antiskid/autobrake system. The
right IRS instrument source select switch also determines if the
center IRU receives air data inputs from the left or right air data
computer. The onside IRU is normal; the center IRU is alternate.
AIR DATA Switch

Each AIR DATA switch selects air data inputs to the onside
mach/airspeed indicator, electric altimeter, ATC transponder and
inertial reference unit. The left switch also selects the altitude source
to the altitude alert module and the air data inputs into the digital
flight data acquisition unit.
On aircraft VH-OGT and on, the air data alternate select switch also
affects the ADC input for the speed tape presentation on the EADI
and the altitude input to the metric altimeters.
EFI Switch
The EFI switch determines if the onside (normal) or the center
(alternate) signal generator supplies the video presentation on the
EADI and EHSI. The captains and first officers EFI switches are
interlocked electrically such that if both are using the ALTN position,
the captains EFIS control panel and instrument source select
switches have control of the center EFIS symbol generator, and, the
level B EICAS message Instrument Switch is initiated.
M0008AB0.PST
INSTR SOURCE SEL

FLT DIR
L
C
INSTR SOURCE SEL

FLT DIR
R
FLIGHT DIRECTOR SOURCE

SELECT SWITCHES
NAV
FMC-L
FMC-R
CDU-L
FMC
ALTNw
w
EFI
ALTN
EFI
ALTNw
w
NORMAL/ALTERNATE SOURCE
SELECT SWITCHES
ALTN
ALTNw
IRS
IRS
w
w
EAJ TO OGE
OGF TO 999
ALTN
AIR
DATA
AIR
DATA
ALTNw
w
LEFT INSTRUMENT SOURCE

SELECT PANEL
RIGHT INSTRUMENT SOURCE

SELECT PANEL
G63422AH
INSTRUMENT SOURCE SELECT PANELS

g63422ah
TEST PANEL MODULE

General
The M10398 test panel module is found on the flight deck on the
P61 right sidewall panel. It has three-position test toggle switches.
The switches are momentary up and down, and are spring loaded to
the center position. They are used to do various airplane systems
tests.
AIR DATA COMPTR

L - Starts the left air data computer functional test when the airplane
is on the ground.
R -Starts the right air data computer functional test when the airplane
is on the ground.
WINDOW/PROBE HEAT
Starts the heating circuits test in the flight compartment windows, in
the AOA sensors (2), the pitot probes (4), and the TAT probe (1).
M0008ACF.PST
AIR DATA
R
COMPTR
L
NOTE:
PANEL SHOWN IS FOR
767-300 A/C & 767-200
A/C WITH TRIPLE H.M.G.
INSTALLATION
STALL
WING
ANTI ICE
R
INOP
WINDOW/
FUEL QTY
PROBE HEAT
L HYD GEN
R HYD GEN
CONFIG
T/O
LDG
GND PROX
INOP
YAW DMPR
L
EQUIP COOL
INOP
C HYD GEN
INOP
63412AIA
TEST PANEL MODULE

g63412ai
AIR DATA DISPLAYS - EICAS

General
Several air data parameters are available on the EICAS displays. TAT
is always displayed as a primary display. TAT, CAS, MACH and
ALT can be displayed on the lower EICAS display unit by pressing
the PERF/ APU key on the EICAS maintenance control panel (P61).
Because these parameters are found on the EICAS maintenance
pages, they are only available on the ground. These parameters are
an excellent method for cross-checking TAT, CAS, MACH, and ALT
test values during air-data self tests.
NOTE: TAT test value of 35 C will only be displayed on upper

EICAS if BOTH ADCs are tested simultaneously or if the
TMC circuit breaker is tripped prior to carrying out
individual ADC test.
M0008AF3.PST
PRIMARY ENGINE PARAMETER DISPLAY - TAT

(UPPER DISPLAY UNIT)
TAT + 35
C
1.76
TO
1.76
PERF/APU DISPLAY PAGE - CAS/TAT/MACH/ALT

(LOWER DISPLAY UNIT)
PERF/APU
KEY
PERF/APU
GROSS WT 185.3
CAS
35
MACH
137
0.250
TAT
ALT
EPR
+35
10000
EICAS MAINT
DISPLAY SELECT
ELEC
EVENT
READ
AUTO
MAN
PERF
APU
REC
TEST
ERASE
1
INDICATED VALUES ARE AS

DISPLAYED DURING ADC TEST
EICAS MAINTENANCE CONTROL PANEL (P61)
63412ACA

g63412ac
ADC SYSTEM - FMC DISPLAYS

General
TAS and SAT are shown on the flight management computer control
display unit ( FMC- CDU) on PROGRESS page 2/2. Pressing the
PROG key will display page 1/2. Pressing the NEXT PAGE key will
display page 2/2 on which TAS and SAT are located.
M0008B08.PST
P R OGRE S S
L A S T
PROG KEY
C Y N
1 /
F U E L
A L T
A T A
F L 2 4 4
1 3 3 2 Z
4 5 .
T O
D T G
E T A
ENO
6 1
1 3 5 5
4 3 . 8
1 9 2
1 4 1 1
4 0 . 0
6 0 6
1 5 1 8
1 2 . 7
NEXT OR
PREV PAGE
KEY
N E X T
GV E
P R OGR E S S
M /
3 2
WI
0 . 1
S E L
S P D
. 5 8 0
1 4 0 2
D M E
ENO
T /
T O
I
ML C
8 2
N M
D M E
R S ( 3 )
1 1 6 . 2 5
E R R O R
N D
5 7
V T K
2 /
X /
WI
N D
2 3
K T
E R R O R
+ 1 0
N M
T A S
TAS
1
F U E L
U S E D
L 2 4 . 7
T O T
4 7 .
< USE
F U E L
Q T Y
T O T A L I Z E R
1 1 4 . 6 0
7 5 . 6
F T
S A T
1 5
D E S T
KATL
WI
0 8 0
K T
X T K
N D
R2 2 . 9
US E >
SAT
2
C A L C U L A T E D
7 2 . 3
PROG KEY
NEXT PAGE KEY
TAS BLANK WITH AIRSPEED

LESS THAN 100 KTS.
BOTH TAS AND SAT BLANK

DURING ADC SELF-TEST.
FMC CDU
63412ABA

g63412ab
AIR DATA COMPUTING SYSTEM BLOCK DIAGRAM

Power Requirements
115 volts ac and 26 volts ac are supplied. The 26 volts ac is used for
synchro reference.
Data Flow
Input Signals:
Pitot and static pressures

Barometric correction from the pilots altimeters
Total air temperature from the TAT probe
Angle of attack from the AOA sensors
Alternate VMO/MMO switch discrete
System test from the test panel module (P61)
Program pin jumpers (these modify the air data computer
software for different airplane types and location, etc.)
Output Signals:
Four ARINC 429 data buses transmit data related to altitude,
airspeed, temperature, pressure and angle-of-attack as well as
status discretes.
Overspeed discrete to the siren owl module, EICAS computer,
master warning module, and discrete warning display module.
Interfacing Systems
Dual air data systems supply data to navigation, flight management,
autoflight, warning and recording systems as well as the air data
instruments.
M0008B1B.PST
.
STATIC
PRESS
BUS NO. 1
LEFT
AIR DATA
COMPUTER
PITOT
PRESS
115V AC
STBY BUS
22-12
C-FLT CONT
COMPUTER
PWR
L AIR
DATA
CMPTR
PROGRAM
JUMPERS
115V AC
L BARO CORR
P/S
HTR
TAT
CKT
AOA
TAT HTR CKT
NORM
34-13
1
CAPTS
MACH/AIRSPEED
INDICATOR
34-21
L INERTIAL
REF UNIT
34-21
C INERTIAL
REF UNIT
F/OS IRS
SOURCE
ALTN
SEL SW
73-21
L-ELECTRONIC ENG
CONTROLLER (EEC)
BUS
NO. 4
31-31
FLIGHT REC ADC
INPUT SW REL
R-ADC
BUS-3
34-46
GROUND PROX
COMPUTER
L-ADC BUS-4
DISCRETES
34-61
5
L-FLT MGT
COMPUTER
27-51
5
FLAP/SLAT
ELEC UNIT
34-53
L-ATC
21-31
AUTO. 1 CABIN AIR
PRESS CONT
6
METRIC
ALTIMETER (P1)
F/T
R-ADC BUS-4
31-41
L EICAS
COMPUTER
ALTERNATE
VMO/MMO
SELECT SWITCH
R ADC TEST
34-22-19
L-EFIS
SYMBOL GEN
TAT
SYS 1
AIR/GND
L ADC TEST
L-ADC BUS-3
AOA
TAT PROBE
(ELEMENT 1)
34-13
CAPTS
ALTIMETER
BUS
NO. 3
REF
L-ANGLE OF
ATTACK SENSOR
L-26V AC
R-26V AC
BARO CORR
L AOA
AOA HTR CKT
22-32
THRUST MGT
COMPUTER
R-ADC BUS-2
L-ADC BUS-2
R-ADC BUS-4
CAPT
BARO CORR 1
BARO CORR 2
REF
BAR0 CORR 3
L 26V AC
27-11
L-STAB/AIL
MODULE
BUS NO. 2
26V AC
L-AIR DATA
COMP XFMR (P36)
22-21
L-YAW DAMPER
MODULE
22-12
L-FLT CONT
COMPUTER
L-OVERSPEED DISCRETE
33-16
DISCRETE WARNING
DISPLAY MODULE
(P1-3)
31-41
R EICAS
COMPUTER
TEST PANEL (P61)
27-32
L-STALL
WARNING MODULE
31-51-05
L SIREN/OWL MODULE
31-51
MASTER WARNING
MODULE
31-51-06
R SIREN/OWL MODULE
31-51
BELL/CHIME
MODULE
34-16
1
ALTITUDE
ALERT MODULE
27-32
R-STALL
WARNING MODULE
R-OVERSPEED DISCRETE
SYS 2
AIR/GND
WARNING ELECTRONICS UNIT (P51)
BUS NO. 1
RIGHT
AIR DATA
COMPUTER
TAT PROBE
(ELEMENT 2)
TAT HTR CKT
AOA HTR CKT
F/T
34-22-29
2
R-EFIS
SYMBOL GEN 7
TAT
P/S
HTR
TAT
CKT
AOA
DISCRETES
R-ANGLE OF
ATTACK SENSOR
22-12
R-FLT CONT
COMPUTER
22-21
R-YAW DAMPER
MODULE
27-11
R-STAB/AIL
MODULE
L-ADC BUS-4
BUS NO. 2
R-ADC BUS-2
AOA
L-26V AC
BARO CORR 2
F/O BARO CORR
BARO CORR 1
34-13
2
F/OS MACH/
AIRSPEED INDICATOR
34-13
2
F/OS
ALTIMETER
R-26V AC
34-21
R INERTIAL
REF UNIT
BARO CORR 3
REF
R AOA
REF
73-21
R-ELECTRONIC ENG
CONTROLLER (EEC)
R BARO CORR
PROGRAM
JUMPERS
26V AC
115V AC
L-ADC BUS-4
R-ADC BUS-3
BUS NO. 3
R 26V AC
34-61
R-FLT MGT
COMPUTER
L-ADC
BUS-3
34-53
R-ATC
21-31
AUTO. 2 CABIN
AIR PRESS CONT
34-22-39
3
C-EFIS
SYMBOL GEN 7
6
METRIC
ALTIMETER (P3)
BUS NO. 4
R-ADC BUS-4
115V AC
F/O INSTR
XFR BUS
R-AIR DATA
COMP XFMR (P37)
ADC INPUT SELECTED BY CAPT ADC INSTR SOURCE

SELECT SWITCH
STATIC
PRESS
ADC INPUT SELECTED BY F/O ADC INSTR SOURCE

SELECT SWITCH
AIRCRAFT EQUIPTED WITH METRIC ALTIMETERS
PITOT
PRESS
ADC INPUT SELECTED BY CAPT OR F/O ADC INSTR

SOURCE SELECT SWITCH, DEPENDING ON CAPT AND
F/O EFI SWITCH SELECTION
AIRCRAFT EQUIPTED WITH ADC SPEED TAPE PRESENTATION
PWR
R AIR
DATA COMPUTER
L-ADC BUS-2
ADC INPUT SELECTED BY AUTOPILOT ENGAGEMENT
QNH
63412AJA
AIR DATA COMPUTING SYSTEM BLOCK DIAGRAM

g63412aj
AIR DATA COMPUTER - ALTERNATE SWITCHING

General
The graphic depicts the activity associated with ADC source
switching by actuating the instrument source select switches, located
on the instrument source select panels (P1 and P3).
The switching of input buses is accomplished by feeding the analog
discrete from the respective instrument source select switch to the
ADC input select circuitry inside the user component, here
represented by a solid-state switch. An exception is the flight
recorder ADC input switching relay, which causes the digital flight
data acquisition unit (DFDAU) to receive input data from the
captains selected ADC.
ADC instrument source selection to the center IRU is controlled by
the F/Os IRS (not ADC) instrument source select switch.
On late model aircraft, the ADC instrument source select switches
input to the EFIS symbol generators (for the speed tape presentation)
and to the metric altimeters (located on P1 and P3).
M0008B3A.PST
.
ALTN
3
ALTN
L - EFIS
SYMBOL GEN
+DC
AIR
DATA
L-ADC/BUS 2 (NORMAL)
IRS
3
w
R-ADC/BUS 4 (ALT)
ALTITUDE
ALERT
w
NORM
R-ADC/BUS 4 (ALT)
CENTER IRU
R-VSI
3
R-ADC/BUS 4 (ALT)
LEFT IRU
NORM
+DC
ALTN
ADC SWITCHING TO CENTER IRU
F/OS IRS INSTR

SOURCE SEL SWITCH
1
LEFT ATC
R-ADC/BUS 4 (ALT)
CAPTAINS
ALTIMETER
R-ADC/BUS 4 (ALT)
+DC
CAPTAINS
MACH/AIRSPEED
INDICATOR +DC
CENTER EFIS
SYMBOL GEN
ADC SELECT 2
+DC
FLIGHT RECORDER
ADC
DC
INPUT
SWITCH
RELAY
RIGHT ATC
NORM
DIGITAL FLIGHT
DATA ACQUISITION
UNIT
F/OS
ALTIMETER
L-ADC/BUS 4 (ALT)
L-ADC/BUS 4 (ALT)
ALTN
F/OS
MACH/AIRSPEED
INDICATOR
+DC
F/OS ADC INSTR

SOURCE SEL SWITCH
WHEN ALTN SELECTED, ALTN LT ILLUMINATES.

SWITCH CONTACTS NOT SHOWN.
R-ADC/BUS 2 (NORMAL)
+DC
+DC
+DC
R-ADC/BUS 4 (ALT)
SOLID STATE SWITCHINGS SHOWN WITH POWER ON.
L-ADC/BUS 4 (ALT)
L-ADC/BUS 4
R-ADC/BUS 2
+DC
R-ADC/BUS 4 (ALT)
CAPT ADC SWITCHING
R-ADC/BUS 4
L-ADC/BUS 2
RIGHT IRU
ALTN
ALTN
L - METRIC
ALTIMETER
R - EFIS
SYMBOL GEN
+DC
R-ADC/BUS 4 (ALT)
AIR
DATA
CAPTS ADC INSTR

SOURCE SEL SWITCH
+DC
+DC
R-ADC/BUS 4 (ALT)
R - METRIC
ALTIMETER
L-ADC/BUS 4 (ALT)
L-ADC/BUS 4 (ALT)
+DC
SELECTION OF ONSIDE OR OFFSIDE (NORM OR ALTN)

ADC BY EITHER CAPTAINS OR F/OS ADC INSTRUMENT
SOURCE SELECT SWITCH IS DEPENDENT ON THE POSITIONS
OF THE CAPTAINS AND F/OS EFI INSTRUMENT S0URCE.
APPLICABLE TO AIRCRAFT WITH METRIC ALTIMETERS.
F/O ADC SWITCHING
63412AKA
AIR DATA COMPUTER - ALTERNATE SWITCHING

g63412ak
BAROMETRIC CORRECTIONS
General
Since the atmospheric pressure changes with weather, for an
altimeter to read correctly it must be adjusted for the actual
atmospheric pressure. This adjustment is made by adjusting the
barometric correction with the baro set knob on the electric
altimeters.
Adjusting the baro correction with the baro set knob causes resolvers
to transmit a three wire resolver signal to the air data computers.
These resolvers are powered as shown in the graphic. Each altimeter
has two resolvers. One resolver output is dedicated to the left ADC
and one resolver output is dedicated to the right ADC. The baro
correction knob on each altimeter will always control the onside
altimeter regardless of the ADC source switching.
The captains electric altimeter sends out baro correction No. 1 and
No. 3 to the left ADC from one resolver, and baro correction No. 2
to the right ADC from the other resolver. The first officers electric
altimeter sends out baro correction No. 1 and No. 3 to the right ADC
from one resolver, and baro correction No. 2 to the left ADC from
the other resolver.
The ADCs receive these three separate baro corrections and can
calculate three separate baro corrected altitudes. For example, baro
corrected altitude No. 1 is calculated using baro correction No. 1.
In addition the ADCs use a program pin to generate a fourth baro
corrected altitude. In both ADCs, baro corrected altitude No. 4 =
baro corrected altitude No. 1.
M0008B4B.PST
POWER
SUPPLY
L ADC (P11)
BARO CORRECTED ALTITUDE NO. 1
BARO CORRECTION NO. 1

T139
(P36)
L ADC
XMFR

BARO
ALTITUDE
CALCULATION
A
L BARO
CORR
(P11)
SYNCHROs
RS
RS

A
BARO CORRECTED
ALT NO. 4 = NO. 1
N8 CAPTAINS
ALTIMETER
(P1-3)
M100 L ADC (E1-3)

B
POWER
SUPPLY
R ADC (P11)
T140
(P37)
R ADC
XFMR
BARO
B
R BARO
CORR
(P11)
SYNCHROs
F/OS
ALTIMETER
(P3-3)
RS
RS
ALTITUDE
CALCULATION

B
BARO CORRECTED
ALT NO. 4 = NO. 1
M101 R ADC (E2-3)

QNH
63412ALA
BAROMETRIC CORRECTIONS
g63412al
AIR DATA COMPUTING SYSTEM SCHEMATIC

General
The left air data computer (ADC) is shown. The right ADC is
similar. The ADC uses a combination of hardware and software to
sense and convert input data to output data.
Power Requirements
Power of 115 volts ac is supplied to the left data computer and to the
left ADC transformer. The ADC transformer steps down the 115
volts ac to 26 volts ac to power the altimeters baro correction
resolvers and the angle of attack (AOA) sensor resolvers. The 26
volts ac is also sent to the ADC as a reference voltage.
Pneumatic
Pneumatic pressures are sensed by the pitot-static system and routed
to the ADC. These pressures are received by a pressure sensor
(transducer). A diaphragm inside the transducer vibrates at a
frequency proportional to the pneumatic pressure. The frequency is
then digitized and sent to the microprocessor.
Electrical
Baro Corrections
The resolver ac signals from both electric altimeters are routed to
both ADCs. These synchro signals are digitized and sent to the
microprocessor. There are three baro correction inputs. Two of these
will originate from the onside electric altimeter and one from the
offside electric altimeter. Baro correction #4 is internally generated.
Angle of Attack Sensor

The two resolver ac signals from the left AOA sensor are routed to
the left ADC. These synchro resolver signals are digitized and sent to
the microprocessor.
Total Air Temperature Probe

A variable resistance sensing element in the TAT probe provides an
analog signal for the ADC, which is sent to the microprocessor.
Program Pins
Source Destination Identifier (SDI) No. 1 - Identifies the ADC as
left or right installation
A/C Type - Indicates the airplane type
VMO No. 1 - grounded for ALTN VMO/MMO
Unique AOA, primarily use No. 1 AOA input, auto default to No.
2 AOA input.
AOA Rot Reference - Both No. 1 and No. 2
AOA input from onside AOA only
M0008B60.PST
FAULT BALL
POWER
SUPPLY
115V AC
STBY BUS
HV
C625
L AIR DATA CMPTR
(F10)
GND
SIN
T139
L ADC
XFMR (P36)
C2
L AIR DATA BARO
CORRECTION (F12)
BARO CORRECTION
26V AC REF
LV
FROM
AIR
DATA
INST
COS
COM
SIN
COS
COM
SIN
COS
COM
BUILT IN
TEST (BIT)
MONITOR
TO
DIGITAL
CONVERTERS
BARO CORRECTED
ALTITUDE
CALCULATION
FREQUENCY
MODULATED
PRESSURE
SENSOR
PS
FROM
PITOT
STATIC
SYSTEM
P11-1
CIRCUIT BREAKER
PNL ASSY
>50 % N2 OR
AIR MODE
VANE
TEST
FREQUENCY
TO
DIGITAL
CONVERTER
CALIBRATION
A/C
TYPE
STATIC
SOURCE
ERROR
CORRECTION
AND
TEMPERATURE
COMPENSATION
FREQUENCY
MODULATED
PRESSURE
SENSOR
TEST
CX
TEST
SIN
COS
COM
SIN
COS
COM
CX
COMPENSATION
CORRECT
AOA
SENSING ELEMENT
NC
A/C TYPE
TAS
-99 to +60 DEG C
K149
SYS NO. 1 AIR/
GROUND BAT. (P36)
TAS (BCD)
100 to 599 KNT
SAT
SAT (BCD)
TAT (BNR)
COMPUTATION
TAT
TAT (BCD)
COMPUTATION
OUTPUT BUS NO.1
SDI NO.1
SDI NO.2
DISCRETE WORD 1
DISCRETE WORD 2
SOFTWARE
DISCRETES
CODER
HARDWARE
WARNING
ELECTRONICS
NORM
TAT HEATER
TO
ALT
ALERT
SYS
F/T
FUNCTIONAL
TEST
SIGNAL GROUND
TEST
M10398
PNL (P61)
2
OUTPUT BUS NO.2
TAS (BNR)
COMPUTATION
PROGRAM PIN COMMON

SDI NO.1
SDI NO.2
VMO ALT NO. 1
AOA ROT REF
SDI PARITY
UNIQUE AOA
ALT WORD NO. 4=
BARO ALT NO. 1
ZERO SSEC
LEFT PITOT/STATIC HTR

RIGHT PITOT/STATIC HTR
AIR
OUTPUT BUS NO.3
SAT (BNR)
P/S PROBE HEAT
L STALL
EXTERNAL
SENSOR
FUNCTIONAL
FAULT
TEST
NO. 2 AOA
NO. 2 AOA INPUT
AOA PROBE HEAT
GND
OVERSPEED DISCRETE
VMO
NO. 1 AOA
0.1 - 1.0 M
NO. 1 AOA INPUT
UPPER LEFT AOA HTR

UPPER RIGHT AOA HTR
TAT PROBE HEAT

L ADC
ADC FAIL
ARINC 429
TRANSMITTER
MACH
MACH
CALCULATION
SYNCHRO
TO
DIGITAL
CONVERTERS
TEST
AIR MODE OR PROBE TEST
ALTITUDE RATE
COMPUTED AIRSPEED
30 - 450 KNT
TAT
NC
NC
STATIC
IMPACT PRESSURE
COMPUTED
AIRSPEED
CALCULATION
-60 to +90 DEG C

TS12 LEFT AOA SNSR
(STA 208.5)
COMPUTER
PITOT
TOTAL PRESSURE
INDICATED AOA
CORRECTED AOA
AND
TEMPERATURE
AOA SENSOR
26V AC REF
2
AIR DATA
ALT-BARO CORR 1
ALT-BARO CORR 2
ALT-BARO CORR 3
ALT-BARO CORR 4
150 - 450 KNT
CALIBRATION
FREQUENCY
TO
DIGITAL
CONVERTER
AOA SENSOR
26V AC REF
TS161 LEFT TOTAL

AIR TEMP PROBE
(STA 143.5, WL 228)
CALCULATION
0 - 20k
FPM
OUTPUT BUS NO.4
ALTITUDE
ALTITUDE
VMO
CALCULATION
TEMP
TO PROBE
HEAT SYS
PS
TEMP
PT
TO
PROBE
HEAT
SYS
CASE
FS
ALTITUDE
RATE
CALCULATION
LOW SPEED
ARINC 429
BARO CORR 1 (IN)

BARO CORR 1 (MB)
BARO CORR 2 (IN)
BARO CORR 2 (MB)
BARO CORR 3 (IN)
BARO CORR 3 (MB)
SYNCHRO
-1 to +50k FT
C1
L AIR DATA AOA
SENSOR (F11)
MAINT WORD 1
MAINT WORD 2
MAINT WORD 3
MAINT WORD 4
MAINT WORD 5
SENSOR
FAULT
INDICATOR
COMMON
A/C TYPE
M100
TEST
ALTN
S591 ALTN
VMO/MMO SEL
LEFT AIR DATA COMPUTER (E1-3)

1
ALL FUNCTIONS WITHIN THE ADC ARE MONITORED BY BITE
TO USER SYSTEMS. SEE BLOCK DIAGRAM
26V AC SYNCHRO REFERENCE TO CAPTAINS AND

FIRST OFFICERS ELECTRIC ALTIMETER
767-300
63412AMA

g63412am

(Continued)
Program Pins (Continued)

Zero Static Source Error Correction (SSEC). This pin, if
grounded, will disable the SSEC function. All Qantas 767 aircraft
will have this pin open to enable SSEC. SSEC is required for
compliance with the reduced vertical separation minimum
(RVSM).
Baro alt No. 4 = Baro alt No. 1
SDI parity - Ensures correct parity for SDI
Discrete Inputs
Test - The ADC test switch located on the P61 panel is routed
through an air/ground relay to the ADC. A functional test from the
P61 panel can only be done on the ground.
Air ground relay
TAT probe heat
Indicates heating status
AOA probe heat
using systems extract only those words necessary for their purpose.
A fault on any one independent bus does not affect the performance
of the other independent buses. Words output on the bus include the
following:
Maintenance Words
These words are currently not utilized on the 757/767 airplane.
Barometric Correction 1-3

These words repeat baro corrections received from the altimeters.
Baro Corrected Altitude

Baro corrected altitude is pressure altitude corrected for the
difference between the standard pressure and the actual barometric
pressure. This difference is set using the baro correction set knob on
the altimeter. Baro corrected altitude No. 1 is calculated using baro
correction No. 1, baro corrected altitude No. 2 with baro correction
No. 2, and baro corrected altitude No. 3 with baro corrected No. 1.
Baro corrected altitude No. 4 is equal to baro corrected altitude No.
1.
Pitot probe heat

Output
Altitude Rate
The altitude rate is the vertical speed of the airplane. It is calculated
as a function of time and pressure altitude.
Four independent buffered low speed ARINC 429 output buses

provide identical data and include all words that are shown on the
schematic. Although all parameters are transmitted on all buses,
M0008B60.PST
FAULT BALL
POWER
SUPPLY
115V AC
STBY BUS
HV
C625
L AIR DATA CMPTR
(F10)
GND
SIN
T139
L ADC
XFMR (P36)
C2
L AIR DATA BARO
CORRECTION (F12)
BARO CORRECTION
26V AC REF
LV
FROM
AIR
DATA
INST
COS
COM
SIN
COS
COM
SIN
COS
COM
BUILT IN
TEST (BIT)
MONITOR
TO
DIGITAL
CONVERTERS
BARO CORRECTED
ALTITUDE
CALCULATION
FREQUENCY
MODULATED
PRESSURE
SENSOR
PS
FROM
PITOT
STATIC
SYSTEM
P11-1
CIRCUIT BREAKER
PNL ASSY
>50 % N2 OR
AIR MODE
VANE
TEST
FREQUENCY
TO
DIGITAL
CONVERTER
CALIBRATION
A/C
TYPE
STATIC
SOURCE
ERROR
CORRECTION
AND
TEMPERATURE
COMPENSATION
FREQUENCY
MODULATED
PRESSURE
SENSOR
TEST
CX
TEST
SIN
COS
COM
SIN
COS
COM
CX
COMPENSATION
CORRECT
AOA
SENSING ELEMENT
NC
A/C TYPE
TAS
-99 to +60 DEG C
K149
SYS NO. 1 AIR/
GROUND BAT. (P36)
TAS (BCD)
100 to 599 KNT
SAT
SAT (BCD)
TAT (BNR)
COMPUTATION
TAT
TAT (BCD)
COMPUTATION
OUTPUT BUS NO.1
SDI NO.1
SDI NO.2
DISCRETE WORD 1
DISCRETE WORD 2
SOFTWARE
DISCRETES
CODER
HARDWARE
WARNING
ELECTRONICS
NORM
TAT HEATER
TO
ALT
ALERT
SYS
F/T
FUNCTIONAL
TEST
SIGNAL GROUND
TEST
M10398
PNL (P61)
2
OUTPUT BUS NO.2
TAS (BNR)
COMPUTATION
PROGRAM PIN COMMON

SDI NO.1
SDI NO.2
VMO ALT NO. 1
AOA ROT REF
SDI PARITY
UNIQUE AOA
ALT WORD NO. 4=
BARO ALT NO. 1
ZERO SSEC

AIR
OUTPUT BUS NO.3
SAT (BNR)
P/S PROBE HEAT
L STALL
EXTERNAL
SENSOR
FUNCTIONAL
FAULT
TEST
NO. 2 AOA
NO. 2 AOA INPUT
AOA PROBE HEAT
GND
OVERSPEED DISCRETE
VMO
NO. 1 AOA
0.1 - 1.0 M
NO. 1 AOA INPUT
UPPER LEFT AOA HTR

UPPER RIGHT AOA HTR
TAT PROBE HEAT

L ADC
ADC FAIL
ARINC 429
TRANSMITTER
MACH
MACH
CALCULATION
SYNCHRO
TO
DIGITAL
CONVERTERS
TEST
ALTITUDE RATE
COMPUTED AIRSPEED
30 - 450 KNT
TAT
NC
NC
STATIC
IMPACT PRESSURE
COMPUTED
AIRSPEED
CALCULATION
-60 to +90 DEG C

TS12 LEFT AOA SNSR
(STA 208.5)
COMPUTER
PITOT
TOTAL PRESSURE
INDICATED AOA
CORRECTED AOA
AND
TEMPERATURE
AOA SENSOR
26V AC REF
2
AIR DATA
ALT-BARO CORR 1
ALT-BARO CORR 2
ALT-BARO CORR 3
ALT-BARO CORR 4
150 - 450 KNT
CALIBRATION
FREQUENCY
TO
DIGITAL
CONVERTER
AOA SENSOR
26V AC REF
TS161 LEFT TOTAL

AIR TEMP PROBE
(STA 143.5, WL 228)
CALCULATION
0 - 20k
FPM
OUTPUT BUS NO.4
ALTITUDE
ALTITUDE
VMO
CALCULATION
TEMP
TO PROBE
HEAT SYS
PS
TEMP
PT
TO
PROBE
HEAT
SYS
CASE
FS
ALTITUDE
RATE
CALCULATION
LOW SPEED
ARINC 429
BARO CORR 1 (IN)

BARO CORR 1 (MB)
BARO CORR 2 (IN)
BARO CORR 2 (MB)
BARO CORR 3 (IN)
BARO CORR 3 (MB)
SYNCHRO
-1 to +50k FT
C1
L AIR DATA AOA
SENSOR (F11)
MAINT WORD 1
MAINT WORD 2
MAINT WORD 3
MAINT WORD 4
MAINT WORD 5
SENSOR
FAULT
INDICATOR
COMMON
A/C TYPE
M100
TEST
ALTN
S591 ALTN
VMO/MMO SEL

1

767-300
63412AMA

g63412am
(Continued)

(Continued)
Pressure Altitude
Pressure altitude is derived from a calibrated static pressure input,
compensated for temperature and static pressure source errors.
Pressure altitude is the height in a model atmosphere above the
altitude where standard pressure, 29.92 in or 1013 MB, is located.
Corrected AOA
Corrected AOA is the resolvers inputs corrected for airflow
disturbances around the fuselage. The correction coefficients are
predetermined and stored in the ADC.
Impact Pressure
Overspeed Discrete
When an overspeed discrete is issued, the overspeed condition is
indicated by a word sent over the bus.
VMO (Maximum Allowable Airspeed)

Maximum allowable airspeed is the speed that the airplane should
not exceed. VMO is calculated as a function of altitude, airspeed and
Mach. Reference data for 32 airplane types are stored in memory.
Selection of appropriate airplane type determined by program pin.
Impact pressure is the force per unit area required to bring moving
air to rest. It is calculated as the total pressure minus static pressure
and is compensated for differing airspeeds.
Computed Airspeed (CAS)

CAS is the indicated airspeed corrected for instrument and
installation error. Indicated airspeed is proportional to the ratio of
pitot and static pressures.
Mach
Total Pressure
Total pressure is the total force per unit area exerted by the air mass
on the surface of the airplane. This is calculated from calibrated pitot
pressure compensated for internal sensor temperature.
Indicated AOA
Mach is the ratio of true airspeed to the speed of sound calculated

with respect to a particular flight condition.
No. 1 AOA, No. 2 AOA

No. 1 and 2 AOA are the corresponding AOA synchro resolvers
inputs digitized and repeated as an output.
Indicated AOA is the angle of attack between the flight path of the
airplanes center of mass and the longitudinal axis. It is calculated by
digitizing the AOA synchro resolver inputs.
M0008B60.PST
FAULT BALL
POWER
SUPPLY
115V AC
STBY BUS
HV
C625
L AIR DATA CMPTR
(F10)
GND
SIN
T139
L ADC
XFMR (P36)
C2
L AIR DATA BARO
CORRECTION (F12)
BARO CORRECTION
26V AC REF
LV
FROM
AIR
DATA
INST
COS
COM
SIN
COS
COM
SIN
COS
COM
BUILT IN
TEST (BIT)
MONITOR
TO
DIGITAL
CONVERTERS
BARO CORRECTED
ALTITUDE
CALCULATION
FREQUENCY
MODULATED
PRESSURE
SENSOR
PS
FROM
PITOT
STATIC
SYSTEM
P11-1
CIRCUIT BREAKER
PNL ASSY
>50 % N2 OR
AIR MODE
VANE
TEST
FREQUENCY
TO
DIGITAL
CONVERTER
CALIBRATION
A/C
TYPE
STATIC
SOURCE
ERROR
CORRECTION
AND
TEMPERATURE
COMPENSATION
FREQUENCY
MODULATED
PRESSURE
SENSOR
TEST
CX
TEST
SIN
COS
COM
SIN
COS
COM
CX
COMPENSATION
CORRECT
AOA
SENSING ELEMENT
NC
A/C TYPE
TAS
-99 to +60 DEG C
K149
SYS NO. 1 AIR/
GROUND BAT. (P36)
TAS (BCD)
100 to 599 KNT
SAT
SAT (BCD)
TAT (BNR)
COMPUTATION
TAT
TAT (BCD)
COMPUTATION
OUTPUT BUS NO.1
SDI NO.1
SDI NO.2
DISCRETE WORD 1
DISCRETE WORD 2
SOFTWARE
DISCRETES
CODER
HARDWARE
WARNING
ELECTRONICS
NORM
TAT HEATER
TO
ALT
ALERT
SYS
F/T
FUNCTIONAL
TEST
SIGNAL GROUND
TEST
M10398
PNL (P61)
2
OUTPUT BUS NO.2
TAS (BNR)
COMPUTATION
PROGRAM PIN COMMON

SDI NO.1
SDI NO.2
VMO ALT NO. 1
AOA ROT REF
SDI PARITY
UNIQUE AOA
ALT WORD NO. 4=
BARO ALT NO. 1
ZERO SSEC

AIR
OUTPUT BUS NO.3
SAT (BNR)
P/S PROBE HEAT
L STALL
EXTERNAL
SENSOR
FUNCTIONAL
FAULT
TEST
NO. 2 AOA
NO. 2 AOA INPUT
AOA PROBE HEAT
GND
OVERSPEED DISCRETE
VMO
NO. 1 AOA
0.1 - 1.0 M
NO. 1 AOA INPUT
UPPER LEFT AOA HTR

UPPER RIGHT AOA HTR
TAT PROBE HEAT

L ADC
ADC FAIL
ARINC 429
TRANSMITTER
MACH
MACH
CALCULATION
SYNCHRO
TO
DIGITAL
CONVERTERS
TEST
ALTITUDE RATE
COMPUTED AIRSPEED
30 - 450 KNT
TAT
NC
NC
STATIC
IMPACT PRESSURE
COMPUTED
AIRSPEED
CALCULATION
-60 to +90 DEG C

TS12 LEFT AOA SNSR
(STA 208.5)
COMPUTER
PITOT
TOTAL PRESSURE
INDICATED AOA
CORRECTED AOA
AND
TEMPERATURE
AOA SENSOR
26V AC REF
2
AIR DATA
ALT-BARO CORR 1
ALT-BARO CORR 2
ALT-BARO CORR 3
ALT-BARO CORR 4
150 - 450 KNT
CALIBRATION
FREQUENCY
TO
DIGITAL
CONVERTER
AOA SENSOR
26V AC REF
TS161 LEFT TOTAL

AIR TEMP PROBE
(STA 143.5, WL 228)
CALCULATION
0 - 20k
FPM
OUTPUT BUS NO.4
ALTITUDE
ALTITUDE
VMO
CALCULATION
TEMP
TO PROBE
HEAT SYS
PS
TEMP
PT
TO
PROBE
HEAT
SYS
CASE
FS
ALTITUDE
RATE
CALCULATION
LOW SPEED
ARINC 429
BARO CORR 1 (IN)

BARO CORR 1 (MB)
BARO CORR 2 (IN)
BARO CORR 2 (MB)
BARO CORR 3 (IN)
BARO CORR 3 (MB)
SYNCHRO
-1 to +50k FT
C1
L AIR DATA AOA
SENSOR (F11)
MAINT WORD 1
MAINT WORD 2
MAINT WORD 3
MAINT WORD 4
MAINT WORD 5
SENSOR
FAULT
INDICATOR
COMMON
A/C TYPE
M100
TEST
ALTN
S591 ALTN
VMO/MMO SEL

1

767-300
63412AMA

g63412am
(Continued)

(Continued)
True Air Speed

TAS is the speed of the airplane with respect to the ambient air it is
passing through. It is computed using pitot pressure, static pressure
and air density. Air density is a function of static air temperature and
static pressure.
Bite test (fail/good)
Discrete Output
An analog overspeed discrete is produced when computed airspeed
or Mach exceeds predetermined limits set by the ADC.
Total Air Temperature (TAT)

TAT is the temperature of a sample of the compressed air mass
which is surrounding the airplane. TAT is computed as the
temperature measured by the TAT probe compensated for wiring
resistance.
Static Air Temperature

SAT is the temperature of the still air surrounding the airplane. SAT
is calculated as the temperature measured by the TAT probe and
compensated for airflow frictional heating and compressing of the
temperature probe.
Discrete Words 1 and 2
BITE Monitor
A built in test is performed on all inputs to the ADC to check for
input failures. In addition a built in test is performed on the
frequency to digital converter, the analog to digital converter, the
ARINC transmitter, the ARINC receiver, the CPUs power supply,
static and pitot transducers.
When an internal failure is detected the ADC FAIL fault ball changes
from black to yellow. When an external sensor failure is detected,
during functional test a red LED single digit is displayed in the
external fault window. The coded digit corresponds to a specific
external sensor fault. These codes can be found in the Maintenance
Manual.
These words include status on the following:
Probe heat (on/off)

ADC (fail/good)
Vmo/Mmo overspeed warning (on/off)
Primary AOA input (fail/good)
AOA input averaging (yes/no)
Vmo reference data change selected (yes/no)
Static Source Error Correction (SSEC) alternate selected (yes/no)
Self-Test
A self-test can be performed from two places. One place is the
FUNCTIONAL TEST switch on the front panel of the air data
computer, another place is the ADC test switch on the P61 panel
while the airplane is on the ground. During this test simulated
M0008B60.PST
FAULT BALL
POWER
SUPPLY
115V AC
STBY BUS
HV
C625
L AIR DATA CMPTR
(F10)
GND
SIN
T139
L ADC
XFMR (P36)
C2
L AIR DATA BARO
CORRECTION (F12)
BARO CORRECTION
26V AC REF
LV
FROM
AIR
DATA
INST
COS
COM
SIN
COS
COM
SIN
COS
COM
BUILT IN
TEST (BIT)
MONITOR
TO
DIGITAL
CONVERTERS
BARO CORRECTED
ALTITUDE
CALCULATION
FREQUENCY
MODULATED
PRESSURE
SENSOR
PS
FROM
PITOT
STATIC
SYSTEM
P11-1
CIRCUIT BREAKER
PNL ASSY
>50 % N2 OR
AIR MODE
VANE
TEST
FREQUENCY
TO
DIGITAL
CONVERTER
CALIBRATION
A/C
TYPE
STATIC
SOURCE
ERROR
CORRECTION
AND
TEMPERATURE
COMPENSATION
FREQUENCY
MODULATED
PRESSURE
SENSOR
TEST
CX
TEST
SIN
COS
COM
SIN
COS
COM
CX
COMPENSATION
CORRECT
AOA
SENSING ELEMENT
NC
A/C TYPE
TAS
-99 to +60 DEG C
K149
SYS NO. 1 AIR/
GROUND BAT. (P36)
TAS (BCD)
100 to 599 KNT
SAT
SAT (BCD)
TAT (BNR)
COMPUTATION
TAT
TAT (BCD)
COMPUTATION
OUTPUT BUS NO.1
SDI NO.1
SDI NO.2
DISCRETE WORD 1
DISCRETE WORD 2
SOFTWARE
DISCRETES
CODER
HARDWARE
WARNING
ELECTRONICS
NORM
TAT HEATER
TO
ALT
ALERT
SYS
F/T
FUNCTIONAL
TEST
SIGNAL GROUND
TEST
M10398
PNL (P61)
2
OUTPUT BUS NO.2
TAS (BNR)
COMPUTATION
PROGRAM PIN COMMON

SDI NO.1
SDI NO.2
VMO ALT NO. 1
AOA ROT REF
SDI PARITY
UNIQUE AOA
ALT WORD NO. 4=
BARO ALT NO. 1
ZERO SSEC

AIR
OUTPUT BUS NO.3
SAT (BNR)
P/S PROBE HEAT
L STALL
EXTERNAL
SENSOR
FUNCTIONAL
FAULT
TEST
NO. 2 AOA
NO. 2 AOA INPUT
AOA PROBE HEAT
GND
OVERSPEED DISCRETE
VMO
NO. 1 AOA
0.1 - 1.0 M
NO. 1 AOA INPUT
UPPER LEFT AOA HTR

UPPER RIGHT AOA HTR
TAT PROBE HEAT

L ADC
ADC FAIL
ARINC 429
TRANSMITTER
MACH
MACH
CALCULATION
SYNCHRO
TO
DIGITAL
CONVERTERS
TEST
ALTITUDE RATE
COMPUTED AIRSPEED
30 - 450 KNT
TAT
NC
NC
STATIC
IMPACT PRESSURE
COMPUTED
AIRSPEED
CALCULATION
-60 to +90 DEG C

TS12 LEFT AOA SNSR
(STA 208.5)
COMPUTER
PITOT
TOTAL PRESSURE
INDICATED AOA
CORRECTED AOA
AND
TEMPERATURE
AOA SENSOR
26V AC REF
2
AIR DATA
ALT-BARO CORR 1
ALT-BARO CORR 2
ALT-BARO CORR 3
ALT-BARO CORR 4
150 - 450 KNT
CALIBRATION
FREQUENCY
TO
DIGITAL
CONVERTER
AOA SENSOR
26V AC REF
TS161 LEFT TOTAL

AIR TEMP PROBE
(STA 143.5, WL 228)
CALCULATION
0 - 20k
FPM
OUTPUT BUS NO.4
ALTITUDE
ALTITUDE
VMO
CALCULATION
TEMP
TO PROBE
HEAT SYS
PS
TEMP
PT
TO
PROBE
HEAT
SYS
CASE
FS
ALTITUDE
RATE
CALCULATION
LOW SPEED
ARINC 429
BARO CORR 1 (IN)

BARO CORR 1 (MB)
BARO CORR 2 (IN)
BARO CORR 2 (MB)
BARO CORR 3 (IN)
BARO CORR 3 (MB)
SYNCHRO
-1 to +50k FT
C1
L AIR DATA AOA
SENSOR (F11)
MAINT WORD 1
MAINT WORD 2
MAINT WORD 3
MAINT WORD 4
MAINT WORD 5
SENSOR
FAULT
INDICATOR
COMMON
A/C TYPE
M100
TEST
ALTN
S591 ALTN
VMO/MMO SEL

1

767-300
63412AMA

g63412am
(Continued)

(Continued)
Self-Test
(Continued)
pitot/static, angle of attack, and TAT signals from memory are

injected into their associated circuits. The results of this test are
described in the ADC TEST section.
M0008B60.PST
FAULT BALL
POWER
SUPPLY
115V AC
STBY BUS
HV
C625
L AIR DATA CMPTR
(F10)
GND
SIN
T139
L ADC
XFMR (P36)
C2
L AIR DATA BARO
CORRECTION (F12)
BARO CORRECTION
26V AC REF
LV
FROM
AIR
DATA
INST
COS
COM
SIN
COS
COM
SIN
COS
COM
BUILT IN
TEST (BIT)
MONITOR
TO
DIGITAL
CONVERTERS
BARO CORRECTED
ALTITUDE
CALCULATION
FREQUENCY
MODULATED
PRESSURE
SENSOR
PS
FROM
PITOT
STATIC
SYSTEM
P11-1
CIRCUIT BREAKER
PNL ASSY
>50 % N2 OR
AIR MODE
VANE
TEST
FREQUENCY
TO
DIGITAL
CONVERTER
CALIBRATION
A/C
TYPE
STATIC
SOURCE
ERROR
CORRECTION
AND
TEMPERATURE
COMPENSATION
FREQUENCY
MODULATED
PRESSURE
SENSOR
TEST
CX
TEST
SIN
COS
COM
SIN
COS
COM
CX
COMPENSATION
CORRECT
AOA
SENSING ELEMENT
NC
A/C TYPE
TAS
-99 to +60 DEG C
K149
SYS NO. 1 AIR/
GROUND BAT. (P36)
TAS (BCD)
100 to 599 KNT
SAT
SAT (BCD)
TAT (BNR)
COMPUTATION
TAT
TAT (BCD)
COMPUTATION
OUTPUT BUS NO.1
SDI NO.1
SDI NO.2
DISCRETE WORD 1
DISCRETE WORD 2
SOFTWARE
DISCRETES
CODER
HARDWARE
WARNING
ELECTRONICS
NORM
TAT HEATER
TO
ALT
ALERT
SYS
F/T
FUNCTIONAL
TEST
SIGNAL GROUND
TEST
M10398
PNL (P61)
2
OUTPUT BUS NO.2
TAS (BNR)
COMPUTATION
PROGRAM PIN COMMON

SDI NO.1
SDI NO.2
VMO ALT NO. 1
AOA ROT REF
SDI PARITY
UNIQUE AOA
ALT WORD NO. 4=
BARO ALT NO. 1
ZERO SSEC

AIR
OUTPUT BUS NO.3
SAT (BNR)
P/S PROBE HEAT
L STALL
EXTERNAL
SENSOR
FUNCTIONAL
FAULT
TEST
NO. 2 AOA
NO. 2 AOA INPUT
AOA PROBE HEAT
GND
OVERSPEED DISCRETE
VMO
NO. 1 AOA
0.1 - 1.0 M
NO. 1 AOA INPUT
UPPER LEFT AOA HTR

UPPER RIGHT AOA HTR
TAT PROBE HEAT

L ADC
ADC FAIL
ARINC 429
TRANSMITTER
MACH
MACH
CALCULATION
SYNCHRO
TO
DIGITAL
CONVERTERS
TEST
ALTITUDE RATE
COMPUTED AIRSPEED
30 - 450 KNT
TAT
NC
NC
STATIC
IMPACT PRESSURE
COMPUTED
AIRSPEED
CALCULATION
-60 to +90 DEG C

TS12 LEFT AOA SNSR
(STA 208.5)
COMPUTER
PITOT
TOTAL PRESSURE
INDICATED AOA
CORRECTED AOA
AND
TEMPERATURE
AOA SENSOR
26V AC REF
2
AIR DATA
ALT-BARO CORR 1
ALT-BARO CORR 2
ALT-BARO CORR 3
ALT-BARO CORR 4
150 - 450 KNT
CALIBRATION
FREQUENCY
TO
DIGITAL
CONVERTER
AOA SENSOR
26V AC REF
TS161 LEFT TOTAL

AIR TEMP PROBE
(STA 143.5, WL 228)
CALCULATION
0 - 20k
FPM
OUTPUT BUS NO.4
ALTITUDE
ALTITUDE
VMO
CALCULATION
TEMP
TO PROBE
HEAT SYS
PS
TEMP
PT
TO
PROBE
HEAT
SYS
CASE
FS
ALTITUDE
RATE
CALCULATION
LOW SPEED
ARINC 429
BARO CORR 1 (IN)

BARO CORR 1 (MB)
BARO CORR 2 (IN)
BARO CORR 2 (MB)
BARO CORR 3 (IN)
BARO CORR 3 (MB)
SYNCHRO
-1 to +50k FT
C1
L AIR DATA AOA
SENSOR (F11)
MAINT WORD 1
MAINT WORD 2
MAINT WORD 3
MAINT WORD 4
MAINT WORD 5
SENSOR
FAULT
INDICATOR
COMMON
A/C TYPE
M100
TEST
ALTN
S591 ALTN
VMO/MMO SEL

1

767-300
63412AMA

g63412am
(Continued)
MAXIMUM OPERATING SPEED SCHEDULE (FAA VERSION)

Mach/Airspeed Warning Curve Characteristics
Vmo
Constant airspeed up to 25,723 feet then decreases with altitude.
Mmo
Constant at .86 from 25,723 feet to 45,000 feet.
Vmo/Mmo pointer indication
Approximately 3 knots below Vmo limit.
Overspeed Switch Function

Vmo/Mmo overspeed switch actuation point
Generates discrete output signal at approximately 2 knots above
Vmo limit and .003 mach above Mmo limit.
Overspeed Switch
When actuated, the aural warning module generates a siren warning,
and the master warning module illuminates the left and right red
WARNING lights on glareshield panel (P7). Also, the red
OVERSPEED discrete light illuminates.
M0008BB0.PST
45,000
40,000
30,000
ALT Mmo
(0.73M)
30,841 FT
Mmo
(0.86M)
25,723 FT
ALTITUDE
(FEET)
20,000
ALT Vmo (GEAR DOWN)
(270 KTS)
NORMAL Vmo(360KTS)
10,000
S.L.
250
300
350
Vc-COMPUTED AIRSPEED (KNOTS)
NORMAL Vmo/Mmo OVERSPEED SWITCH ACTUATION POINTS

362 KNOTS
360 Vc
0.860 Mc 0.863 MACH
Vc
400
ALTERNATE Vmo/Mmo OVERSPEED SWITCH ACTUATION POINTS

270 Vc
272
0.730>Mc
0.733
=COMPUTED AIRSPEED OUTPUT,KNOTS
Vmo =MAX OPERATING AIRSPEED

Mc =MACH NUMBER OUTPUT
Mmo =MAX OPERATING MACH
63412ANA
MAXIMUM OPERATING SPEED SCHEDULE (FAA VERSION)

g63412an
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
FUNCTIONAL TEST
g63412an
34.12 AIR DATA COMPUTER SYSTEM FUNCTIONAL TEST
AIR DATA COMPUTING SYSTEM - FUNCTIONAL TEST

General
The operational test is limited to the self-test mode of air data
computer operation. Satisfactory completion of this test assures that:
The air data computer modules are functioning properly;
The interface and failure warning system between computers and
air data instruments is operating;
The air data instruments respond to input signals without major
internal failures.
AIR DATA COMPTR L/R Test Switches (P61 Test

Panel Module)
Actuating the switch to the L or R position and holding it, initiates a
test of the left or right air data computer and its interfacing
equipment.
This test is terminated when the switch is released back to the center
position.
The test capability at the test panel module is inhibited in flight.
FUNCTIONAL TEST Switch

Depressing the ADCs FUNCTIONAL TEST switch on the front face
of either air data computer, initiates a test of that air data computer
and its interfacing equipment only. The test is terminated when the
switch is released.
CAUTION
Do not test the ADC if the pitot/static system is
pressurized. The ADC system will enter an erroneous
failure mode. To correct this failure mode, the pitot/static
system must be returned to ambient pressure and the
functional test must be reactivated.
Test Results
The following test results apply to a test initiated from either
locations.
For the first two seconds of the test the following indications may be
observed:
P1-3 Overspeed discrete light on

Master Warning lights on
Overspeed Aural annunciated (Siren)
Mach/ASI VMO/MMO pointer slew downwards
If the test was initiated via the ADC front panel, the external
sensor monitor will active at this time.
For the next five seconds, the following flags may be observed:
Altimeter OFF flag
M0008BD3.PST
ACTION
OVSPD
SEQUENCE
TEST SWITCH RELEASED
TEST SWITCH ACTIVATED & HELD
FIRST 2
SECONDS
ONLY FOR FUNCTIONAL

TEST FROM ADC FRONT PNL.
NEXT 5
SECONDS
OVSPD DISCRETE ANNUNCIATOR & MASTER

WARNING ANNUNCIATORS ILLUMINATED.
AURAL WARNING (SIREN) IS ACTIVATED.
VMO POINTER SLEWS DOWNWARDS.
EXTERNAL SENSOR FAULT MONITOR ACTIVATED.
IF FAULT BALL IS SET (YELLOW) & NO FAULT
EXISTS, FAULT BALL CLEARS (BLACK).
WARNING
R
RESULTS
OVERSPEED DISCRETE
ANNUNCIATOR (P1-3)
CAUTION
A
MASTER WARNING & CAUTION

ANNUNCIATORS (P7)
MACH FLAG
(OVER MACH
DISPLAY)
MAXIMUM
AIRSPEED
FLAG
MO
AIRSPEED
FLAG (OVER
AIRSPEED
DRUM
DISPLAY)
INVALID DISPLAYS-FLAGS IN VIEW ON

THE ALTIMETER(S), MACH/AIRSPEED INDICATOR(S),
& VERTICAL SPEED INDICATOR(S) (VIA IRUS).
EXTERNAL SENSOR FAULT MONITOR ACTIVATED. 1
MACH/AIRSPEED INDICATOR
7 SECONDS
AFTER
ACTIVATION
UNTIL TEST
SWITCH
RELEASED
FLAGS REMOVED FROM ALTIMETER AND MASI.

ALTITUDE DISPLAY IS 10,000 FT.
(AFTER SLEWING FROM PRESENT ALTITUDE.)
MACH DISPLAY BLANK SHUTTER IN VIEW(<0.4).
AIRSPEED DISPLAY IS 137 KNOTS.
TAT DISPLAY IS +35 C ON UPPER EICAS DISPLAY.
VERTICAL SPEED INDICATOR FLAG REMAIN IN VIEW.
OFF FLAG
(OVER ALTITUDE
DRUM DISPLAY)
OFF
ALTIMETER
N/A
ALL INDICATORS & SYSTEMS RETURN TO NORMAL

OPERATION.
EXTERNAL SENSOR FAULT MONITOR DEACTIVATED.
2
VERTICAL
SPEED
.5
1
VERTICAL SPEED
INVALID FLAG
1000 FPM
.5
.5
4
1
.5
4
1
ONLY IF TMC C/B IS

TRIPPED.
VSI
FAIL
OFF
VERTICAL SPEED INDICATOR
TCAS / VERTICAL SPEED INDICATOR

63412AOA

g63412ao
34.12 AIR DATA COMPUTER SYSTEM FUNCTIONAL TEST

(Continued)
Test Results
(Continued)
Mach/ASI
Mach flag
VMO flag
AS flag
Vertical Speed Indicator OFF flag
Seven seconds after initiating a test the ADC outputs the following
test values:
VMO/MMO pointer returns to 360 knots

Altitude = 10,000 feet
Airspeed = 137 knots
T.A.T. = +35 C
S.A.T = +31.2 C
T.A.S. = 170 knots
Mach = 0.25
The VSI OFF flag remains in view for the remainder of the test
with the pointer at zero. For the TCAS/Vertical Speed indicator,
the pointer is removed from view and a VSI FAIL legend is
displayed.
NOTE: CAS, TAT, MACH and Altitude test values may be observed
on the EICAS Performance/APU page.
The TAT test value of +35 C will only be displayed on the
upper EICAS if BOTH ADCs are tested simultaneously, or if
the TMC circuit breaker is tripped prior to carrying out
individual ADC tests.
These test indications will remain until the switch is released.
M0008BD3.PST
ACTION
OVSPD
SEQUENCE
TEST SWITCH RELEASED
TEST SWITCH ACTIVATED & HELD
FIRST 2
SECONDS
ONLY FOR FUNCTIONAL

TEST FROM ADC FRONT PNL.
NEXT 5
SECONDS
WARNING
R
RESULTS
OVERSPEED DISCRETE
ANNUNCIATOR (P1-3)
OVSPD DISCRETE ANNUNCIATOR & MASTER

WARNING ANNUNCIATORS ILLUMINATED.
AURAL WARNING (SIREN) IS ACTIVATED.
VMO POINTER SLEWS DOWNWARDS.
EXTERNAL SENSOR FAULT MONITOR ACTIVATED.
IF FAULT BALL IS SET (YELLOW) & NO FAULT
EXISTS, FAULT BALL CLEARS (BLACK).
CAUTION
A
MASTER WARNING & CAUTION

ANNUNCIATORS (P7)
MACH FLAG
(OVER MACH
DISPLAY)
MAXIMUM
AIRSPEED
FLAG
MO
AIRSPEED
FLAG (OVER
AIRSPEED
DRUM
DISPLAY)
INVALID DISPLAYS-FLAGS IN VIEW ON

THE ALTIMETER(S), MACH/AIRSPEED INDICATOR(S),
& VERTICAL SPEED INDICATOR(S) (VIA IRUS).
MACH/AIRSPEED INDICATOR
7 SECONDS
AFTER
ACTIVATION
UNTIL TEST
SWITCH
RELEASED
FLAGS REMOVED FROM ALTIMETER AND MASI.

ALTITUDE DISPLAY IS 10,000 FT.
(AFTER SLEWING FROM PRESENT ALTITUDE.)
MACH DISPLAY BLANK SHUTTER IN VIEW(<0.4).
AIRSPEED DISPLAY IS 137 KNOTS.
TAT DISPLAY IS +35 C ON UPPER EICAS DISPLAY.
VERTICAL SPEED INDICATOR FLAG REMAIN IN VIEW.
OFF FLAG
(OVER ALTITUDE
DRUM DISPLAY)
OFF
ALTIMETER
N/A
ALL INDICATORS & SYSTEMS RETURN TO NORMAL

OPERATION.
EXTERNAL SENSOR FAULT MONITOR DEACTIVATED.
2
VERTICAL
SPEED
.5
1
VERTICAL SPEED
INVALID FLAG
1000 FPM
.5
.5
4
1
.5
4
1
VERTICAL SPEED INDICATOR
ONLY IF TMC C/B IS

TRIPPED.
VSI
FAIL
OFF
TCAS / VERTICAL SPEED INDICATOR

63412AOA

g63412ao
(Continued)
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
AIR DATA INSTRUMENTS
Table of Contents
Subchapter
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DISPLAYS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Page
565
571
587
595
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
INTRODUCTION
g63412ao
34.13 AIR DATA INSTRUMENTS INTRODUCTION
AIR DATA INSTRUMENTS INTRODUCTION

Electric Altimeter and Mach Airspeed Indicators
The prime instruments are driven by digital data signals from the air
data computers.
Standby Altimeter and Standby Airspeed Indicator

These instruments are conventional pneumatic instruments which
receive pressure inputs from the pitot-static system.
Metric Altimeters
Where installed, the metric altimeters provide an indication to the
pilots of the aircrafts height in metres. These instruments are driven
by digital signals from the air data computers (for the actual altitude)
and the mode control panel (for the selected altitude).
M0008C0E.PST
1
CAPT METRIC ALTIMETER
CAPT ELECTRIC ALTIMETER
AIR DATA COMPUTING SYSTEM
CAPT MACH AIRSPEED

INDICATOR
ARINC 429 DATA
T.A.S. AND S.A.T. TO F.M.C. PROGRESS 2/2
MAIN AIR
DATA INSTRUMENTS
F/O ELECTRIC ALTIMETER
F/O MACH AIRSPEED

INDICATOR
1
F/O METRIC ALTIMETER
PITOT-STATIC SYSTEM
WHERE INSTALLED
PNEUMATIC
PNEUMATIC ALTIMETER
PNEUMATIC AIRSPEED
INDICATOR
STANDBY AIR
DATA INSTRUMENTS
63413AAA
AIR DATA INSTRUMENTS INTRODUCTION

g63413aa
34.13 AIR DATA INSTRUMENTS INTRODUCTION
AIR DATA INSTRUMENTS - BLOCK DIAGRAM

Primary Instruments
The primary air data instruments are the electric altimeters,
mach/airspeed indicators and if installed, the metric altimeters. Power
to these instruments is indicated on the graphic.
The primary air data information is supplied by bus 2 of the
associated air data computer.
If the ADC ALT switch is selected, an analog discreet causes an
internal port selection, which enables the alternate air data computer
to supply identical information via bus 4.
Standby Instruments
These instruments receive pressures directly from the pitot-static
system. The altimeter receives power for an internal vibrator used to
minimize frictional errors.
M0008C2A.PST
.
115V AC
L BUS
L METRIC
SEL ALT
115V AC
CAPT FLT
INSTR
XFR BUS
CAPTS METRIC ALT (P1-1)

L IAS/MACH
BUS 2
ALTN
BARO 3
N1 CAPTS MACH/AIRSPEED IND (P1-1)
CAPTS ADC INST

SOURCE SEL SW (P1-1)
BARO 1
BARO CORRECT
BARO 2
BUS 4
115V AC
CAPT FLT
INSTR
XFR BUS
115V AC
F/O FLT
INSTR
XFR BUS
N8 CAPTS ALTIMETER (P1-3)
M100 L AIR DATA

COMPUTER (E1-3)
L ALTM
R IAS/MACH
BUS 4
BARO 2
ALTN
M41 F/OS MACH/AIRSPEED IND (P3-1)
F/OS ADC INST

SOURCE SEL SW (P3-3)
BARO 1
BARO 3
BUS 2
115V AC
F/O FLT
INSTR
XFR BUS
28V DC
STBY
BUS
BARO CORRECT
M101 R AIR DATA
COMPUTER (E2-3)
R ALTM
N48 F/OS ALTIMETER (P3-3)
STBY ALTM
VIBRATOR
STATIC
PRESSURE
(ALT STATIC)
115V AC
R BUS
R METRIC
SEL ALT
F/OS METRIC ALT (P3-3)
P-11 OVERHEAD CIRCUIT

BREAKER PANEL
PITOT
PRESSURE
(AUX 1 PITOT)
N23 STBY ALTIMETER (P1-3)
N22 STBY AIRSPEED IND (P1-3)
63413ABA
AIR DATA INSTRUMENTS - BLOCK DIAGRAM

g63413ab
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
COMPONENT LOCATIONS
g63413ab
34.13 AIR DATA INSTRUMENTS COMPONENT LOCATIONS
AIR DATA INSTRUMENTS - COMPONENT LOCATIONS

Captains Air Data Instruments
The Captains air data instruments are located as follows:
Mach airspeed indicator - P1-1

Electric altimeter - P1-3
Standby airspeed - P1-3
Standby altimeter - P1-3
Metric altitude display unit - P1-1 (if installed)
First Officers Air Data Instruments

Mach airspeed indicator - P3-1
Electric altimeter - P3-3
Metric altitude display unit - P3-3 (if installed)
M0008C48.PST
CAPTAINS INSTRUMENT PANEL (P1)

METRIC ALTITUDE DISPLAY UNIT
MACH AIRSPEED INDICATOR
ELECTRIC ALTIMETER
STANDBY AIRSPEED INDICATOR
STANDBY ALTIMETER
FIRST OFFICERS INSTRUMENT PANEL (P3)

ELECTRIC ALTIMETER
G63413AK
AIR DATA INSTRUMENTS - COMPONENT LOCATIONS

g63413ak
ELECTRIC ALTIMETER
Barometric Altitude Display
Corrected pressure altitude is displayed in the range of -1000 feet to
+50,000 feet on a combination drum and pointer display in 20-foot
increments. The left digit drum is colored green to alert the flight
crew that the altitude is less than 10,000 feet.
A NEG shutter covers the counter digits when negative altitude is
displayed.
Failure external to altimeter - OFF flag displayed and pointer returns

to zero.
CAUTION
The electrical connectors for the TCAS/IVSI and the
Electrical Altimeter are identical. Serious damage can
occur if the incorrect connector is installed.
Barometric Setting Displays

Two counters display barometric setting as controlled by the baro set
knob. One displays in millibars and the other in inches of mercury.
Altitude Reference Index

The index moves around the periphery of the instrument face as
controlled by the altitude reference set knob.
Altitude Acquisition (ALT) Light

Illuminated by the altitude alert system in reference to the altitude
selected on the AFDS mode control panel.
Failure Displays
Internal failure of altimeter - OFF flag displayed and for certain
failures pointer frozen.
M0008CC3.PST
ALTITUDE DISPLAY
WINDOW
ALTITUDE ACQUISITION LIGHT (WHITE)
ALTITUDE DISPLAY
POINTER
0 0 20 2
LEFT DIGIT GREEN

BELOW 10,000
ALT
ALT
MB
IN
HG
ALTITUDE REFERENCE INDEX
1013 2992
BARO SET INDICATORS
6
BARO
ALTITUDE REFERENCE INDEX

SET KNOB
BARO SET KNOB

A. STANDARD BARO CORRECTION
OFF FLAG
(AMBER)
NEGATIVE SHUTTER (BLACK)
9
0
9
8
7
ALT
NEG
ALT
MB
IN
HG
1001 2954
6
BARO
1
NOTE: DISPLAY RANGES
ALTITUDE: - 1000 TO 50,000 FT
BARO SET: 22.00 IN HG (745 MB) TO
30.99 IN HG (1049 MB)
ALT
1
2
OFF
ALT
MB
IN
HG
1021 3015
6
BARO
4
C. FLAG IN VIEW
B. NEGATIVE ALTITUDE - SHUTTER IN VIEW

BOEING P/N S23IT101 - 1
SPERRY P/N 4039892 - 904
63413ADA
ELECTRIC ALTIMETER
g63413ad

Computed Airspeed
Failure Displays
Airspeed is displayed in the range of 30 to 450 knots both by a

3-digit display window and by a pointer against the circular airspeed
scale.
Failure flags (amber) within the indicator come into view in the
event of an input signal and/or indicator circuit failure.
Mach Number
Mach is displayed in the range of .400 to .999 mach by a 3-digit
magnetic wheel display window. Below .400 mach, a black mask
covers the numerals.
Maximum Allowable Airspeed

Displayed by a red and white striped pointer in the range of 150 to
450 knots against the circular airspeed scale.
The MASI monitors each incoming word and if the word is tagged
invalid, NCD or there is lack of an update of any signal, the
following response will be shown:
Airspeed:
AS FLAG, counter and pointer park at 30 knots
VMO:
VMO FLAG, pointer parks at 260 knots
Mach:
Mach FLAG
Commanded airspeed:
Index driven behind mask
Internal failures will cause the flags to come into view. Also certain
failures may cause the counters and the pointers to be frozen.
Commanded Airspeed
Displayed by a cursor against the circular airspeed scale, indicating
commanded airspeed received from the AFDS mode control panel
speed knob. The FMCS, when in the VNAV mode, will control the
commanded airspeed cursor.
Manually Set Indices

Manually positioned around the instrument face by the pilots, used
for reference.
M0008CF0.PST
60
MACH
400
CURSOR MASK
MACH
350
300
80
100
120
IN
OP
MO
60
MAX
ALLOWABLE
AIRSPEED
400
350
COMPUTED
AIRSPEED
80
100
6 2 7
120
MACH
2
MACH NO.
140
KNOTS
AS
240
220
200
160
180
300
140
KNOTS
2
240
220
2 4 5
200
160
180
COMMANDED
AIRSPEED CURSOR
NORMAL DISPLAYS
1
POINTER/CURSOR FROZEN TO THE

VALUE AT THE TIME OF FAILURE
THE FAILURE DISPLAYS SHOWN APPLY

TO INTERNAL INDICATOR FAILURES.
REFER TO THE TABLE FOR EXTERNAL
INPUT FAILURE DISPLAYS
REFERENCE
AIRSPEED
INDICES (TYP)
(EXTERNAL)
COMPUTED
AIRSPEED
PARAMETER
INDICATOR
INTERNAL
FAILURE
EXTERNAL
INPUT
FAILURE
COMPUTED
AIRSPEED
AS FLAG
1
AS FLAG; POINTER
INDICATES 0
COMMANDED
AIRSPEED
INOP FLAG
1
CURSOR DRIVEN
BEHIND MASK
MAXIMUM
ALLOWABLE
AIRSPEED
VMO FLAG
1
VMO FLAG, POINTER

INDICATES 260
KNOTS
MACH
MACH FLAG
MACH FLAG
FAILURE DISPLAYS
SPERRY 4039891-903
BOEING S231T100-1
63413AEA

g63413ae

General
There are two metric altimeters (located on the P1 and P3 panels)
which provide an indication of metric altitude (both current and
selected) to the pilots. The two sections of display provide
information to the crew using liquid crystal displays (LCD). The
digits are shown as bright images on a dark background with the aid
of back lighting. The metric altimeter is supplied with 115 v ac for
its primary power and 5 v ac for panel lighting.
If a converted value ends with 10, 40, 60 or 90, then this value is
further rounded so that it will end with 00 or 50.
Certain converted values (1580, 2870, 7320 and 11730) are
further corrected using a conversion table (to indicate 1600, 2850,
7300 and 11750 respectively).
The selected altitude will NOT indicate negative values. If a selected
altitude data word is received which indicates a negative altitude, the
indicator will display the no computed data (NCD) display of dashes
(- - - -).
Current Altitude
Altitude data from the air data computers (ADC) is converted from
feet to meters by the metric altimeter and displayed on the upper
LCD display to the nearest multiple of 10 metres. The metric
conversion is made for input data up to a maximum of 65,535 feet
(19,980 metres). Above these limits the display will show the invalid
presentation of dashes (- - - -). For negative altitude values, the
metric conversion is similarly made, but only three digits are
displayed with a negative sign (-) displayed ahead of the values.
The altitude input is from the onside selected ADC.
Selected Altitude
The automatic flight control system mode control panel (AFCS
MCP) selected altitude is converted from feet to meters by the metric
altimeter and displayed on the lower LCD display to the nearest
multiple of 10 metres. The metric conversion is made for input data
up to a maximum of 65,535 feet (19,980 metres) with the following
adjustments:
Failure Displays
If the signal source for either display fails or is non-computed data
(NCD), the display will show dashes (----).
The following lists the conditions each of the displays will
annunciate dashes.
Current Altitude Display

data received above the range of the indicator
invalid data received for greater than 2 seconds
no current altitude data is received for greater than 2 seconds
Selected Altitude Display
data received above the range of the indicator

data received indicating a negative value
invalid data received for greater than 2 seconds
no selected altitude data received for greater than 2 seconds
M6001D7A.PST
METRIC ALT
ALT
M
SEL ALT
M
G63413AJ

g63413aj

(Continued)
Blank Display
The metric altimeter will show a blank display if the unit fails or
there is a loss of power.
M6001D7A.PST
METRIC ALT
ALT
M
SEL ALT
M
G63413AJ

g63413aj
(Continued)
PNEUMATIC ALTIMETER
Description
Leading Particulars
The altimeter is an integrally lighted, pneumatic actuated instrument.
Altitude range
Altitude Readout
Altitude is displayed by means of a counter, dial, and pointer. The
counter indicates 10,000s, 1,000s, and 100s of feet; the 10s and 1s
digits are tied together, the last digit always being a zero. The dial is
marked from 0 to 1,000 feet, with graduations of 20 feet; as the
pointer is driven clockwise, or counterclockwise, past the 1,000 foot
mark, a 1,000 foot increment is added to, or subtracted from, the
counter.
The left-most digit displays the color green between 10,000 feet and
zero (0) feet.
Negative altitudes are indicated by a NEG flag in the left-most digit.
-1,000 to +50,000 feet (early models)

-2,000 to +50,000 feet (late models)
Barometric range
22.00 to 30.99 in. Hg or 745 to 1050 mbar
Pneumatic Source
Alternate Static
Electrical input
Vibrator - +28 volt dc
Lighting - 5 volt ac
Weight
2.5 lb.
Baro-Set Control and Readout

Local atmospheric pressure is set by the BARO knob and displayed
in millibars and inches of mercury by two four-digit counters.
Vibration
An electrically powered vibrator smooths the altitude pointer motion.
There are no failure flags on this indicator.
M0008D22.PST
3 1 6 80
1 0 1 3
2 9 9 2
TOKYO LK-35-2
S231T113-2
63413AFA
PNEUMATIC ALTIMETER
g63413af
PNEUMATIC AIRSPEED INDICATOR

General
The indicator displays airspeed using a pointer and airspeed scale on
a three-inch dial. This indicator is pneumatically driven over a range
of 60-450 knots. The pneumatic sources are Aux. Pitot No. 1 and
Alternate Static.
There are no failure displays (flags) on this indicator.
M0008D45.PST
60
AIRSPEED POINTER
400
350
80
100
IAS
120
300
250
240
220
KNOTS
200
140
160
180
KOLLSMAN A3615710067
BOEING S231T112-1
63413AGA
PNEUMATIC AIRSPEED INDICATOR

g63413ag
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS
g63413ag
34.13 AIR DATA INSTRUMENTS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS
AIR DATA INSTRUMENTS - SCHEMATIC (SHEET 1)

Air Data Instruments
The captains and first officers air data instruments are shown on the
schematic (outgoing signals from sheet 1 are continued on sheet 2).
The only totally pneumatic instruments are the Standby Airspeed
Indicator and Standby Altimeter shown.
The ADC instrument source select switches provide a means of

furnishing the same data by the opposite ADC when ADC ALTN is
selected.
The data is supplied to a microprocessor.
Signal Processing
Power Requirements
Primary power for each of the electrical instruments is 115 volts ac.
A separate circuit breaker supplies power to each instrument.
Front panel lighting for the instruments is 5 volts ac. The master dim
and test system supplies 28 volts dc to the primary electric altimeters
for the ALT (altitude acquisition) lights, which are illuminated by a
ground from the Altitude Alert Module.
The vibrator in the standby altimeter uses 28 volts dc from the
standby bus.
Electric Altimeter Operation

Data Inputs
Each altimeter receives data from each air data computer in an
ARINC 429 format. Primary data flow is the left ADC feeding the
captains altimeters and the right ADC feeding the first officers
altimeter.
The microprocessor executes a software program which controls the

altimeters servo drive system and flag driver. The output of the
digital-to-analog converter is routed to an output driver which powers
the servo motor. This motor in turn drives the pointer, the drum
counter, and the feedback synchro transmitters.
The feedback synchros provide coarse and fine pointer position data
which is multiplexed into an analog comparator. The comparators
output is digitized and routed back to the microprocessor as an error
signal.
Flags
Negative Altitudes - Negative altitude input data causes this flag to
be displayed.
OFF Flag - Internal or external failures result in the OFF flag being
displayed.
M0008D55.PST
.
CONTROL
115V AC
+5V DC
+15V DC
-15V DC
POWER
SUPPLY
ALTM LEFT
ALT ACQ
NC
P11
ALT ALERT MDL
PROCESSOR
INSTR LTS
NORM
DECODER
W
5V AC
CONTROL
ALT
CONTROL
1
CAPT ADC INSTR

SOURCE SEL SW
ARINC
429
RCVR
NORM
ARINC
429
RCVR
115V AC
METRIC
ALTM L
ALT
F/O ADC INSTR
SOURCE SEL SW
P11
MASTER
DIM AND TEST
INTERNALS
SAME AS
CAPT
ALTIMETER
IND
FLAG
DRIVER
MASTER
DIM AND
TEST
28V DC
CX
CX
CONTROL
4
ALT ACQ
DATA BUS 2
SIN
COS
COM
INSTR LTS
26V AC
ALT
FE ET
6 80 2
2992
7
ALT
MB
IN
1 01 3
RS
1013
BARO
MO
29 9 2
BARO
26V AC
BARO CORR
NO. 3
9
8 3 1
RS
SIN
COS
COM
F/O ALTIMETER IND
100
OUTPUT
DRIVER
26V AC
26V AC
BARO CORR
NO. 1
COMP
D
DAC
TEST
INPUT
MUX
OFF
NEG
CAPT ALTIMETER IND
BARO CORR
NO. 2
A
B
DATA BUS 4
C
L AIR DATA
COMPUTER
D
E
F
BARO CORR
NO. 1
26V AC
G
26V AC
115V AC
BARO CORR
NO. 3
BARO CORR
NO. 2
115V AC
ALTM RIGHT
ALTITUDE
COMPUTED AIRSPEED MACH

MAX OPERATING SCHEDULE
SPEED SELECTED
INSTR
LTS
SPEED SELECT
IAS MACH
RIGHT
P11
R AIR DATA
COMPUTER
INSTR LTS
4
MACH AIRSPEED AND ALTIMETER

INDICATOR FACES SHOWN WITH
POWER APPLIED TO SHOW DISPLAYS
AND FLAGS RETRACTED
IF INSTALLED
+5V
ARINC
429
RCVR
DATA BUS 4
DATA BUS 2
POWER
SUPPLY
INTERNALS
SAME AS
CAPT
MACH
AIRSPEED
IND (SH 2)
F/O MACH
AIRSPEED IND
AFCS MODE CONT PNL
CURRENT ALT.
W
5V AC
METRIC ALT
ARINC
429
RCVR
LCD DRIVER
PROCESSOR
ALT
INPUT
SELECT
SEL ALT
2
SELECTED ALT.
DATA BUS NO. 4

SELECTED ALTITUDE
FCC DISCRETES
AFCS MODE CONT PNL
ARINC
429
RCVR
PROCESSOR
CAPT METRIC SELECTED ALTITUDE IND
LCD DRIVER
63413AHA

g63413ah

Mach Airspeed Indicator Operation
Data Inputs
Each Mach/Airspeed Indicator receives computed airspeed, mach,
Vmo/Mmo data from both air data computers in an ARINC 429
format. Primary data flow is the left ADC feeding the captains
indicator and the right ADC feeding the first officers indicator.
Feedback data from four independent synchro transmitters is

multiplexed into an analog comparator. The comparators output is
digitized and routed back to the direct memory access circuit as an
error signal.
Flags
Computed Airspeed - Internal faults - AS flag only appears. External faults - AS flag appears and pointer drives to zero.
Each indicator also receives selected/commanded airspeed data from

the Autopilot/Flight Director system Mode Control Panel or FMC
when VNAV is engaged.
Mach - MACH flag only appears for all mach failures. Black flag
appears below .40 mach.
The ADC instrument source select switches provide a means of

furnishing the same data by the opposite ADC when the ALTN
switch position is selected.
Maximum Allow Airspeed (Vmo/Mmo) - Internal faults - Vmo flag

only appears. External faults - Vmo flag appears and pointer at 260
knots.
The data is inputted to a direct memory access circuit.
Selected/Commanded Airspeed Index - Internal faults - INOP flag

only. External faults - Index driven behind mask only.
Signal Processing
The microprocessor executes the software program which controls
the servo drive system and flag driver.
The digital output from the microprocessor is converted to analog
data which is multiplexed and used to power:
Magnetic wheel drivers for the mach display
Servo motors for the airspeed limit pointer, the airspeed pointer,
and the commanded airspeed cursor.
Metric Altimeter (if installed)

As with the electric altimeter, the metric altimeter receives data on
ARINC 429 digital data buses from both ADCs. The ADC ALTN
switch controls the ADC input switching and therefore which ADC
drives the indicator. The altitude data is buffered and then transferred
to the processor. The processor computes metric conversions from
stored conversion tables and also performs storage and failure
monitoring.
M0008D6D.PST
28V DC
VIBRATOR
STBY ALTM
VIBRATOR
POINTER
INSTR LTS
5V AC
STATIC
PRESSURE
115V AC
W
CAPT MACH
AIRSPEED IND
P11
9
PROCESSOR
ARINC
429
RCVR
1013
3
6
CONTROL
COMP
2992
CONTROL
SUM
CONTROL
STANDBY ALTIMETER IND
INPUT
MUX
VMO
MACH
AS
BUG INOP
CONT
FLAG
DRVR
CONTROL
CONTROL
POWER
SUPPLY
1013 2992
ARINC
429
RCVR
INSTR LTS
5V DC
15V DC
15V DC
CONTROL
ARINC
429
RCVR
DECODER
PRESSURE
SEALED
DAC
CONTROL
60
MACH
LIMIT
80
MACH
400
7 3
350
100
5
120
300
OUTPUT
MUX
KNOTS
2 4 4
KNOTS
180
220
140
160
240
200
E
M
BUG
CAPTAIN MACH AIRSPEED IND
INTERNALS
SAME AS
CAPT
METRIC
SEL ALT
IND
(SH 1)
INSTR LTS
5V AC
60
400
350
80
100
IAS
300
250
240
220
KNOTS
200
PITOT PRESSURE
120
140
160
180
AIRSPEED
CAPSULE
STATIC PRESSURE
PRESSURE
SEALED
115V AC
METRIC
ALTM R
P11
F/O METRIC SEL

ALT IND
5
STANDBY AIRSPEED IND
G63413AI

g63413ai

(Continued)
Metric Altimeter (if installed)
(Continued)
Power
Each indicator receives 115 v ac from their respective circuit breaker.
Isolated power interruptions of less than 200 msec will cause no loss
of operation. For power interruptions of between 200 and 500 msec,
the display will be lost but will return to the same state 20 msec
after power is restored.
Current Altitude Display

An LCD driver completes the operation by generating the actual
segments of the display.
Selected Altitude Display

Desired altitude is selected on the autoflight mode control panel
(MCP) and transferred to the indicator via an ARINC 429 digital
data bus.
M0008D6D.PST
28V DC
VIBRATOR
STBY ALTM
VIBRATOR
POINTER
INSTR LTS
5V AC
STATIC
PRESSURE
115V AC
W
CAPT MACH
AIRSPEED IND
P11
9
PROCESSOR
ARINC
429
RCVR
1013
3
6
CONTROL
COMP
2992
CONTROL
SUM
CONTROL
STANDBY ALTIMETER IND
INPUT
MUX
VMO
MACH
AS
BUG INOP
CONT
FLAG
DRVR
CONTROL
CONTROL
POWER
SUPPLY
1013 2992
ARINC
429
RCVR
INSTR LTS
5V DC
15V DC
15V DC
CONTROL
ARINC
429
RCVR
DECODER
PRESSURE
SEALED
DAC
CONTROL
60
MACH
LIMIT
80
MACH
400
7 3
350
100
5
120
300
OUTPUT
MUX
140
KNOTS
2 4 4
KNOTS
160
240
180
220
200
E
M
BUG
CAPTAIN MACH AIRSPEED IND
INTERNALS
SAME AS
CAPT
METRIC
SEL ALT
IND
(SH 1)
INSTR LTS
5V AC
60
400
350
80
100
IAS
300
250
240
220
KNOTS
200
PITOT PRESSURE
120
140
160
180
AIRSPEED
CAPSULE
STATIC PRESSURE
PRESSURE
SEALED
115V AC
METRIC
ALTM R
P11
STANDBY AIRSPEED IND
F/O METRIC SEL

ALT IND
5
G63413AI

g63413ai
(Continued)
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
DISPLAYS
g63413ai
34.13 AIR DATA INSTRUMENTS DISPLAYS

General
TAS and SAT are shown on the Flight Management Computers
Control Display Unit (C.D.U.) on the Progress Pages.
TAS and SAT are displayed on Page 2 of the Progress Pages which
is displayed by pressing the PROG key then pressing the NEXT
PAGE key.
M0008D7C.PST
P R OGRE S S
L A S T
PROG KEY
C Y N
1 /
F U E L
A L T
A T A
F L 2 4 4
1 3 3 2 Z
4 5 .
T O
D T G
E T A
ENO
6 1
1 3 5 5
4 3 . 8
1 9 2
1 4 1 1
4 0 . 0
6 0 6
1 5 1 8
1 2 . 7
NEXT OR
PREV PAGE
KEY
N E X T
GV E
P R OGR E S S
M /
3 2
WI
0 . 1
S E L
S P D
. 5 8 0
1 4 0 2
D M E
ENO
T /
T O
I
ML C
8 2
N M
D M E
R S ( 3 )
1 1 6 . 2 5
E R R O R
N D
5 7
V T K
2 /
X /
WI
N D
2 3
K T
E R R O R
+ 1 0
N M
T A S
TAS
1
F U E L
U S E D
L 2 4 . 7
T O T
4 7 .
< USE
F U E L
Q T Y
T O T A L I Z E R
1 1 4 . 6 0
7 5 . 6
F T
S A T
1 5
D E S T
KATL
WI
0 8 0
K T
X T K
N D
R2 2 . 9
US E >
SAT
2
C A L C U L A T E D
7 2 . 3
PROG KEY
NEXT PAGE KEY
TAS BLANK WITH AIRSPEED

LESS THAN 100 KTS.
BOTH TAS AND SAT BLANK

DURING ADC SELF-TEST.
FMC CDU
63412ABA

g63412ab
34.13 AIR DATA INSTRUMENTS DISPLAYS

General
Several Air Data parameters are available on the E.I.C.A.S. displays.
T.A.T. is always displayed as a Primary display. T.A.T., C.A.S.,
MACH, and ALT can be displayed on the lower E.I.C.A.S. display
unit by pressing the PERF/APU key on the E.I.C.A.S. Maintenance
Control Panel (P61).
NOTE: The prime source of T.A.T. information to the E.I.C.A.S.

Computers is from the Thrust Management Computer
(T.M.C.) and the A.D.C. information is secondary.
Therefore to obtain the test value of 35 C on upper
EICAS, the TMC circuit breaker should be tripped while
performing the individual ADC test.
M0008D8A.PST
PRIMARY ENGINE PARAMETER DISPLAY - TAT

(UPPER DISPLAY UNIT)
TAT + 35
C
1.76
TO
1.76
PERF/APU DISPLAY PAGE - CAS/TAT/MACH/ALT

(LOWER DISPLAY UNIT)
PERF/APU
KEY
PERF/APU
GROSS WT 185.3
CAS
35
MACH
137
0.250
TAT
ALT
EPR
+35
10000
EICAS MAINT
DISPLAY SELECT
ELEC
EVENT
READ
AUTO
MAN
PERF
APU
REC
TEST
ERASE
1
INDICATED VALUES ARE AS

DISPLAYED DURING ADC TEST
EICAS MAINTENANCE CONTROL PANEL (P61)
63412ACA

g63412ac
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
ALTITUDE ALERT
Table of Contents
Subchapter
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BLOCK DIAGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Page
603
607
615
621
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
INTRODUCTION
g63412ac
34.16 ALTITUDE ALERT INTRODUCTION
ALTITUDE ALERT SYSTEM - INTRODUCTION

Purpose
The system advises the pilots when the airplane approaches to within
900 feet of a selected altitude. It then warns the pilots when the
airplane departs a distance greater than 300 feet from the selected
altitude.
System Description
Input signals which are supplied from various airplane sensors and
altitude selection from the P55 Mode Control Panel and are
processed by the Altitude Alert module. The Altitude Alert module is
located in the Warning Electronics Unit (WEU) in the P51 panel.
There are two output conditions:- Approach and Deviation.
The illumination of the dedicated ALTITUDE ALERT light

(P13), and the master caution lights (P7).
Inputs
The Altitude Alert module receives inputs from the following:
The Mode Control Panel (M.C.P.)

The Air Data Computers (A.D.C.s)
The Proximity Switch Electronics Unit (P.S.E.U.)
The Captains A.D.C. source select switch (P1-1)
The Parking Brake Switch (S459)
The Alternate VMO/MMO select switch (E1 Stanchion)
Approach
The output indications for an Approach condition consist of:
The illumination of the Altitude Acquisition lights on the Electric
Altimeters.
There are no aural warnings during the approach mode.
Deviation
The output indications for a Deviation condition consist of the
following:
The ALTITUDE ALERT EICAS B level message,
An aural warning (Beep, Beep, Beep, Beep)
M0008DA5.PST
INPUT
SIGNALS
SIGNAL
PROCESSING
OUTPUT
FUNCTIONS
M.D.&.T
& CAUTION
PILOTS ALTITUDE SELECTION
P29
AIRPLANE SENSORS
* ADC BAROMETRIC ALTITUDE
* LANDING GEAR POSITION
* ADC SOURCE SELECT SWITCH
ADVISORY
LIGHTS
ALTITUDE
ALERT
EICAS
COMPUTERS
MODULE
* PARKING BRAKE SWITCH

* ALTERNATE VMO/MMO
SELECT SWITCH
LEVEL B
CAUTION
AURAL
P51 W.E.U.
63416AAA
ALTITUDE ALERT SYSTEM - INTRODUCTION

g63416aa
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
COMPONENT LOCATIONS
g63416aa
34.16 ALTITUDE ALERT COMPONENT LOCATIONS
ALTITUDE ALERT SYSTEMS - COMPONENT LOCATIONS

System Component Locations
Altitude alert caution light - Located on the captains right
instrument panel (P1-3).
Altitude advisory light - Located on the upper right corner of each
electric altimeter (P1 and P3 panels.)
Altitude alert module - Located in warning electronics unit (P51
panel).
A.F.C.S. Mode Control Panel - Located on the P55 panel. Provides
the pilots selected altitude.
Parking Brake s/w (S459) - Used to allow ground testing of the
Altitude Alert system.
M0008DBB.PST
F/OS RIGHT INSTRUMENT PANEL (P3-3)

* ELECTRIC ALTIMETER ADVISORY LIGHT
WARNING ELECTRONICS UNIT (P51)
AFCS MODE CONTROL PANEL (P55)
* ALTITUDE ALERT MODULE
CAPTAINS RIGHT
INSTRUMENT PANEL (P1-3)
* ALTITUDE ALERT CAUTION
LIGHT
* ELECTRIC ALTIMETER
ADVISORY LIGHT
PARKING BRAKE SWITCH (S459)
63416ABA
ALTITUDE ALERT SYSTEMS - COMPONENT LOCATIONS

g63416ab
ALTITUDE ALERT SYSTEM - COMPONENTS

Purpose
Whenever the airplane approaches a specified distance from the
selected altitude, theALT advisory lights, located on the electric
altimeters will illuminate.
Whenever the airplane deviates a specified distance from the Mode
Control Panels (M.C.P.) selected altitude, the B level EICAS MSG
and amber ALT ALERT light illuminates in order to alert the pilots
to this condition.
The altitude alert module consists of a microprocessor-controlled
circuit board which provides altitude approach-mode advisory alert
information and deviation-mode caution alerts.
Locations
The ALT ALERT light is located on the captains instrument panel
(P1-3).
The altitude alert module consists of a card located within the
warning electronics unit (P51).
The ALT advisory lights are located on the faces of the electric
altimeters (P1-3, P3-3). These ALT lights can be replaced by
removing the lens cover.
The Mode Control Panel is located directly above the E.I.C.A.S.
Display units and under the pilots glareshield.
M0008DC6.PST
CONFIG
FIRE
WINDSHEAR
r
WARNING
ELECTRONICS
UNIT (P51)
ALTITUDE
ALERT LIGHT
PULL UP
A/P
DISC r
SPEED
BRAKE w
CABIN
ALT
r
ALT
ALERT a
AUTO
PILOT a
A/T
DISC
FMC
OVSPD
GND a
a
PROX
G/S INHB
DISCRETE WARNING DISPLAY MODULE (P1-3)
ALTITUDE
ALERT
MODULE (M617)
ADVISORY
LIGHT (W)
9
ALT
L
CMD
A/P ENGAGE
C
CMD
R
CMD
F/D
ON
AFCS MODE CONTROL PANEL (P55)
2 8 7 402
ALT
M B
IN
HG
1 0 21 3 015
OFF
DISENGAGE
ALT
6
BARO
ELECTRIC ALTIMETER (P1-3, P3-3)

63416ACA
ALTITUDE ALERT SYSTEM - COMPONENTS

g63416ac

General
An alternate Vmo/Mmo select guarded and wire locked switch
(located on the E1 Stanchion) is provided to accommodate certifiable
flight with the landing gear extended.
When a flight with the gear down is anticipated, this switch has to be
actuated prior to takeoff since it is located in the main equipment
centre (MEC)
Actuation of this switch deactivates the landing gear down and lock
signal that normally inhibits altitude alert deviation mode.
NOTE: Actuation of this switch will also affect the overspeed

warning parameters from the air data computers.
M0008DF3.PST
E2
E1
FWD
63412AAA

g63412aa
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
OPERATION
g63412aa
34.16 ALTITUDE ALERT OPERATION
ALTITUDE ALERT SYSTEM - OPERATION

Operational Sequence
Approach
When the airplane approaches the M.C.P. selected altitude and is
within 900 feet above or below the M.C.P. selected altitude, visual
signals are generated by the altitude alert module. The ALT
advisory lights on the captains and first officers electric altimeters
will illuminate with no aural annunciation. As the airplane continues
toward the selected altitude, and passes through 300 feet from the
selected altitude, the ALT advisory lights extinguish. As long as
the airplane flies within 300 feet of the selected altitude, no further
indications are produced.
gear is down and locked. This action prevents nuisance caution

indications during the approach phase. The caution signals are also
inhibited when the airplane re-enters the 300 foot envelope above
or below selected altitude.
Test
If the airplane is on the ground with the parking brake set, the
caution signal inhibits are removed so that the altitude alert system
can be tested. All of the deviation warnings will be present during a
ground test with the exception of the master caution lights. These
lights are affected by the Engine Shutdown Inhibit from within the
EICAS Computers. To produce complete ground test results the
engine shutdown inhibit must be removed.
Deviation
If the altitude deviation subsequently exceeds 300 feet, the following
aural and visual indications are produced:
The aural warning speakers sound the level B caution aural.
The amber ALT ALERT light and the master caution lights will
illuminate
The ALTITUDE ALERT caution message is displayed on
EICAS.
When the pilot changes the selected altitude or when the airplane
deviates more than 900 ft from the selected altitude, the caution
signals are cancelled and the microprocessor is reset to the approach
mode. The caution signals are inhibited, in flight, when the landing
M000BB12.PST
DEVIATION FUNCTION
AUTO RESET
900 FT
ADVISORY
LIGHTS ON
APPROACH
MODE
DEVIATION MODE
ADVISORY
LIGHTS OFF
LEVEL B CAUTION AURAL

ALTITUDE ALERT LIGHT
"ALTITUDE ALERT" MESSAGE
MASTER CAUTION LIGHTS
300 FT
SELECTED
ALTITUDE
(FROM THE M.C.P.)
300 FT
APPROACH
MODE
ADVISORY
LIGHTS ON
ADVISORY
LIGHTS OFF

ALTITUDE ALERT LIGHT
"ALTITUDE ALERT" MESSAGE
MASTER CAUTION LIGHTS
DEVIATION MODE
900 FT
DEVIATION FUNCTION
AUTO RESET
63416ADA
ALTITUDE ALERT SYSTEM - OPERATION

g63416ad
34.16 ALTITUDE ALERT OPERATION
ALTITUDE ALERT - OPERATIONAL CHECKOUT

Test Preparations
The functional test is accomplished with the A/C on the ground
(landing gear down and locked, parking brake set) by using the mode
control panels altitude select knob to simulate an altitude difference
in order to check the approach and the deviation modes. Also the
barometric correction knob on the electric altimeters can be set.
NOTE: Note: To remove the Engine Shutdown Inhibit requires

different Maintenance functions between the JT9D-7R4E
and the CF6-80C2 engines. Refer to the Maintenance
Manual for specific details.
Operational Checkout
To test the system, slowly rotate the altitude select knob away from
the airplane barometric altitude as seen on the captains electric
altimeter. Then turn the altitude select knob to approach the airplane
barometric altitude. Monitor correct operation. Continue rotating the
altitude select knob so the error reduces to zero and then increases
beyond the deviation threshold. Monitor correct operation.
If the Captains ADC source select s/w is selected to the alternate
position, then the F.O.s barometric altitude via his electric altimeter
must be set.
Use the graphic for the appropriate altitude setting and annunciations.
NOTE: To enable the master caution lights during test, remove the
EICAS engine shutdown inhibit (reference MM 31-41-00).
The level B message ALTITUDE ALERT and the B
level aural (Beep, Beep, Beep, Beep) are not inhibited.
M0008E31.PST
MODE
APPROACH
MODE
DEVIATION
MODE
MODE CONTROL PANEL

ALTITUDE SETTING
ANNUNCIATIONS
BARO ALT + ( > 1000 FT)
NONE
BARO ALT + ( > 300 AND < 900 FT)
"ALT" ADVISORY LIGHTS - ON
BARO ALT + ( < 300 FT)
"ALT" ADVISORY LIGHTS - OFF
BARO ALT + ( > 300 AND < 900 FT)
EICAS MESSAGE "ALTITUDE ALERT"

1
DEVIATION MODE INHIBIT
BARO ALT + (>900 FT)
MASTER CAUTION LIGHTS - ON

"ALT ALERT" LIGHT - ON
NONE
MASTER CAUTION LIGHT

ENABLED BY REMOVING EICAS
ENGINE SHUTDOWN INHIBIT (REF MM 31-41-00)
LEVEL B AURAL NOT INHIBITED FOR ALTITUDE ALERT
63416AEA
ALTITUDE ALERT - OPERATIONAL CHECKOUT

g63416ae
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
BLOCK DIAGRAMS
g63416ae
34.16 ALTITUDE ALERT BLOCK DIAGRAMS
ALTITUDE ALERT SYSTEM - BLOCK DIAGRAM

Purpose
Alternate VMO/MMO Switch
The system advises the pilots when the airplane approaches within
900 feet of a MCP preselected altitude and when the airplane departs
a distance greater than 300 feet from a MCP preselected altitude.
The Alternate VMO/MMO switch (E1) is used to remove the gear

down inhibit due to the dispatch of the A/C with the Landing Gear
locked down.
AFCS Mode Control Panel
Parking Brake Switch
This panel provides the means for the pilots to input a selected
altitude into the AFCS and altitude alert system.
The set or released status signal is provided by this switch. This

signal allows for the ground testing of the deviation mode.
Air Data Computers
Visual
These units provide barometric altitude reference data to the altitude

alert system. Both ADCs feed to the Altitude Alert module with
only one providing barometric corrected altitude at any one time.
The visual indications output by this system are: The two amber
master caution lights (via the EICAS Computers); the amber ALT
ALERT light; the two white ALT lights on the Captains and
F/Os electric altimeters; the level B message ALTITUDE
ALERT on the upper EICAS display.
Captains ADC Instrument Source Select switch

The Captains ADC source select switch allows under certain
conditions the ADC sources to be changed. Normally the left ADC is
used by the Altitude Alert module, the selection of Alternate ADC
from the Captains ADC source select switch can change the ADC
source to that of the right ADC.
Aural
A level B caution aural sound (beep-beep-beep-beep) is heard over
both aural warning speakers for approximately 0.8 seconds.
Proximity Switch Electronic Unit

This unit sends a landing gear up/down signal.
M0008E50.PST
LEVEL B AURAL
PILOTS SELECTED ALTITUDE
R - SIREN/OWL
AMP MODULE
ALT
L
CMD
A/P ENGAGE
C
CMD
R
CMD
LEVEL B AURAL
F/D
ON
L - SIREN/OWL
AMP MODULE
CAPTS AURAL
WN SPEAKER
OFF
ALT
ALERT
DISENGAGE
F/OS AURAL
WN SPEAKER
ALTITUDE ALERT
LIGHT
AFCS MODE CONTROL PANEL
BARO ALT
9
L-ADC
ALT
8 2 8 7 402
7
BARO ALT
ALT
M B
IN
HG
8 2 8 7 402
1 0 21 3 0 15
BARO
ALT
ALT
M B
IN
HG
1 0 2 1 3 015
6
BARO
R-ADC
CAPTS ALTIMETER
NORM/ALTN
F/OS ALTIMETER
WARNING
WARNING
CAUTIONa
CAUTIONa
CAPTS ADC INSTR

SOURCE SELECT SW
ALTERNATE
LDG GEAR POS
L - EICAS COMPUTER
Vmo/Mmo SW
ALTITUDE ALERT
(LEVEL B)
PROX SW ELEX UNIT
R - EICAS COMPUTER
SET/RELEASED
PARKING BRAKE SW
UPPER DISPLAY
SWITCHING UNIT
UPPER EICAS DU
1
ALT ALERT
MODULE
POWER TO MODULE
FROM WEU POWER
SUPPLY MODULES
63416AFA

g63416af

(Continued)
General Operation
Following the MCP selection of a desired altitude, various visual
indications and aural sounds occur as the airplane approaches and
later deviates from that altitude. Altitude alerting occurs at certain
specific distances from the selected altitude during the approach
mode and deviation mode. The specific distances are described later.
M0008E50.PST
LEVEL B AURAL
PILOTS SELECTED ALTITUDE
R - SIREN/OWL
AMP MODULE
ALT
L
CMD
A/P ENGAGE
C
CMD
R
CMD
LEVEL B AURAL
F/D
ON
L - SIREN/OWL
AMP MODULE
CAPTS AURAL
WN SPEAKER
OFF
ALT
ALERT
DISENGAGE
F/OS AURAL
WN SPEAKER
ALTITUDE ALERT
LIGHT
AFCS MODE CONTROL PANEL
BARO ALT
9
L-ADC
ALT
8 2 8 7 402
7
BARO ALT
ALT
M B
IN
HG
8 2 8 7 402
1 0 21 3 0 15
BARO
ALT
ALT
M B
IN
HG
1 0 2 1 3 015
6
BARO
R-ADC
CAPTS ALTIMETER
NORM/ALTN
F/OS ALTIMETER
WARNING
WARNING
CAUTIONa
CAUTIONa
CAPTS ADC INSTR

SOURCE SELECT SW
ALTERNATE
LDG GEAR POS
L - EICAS COMPUTER
Vmo/Mmo SW
ALTITUDE ALERT
(LEVEL B)
PROX SW ELEX UNIT
R - EICAS COMPUTER
SET/RELEASED
PARKING BRAKE SW
UPPER DISPLAY
SWITCHING UNIT
UPPER EICAS DU
1
ALT ALERT
MODULE
POWER TO MODULE
FROM WEU POWER
SUPPLY MODULES
63416AFA

g63416af
(Continued)
ALTITUDE ALERT SYSTEM - FUNCTIONAL DIAGRAM

Power Requirements
Signal Processing
Dual input of 12 volts dc and +5 volts dc from each of the WEU

power supply modules A and B, contained in the P51 card file.
There are two identical outputs of selected altitude from the mode
control panel ( MCP):
Input Signals
The following input signals are required to process altitude alert
functions:
The Parking brake switch position (S459), and the Landing Gear
position as sensed by the Proximity Switch Electronic Unit (
PSEU), each provide an enable signal for the microprocessor.
The Barometric Corrected Altitude No. 4, comes from the left or
right air data computer on ARINC 429 busses. Only one ADC
signal will be processed at any one time
The left or right ADC altitude data source selection is
microprocessor controlled by sensing a discrete from the captains
ADC instrument source select switch, or by sensing the autopilot
FCC channel(s) in command or engaged from the mode control
panel.
The ARINC 429 data bus includes selected altitude No. 1 or No.
2 and the FCC engage status.
The captains ADC instrument source select switch position
selects the barometric corrected altitude data source when no FCC
or more than one FCC is in command. If only one FCC is in
command, the altitude alert module looks at the ADC which is
related to that FCC. The left ADC is used by the left and center
FCC. The right ADC is dedicated to the right FCC.
Output No. 1 is used when left ADC is used

Output No. 2 is used when right ADC is used.
NOTE: When an invalid data word is received on MCP bus 1, it is

detected by the monitor logic, which causes it to switch the
input to the alternate source (bus 2).
Decoded selected altitude is processed for comparison with actual
barometric altitude to determine which output switches should be
actuated (S2-S5).
The microprocessor develops initialization logic and compares
altitude difference to three logic criteria:
Less than 900 feet but greater than 300 feet
Less than 300 feet
Greater than 900 feet
For an altitude difference less than 900 feet but greater than 300 feet,
switch S2 provides a ground for illuminating the white ALT lights
on the captains and the F/Os altimeters.
When the altitude difference is less than 300 feet the white ALT
lights extinguish.
After once being within 300 feet of selected altitude, and the
difference exceeds 300 feet but is less than 900 feet, the
microprocessor controls switching circuits that provide grounds to the
M0008E9B.PST
115V AC
R BUS
WARN
ELECT A
POWER
CONTROL
CIRCUITS
MICRO-P
RESET
DC
POWER SUPPLY A
115V AC
STBY BUS
+5V DC
+12V DC
-12V DC
WARN
ELECT B
CIRCUIT BREAKER PANEL

(P11)
RESET B=1
RESET B
DIGITAL
SIGNAL
DECODER
DIGITAL
SIGNAL
DECODER
R ADC (E2-3)
ADC SEL
LOGIC
MODE
1
MONITOR
DIGITAL
SIGNAL
DECODER
SELECTED ALTITUDE 1, FCC DISCRETES

DATA BUS
NO. 1
DIGITAL
SIGNAL
DECODER
AFCS MODE CONT

PANEL (P55)
APPROACH
DEVIATION
S1
SET
DEVIATION
MODE RESET BY
SELECTING NEW
ALT ON MCP
AUTO RESET
DIST FROM
SELECTED ALTITUDE
<900 >300FT
>300 <900FT
ANNUNCIATIONS
S459 PARK BRAKE

SWITCH
S591 VMO/MMO
SWITCH
PROX SW ELEX
UNIT (E1-2)
"ALT" ADVISORY LTS ON
S2
1. EICAS
"ALT ALERT" MESSAGE
DISPLAYED & MASTER
CAUTION LTS ON
S3
2. LEVEL B SOUNDS (0.8 SEC)

3. "ALT ALERT" LIGHT ON
S4
S5
ALL DEVIATION
ANNUNCIATION
NOTED ABOVE
CANCELED
>300FT
ALL
SWITCHES
OPEN
L
O
G
I
C
L EICAS
CMPTR (E8)
POWER SUPPLY ENABLE
2
CONTROL LOGIC
ENABLE 2
M617 ALTITUDE ALERT MODULE
L OR C FCC
L
R
ADC ADC
R EICAS
CMPTR (E8)
S4
R ONLY
NO FCC SELECTED, OR MORE THAN ONE
MCP SELECTED ALTITUDE NO. 1 IS USED

WHEN L ADC IS USED, SELECTED ALTITUDE
NO. 2 IS USED WHEN R ADC IS USED.
L STALL WARNING MODULE
R STALL WARNING MODULE
USE OF L OR R ADC ALTITUDE IS DETERMINED

BY CAPT ADC INSTRUMENT SOURCE SELECT SW.
X
6
LEFT
SIREN/
OWL
MODULE
RIGHT
SIREN/
OWL
MODULE
AURAL
WARNING
SPEAKER
IN AIR - LDG GEAR DOWN

AND LOCKED INHIBIT
DEVIATION MODE ONLY.
ALTITUDE
ALERT
DISCRETE
S3
>900 FT
WEU (P51)
FCC SELECTED
ALTITUDE
ALERT
DISCRETE
S2
S5
GEAR DOWN & LOCKED

PARKING BRAKE SET
OR
GEAR UP
ALT
SWITCHES
ACTUATED
C
O
N
T
R
O
L
ENABLE LOGIC:
LDG GEAR
DOWN AND
LOCKED
F/O
ALTIMETER
ADV LT (P3-3)
L ADC (E1-3)
DATA BUS
NO. 2
ALT
MASTER
DIM &
TEST
DATA BUS
NO. 4
POWER SUPPLY B
SELECT
CAPT ADC INSTR

SOURCE SEL SW
(P1-1)
DATA BUS
NO. 1
POWER SUPPLY
ENABLE
RESET A=1
CAPTAINS
ALTIMETER
ADV LT (P1-3)
SOURCE
ALTN
ALT
MASTER
DIM &
TEST
+5V DC
+12V DC
-12V DC
RESET A
MASTER
DIM &
TEST ALT ALERT
LIGHT (P1-3)
63416AGA

g63416ag

(Continued)
Signal Processing
(Continued)
EICAS computer. These grounds are used for illuminating both

master caution lights and displaying the ALTITUDE ALERT B
level caution message, illuminating the ALT light, and generating
the caution aural (level B).
NOTE: Note: Not shown on this simplified schematic is the rate

detection circuit for the MCP selected altitude. This circuit
inhibits Altitude Alert warnings (Approach and Deviation)
if the MCP altitude is moved quickly. During a ground
functional test of the Altitude Alert system, the MCP
altitude must be changed slowly to receive correct results.
In-flight, a landing gear down-and-locked signal inhibits altitude alert

deviation indications from occurring. Only altitude alert approach
mode ALT indications can occur.
Two conditions reset the deviation annunciations:
The altitude difference exceeds 900 feet
The selected altitude is changed at the Mode Control Panel.
Functional Test
The functional test can be performed on the ground with the parking
brake set. The mode control panels altitude select knob is used to
simulate the approach and the deviation modes.
NOTE: To enable the EICAS computers to illuminate the master

caution lights during the checkout of the altitude alert
systems deviation mode, the EICAS engine shutdown
inhibit feature must be removed.
M0008E9B.PST
115V AC
R BUS
WARN
ELECT A
POWER
CONTROL
CIRCUITS
MICRO-P
RESET
DC
POWER SUPPLY A
115V AC
STBY BUS
+5V DC
+12V DC
-12V DC
WARN
ELECT B
CIRCUIT BREAKER PANEL

(P11)
RESET B=1
RESET B
DIGITAL
SIGNAL
DECODER
DIGITAL
SIGNAL
DECODER
R ADC (E2-3)
ADC SEL
LOGIC
MODE
1
MONITOR
DIGITAL
SIGNAL
DECODER

DATA BUS
NO. 1
DIGITAL
SIGNAL
DECODER
AFCS MODE CONT

PANEL (P55)
DIST FROM
SELECTED ALTITUDE
APPROACH
DEVIATION
S1
SET
DEVIATION
MODE RESET BY
SELECTING NEW
ALT ON MCP
AUTO RESET
<900 >300FT
>300 <900FT
ANNUNCIATIONS
S459 PARK BRAKE

SWITCH
S591 VMO/MMO
SWITCH
PROX SW ELEX
UNIT (E1-2)
"ALT" ADVISORY LTS ON
S2
1. EICAS
"ALT ALERT" MESSAGE
DISPLAYED & MASTER
CAUTION LTS ON
S3
2. LEVEL B SOUNDS (0.8 SEC)

3. "ALT ALERT" LIGHT ON
S4
S5
ALL DEVIATION
ANNUNCIATION
NOTED ABOVE
CANCELED
>300FT
ALL
SWITCHES
OPEN
L
O
G
I
C
L EICAS
CMPTR (E8)
POWER SUPPLY ENABLE
2
CONTROL LOGIC
ENABLE 2
M617 ALTITUDE ALERT MODULE
L OR C FCC
L
R
ADC ADC
R EICAS
CMPTR (E8)
S4
R ONLY
NO FCC SELECTED, OR MORE THAN ONE
MCP SELECTED ALTITUDE NO. 1 IS USED

WHEN L ADC IS USED, SELECTED ALTITUDE
NO. 2 IS USED WHEN R ADC IS USED.
L STALL WARNING MODULE
R STALL WARNING MODULE
USE OF L OR R ADC ALTITUDE IS DETERMINED

BY CAPT ADC INSTRUMENT SOURCE SELECT SW.
X
6
LEFT
SIREN/
OWL
MODULE
RIGHT
SIREN/
OWL
MODULE
AURAL
WARNING
SPEAKER
IN AIR - LDG GEAR DOWN

AND LOCKED INHIBIT
DEVIATION MODE ONLY.
ALTITUDE
ALERT
DISCRETE
S3
>900 FT
WEU (P51)
FCC SELECTED
ALTITUDE
ALERT
DISCRETE
S2
S5
GEAR DOWN & LOCKED

PARKING BRAKE SET
OR
GEAR UP
ALT
SWITCHES
ACTUATED
C
O
N
T
R
O
L
ENABLE LOGIC:
LDG GEAR
DOWN AND
LOCKED
F/O
ALTIMETER
ADV LT (P3-3)
L ADC (E1-3)
DATA BUS
NO. 2
ALT
MASTER
DIM &
TEST
DATA BUS
NO. 4
POWER SUPPLY B
SELECT
CAPT ADC INSTR

SOURCE SEL SW
(P1-1)
DATA BUS
NO. 1
POWER SUPPLY
ENABLE
RESET A=1
CAPTAINS
ALTIMETER
ADV LT (P1-3)
SOURCE
ALTN
ALT
MASTER
DIM &
TEST
+5V DC
+12V DC
-12V DC
RESET A
MASTER
DIM &
TEST ALT ALERT
LIGHT (P1-3)
63416AGA

g63416ag
(Continued)
LAST PAGE

Chptr-32 PSS, 31,34 Air Data PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Chptr-32 PSS, 31,34 Air Data PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

B767

Electrical / Instrument Book 18

B767 ELECTRICAL / INSTRUMENT BOOK 18 Page 2

THESE NOTES ARE INTENDED FOR INSTRUCTIONAL PURPOSES ONLY

B767 Electrical / Instrument Book 18 Page 3

B767 ELECTRICAL / INSTRUMENT BOOK 18 Page 4

B767 Electrical / Instrument Book 18 Page 5

23.34 PSS B767-200 INTRODUCTION

B767 ELECTRICAL / INSTRUMENT BOOK 18 Page 6

PASSENGER SERVICE SYSTEM INTRODUCTION

PASSENGER SERVICE SYSTEM INTRODUCTION

B767 Electrical / Instrument Book 18 Page 7

23.34 PSS B767-200 INTRODUCTION

B767 ELECTRICAL / INSTRUMENT BOOK 18 Page 8

PASSENGER SERVICE SYSTEM

MAINTENANCE AND TEST ONLY

CALL AND SERVICE

FWD ATTENDANTS PANEL

PASSENGER CONTROL UNIT

PASSENGER SERVICE SYSTEM

B767 Electrical / Instrument Book 18 Page 9

B767 ELECTRICAL / INSTRUMENT BOOK 18 Page 10

B767 Electrical / Instrument Book 18 Page 11

23.34 PSS B767-200 COMPONENT LOCATIONS

B767 ELECTRICAL / INSTRUMENT BOOK 18 Page 12

FLIGHT DECK AND EQUIPMENT CENTRE

FWD and AFT Column Timer Decoders (No. 1 and 2

The following circuit breaker is located on the P11-3 circuit breaker

Main Equipment Centre

Circuit Breakers - located on P37 PASS ENTERTAINMENT PSUD:

CIRCUIT BREAKER PANEL (P11-3)

CEILING AREA THAT IS FORWARD

RIGHT MISC ELECTRICAL

P36 MISC. EQUIP. LEFT

MAIN EQUIPMENT CENTER

FLIGHT DECK AND EQUIPMENT CENTRE

B767 Electrical / Instrument Book 18 Page 13

23.34 PSS B767-200 COMPONENT LOCATIONS

B767 ELECTRICAL / INSTRUMENT BOOK 18 Page 14

PASSENGER CABIN AREA

Fwd Attendants Panel (P21) - Forward main entry door.

Passenger Service Unit Decoders - above each seat group.

FWD ATTENDANTS PANEL (P21)

PES/PSS CABLE RUN

DIRECT WIRED FROM ZONE CTD TO PSUDS

PES/PSS CABLE RUN

TERM PLUG ON PSUD CORRESPONDING

SHIPS WIRING (UNDER FLOOR)

PASSENGER CABIN AREA

B767 Electrical / Instrument Book 18 Page 15

B767 ELECTRICAL / INSTRUMENT BOOK 18 Page 16

B767 Electrical / Instrument Book 18 Page 17

23.34 PSS B767-200 INTERFACE

B767 ELECTRICAL / INSTRUMENT BOOK 18 Page 18

RELA Y DIODE (P38)

NO 2 COLUMN TIMER DECORDER (AFT)

K458 FWD PSS

B767 Electrical / Instrument Book 18 Page 19

23.34 PSS B767-200 INTERFACE

B767 ELECTRICAL / INSTRUMENT BOOK 18 Page 20

PSS SIGNAL FLOW

Forward Attendants Panel PSS Controls